Physics Formulary

By ir. J.C.A. Wevers
c (1995, 2009 J.C.A. Wevers Version: December 16, 2009
Dear reader,
This document contains a 108 page L
A
T
E
Xfile which contains a lot equations in physics. It is written at advanced
undergraduate/postgraduate level. It is intended to be a short reference for anyone who works with physics and
often needs to look up equations.
This, and a Dutch version of this file, can be obtained from the author, Johan Wevers
(johanw@xs4all.nl).
It can also be obtained on the WWW. See http://www.xs4all.nl/˜johanw/index.html, where
also a Postscript version is available.
If you find any errors or have any comments, please let me know. I am always open for suggestions and
possible corrections to the physics formulary.
The Physics Formulary is made with teT
E
X and L
A
T
E
X version 2.09. It can be possible that your L
A
T
E
X version
has problems compiling the file. The most probable source of problems would be the use of large bezier
curves and/or emT
E
X specials in pictures. If you prefer the notation in which vectors are typefaced in boldface,
uncomment the redefinition of the `vec command in the T
E
X file and recompile the file.
This work is licenced under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Netherlands License. To view a copy of
this licence, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/nl/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 171
Second Street, Suite 300, San Francisco, California 94105, USA.
Johan Wevers
Contents
Contents I
Physical Constants 1
1 Mechanics 2
1.1 Point-kinetics in a fixed coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2 Polar coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Relative motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Point-dynamics in a fixed coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3.1 Force, (angular)momentumand energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3.2 Conservative force fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.3 Gravitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.4 Orbital equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.5 The virial theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Point dynamics in a moving coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4.1 Apparent forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4.2 Tensor notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Dynamics of masspoint collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5.1 The centre of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5.2 Collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.6 Dynamics of rigid bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6.1 Moment of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6.2 Principal axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6.3 Time dependence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7 Variational Calculus, Hamilton and Lagrange mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7.1 Variational Calculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7.2 Hamilton mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.7.3 Motion around an equilibrium, linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.7.4 Phase space, Liouville’s equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.7.5 Generating functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 Electricity & Magnetism 9
2.1 The Maxwell equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Force and potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3 Gauge transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.4 Energy of the electromagnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5 Electromagnetic waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5.1 Electromagnetic waves in vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5.2 Electromagnetic waves in matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6 Multipoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7 Electric currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.8 Depolarizing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.9 Mixtures of materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
II Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
3 Relativity 13
3.1 Special relativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.1 The Lorentz transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.2 Red and blue shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.3 The stress-energy tensor and the field tensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2 General relativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.1 Riemannian geometry, the Einstein tensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.2 The line element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.3 Planetary orbits and the perihelion shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2.4 The trajectory of a photon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.5 Gravitational waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.6 Cosmology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4 Oscillations 18
4.1 Harmonic oscillations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.2 Mechanic oscillations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.3 Electric oscillations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.4 Waves in long conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.5 Coupled conductors and transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.6 Pendulums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5 Waves 20
5.1 The wave equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2 Solutions of the wave equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2.1 Plane waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2.2 Spherical waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.3 Cylindrical waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.4 The general solution in one dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3 The stationary phase method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.4 Green functions for the initial-value problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.5 Waveguides and resonating cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.6 Non-linear wave equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6 Optics 24
6.1 The bending of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.2 Paraxial geometrical optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.2.1 Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.2.2 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2.3 Principal planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2.4 Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.3 Matrix methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.4 Aberrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.5 Reflection and transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.6 Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.7 Prisms and dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.8 Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.9 Special optical effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.10 The Fabry-Perot interferometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7 Statistical physics 30
7.1 Degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7.2 The energy distribution function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7.3 Pressure on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.4 The equation of state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.5 Collisions between molecules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers III
7.6 Interaction between molecules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8 Thermodynamics 33
8.1 Mathematical introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.3 Thermal heat capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.4 The laws of thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.5 State functions and Maxwell relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.6 Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.7 Maximal work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.8 Phase transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.9 Thermodynamic potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.10 Ideal mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.11 Conditions for equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.12 Statistical basis for thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
8.13 Application to other systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
9 Transport phenomena 39
9.1 Mathematical introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9.2 Conservation laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9.3 Bernoulli’s equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
9.4 Characterising of flows by dimensionless numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
9.5 Tube flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
9.6 Potential theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
9.7 Boundary layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9.7.1 Flow boundary layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9.7.2 Temperature boundary layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9.8 Heat conductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9.9 Turbulence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9.10 Self organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
10 Quantum physics 45
10.1 Introduction to quantum physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.1.1 Black body radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.1.2 The Compton effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.1.3 Electron diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.2 Wave functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.3 Operators in quantum physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.4 The uncertainty principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10.5 The Schr¨ odinger equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10.6 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10.7 The tunnel effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
10.8 The harmonic oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
10.9 Angular momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
10.10 Spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10.11 The Dirac formalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10.12 Atomic physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10.12.1 Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10.12.2 Eigenvalue equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10.12.3 Spin-orbit interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10.12.4 Selection rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
10.13 Interaction with electromagnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
10.14 Perturbation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
10.14.1 Time-independent perturbation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
10.14.2 Time-dependent perturbation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
IV Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
10.15 N-particle systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.15.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.15.2 Molecules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
10.16 Quantum statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
11 Plasma physics 54
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
11.2 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
11.3 Elastic collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
11.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
11.3.2 The Coulomb interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
11.3.3 The induced dipole interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
11.3.4 The centre of mass system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
11.3.5 Scattering of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
11.4 Thermodynamic equilibrium and reversibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
11.5 Inelastic collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
11.5.1 Types of collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
11.5.2 Cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
11.6 Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
11.7 The Boltzmann transport equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
11.8 Collision-radiative models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
11.9 Waves in plasma’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
12 Solid state physics 62
12.1 Crystal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
12.2 Crystal binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
12.3 Crystal vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
12.3.1 A lattice with one type of atoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
12.3.2 A lattice with two types of atoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
12.3.3 Phonons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
12.3.4 Thermal heat capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
12.4 Magnetic field in the solid state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
12.4.1 Dielectrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
12.4.2 Paramagnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
12.4.3 Ferromagnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
12.5 Free electron Fermi gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
12.5.1 Thermal heat capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
12.5.2 Electric conductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
12.5.3 The Hall-effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
12.5.4 Thermal heat conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
12.6 Energy bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
12.7 Semiconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
12.8 Superconductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
12.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
12.8.2 The Josephson effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
12.8.3 Flux quantisation in a superconducting ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
12.8.4 Macroscopic quantum interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
12.8.5 The London equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
12.8.6 The BCS model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers V
13 Theory of groups 71
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
13.1.1 Definition of a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
13.1.2 The Cayley table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
13.1.3 Conjugated elements, subgroups and classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
13.1.4 Isomorfism and homomorfism; representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
13.1.5 Reducible and irreducible representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
13.2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
13.2.1 Schur’s lemma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
13.2.2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
13.2.3 Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
13.3 The relation with quantum mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
13.3.1 Representations, energy levels and degeneracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
13.3.2 Breaking of degeneracy by a perturbation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
13.3.3 The construction of a base function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
13.3.4 The direct product of representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
13.3.5 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
13.3.6 Symmetric transformations of operators, irreducible tensor operators . . . . . . . . . . 74
13.3.7 The Wigner-Eckart theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
13.4 Continuous groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
13.4.1 The 3-dimensional translation group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
13.4.2 The 3-dimensional rotation group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
13.4.3 Properties of continuous groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
13.5 The group SO(3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
13.6 Applications to quantum mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
13.6.1 Vectormodel for the addition of angular momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
13.6.2 Irreducible tensor operators, matrixelements and selection rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
13.7 Applications to particle physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
14 Nuclear physics 81
14.1 Nuclear forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
14.2 The shape of the nucleus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
14.3 Radioactive decay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
14.4 Scattering and nuclear reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
14.4.1 Kinetic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
14.4.2 Quantum mechanical model for n-p scattering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
14.4.3 Conservation of energy and momentum in nuclear reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
14.5 Radiation dosimetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
15 Quantum field theory & Particle physics 85
15.1 Creation and annihilation operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
15.2 Classical and quantum fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
15.3 The interaction picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
15.4 Real scalar field in the interaction picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
15.5 Charged spin-0 particles, conservation of charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
15.6 Field functions for spin-
1
2
particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
15.7 Quantization of spin-
1
2
fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
15.8 Quantization of the electromagnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
15.9 Interacting fields and the S-matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
15.10 Divergences and renormalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
15.11 Classification of elementary particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
15.12 P and CP-violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
15.13 The standard model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
15.13.1 The electroweak theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
15.13.2 Spontaneous symmetry breaking: the Higgs mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
VI Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
15.13.3 Quantumchromodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
15.14 Path integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
15.15 Unification and quantum gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
16 Astrophysics 96
16.1 Determination of distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
16.2 Brightness and magnitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
16.3 Radiation and stellar atmospheres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
16.4 Composition and evolution of stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
16.5 Energy production in stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
The ∇-operator 99
The SI units 100
Physical Constants
Name Symbol Value Unit
Number π π 3.14159265358979323846
Number e e 2.71828182845904523536
Euler’s constant γ = lim
n→∞

n
¸
k=1
1/k −ln(n)

= 0.5772156649
Elementary charge e 1.60217733 10
−19
C
Gravitational constant G, κ 6.67259 10
−11
m
3
kg
−1
s
−2
Fine-structure constant α = e
2
/2hcε
0
≈ 1/137
Speed of light in vacuum c 2.99792458 10
8
m/s (def)
Permittivity of the vacuum ε
0
8.854187 10
−12
F/m
Permeability of the vacuum µ
0
4π 10
−7
H/m
(4πε
0
)
−1
8.9876 10
9
Nm
2
C
−2
Planck’s constant h 6.6260755 10
−34
Js
Dirac’s constant ¯h = h/2π 1.0545727 10
−34
Js
Bohr magneton µ
B
= e¯h/2m
e
9.2741 10
−24
Am
2
Bohr radius a
0
0.52918
˚
A
Rydberg’s constant Ry 13.595 eV
Electron Compton wavelength λ
Ce
= h/m
e
c 2.2463 10
−12
m
Proton Compton wavelength λ
Cp
= h/m
p
c 1.3214 10
−15
m
Reduced mass of the H-atom µ
H
9.1045755 10
−31
kg
Stefan-Boltzmann’s constant σ 5.67032 10
−8
Wm
−2
K
−4
Wien’s constant k
W
2.8978 10
−3
mK
Molar gasconstant R 8.31441 Jmol
−1
K
−1
Avogadro’s constant N
A
6.0221367 10
23
mol
−1
Boltzmann’s constant k = R/N
A
1.380658 10
−23
J/K
Electron mass m
e
9.1093897 10
−31
kg
Proton mass m
p
1.6726231 10
−27
kg
Neutron mass m
n
1.674954 10
−27
kg
Elementary mass unit m
u
=
1
12
m(
12
6
C) 1.6605656 10
−27
kg
Nuclear magneton µ
N
5.0508 10
−27
J/T
Diameter of the Sun D

1392 10
6
m
Mass of the Sun M

1.989 10
30
kg
Rotational period of the Sun T

25.38 days
Radius of Earth R
A
6.378 10
6
m
Mass of Earth M
A
5.976 10
24
kg
Rotational period of Earth T
A
23.96 hours
Earth orbital period Tropical year 365.24219879 days
Astronomical unit AU 1.4959787066 10
11
m
Light year lj 9.4605 10
15
m
Parsec pc 3.0857 10
16
m
Hubble constant H ≈ (75 ±25) kms
−1
Mpc
−1
Chapter 1
Mechanics
1.1 Point-kinetics in a fixed coordinate system
1.1.1 Definitions
The position r, the velocity v and the acceleration a are defined by: r = (x, y, z), v = ( ˙ x, ˙ y, ˙ z), a = (¨ x, ¨ y, ¨ z).
The following holds:
s(t) = s
0
+

[v(t)[dt ; r(t) = r
0
+

v(t)dt ; v(t) = v
0
+

a(t)dt
When the acceleration is constant this gives: v(t) = v
0
+at and s(t) = s
0
+v
0
t +
1
2
at
2
.
For the unit vectors in a direction ⊥ to the orbit e
t
and parallel to it e
n
holds:
e
t
=
v
[v[
=
dr
ds
˙
e
t
=
v
ρ
e
n
; e
n
=
˙
e
t
[
˙
e
t
[
For the curvature k and the radius of curvature ρ holds:

k =
de
t
ds
=
d
2
r
ds
2
=


ds

; ρ =
1
[k[
1.1.2 Polar coordinates
Polar coordinates are defined by: x = r cos(θ), y = r sin(θ). So, for the unit coordinate vectors holds:
˙
e
r
=
˙
θe
θ
,
˙
e
θ
= −
˙
θe
r
The velocity and the acceleration are derived from: r = re
r
, v = ˙ re
r
+r
˙
θe
θ
, a = (¨ r −r
˙
θ
2
)e
r
+(2 ˙ r
˙
θ +r
¨
θ)e
θ
.
1.2 Relative motion
For the motion of a point D w.r.t. a point Q holds: r
D
= r
Q
+
ω v
Q
ω
2
with

QD = r
D
−r
Q
and ω =
˙
θ.
Further holds: α =
¨
θ.

means that the quantity is defined in a moving system of coordinates. In a moving
system holds:
v = v
Q
+v

+ ω r

and a =a
Q
+a

+ α r

+2ω v

+ω (ω r

)
with ω (ω r

) = −ω
2
r

n
1.3 Point-dynamics in a fixed coordinate system
1.3.1 Force, (angular)momentum and energy
Newton’s 2nd law connects the force on an object and the resulting acceleration of the object where the mo-
mentum is given by p = mv:

F(r, v, t) =
d p
dt
=
d(mv )
dt
= m
dv
dt
+v
dm
dt
m=const
= ma
Chapter 1: Mechanics 3
Newton’s 3rd law is given by:

F
action
= −

F
reaction
.
For the power P holds: P =
˙
W =

F v. For the total energy W, the kinetic energy T and the potential energy
U holds: W = T +U ;
˙
T = −
˙
U with T =
1
2
mv
2
.
The kick

S is given by:

S = ∆ p =

Fdt
The work A, delivered by a force, is A =
2

1

F ds =
2

1
F cos(α)ds
The torque τ is related to the angular momentum

L: τ =
˙

L = r

F; and

L = r p = mv r, [

L[ = mr
2
ω. The following equation is valid:
τ = −
∂U
∂θ
Hence, the conditions for a mechanical equilibrium are:
¸

F
i
= 0 and
¸
τ
i
= 0.
The force of friction is usually proportional to the force perpendicular to the surface, except when the motion
starts, when a threshold has to be overcome: F
fric
= f F
norm
e
t
.
1.3.2 Conservative force fields
A conservative force can be written as the gradient of a potential:

F
cons
= −

∇U. From this follows that


F =

0. For such a force field also holds:

F ds = 0 ⇒ U = U
0

r1

r0

F ds
So the work delivered by a conservative force field depends not on the trajectory covered but only on the
starting and ending points of the motion.
1.3.3 Gravitation
The Newtonian law of gravitation is (in GRT one also uses κ instead of G):

F
g
= −G
m
1
m
2
r
2
e
r
The gravitational potential is then given by V = −Gm/r. From Gauss law it then follows: ∇
2
V = 4πG.
1.3.4 Orbital equations
If V = V (r) one can derive from the equations of Lagrange for φ the conservation of angular momentum:
∂L
∂φ
=
∂V
∂φ
= 0 ⇒
d
dt
(mr
2
φ) = 0 ⇒L
z
= mr
2
φ = constant
For the radial position as a function of time can be found that:

dr
dt

2
=
2(W −V )
m

L
2
m
2
r
2
The angular equation is then:
φ −φ
0
=
r

0
¸
mr
2
L

2(W −V )
m

L
2
m
2
r
2
¸
−1
dr
r
−2
field
= arccos

1 +
1
r

1
r0
1
r0
+km/L
2
z

If F = F(r): L =constant, if F is conservative: W =constant, if

F ⊥ v then ∆T = 0 and U = 0.
4 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Kepler’s orbital equations
In a force field F = kr
−2
, the orbits are conic sections with the origin of the force in one of the foci (Kepler’s
1st law). The equation of the orbit is:
r(θ) =

1 +ε cos(θ −θ
0
)
, or: x
2
+y
2
= ( −εx)
2
with
=
L
2

2
M
tot
; ε
2
= 1 +
2WL
2
G
2
µ
3
M
2
tot
= 1 −

a
; a =

1 −ε
2
=
k
2W
a is half the length of the long axis of the elliptical orbit in case the orbit is closed. Half the length of the short
axis is b =

a. ε is the excentricity of the orbit. Orbits with an equal ε are of equal shape. Now, 5 types of
orbits are possible:
1. k < 0 and ε = 0: a circle.
2. k < 0 and 0 < ε < 1: an ellipse.
3. k < 0 and ε = 1: a parabole.
4. k < 0 and ε > 1: a hyperbole, curved towards the centre of force.
5. k > 0 and ε > 1: a hyperbole, curved away from the centre of force.
Other combinations are not possible: the total energy in a repulsive force field is always positive so ε > 1.
If the surface between the orbit covered between t
1
and t
2
and the focus C around which the planet moves is
A(t
1
, t
2
), Kepler’s 2nd law is
A(t
1
, t
2
) =
L
C
2m
(t
2
−t
1
)
Kepler’s 3rd law is, with T the period and M
tot
the total mass of the system:
T
2
a
3
=

2
GM
tot
1.3.5 The virial theorem
The virial theorem for one particle is:
'mv r` = 0 ⇒'T` = −
1
2

F r

=
1
2

r
dU
dr

=
1
2
n'U` if U = −
k
r
n
The virial theorem for a collection of particles is:
'T` = −
1
2

¸
particles

F
i
r
i
+
¸
pairs

F
ij
r
ij
¸
These propositions can also be written as: 2E
kin
+E
pot
= 0.
1.4 Point dynamics in a moving coordinate system
1.4.1 Apparent forces
The total force in a moving coordinate system can be found by subtracting the apparent forces from the forces
working in the reference frame:

F

=

F −

F
app
. The different apparent forces are given by:
1. Transformation of the origin: F
or
= −ma
a
2. Rotation:

F
α
= −m α r

3. Coriolis force: F
cor
= −2mω v
4. Centrifugal force:

F
cf
= mω
2
r
n

= −

F
cp
;

F
cp
= −
mv
2
r
e
r
Chapter 1: Mechanics 5
1.4.2 Tensor notation
Transformation of the Newtonian equations of motion to x
α
= x
α
(x) gives:
dx
α
dt
=
∂x
α
∂¯ x
β
d¯ x
β
dt
;
The chain rule gives:
d
dt
dx
α
dt
=
d
2
x
α
dt
2
=
d
dt

∂x
α
∂¯ x
β
d¯ x
β
dt

=
∂x
α
∂¯ x
β
d
2
¯ x
β
dt
2
+
d¯ x
β
dt
d
dt

∂x
α
∂¯ x
β

so:
d
dt
∂x
α
∂¯ x
β
=

∂¯ x
γ
∂x
α
∂¯ x
β
d¯ x
γ
dt
=

2
x
α
∂¯ x
β
∂¯ x
γ
d¯ x
γ
dt
This leads to:
d
2
x
α
dt
2
=
∂x
α
∂¯ x
β
d
2
¯ x
β
dt
2
+

2
x
α
∂¯ x
β
∂¯ x
γ
d¯ x
γ
dt

d¯ x
β
dt

Hence the Newtonian equation of motion
m
d
2
x
α
dt
2
= F
α
will be transformed into:
m

d
2
x
α
dt
2

α
βγ
dx
β
dt
dx
γ
dt

= F
α
The apparent forces are taken from he origin to the effect side in the way Γ
α
βγ
dx
β
dt
dx
γ
dt
.
1.5 Dynamics of masspoint collections
1.5.1 The centre of mass
The velocity w.r.t. the centre of mass

R is given by v −
˙

R. The coordinates of the centre of mass are given by:
r
m
=
¸
m
i
r
i
¸
m
i
In a 2-particle system, the coordinates of the centre of mass are given by:

R =
m
1
r
1
+m
2
r
2
m
1
+m
2
With r = r
1
−r
2
, the kinetic energy becomes: T =
1
2
M
tot
˙
R
2
+
1
2
µ˙ r
2
, with the reduced mass µ given by:
1
µ
=
1
m
1
+
1
m
2
The motion within and outside the centre of mass can be separated:
˙

L
outside
= τ
outside
;
˙

L
inside
= τ
inside
p = mv
m
;

F
ext
= ma
m
;

F
12
= µu
1.5.2 Collisions
With collisions, where B are the coordinates of the collision and C an arbitrary other position, holds: p = mv
m
is constant, and T =
1
2
mv
2
m
is constant. The changes in the relative velocities can be derived from:

S = ∆ p =
µ(v
aft
−v
before
). Further holds ∆

L
C
=

CB

S, p |

S =constant and

L w.r.t. B is constant.
6 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
1.6 Dynamics of rigid bodies
1.6.1 Moment of Inertia
The angular momentum in a moving coordinate system is given by:

L

= I ω +

L

n
where I is the moment of inertia with respect to a central axis, which is given by:
I =
¸
i
m
i
r
i
2
; T

= W
rot
=
1
2
ωI
ij
e
i
e
j
=
1
2

2
or, in the continuous case:
I =
m
V

r

2
n
dV =

r

2
n
dm
Further holds:
L
i
= I
ij
ω
j
; I
ii
= I
i
; I
ij
= I
ji
= −
¸
k
m
k
x

i
x

j
Steiner’s theorem is: I
w.r.t.D
= I
w.r.t.C
+m(DM)
2
if axis C | axis D.
Object I Object I
Cavern cylinder I = mR
2
Massive cylinder I =
1
2
mR
2
Disc, axis in plane disc through m I =
1
4
mR
2
Halter I =
1
2
µR
2
Cavern sphere I =
2
3
mR
2
Massive sphere I =
2
5
mR
2
Bar, axis ⊥ through c.o.m. I =
1
12
ml
2
Bar, axis ⊥ through end I =
1
3
ml
2
Rectangle, axis ⊥ plane thr. c.o.m. I =
1
12
m(a
2
+b
2
) Rectangle, axis | b thr. m I = ma
2
1.6.2 Principal axes
Each rigid body has (at least) 3 principal axes which stand ⊥ to each other. For a principal axis holds:
∂I
∂ω
x
=
∂I
∂ω
y
=
∂I
∂ω
z
= 0 so L

n
= 0
The following holds: ˙ ω
k
= −a
ijk
ω
i
ω
j
with a
ijk
=
I
i
−I
j
I
k
if I
1
≤ I
2
≤ I
3
.
1.6.3 Time dependence
For torque of force τ holds:
τ

= I
¨
θ ;
d

L

dt
= τ

−ω

L

The torque

T is defined by:

T =

F

d.
1.7 Variational Calculus, Hamilton and Lagrange mechanics
1.7.1 Variational Calculus
Starting with:
δ
b

a
L(q, ˙ q, t)dt = 0 with δ(a) = δ(b) = 0 and δ

du
dx

=
d
dx
(δu)
Chapter 1: Mechanics 7
the equations of Lagrange can be derived:
d
dt
∂L
∂ ˙ q
i
=
∂L
∂q
i
When there are additional conditions applying to the variational problem δJ(u) = 0 of the type
K(u) =constant, the new problem becomes: δJ(u) −λδK(u) = 0.
1.7.2 Hamilton mechanics
The Lagrangian is given by: L =
¸
T( ˙ q
i
) − V (q
i
). The Hamiltonian is given by: H =
¸
˙ q
i
p
i
− L. In 2
dimensions holds: L = T −U =
1
2
m( ˙ r
2
+r
2 ˙
φ
2
) −U(r, φ).
If the used coordinates are canonical the Hamilton equations are the equations of motion for the system:
dq
i
dt
=
∂H
∂p
i
;
dp
i
dt
= −
∂H
∂q
i
Coordinates are canonical if the following holds: ¦q
i
, q
j
¦ = 0, ¦p
i
, p
j
¦ = 0, ¦q
i
, p
j
¦ = δ
ij
where ¦, ¦ is the
Poisson bracket:
¦A, B¦ =
¸
i
¸
∂A
∂q
i
∂B
∂p
i

∂A
∂p
i
∂B
∂q
i

The Hamiltonian of a Harmonic oscillator is given by H(x, p) = p
2
/2m +
1
2

2
x
2
. With new coordinates
(θ, I), obtained by the canonical transformation x =

2I/mωcos(θ) and p = −

2Imωsin(θ), with inverse
θ = arctan(−p/mωx) and I = p
2
/2mω +
1
2
mωx
2
it follows: H(θ, I) = ωI.
The Hamiltonian of a charged particle with charge q in an external electromagnetic field is given by:
H =
1
2m

p −q

A

2
+qV
This Hamiltonian can be derived from the Hamiltonian of a free particle H = p
2
/2m with the transformations
p → p − q

A and H → H − qV . This is elegant from a relativistic point of view: this is equivalent to the
transformation of the momentum 4-vector p
α
→ p
α
− qA
α
. A gauge transformation on the potentials A
α
corresponds with a canonical transformation, which make the Hamilton equations the equations of motion for
the system.
1.7.3 Motion around an equilibrium, linearization
For natural systems around equilibrium the following equations are valid:

∂V
∂q
i

0
= 0 ; V (q) = V (0) +V
ik
q
i
q
k
with V
ik
=


2
V
∂q
i
∂q
k

0
With T =
1
2
(M
ik
˙ q
i
˙ q
k
) one receives the set of equations M¨ q + V q = 0. If q
i
(t) = a
i
exp(iωt) is substituted,
this set of equations has solutions if det(V − ω
2
M) = 0. This leads to the eigenfrequencies of the problem:
ω
2
k
=
a
T
k
V a
k
a
T
k
Ma
k
. If the equilibrium is stable holds: ∀k that ω
2
k
> 0. The general solution is a superposition if
eigenvibrations.
1.7.4 Phase space, Liouville’s equation
In phase space holds:
∇ =

¸
i

∂q
i
,
¸
i

∂p
i

so ∇ v =
¸
i


∂q
i
∂H
∂p
i


∂p
i
∂H
∂q
i

8 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
If the equation of continuity, ∂
t
+∇ (v ) = 0 holds, this can be written as:
¦, H¦ +

∂t
= 0
For an arbitrary quantity A holds:
dA
dt
= ¦A, H¦ +
∂A
∂t
Liouville’s theorem can than be written as:
d
dt
= 0 ; or:

pdq = constant
1.7.5 Generating functions
Starting with the coordinate transformation:

Q
i
= Q
i
(q
i
, p
i
, t)
P
i
= P
i
(q
i
, p
i
, t)
one can derive the following Hamilton equations with the new Hamiltonian K:
dQ
i
dt
=
∂K
∂P
i
;
dP
i
dt
= −
∂K
∂Q
i
Now, a distinction between 4 cases can be made:
1. If p
i
˙ q
i
−H = P
i
Q
i
−K(P
i
, Q
i
, t) −
dF
1
(q
i
, Q
i
, t)
dt
, the coordinates follow from:
p
i
=
∂F
1
∂q
i
; P
i
= −
∂F
1
∂Q
i
; K = H +
∂F
1
∂t
2. If p
i
˙ q
i
−H = −
˙
P
i
Q
i
−K(P
i
, Q
i
, t) +
dF
2
(q
i
, P
i
, t)
dt
, the coordinates follow from:
p
i
=
∂F
2
∂q
i
; Q
i
=
∂F
2
∂P
i
; K = H +
∂F
2
∂t
3. If −˙ p
i
q
i
−H = P
i
˙
Q
i
−K(P
i
, Q
i
, t) +
dF
3
(p
i
, Q
i
, t)
dt
, the coordinates follow from:
q
i
= −
∂F
3
∂p
i
; P
i
= −
∂F
3
∂Q
i
; K = H +
∂F
3
∂t
4. If −˙ p
i
q
i
−H = −P
i
Q
i
−K(P
i
, Q
i
, t) +
dF
4
(p
i
, P
i
, t)
dt
, the coordinates follow from:
q
i
= −
∂F
4
∂p
i
; Q
i
=
∂F
4
∂P
i
; K = H +
∂F
4
∂t
The functions F
1
, F
2
, F
3
and F
4
are called generating functions.
Chapter 2
Electricity & Magnetism
2.1 The Maxwell equations
The classical electromagnetic field can be described by the Maxwell equations. Those can be written both as
differential and integral equations:

((

D n)d
2
A = Q
free,included


D = ρ
free

((

B n)d
2
A = 0 ∇

B = 0

E ds = −

dt


E = −

B
∂t

H ds = I
free,included
+

dt


H =

J
free
+

D
∂t
For the fluxes holds: Ψ =

(

D n)d
2
A, Φ =

(

B n)d
2
A.
The electric displacement

D, polarization

P and electric field strength

E depend on each other according to:

D = ε
0

E +

P = ε
0
ε
r

E,

P =
¸
p
0
/Vol, ε
r
= 1 +χ
e
, with χ
e
=
np
2
0

0
kT
The magnetic field strength

H, the magnetization

M and the magnetic flux density

B depend on each other
according to:

B = µ
0
(

H +

M) = µ
0
µ
r

H,

M =
¸
m/Vol, µ
r
= 1 +χ
m
, with χ
m
=
µ
0
nm
2
0
3kT
2.2 Force and potential
The force and the electric field between 2 point charges are given by:

F
12
=
Q
1
Q
2
4πε
0
ε
r
r
2
e
r
;

E =

F
Q
The Lorentzforce is the force which is felt by a charged particle that moves through a magnetic field. The
origin of this force is a relativistic transformation of the Coulomb force:

F
L
= Q(v

B) = l(

I

B).
The magnetic field in point P which results from an electric current is given by the law of Biot-Savart, also
known as the law of Laplace. In here, d

l |

I and r points from d

l to P:
d

B
P
=
µ
0
I
4πr
2
d

l e
r
If the current is time-dependent one has to take retardation into account: the substitution I(t) → I(t − r/c)
has to be applied.
The potentials are given by: V
12
= −
2

1

E ds and

A =
1
2

B r.
10 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Here, the freedom remains to apply a gauge transformation. The fields can be derived from the potentials as
follows:

E = −∇V −


A
∂t
,

B = ∇

A
Further holds the relation: c
2

B = v

E.
2.3 Gauge transformations
The potentials of the electromagnetic fields transform as follows when a gauge transformation is applied:

A

=

A −∇f
V

= V +
∂f
∂t
so the fields

E and

B do not change. This results in a canonical transformation of the Hamiltonian. Further,
the freedom remains to apply a limiting condition. Two common choices are:
1. Lorentz-gauge: ∇

A+
1
c
2
∂V
∂t
= 0. This separates the differential equations for

A and V : ✷V = −
ρ
ε
0
,

A = −µ
0

J.
2. Coulomb gauge: ∇

A = 0. If ρ = 0 and

J = 0 holds V = 0 and follows

A from✷

A = 0.
2.4 Energy of the electromagnetic field
The energy density of the electromagnetic field is:
dW
dVol
= w =

HdB +

EdD
The energy density can be expressed in the potentials and currents as follows:
w
mag
=
1
2

J

Ad
3
x , w
el
=
1
2

ρV d
3
x
2.5 Electromagnetic waves
2.5.1 Electromagnetic waves in vacuum
The wave equation ✷Ψ(r, t) = −f(r, t) has the general solution, with c = (ε
0
µ
0
)
−1/2
:
Ψ(r, t) =

f(r, t −[r −r

[/c)
4π[r −r

[
d
3
r

If this is written as:

J(r, t) =

J(r ) exp(−iωt) and

A(r, t) =

A(r ) exp(−iωt) with:

A(r ) =
µ

J(r

)
exp(ik[r −r

[)
[r −r

[
d
3
r

, V (r ) =
1
4πε

ρ(r

)
exp(ik[r −r

[)
[r −r

[
d
3
r

A derivation via multipole expansion will show that for the radiated energy holds, if d, λ r:
dP
dΩ
=
k
2
32π
2
ε
0
c

J

(r

)e
i

k·r
d
3
r

2
The energy density of the electromagnetic wave of a vibrating dipole at a large distance is:
w = ε
0
E
2
=
p
2
0
sin
2
(θ)ω
4
16π
2
ε
0
r
2
c
4
sin
2
(kr −ωt) , 'w`
t
=
p
2
0
sin
2
(θ)ω
4
32π
2
ε
0
r
2
c
4
, P =
ck
4
[ p [
2
12πε
0
The radiated energy can be derived from the Poynting vector

S:

S =

E

H = cWe
v
. The irradiance is the
time-averaged of the Poynting vector: I = '[

S [`
t
. The radiation pressure p
s
is given by p
s
= (1 + R)[

S [/c,
where R is the coefficient of reflection.
Chapter 2: Electricity & Magnetism 11
2.5.2 Electromagnetic waves in matter
The wave equations in matter, with c
mat
= (εµ)
−1/2
the lightspeed in matter, are:


2
−εµ

2
∂t
2

µ
ρ

∂t

E = 0 ,


2
−εµ

2
∂t
2

µ
ρ

∂t

B = 0
give, after substitution of monochromatic plane waves:

E = E exp(i(

kr−ωt)) and

B = Bexp(i(

kr−ωt))
the dispersion relation:
k
2
= εµω
2
+
iµω
ρ
The first term arises from the displacement current, the second from the conductance current. If k is written in
the form k := k

+ik

it follows that:
k

= ω

1
2
εµ

1 +

1 +
1
(ρεω)
2
and k

= ω

1
2
εµ

−1 +

1 +
1
(ρεω)
2
This results in a damped wave:

E = E exp(−k

n r ) exp(i(k

n r −ωt)). If the material is a good conductor,
the wave vanishes after approximately one wavelength, k = (1 +i)

µω

.
2.6 Multipoles
Because
1
[r −r

[
=
1
r

¸
0

r

r

l
P
l
(cos θ) the potential can be written as: V =
Q
4πε
¸
n
k
n
r
n
For the lowest-order terms this results in:
• Monopole: l = 0, k
0
=

ρdV
• Dipole: l = 1, k
1
=

r cos(θ)ρdV
• Quadrupole: l = 2, k
2
=
1
2
¸
i
(3z
2
i
−r
2
i
)
1. The electric dipole: dipole moment: p = Qle, where e goes from ⊕ to , and

F = ( p ∇)

E
ext
, and
W = − p

E
out
.
Electric field:

E ≈
Q
4πεr
3

3 p r
r
2
− p

. The torque is: τ = p

E
out
2. The magnetic dipole: dipole moment: if r

A: µ =

I (Ae

),

F = (µ ∇)

B
out
[µ[ =
mv
2

2B
, W = −µ

B
out
Magnetic field:

B =
−µ
4πr
3

3µ r
r
2
− µ

. The moment is: τ = µ

B
out
2.7 Electric currents
The continuity equation for charge is:
∂ρ
∂t
+∇

J = 0. The electric current is given by:
I =
dQ
dt
=

(

J n)d
2
A
For most conductors holds:

J =

E/ρ, where ρ is the resistivity.
12 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
If the flux enclosed by a conductor changes this results in an induced voltage V
ind
= −N

dt
. If the current
flowing through a conductor changes, this results in a self-inductance which opposes the original change:
V
selfind
= −L
dI
dt
. If a conductor encloses a flux Φ holds: Φ = LI.
The magnetic induction within a coil is approximated by: B =
µNI

l
2
+4R
2
where l is the length, R the radius
and N the number of coils. The energy contained within a coil is given by W =
1
2
LI
2
and L = µN
2
A/l.
The capacity is defined by: C = Q/V . For a capacitor holds: C = ε
0
ε
r
A/d where d is the distance between
the plates and A the surface of one plate. The electric field strength between the plates is E = σ/ε
0
= Q/ε
0
A
where σ is the surface charge. The accumulated energy is given by W =
1
2
CV
2
. The current through a
capacity is given by I = −C
dV
dt
.
For most PTC resistors holds approximately: R = R
0
(1 + αT), where R
0
= ρl/A. For a NTC holds:
R(T) = C exp(−B/T) where B and C depend only on the material.
If a current flows through two different, connecting conductors x and y, the contact area will heat up or cool
down, depending on the direction of the current: the Peltier effect. The generated or removed heat is given by:
W = Π
xy
It. This effect can be amplified with semiconductors.
The thermic voltage between 2 metals is given by: V = γ(T − T
0
). For a Cu-Konstantane connection holds:
γ ≈ 0.2 −0.7 mV/K.
In an electrical net with only stationary currents, Kirchhoff ’s equations apply: for a knot holds:
¸
I
n
= 0,
along a closed path holds:
¸
V
n
=
¸
I
n
R
n
= 0.
2.8 Depolarizing field
If a dielectric material is placed in an electric or magnetic field, the field strength within and outside the
material will change because the material will be polarized or magnetized. If the medium has an ellipsoidal
shape and one of the principal axes is parallel with the external field

E
0
or

B
0
then the depolarizing is field
homogeneous.

E
dep
=

E
mat


E
0
= −
^

P
ε
0

H
dep
=

H
mat


H
0
= −^

M
^ is a constant depending only on the shape of the object placed in the field, with 0 ≤ ^ ≤ 1. For a few
limiting cases of an ellipsoid holds: a thin plane: ^ = 1, a long, thin bar: ^ = 0, a sphere: ^ =
1
3
.
2.9 Mixtures of materials
The average electric displacement in a material which is inhomogenious on a mesoscopic scale is given by:
'D` = 'εE` = ε

'E` where ε

= ε
1

1 −
φ
2
(1 −x)
Φ(ε


2
)

−1
where x = ε
1

2
. For a sphere holds: Φ =
1
3
+
2
3
x. Further holds:

¸
i
φ
i
ε
i

−1
≤ ε


¸
i
φ
i
ε
i
Chapter 3
Relativity
3.1 Special relativity
3.1.1 The Lorentz transformation
The Lorentz transformation (x

, t

) = (x

(x, t), t

(x, t)) leaves the wave equation invariant if c is invariant:

2
∂x
2
+

2
∂y
2
+

2
∂z
2

1
c
2

2
∂t
2
=

2
∂x
2
+

2
∂y
2
+

2
∂z
2

1
c
2

2
∂t
2
This transformation can also be found when ds
2
= ds
2
is demanded. The general form of the Lorentz
transformation is given by:
x

= x +
(γ −1)(x v )v
[v[
2
−γvt , t

= γ

t −
x v
c
2

where
γ =
1

1 −
v
2
c
2
The velocity difference v

between two observers transforms according to:
v

=

γ

1 −
v
1
v
2
c
2

−1

v
2
+(γ −1)
v
1
v
2
v
2
1
v
1
−γv
1

If the velocity is parallel to the x-axis, this becomes y

= y, z

= z and:
x

= γ(x −vt) , x = γ(x

+vt

)
t

= γ

t −
xv
c
2

, t = γ

t

+
x

v
c
2

, v

=
v
2
−v
1
1 −
v
1
v
2
c
2
If v = ve
x
holds:
p

x
= γ

p
x

βW
c

, W

= γ(W −vp
x
)
With β = v/c the electric field of a moving charge is given by:

E =
Q
4πε
0
r
2
(1 −β
2
)e
r
(1 −β
2
sin
2
(θ))
3/2
The electromagnetic field transforms according to:

E

= γ(

E +v

B) ,

B

= γ

B −
v

E
c
2

Length, mass and time transform according to: ∆t
r
= γ∆t
0
, m
r
= γm
0
, l
r
= l
0
/γ, with
0
the quantities
in a co-moving reference frame and
r
the quantities in a frame moving with velocity v w.r.t. it. The proper
time τ is defined as: dτ
2
= ds
2
/c
2
, so ∆τ = ∆t/γ. For energy and momentum holds: W = m
r
c
2
= γW
0
,
14 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
W
2
= m
2
0
c
4
+ p
2
c
2
. p = m
r
v = γm
0
v = Wv/c
2
, and pc = Wβ where β = v/c. The force is defined by

F = d p/dt.
4-vectors have the property that their modulus is independent of the observer: their components can change
after a coordinate transformation but not their modulus. The difference of two 4-vectors transforms also as
a 4-vector. The 4-vector for the velocity is given by U
α
=
dx
α

. The relation with the “common” velocity
u
i
:= dx
i
/dt is: U
α
= (γu
i
, icγ). For particles with nonzero restmass holds: U
α
U
α
= −c
2
, for particles
with zero restmass (so with v = c) holds: U
α
U
α
= 0. The 4-vector for energy and momentum is given by:
p
α
= m
0
U
α
= (γp
i
, iW/c). So: p
α
p
α
= −m
2
0
c
2
= p
2
−W
2
/c
2
.
3.1.2 Red and blue shift
There are three causes of red and blue shifts:
1. Motion: with e
v
e
r
= cos(ϕ) follows:
f

f
= γ

1 −
v cos(ϕ)
c

.
This can give both red- and blueshift, also ⊥ to the direction of motion.
2. Gravitational redshift:
∆f
f
=
κM
rc
2
.
3. Redshift because the universe expands, resulting in e.g. the cosmic background radiation:
λ
0
λ
1
=
R
0
R
1
.
3.1.3 The stress-energy tensor and the field tensor
The stress-energy tensor is given by:
T
µν
= (c
2
+p)u
µ
u
ν
+pg
µν
+
1
c
2

F
µα
F
α
ν
+
1
4
g
µν
F
αβ
F
αβ

The conservation laws can than be written as: ∇
ν
T
µν
= 0. The electromagnetic field tensor is given by:
F
αβ
=
∂A
β
∂x
α

∂A
α
∂x
β
with A
µ
:= (

A, iV/c) and J
µ
:= (

J, icρ). The Maxwell equations can than be written as:

ν
F
µν
= µ
0
J
µ
, ∂
λ
F
µν
+∂
µ
F
νλ
+∂
ν
F
λµ
= 0
The equations of motion for a charged particle in an EM field become with the field tensor:
dp
α

= qF
αβ
u
β
3.2 General relativity
3.2.1 Riemannian geometry, the Einstein tensor
The basic principles of general relativity are:
1. The geodesic postulate: free falling particles move along geodesics of space-time with the proper time
τ or arc length s as parameter. For particles with zero rest mass (photons), the use of a free parameter is
required because for them holds ds = 0. From δ

ds = 0 the equations of motion can be derived:
d
2
x
α
ds
2

α
βγ
dx
β
ds
dx
γ
ds
= 0
Chapter 3: Relativity 15
2. The principle of equivalence: inertial mass ≡ gravitational mass ⇒ gravitation is equivalent with a
curved space-time were particles move along geodesics.
3. By a proper choice of the coordinate system it is possible to make the metric locally flat in each point
x
i
: g
αβ
(x
i
) = η
αβ
:=diag(−1, 1, 1, 1).
The Riemann tensor is defined as: R
µ
ναβ
T
ν
:= ∇
α

β
T
µ
−∇
β

α
T
µ
, where the covariant derivative is given
by ∇
j
a
i
= ∂
j
a
i

i
jk
a
k
and ∇
j
a
i
= ∂
j
a
i
−Γ
k
ij
a
k
. Here,
Γ
i
jk
=
g
il
2

∂g
lj
∂x
k
+
∂g
lk
∂x
j

∂g
j
k
∂x
l

, for Euclidean spaces this reduces to: Γ
i
jk
=

2
¯ x
l
∂x
j
∂x
k
∂x
i
∂¯ x
l
,
are the Christoffel symbols. For a second-order tensor holds: [∇
α
, ∇
β
]T
µ
ν
= R
µ
σαβ
T
σ
ν
+ R
σ
ναβ
T
µ
σ
, ∇
k
a
i
j
=

k
a
i
j
−Γ
l
kj
a
i
l

i
kl
a
l
j
, ∇
k
a
ij
= ∂
k
a
ij
−Γ
l
ki
a
lj
−Γ
l
kj
a
jl
and ∇
k
a
ij
= ∂
k
a
ij

i
kl
a
lj

j
kl
a
il
. The following
holds: R
α
βµν
= ∂
µ
Γ
α
βν
−∂
ν
Γ
α
βµ
+ Γ
α
σµ
Γ
σ
βν
−Γ
α
σν
Γ
σ
βµ
.
The Ricci tensor is a contraction of the Riemann tensor: R
αβ
:= R
µ
αµβ
, which is symmetric: R
αβ
= R
βα
.
The Bianchi identities are: ∇
λ
R
αβµν
+∇
ν
R
αβλµ
+∇
µ
R
αβνλ
= 0.
The Einstein tensor is given by: G
αβ
:= R
αβ

1
2
g
αβ
R, where R := R
α
α
is the Ricci scalar, for which
holds: ∇
β
G
αβ
= 0. With the variational principle δ

(L(g
µν
) − Rc
2
/16πκ)

[g[d
4
x = 0 for variations
g
µν
→g
µν
+δg
µν
the Einstein field equations can be derived:
G
αβ
=
8πκ
c
2
T
αβ
, which can also be written as R
αβ
=
8πκ
c
2
(T
αβ

1
2
g
αβ
T
µ
µ
)
For empty space this is equivalent to R
αβ
= 0. The equation R
αβµν
= 0 has as only solution a flat space.
The Einstein equations are 10 independent equations, which are of second order in g
µν
. From this, the Laplace
equation from Newtonian gravitation can be derived by stating: g
µν
= η
µν
+ h
µν
, where [h[ < 1. In the
stationary case, this results in ∇
2
h
00
= 8πκ/c
2
.
The most general form of the field equations is: R
αβ

1
2
g
αβ
R +Λg
αβ
=
8πκ
c
2
T
αβ
where Λ is the cosmological constant. This constant plays a role in inflatory models of the universe.
3.2.2 The line element
The metric tensor in an Euclidean space is given by: g
ij
=
¸
k
∂¯ x
k
∂x
i
∂¯ x
k
∂x
j
.
In general holds: ds
2
= g
µν
dx
µ
dx
ν
. In special relativity this becomes ds
2
= −c
2
dt
2
+ dx
2
+ dy
2
+ dz
2
.
This metric, η
µν
:=diag(−1, 1, 1, 1), is called the Minkowski metric.
The external Schwarzschild metric applies in vacuum outside a spherical mass distribution, and is given by:
ds
2
=

−1 +
2m
r

c
2
dt
2
+

1 −
2m
r

−1
dr
2
+r
2
dΩ
2
Here, m := Mκ/c
2
is the geometrical mass of an object with mass M, and dΩ
2
= dθ
2
+ sin
2
θdϕ
2
. This
metric is singular for r = 2m = 2κM/c
2
. If an object is smaller than its event horizon 2m, that implies that
its escape velocity is > c, it is called a black hole. The Newtonian limit of this metric is given by:
ds
2
= −(1 +2V )c
2
dt
2
+(1 −2V )(dx
2
+dy
2
+dz
2
)
where V = −κM/r is the Newtonian gravitation potential. In general relativity, the components of g
µν
are
associated with the potentials and the derivatives of g
µν
with the field strength.
The Kruskal-Szekeres coordinates are used to solve certain problems with the Schwarzschild metric near
r = 2m. They are defined by:
16 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
• r > 2m:

u =

r
2m
−1 exp

r
4m

cosh

t
4m

v =

r
2m
−1 exp

r
4m

sinh

t
4m

• r < 2m:

u =

1 −
r
2m
exp

r
4m

sinh

t
4m

v =

1 −
r
2m
exp

r
4m

cosh

t
4m

• r = 2m: here, the Kruskal coordinates are singular, which is necessary to eliminate the coordinate
singularity there.
The line element in these coordinates is given by:
ds
2
= −
32m
3
r
e
−r/2m
(dv
2
−du
2
) +r
2
dΩ
2
The line r = 2m corresponds to u = v = 0, the limit x
0
→∞with u = v and x
0
→−∞with u = −v. The
Kruskal coordinates are only singular on the hyperbole v
2
−u
2
= 1, this corresponds with r = 0. On the line
dv = ±du holds dθ = dϕ = ds = 0.
For the metric outside a rotating, charged spherical mass the Newman metric applies:
ds
2
=

1 −
2mr −e
2
r
2
+a
2
cos
2
θ

c
2
dt
2

r
2
+a
2
cos
2
θ
r
2
−2mr +a
2
−e
2

dr
2
−(r
2
+a
2
cos
2
θ)dθ
2

r
2
+a
2
+
(2mr −e
2
)a
2
sin
2
θ
r
2
+a
2
cos
2
θ

sin
2
θdϕ
2
+

2a(2mr −e
2
)
r
2
+a
2
cos
2
θ

sin
2
θ(dϕ)(cdt)
where m = κM/c
2
, a = L/Mc and e = κQ/ε
0
c
2
.
A rotating charged black hole has an event horizon with R
S
= m+

m
2
−a
2
−e
2
.
Near rotating black holes frame dragging occurs because g

= 0. For the Kerr metric (e = 0, a = 0) then
follows that within the surface R
E
= m +

m
2
−a
2
cos
2
θ (de ergosphere) no particle can be at rest.
3.2.3 Planetary orbits and the perihelion shift
To find a planetary orbit, the variational problemδ

ds = 0 has to be solved. This is equivalent to the problem
δ

ds
2
= δ

g
ij
dx
i
dx
j
= 0. Substituting the external Schwarzschild metric yields for a planetary orbit:
du

d
2
u

2
+u

=
du

3mu +
m
h
2

where u := 1/r and h = r
2
˙ ϕ =constant. The term 3mu is not present in the classical solution. This term can
in the classical case also be found from a potential V (r) = −
κM
r

1 +
h
2
r
2

.
The orbital equation gives r =constant as solution, or can, after dividing by du/dϕ, be solved with perturbation
theory. In zeroth order, this results in an elliptical orbit: u
0
(ϕ) = A + Bcos(ϕ) with A = m/h
2
and B an
arbitrary constant. In first order, this becomes:
u
1
(ϕ) = A +Bcos(ϕ −εϕ) +ε

A+
B
2
2A

B
2
6A
cos(2ϕ)

where ε = 3m
2
/h
2
is small. The perihelion of a planet is the point for which r is minimal, or u maximal.
This is the case if cos(ϕ − εϕ) = 0 ⇒ ϕ ≈ 2πn(1 + ε). For the perihelion shift then follows: ∆ϕ = 2πε =
6πm
2
/h
2
per orbit.
Chapter 3: Relativity 17
3.2.4 The trajectory of a photon
For the trajectory of a photon (and for each particle with zero restmass) holds ds
2
= 0. Substituting the
external Schwarzschild metric results in the following orbital equation:
du

d
2
u

2
+u −3mu

= 0
3.2.5 Gravitational waves
Starting with the approximation g
µν
= η
µν
+ h
µν
for weak gravitational fields and the definition h

µν
=
h
µν

1
2
η
µν
h
α
α
it follows that ✷h

µν
= 0 if the gauge condition ∂h

µν
/∂x
ν
= 0 is satisfied. From this, it
follows that the loss of energy of a mechanical system, if the occurring velocities are <c and for wavelengths
the size of the system, is given by:
dE
dt
= −
G
5c
5
¸
i,j

d
3
Q
ij
dt
3

2
with Q
ij
=

(x
i
x
j

1
3
δ
ij
r
2
)d
3
x the mass quadrupole moment.
3.2.6 Cosmology
If for the universe as a whole is assumed:
1. There exists a global time coordinate which acts as x
0
of a Gaussian coordinate system,
2. The 3-dimensional spaces are isotrope for a certain value of x
0
,
3. Each point is equivalent to each other point for a fixed x
0
.
then the Robertson-Walker metric can be derived for the line element:
ds
2
= −c
2
dt
2
+
R
2
(t)
r
2
0

1 −
kr
2
4r
2
0
(dr
2
+r
2
dΩ
2
)
For the scalefactor R(t) the following equations can be derived:
2
¨
R
R
+
˙
R
2
+kc
2
R
2
= −
8πκp
c
2
+Λ and
˙
R
2
+kc
2
R
2
=
8πκ
3
+
Λ
3
where p is the pressure and the density of the universe. If Λ = 0 can be derived for the deceleration
parameter q:
q = −
¨
RR
˙
R
2
=
4πκ
3H
2
where H =
˙
R/R is Hubble’s constant. This is a measure of the velocity with which galaxies far away are
moving away from each other, and has the value ≈ (75±25) kms
−1
Mpc
−1
. This gives 3 possible conditions
for the universe (here, W is the total amount of energy in the universe):
1. Parabolical universe: k = 0, W = 0, q =
1
2
. The expansion velocity of the universe → 0 if t → ∞.
The hereto related critical density is
c
= 3H
2
/8πκ.
2. Hyperbolical universe: k = −1, W < 0, q <
1
2
. The expansion velocity of the universe remains
positive forever.
3. Elliptical universe: k = 1, W > 0, q >
1
2
. The expansion velocity of the universe becomes negative
after some time: the universe starts collapsing.
Chapter 4
Oscillations
4.1 Harmonic oscillations
The general form of a harmonic oscillation is: Ψ(t) =
ˆ
Ψe
i(ωt±ϕ)

ˆ
Ψcos(ωt ±ϕ),
where
ˆ
Ψ is the amplitude. A superposition of several harmonic oscillations with the same frequency results in
another harmonic oscillation:
¸
i
ˆ
Ψ
i
cos(α
i
±ωt) =
ˆ
Φcos(β ±ωt)
with:
tan(β) =
¸
i
ˆ
Ψ
i
sin(α
i
)
¸
i
ˆ
Ψ
i
cos(α
i
)
and
ˆ
Φ
2
=
¸
i
ˆ
Ψ
2
i
+2
¸
j>i
¸
i
ˆ
Ψ
i
ˆ
Ψ
j
cos(α
i
−α
j
)
For harmonic oscillations holds:

x(t)dt =
x(t)

and
d
n
x(t)
dt
n
= (iω)
n
x(t).
4.2 Mechanic oscillations
For a construction with a spring with constant C parallel to a damping k which is connected to a mass M, to
which a periodic force F(t) =
ˆ
F cos(ωt) is applied holds the equation of motion m¨ x = F(t) − k ˙ x − Cx.
With complex amplitudes, this becomes −mω
2
x = F −Cx −ikωx. With ω
2
0
= C/m follows:
x =
F
m(ω
2
0
−ω
2
) +ikω
, and for the velocity holds: ˙ x =
F
i

Cmδ +k
where δ =
ω
ω
0

ω
0
ω
. The quantity Z = F/ ˙ x is called the impedance of the system. The quality of the system
is given by Q =

Cm
k
.
The frequency with minimal [Z[ is called velocity resonance frequency. This is equal to ω
0
. In the resonance
curve [Z[/

Cmis plotted against ω/ω
0
. The width of this curve is characterized by the points where [Z(ω)[ =
[Z(ω
0
)[

2. In these points holds: R = X and δ = ±Q
−1
, and the width is 2∆ω
B
= ω
0
/Q.
The stiffness of an oscillating system is given by F/x. The amplitude resonance frequency ω
A
is the frequency
where iωZ is minimal. This is the case for ω
A
= ω
0

1 −
1
2
Q
2
.
The damping frequency ω
D
is a measure for the time in which an oscillating system comes to rest. It is given
by ω
D
= ω
0

1 −
1
4Q
2
. A weak damped oscillation (k
2
< 4mC) dies out after T
D
= 2π/ω
D
. For a critical
damped oscillation (k
2
= 4mC) holds ω
D
= 0. A strong damped oscillation (k
2
> 4mC) drops like (if
k
2
4mC) x(t) ≈ x
0
exp(−t/τ).
4.3 Electric oscillations
The impedance is given by: Z = R + iX. The phase angle is ϕ := arctan(X/R). The impedance of a
resistor is R, of a capacitor 1/iωC and of a self inductor iωL. The quality of a coil is Q = ωL/R. The total
impedance in case several elements are positioned is given by:
Chapter 4: Oscillations 19
1. Series connection: V = IZ,
Z
tot
=
¸
i
Z
i
, L
tot
=
¸
i
L
i
,
1
C
tot
=
¸
i
1
C
i
, Q =
Z
0
R
, Z = R(1 +iQδ)
2. parallel connection: V = IZ,
1
Z
tot
=
¸
i
1
Z
i
,
1
L
tot
=
¸
i
1
L
i
, C
tot
=
¸
i
C
i
, Q =
R
Z
0
, Z =
R
1 +iQδ
Here, Z
0
=

L
C
and ω
0
=
1

LC
.
The power given by a source is given by P(t) = V (t) I(t), so 'P`
t
=
ˆ
V
eff
ˆ
I
eff
cos(∆φ)
=
1
2
ˆ
V
ˆ
I cos(φ
v
−φ
i
) =
1
2
ˆ
I
2
Re(Z) =
1
2
ˆ
V
2
Re(1/Z), where cos(∆φ) is the work factor.
4.4 Waves in long conductors
These cables are in use for signal transfer, e.g. coax cable. For them holds: Z
0
=

dL
dx
dx
dC
.
The transmission velocity is given by v =

dx
dL
dx
dC
.
4.5 Coupled conductors and transformers
For two coils enclosing each others flux holds: if Φ
12
is the part of the flux originating from I
2
through coil 2
which is enclosed by coil 1, than holds Φ
12
= M
12
I
2
, Φ
21
= M
21
I
1
. For the coefficients of mutual induction
M
ij
holds:
M
12
= M
21
:= M = k

L
1
L
2
=
N
1
Φ
1
I
2
=
N
2
Φ
2
I
1
∼ N
1
N
2
where 0 ≤ k ≤ 1 is the coupling factor. For a transformer is k ≈ 1. At full load holds:
V
1
V
2
=
I
2
I
1
= −
iωM
iωL
2
+R
load
≈ −

L
1
L
2
= −
N
1
N
2
4.6 Pendulums
The oscillation time T = 1/f, and for different types of pendulums is given by:
• Oscillating spring: T = 2π

m/C if the spring force is given by F = C ∆l.
• Physical pendulum: T = 2π

I/τ with τ the moment of force and I the moment of inertia.
• Torsion pendulum: T = 2π

I/κ with κ =
2lm
πr
4
∆ϕ
the constant of torsion and I the moment of inertia.
• Mathematical pendulum: T = 2π

l/g with g the acceleration of gravity and l the length of the pendu-
lum.
Chapter 5
Waves
5.1 The wave equation
The general form of the wave equation is: ✷u = 0, or:

2
u −
1
v
2

2
u
∂t
2
=

2
u
∂x
2
+

2
u
∂y
2
+

2
u
∂z
2

1
v
2

2
u
∂t
2
= 0
where u is the disturbance and v the propagation velocity. In general holds: v = fλ. By definition holds:
kλ = 2π and ω = 2πf.
In principle, there are two types of waves:
1. Longitudinal waves: for these holds

k | v | u.
2. Transversal waves: for these holds

k | v ⊥ u.
The phase velocity is given by v
ph
= ω/k. The group velocity is given by:
v
g
=

dk
= v
ph
+k
dv
ph
dk
= v
ph

1 −
k
n
dn
dk

where n is the refractive index of the medium. If v
ph
does not depend on ω holds: v
ph
= v
g
. In a dispersive
medium it is possible that v
g
> v
ph
or v
g
< v
ph
, and v
g
v
f
= c
2
. If one wants to transfer information with
a wave, e.g. by modulation of an EM wave, the information travels with the velocity at with a change in the
electromagnetic field propagates. This velocity is often almost equal to the group velocity.
For some media, the propagation velocity follows from:
• Pressure waves in a liquid or gas: v =

κ/, where κ is the modulus of compression.
• For pressure waves in a gas also holds: v =

γp/ =

γRT/M.
• Pressure waves in a thin solid bar with diameter << λ: v =

E/
• waves in a string: v =

F
span
l/m
• Surface waves on a liquid: v =



+
2πγ
λ

tanh

2πh
λ

where h is the depth of the liquid and γ the surface tension. If h <λ holds: v ≈

gh.
5.2 Solutions of the wave equation
5.2.1 Plane waves
In n dimensions a harmonic plane wave is defined by:
u(x, t) = 2
n
ˆ ucos(ωt)
n
¸
i=1
sin(k
i
x
i
)
Chapter 5: Waves 21
The equation for a harmonic traveling plane wave is: u(x, t) = ˆ ucos(

k x ±ωt +ϕ)
If waves reflect at the end of a spring this will result in a change in phase. A fixed end gives a phase change of
π/2 to the reflected wave, with boundary condition u(l) = 0. A lose end gives no change in the phase of the
reflected wave, with boundary condition (∂u/∂x)
l
= 0.
If an observer is moving w.r.t. the wave with a velocity v
obs
, he will observe a change in frequency: the
Doppler effect. This is given by:
f
f
0
=
v
f
−v
obs
v
f
.
5.2.2 Spherical waves
When the situation is spherical symmetric, the homogeneous wave equation is given by:
1
v
2

2
(ru)
∂t
2


2
(ru)
∂r
2
= 0
with general solution:
u(r, t) = C
1
f(r −vt)
r
+C
2
g(r +vt)
r
5.2.3 Cylindrical waves
When the situation has a cylindrical symmetry, the homogeneous wave equation becomes:
1
v
2

2
u
∂t
2

1
r

∂r

r
∂u
∂r

= 0
This is a Bessel equation, with solutions which can be written as Hankel functions. For sufficient large values
of r these are approximated by:
u(r, t) =
ˆ u

r
cos(k(r ±vt))
5.2.4 The general solution in one dimension
Starting point is the equation:

2
u(x, t)
∂t
2
=
N
¸
m=0

b
m

m
∂x
m

u(x, t)
where b
m
∈ IR. Substituting u(x, t) = Ae
i(kx−ωt)
gives two solutions ω
j
= ω
j
(k) as dispersion relations.
The general solution is given by:
u(x, t) =

−∞

a(k)e
i(kx−ω1(k)t)
+b(k)e
i(kx−ω2(k)t)

dk
Because in general the frequencies ω
j
are non-linear in k there is dispersion and the solution cannot be written
any more as a sum of functions depending only on x ±vt: the wave front transforms.
5.3 The stationary phase method
Usually the Fourier integrals of the previous section cannot be calculated exactly. If ω
j
(k) ∈ IR the stationary
phase method can be applied. Assuming that a(k) is only a slowly varying function of k, one can state that the
parts of the k-axis where the phase of kx −ω(k)t changes rapidly will give no net contribution to the integral
because the exponent oscillates rapidly there. The only areas contributing significantly to the integral are areas
with a stationary phase, determined by
d
dk
(kx −ω(k)t) = 0. Now the following approximation is possible:

−∞
a(k)e
i(kx−ω(k)t)
dk ≈
N
¸
i=1


d
2
ω(ki)
dk
2
i
exp

−i
1
4
π +i(k
i
x −ω(k
i
)t)

22 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
5.4 Green functions for the initial-value problem
This method is preferable if the solutions deviate much fromthe stationary solutions, like point-like excitations.
Starting with the wave equation in one dimension, with ∇
2
= ∂
2
/∂x
2
holds: if Q(x, x

, t) is the solution with
initial values Q(x, x

, 0) = δ(x − x

) and
∂Q(x, x

, 0)
∂t
= 0, and P(x, x

, t) the solution with initial values
P(x, x

, 0) = 0 and
∂P(x, x

, 0)
∂t
= δ(x − x

), then the solution of the wave equation with arbitrary initial
conditions f(x) = u(x, 0) and g(x) =
∂u(x, 0)
∂t
is given by:
u(x, t) =

−∞
f(x

)Q(x, x

, t)dx

+

−∞
g(x

)P(x, x

, t)dx

P and Q are called the propagators. They are defined by:
Q(x, x

, t) =
1
2
[δ(x −x

−vt) +δ(x −x

+vt)]
P(x, x

, t) =

1
2v
if [x −x

[ < vt
0 if [x −x

[ > vt
Further holds the relation: Q(x, x

, t) =
∂P(x, x

, t)
∂t
5.5 Waveguides and resonating cavities
The boundary conditions for a perfect conductor can be derived from the Maxwell equations. If n is a unit
vector ⊥ the surface, pointed from 1 to 2, and

K is a surface current density, than holds:
n (

D
2


D
1
) = σ n (

E
2


E
1
) = 0
n (

B
2


B
1
) = 0 n (

H
2


H
1
) =

K
In a waveguide holds because of the cylindrical symmetry:

E(x, t) =

c(x, y)e
i(kz−ωt)
and

B(x, t) =

B(x, y)e
i(kz−ωt)
. From this one can now deduce that, if B
z
and c
z
are not ≡ 0:
B
x
=
i
εµω
2
−k
2

k
∂B
z
∂x
−εµω
∂c
z
∂y

B
y
=
i
εµω
2
−k
2

k
∂B
z
∂y
+εµω
∂c
z
∂x

c
x
=
i
εµω
2
−k
2

k
∂c
z
∂x
+εµω
∂B
z
∂y

c
y
=
i
εµω
2
−k
2

k
∂c
z
∂y
−εµω
∂B
z
∂x

Now one can distinguish between three cases:
1. B
z
≡ 0: the Transversal Magnetic modes (TM). Boundary condition: c
z
[
surf
= 0.
2. E
z
≡ 0: the Transversal Electric modes (TE). Boundary condition:
∂B
z
∂n

surf
= 0.
For the TE and TM modes this gives an eigenvalue problem for c
z
resp. B
z
with boundary conditions:


2
∂x
2
+

2
∂y
2

ψ = −γ
2
ψ with eigenvalues γ
2
:= εµω
2
−k
2
This gives a discrete solution ψ

with eigenvalue γ
2

: k =

εµω
2
−γ
2

. For ω < ω

, k is imaginary
and the wave is damped. Therefore, ω

is called the cut-off frequency. In rectangular conductors the
following expression can be found for the cut-off frequency for modes TE
m,n
of TM
m,n
:
λ

=
2

(m/a)
2
+(n/b)
2
Chapter 5: Waves 23
3. E
z
and B
z
are zero everywhere: the Transversal electromagnetic mode (TEM). Than holds: k =
±ω

εµ and v
f
= v
g
, just as if here were no waveguide. Further k ∈ IR, so there exists no cut-off
frequency.
In a rectangular, 3 dimensional resonating cavity with edges a, b and c the possible wave numbers are given
by: k
x
=
n
1
π
a
, k
y
=
n
2
π
b
, k
z
=
n
3
π
c
This results in the possible frequencies f = vk/2π in the cavity:
f =
v
2

n
2
x
a
2
+
n
2
y
b
2
+
n
2
z
c
2
For a cubic cavity, with a = b = c, the possible number of oscillating modes N
L
for longitudinal waves is
given by:
N
L
=
4πa
3
f
3
3v
3
Because transversal waves have two possible polarizations holds for them: N
T
= 2N
L
.
5.6 Non-linear wave equations
The Van der Pol equation is given by:
d
2
x
dt
2
−εω
0
(1 −βx
2
)
dx
dt

2
0
x = 0
βx
2
can be ignored for very small values of the amplitude. Substitution of x ∼ e
iωt
gives: ω =
1
2
ω
0
(iε ±
2

1 −
1
2
ε
2
). The lowest-order instabilities grow as
1
2
εω
0
. While x is growing, the 2nd term becomes larger
and diminishes the growth. Oscillations on a time scale ∼ ω
−1
0
can exist. If x is expanded as x = x
(0)
+
εx
(1)
+ ε
2
x
(2)
+ and this is substituted one obtains, besides periodic, secular terms ∼ εt. If it is assumed
that there exist timescales τ
n
, 0 ≤ τ ≤ N with ∂τ
n
/∂t = ε
n
and if the secular terms are put 0 one obtains:
d
dt

1
2

dx
dt

2
+
1
2
ω
2
0
x
2
¸
= εω
0
(1 −βx
2
)

dx
dt

2
This is an energy equation. Energy is conserved if the left-hand side is 0. If x
2
> 1/β, the right-hand side
changes sign and an increase in energy changes into a decrease of energy. This mechanism limits the growth
of oscillations.
The Korteweg-De Vries equation is given by:
∂u
∂t
+
∂u
∂x
− au
∂u
∂x
. .. .
non−lin
+ b
2

3
u
∂x
3
. .. .
dispersive
= 0
This equation is for example a model for ion-acoustic waves in a plasma. For this equation, soliton solutions
of the following form exist:
u(x −ct) =
−d
cosh
2
(e(x −ct))
with c = 1 +
1
3
ad and e
2
= ad/(12b
2
).
Chapter 6
Optics
6.1 The bending of light
For the refraction at a surface holds: n
i
sin(θ
i
) = n
t
sin(θ
t
) where n is the refractive index of the material.
Snell’s law is:
n
2
n
1
=
λ
1
λ
2
=
v
1
v
2
If ∆n ≤ 1, the change in phase of the light is ∆ϕ = 0, if ∆n > 1 holds: ∆ϕ = π. The refraction of light in a
material is caused by scattering from atoms. This is described by:
n
2
= 1 +
n
e
e
2
ε
0
m
¸
j
f
j
ω
2
0,j
−ω
2
−iδω
where n
e
is the electron density and f
j
the oscillator strength, for which holds:
¸
j
f
j
= 1. From this follows
that v
g
= c/(1 +(n
e
e
2
/2ε
0

2
)). From this the equation of Cauchy can be derived: n = a
0
+a
1

2
. More
general, it is possible to expand n as: n =
n
¸
k=0
a
k
λ
2k
.
For an electromagnetic wave in general holds: n =

ε
r
µ
r
.
The path, followed by a light ray in material can be found from Fermat’s principle:
δ
2

1
dt = δ
2

1
n(s)
c
ds = 0 ⇒δ
2

1
n(s)ds = 0
6.2 Paraxial geometrical optics
6.2.1 Lenses
The Gaussian lens formula can be deduced from Fermat’s principle with the approximations cos ϕ = 1 and
sin ϕ = ϕ. For the refraction at a spherical surface with radius R holds:
n
1
v

n
2
b
=
n
1
−n
2
R
where [v[ is the distance of the object and [b[ the distance of the image. Applying this twice results in:
1
f
= (n
l
−1)

1
R
2

1
R
1

where n
l
is the refractive index of the lens, f is the focal length and R
1
and R
2
are the curvature radii of both
surfaces. For a double concave lens holds R
1
< 0, R
2
> 0, for a double convex lens holds R
1
> 0 and
R
2
< 0. Further holds:
1
f
=
1
v

1
b
Chapter 6: Optics 25
D := 1/f is called the dioptric power of a lens. For a lens with thickness d and diameter D holds to a good
approximation: 1/f = 8(n −1)d/D
2
. For two lenses placed on a line with distance d holds:
1
f
=
1
f
1
+
1
f
2

d
f
1
f
2
In these equations the following signs are being used for refraction at a spherical surface, as is seen by an
incoming light ray:
Quantity + −
R Concave surface Convex surface
f Converging lens Diverging lens
v Real object Virtual object
b Virtual image Real image
6.2.2 Mirrors
For images of mirrors holds:
1
f
=
1
v
+
1
b
=
2
R
+
h
2
2

1
R

1
v

2
where h is the perpendicular distance from the point the light ray hits the mirror to the optical axis. Spherical
aberration can be reduced by not using spherical mirrors. A parabolical mirror has no spherical aberration for
light rays parallel with the optical axis and is therefore often used for telescopes. The used signs are:
Quantity + −
R Concave mirror Convex mirror
f Concave mirror Convex mirror
v Real object Virtual object
b Real image Virtual image
6.2.3 Principal planes
The nodal points N of a lens are defined by the figure on the right. If the lens is
surrounded by the same medium on both sides, the nodal points are the same as
the principal points H. The plane ⊥ the optical axis through the principal points
is called the principal plane. If the lens is described by a matrix m
ij
than for the
distances h
1
and h
2
to the boundary of the lens holds:
h
1
= n
m
11
−1
m
12
, h
2
= n
m
22
−1
m
12
r r r
N
1
N
2 O
6.2.4 Magnification
The linear magnification is defined by: N = −
b
v
The angular magnification is defined by: N
α
= −
α
syst
α
none
where α
sys
is the size of the retinal image with the optical system and α
none
the size of the retinal image
without the system. Further holds: N N
α
= 1. For a telescope holds: N = f
objective
/f
ocular
. The f-number
is defined by f/D
objective
.
26 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
6.3 Matrix methods
A light ray can be described by a vector (nα, y) with α the angle with the optical axis and y the distance to
the optical axis. The change of a light ray interacting with an optical system can be obtained using a matrix
multiplication:

n
2
α
2
y
2

= M

n
1
α
1
y
1

where Tr(M) = 1. M is a product of elementary matrices. These are:
1. Transfer along length l: M
R
=

1 0
l/n 1

2. Refraction at a surface with dioptric power D: M
T
=

1 −D
0 1

6.4 Aberrations
Lenses usually do not give a perfect image. Some causes are:
1. Chromatic aberration is caused by the fact that n = n(λ). This can be partially corrected with a lens
which is composed of more lenses with different functions n
i
(λ). Using N lenses makes it possible to
obtain the same f for N wavelengths.
2. Spherical aberration is caused by second-order effects which are usually ignored; a spherical surface
does not make a perfect lens. Incomming rays far from the optical axis will more bent.
3. Coma is caused by the fact that the principal planes of a lens are only flat near the principal axis. Further
away of the optical axis they are curved. This curvature can be both positive or negative.
4. Astigmatism: from each point of an object not on the optical axis the image is an ellipse because the
thickness of the lens is not the same everywhere.
5. Field curvature can be corrected by the human eye.
6. Distorsion gives abberations near the edges of the image. This can be corrected with a combination of
positive and negative lenses.
6.5 Reflection and transmission
If an electromagnetic wave hits a transparent medium part of the wave will reflect at the same angle as the
incident angle, and a part will be refracted at an angle according to Snell’s law. It makes a difference whether
the

E field of the wave is ⊥ or | w.r.t. the surface. When the coefficients of reflection r and transmission t are
defined as:
r

E
0r
E
0i

, r

E
0r
E
0i


, t

E
0t
E
0i

, t

E
0t
E
0i


where E
0r
is the reflected amplitude and E
0t
the transmitted amplitude. Then the Fresnel equations are:
r

=
tan(θ
i
−θ
t
)
tan(θ
i

t
)
, r

=
sin(θ
t
−θ
i
)
sin(θ
t

i
)
t

=
2 sin(θ
t
) cos(θ
i
)
sin(θ
t

i
) cos(θ
t
−θ
i
)
, t

=
2 sin(θ
t
) cos(θ
i
)
sin(θ
t

i
)
The following holds: t

− r

= 1 and t

+ r

= 1. If the coefficient of reflection R and transmission T are
defined as (with θ
i
= θ
r
):
R ≡
I
r
I
i
and T ≡
I
t
cos(θ
t
)
I
i
cos(θ
i
)
Chapter 6: Optics 27
with I = '[

S[` it follows: R+T = 1. A special case is r

= 0. This happens if the angle between the reflected
and transmitted rays is 90

. From Snell’s law it then follows: tan(θ
i
) = n. This angle is called Brewster’s
angle. The situation with r

= 0 is not possible.
6.6 Polarization
The polarization is defined as: P =
I
p
I
p
+I
u
=
I
max
−I
min
I
max
+I
min
where the intensity of the polarized light is given by I
p
and the intensity of the unpolarized light is given by
I
u
. I
max
and I
min
are the maximum and minimum intensities when the light passes a polarizer. If polarized
light passes through a polarizer Malus law applies: I(θ) = I(0) cos
2
(θ) where θ is the angle of the polarizer.
The state of a light ray can be described by the Stokes-parameters: start with 4 filters which each transmits half
the intensity. The first is independent of the polarization, the second and third are linear polarizers with the
transmission axes horizontal and at +45

, while the fourth is a circular polarizer which is opaque for L-states.
Then holds S
1
= 2I
1
, S
2
= 2I
2
−2I
1
, S
3
= 2I
3
−2I
1
and S
4
= 2I
4
−2I
1
.
The state of a polarized light ray can also be described by the Jones vector:

E =

E
0x
e
iϕx
E
0y
e
iϕy

For the horizontal P-state holds:

E = (1, 0), for the vertical P-state

E = (0, 1), the R-state is given by

E =
1
2

2(1, −i) and the L-state by

E =
1
2

2(1, i). The change in state of a light beam after passage of
optical equipment can be described as

E
2
= M

E
1
. For some types of optical equipment the Jones matrix M
is given by:
Horizontal linear polarizer:

1 0
0 0

Vertical linear polarizer:

0 0
0 1

Linear polarizer at +45
◦ 1
2

1 1
1 1

Lineair polarizer at −45
◦ 1
2

1 −1
−1 1

1
4
-λ plate, fast axis vertical e
iπ/4

1 0
0 −i

1
4
-λ plate, fast axis horizontal e
iπ/4

1 0
0 i

Homogene circular polarizor right
1
2

1 i
−i 1

Homogene circular polarizer left
1
2

1 −i
i 1

6.7 Prisms and dispersion
A light ray passing through a prism is refracted twice and aquires a deviation from its original direction
δ = θ
i
+ θ
i
+ α w.r.t. the incident direction, where α is the apex angle, θ
i
is the angle between the incident
angle and a line perpendicular to the surface and θ
i
is the angle between the ray leaving the prism and a line
perpendicular to the surface. When θ
i
varies there is an angle for which δ becomes minimal. For the refractive
index of the prism now holds:
n =
sin(
1
2

min
+α))
sin(
1
2
α)
28 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
The dispersion of a prism is defined by:
D =


=

dn
dn

where the first factor depends on the shape and the second on the composition of the prism. For the first factor
follows:

dn
=
2 sin(
1
2
α)
cos(
1
2

min
+α))
For visible light usually holds dn/dλ < 0: shorter wavelengths are stronger bent than longer. The refractive
index in this area can usually be approximated by Cauchy’s formula.
6.8 Diffraction
Fraunhofer diffraction occurs far away from the source(s). The Fraunhofer diffraction of light passing through
multiple slits is described by:
I(θ)
I
0
=

sin(u)
u

2

sin(Nv)
sin(v)

2
where u = πb sin(θ)/λ, v = πd sin(θ)/λ. N is the number of slits, b the width of a slit and d the distance
between the slits. The maxima in intensity are given by d sin(θ) = kλ.
The diffraction through a spherical aperture with radius a is described by:
I(θ)
I
0
=

J
1
(ka sin(θ))
ka sin(θ)

2
The diffraction pattern of a rectangular aperture at distance R with length a in the x-direction and b in the
y-direction is described by:
I(x, y)
I
0
=

sin(α

)
α

2

sin(β

)
β

2
where α

= kax/2R and β

= kby/2R.
When X rays are diffracted at a crystal holds for the position of the maxima in intensity Bragg’s relation:
2d sin(θ) = nλ where d is the distance between the crystal layers.
Close at the source the Fraunhofermodel is invalid because it ignores the angle-dependence of the reflected
waves. This is described by the obliquity or inclination factor, which describes the directionality of the sec-
ondary emissions: E(θ) =
1
2
E
0
(1 +cos(θ)) where θ is the angle w.r.t. the optical axis.
Diffraction limits the resolution of a system. This is the minimum angle ∆θ
min
between two incident rays
coming from points far away for which their refraction patterns can be detected separately. For a circular slit
holds: ∆θ
min
= 1.22λ/D where D is the diameter of the slit.
For a grating holds: ∆θ
min
= 2λ/(Na cos(θ
m
)) where a is the distance between two peaks and N the
number of peaks. The minimum difference between two wavelengths that gives a separated diffraction pattern
in a multiple slit geometry is given by ∆λ/λ = nN where N is the number of lines and n the order of the
pattern.
6.9 Special optical effects
• Birefringe and dichroism.

D is not parallel with

E if the polarizability

P of a material is not equal in
all directions. There are at least 3 directions, the principal axes, in which they are parallel. This results
in 3 refractive indices n
i
which can be used to construct Fresnel’s ellipsoid. In case n
2
= n
3
= n
1
,
which happens e.g. at trigonal, hexagonal and tetragonal crystals there is one optical axis in the direction
of n
1
. Incident light rays can now be split up in two parts: the ordinary wave is linear polarized ⊥ the
plane through the transmission direction and the optical axis. The extraordinary wave is linear polarized
Chapter 6: Optics 29
in the plane through the transmission direction and the optical axis. Dichroism is caused by a different
absorption of the ordinary and extraordinary wave in some materials. Double images occur when the
incident ray makes an angle with the optical axis: the extraordinary wave will refract, the ordinary will
not.
• Retarders: waveplates and compensators. Incident light will have a phase shift of ∆ϕ = 2πd([n
0

n
e
[)/λ
0
if an uniaxial crystal is cut in such a way that the optical axis is parallel with the front and back
plane. Here, λ
0
is the wavelength in vacuum and n
0
and n
e
the refractive indices for the ordinary and
extraordinary wave. For a quarter-wave plate holds: ∆ϕ = π/2.
• The Kerr-effect: isotropic, transparent materials can become birefringent when placed in an electric
field. In that case, the optical axis is parallel to

E. The difference in refractive index in the two directions
is given by: ∆n = λ
0
KE
2
, where K is the Kerr constant of the material. If the electrodes have an
effective length and are separated by a distance d, the retardation is given by: ∆ϕ = 2πKV
2
/d
2
,
where V is the applied voltage.
• The Pockels or linear electro-optical effect can occur in 20 (froma total of 32) crystal symmetry classes,
namely those without a centre of symmetry. These crystals are also piezoelectric: their polarization
changes when a pressure is applied and vice versa:

P = pd +ε
0
χ

E. The retardation in a Pockels cell is
∆ϕ = 2πn
3
0
r
63
V/λ
0
where r
63
is the 6-3 element of the electro-optic tensor.
• The Faraday effect: the polarization of light passing through material with length d and to which a
magnetic field is applied in the propagation direction is rotated by an angle β = 1Bd where 1 is the
Verdet constant.

˘
Cerenkov radiation arises when a charged particle with v
q
> v
f
arrives. The radiation is emitted within
a cone with an apex angle α with sin(α) = c/c
medium
= c/nv
q
.
6.10 The Fabry-Perot interferometer
For a Fabry-Perot interferometer holds in
general: T + R + A = 1 where T is the
transmission factor, R the reflection factor
and A the absorption factor. If F is given
by F = 4R/(1 − R)
2
it follows for the
intensity distribution:
I
t
I
i
=
¸
1 −
A
1 −R

2
1
1 +F sin
2
(θ)
The term [1 + F sin
2
(θ)]
−1
:= /(θ) is
called the Airy function.
✛✲
Source Lens
d
Focussing lens
Screen
€
€
€
€q
The width of the peaks at half height is given by γ = 4/

F. The finesse T is defined as T =
1
2
π

F. The
maximum resolution is then given by ∆f
min
= c/2ndT.
Chapter 7
Statistical physics
7.1 Degrees of freedom
Amolecule consisting of n atoms has s = 3n degrees of freedom. There are 3 translational degrees of freedom,
a linear molecule has s = 3n − 5 vibrational degrees of freedom and a non-linear molecule s = 3n − 6. A
linear molecule has 2 rotational degrees of freedom and a non-linear molecule 3.
Because vibrational degrees of freedom account for both kinetic and potential energy they count double. So,
for linear molecules this results in a total of s = 6n −5. For non-linear molecules this gives s = 6n −6. The
average energy of a molecule in thermodynamic equilibrium is 'E
tot
` =
1
2
skT. Each degree of freedom of a
molecule has in principle the same energy: the principle of equipartition.
The rotational and vibrational energy of a molecule are:
W
rot
=
¯h
2
2I
l(l + 1) = Bl(l +1) , W
vib
= (v +
1
2
)¯ hω
0
The vibrational levels are excited if kT ≈ ¯hω, the rotational levels of a hetronuclear molecule are excited if
kT ≈ 2B. For homonuclear molecules additional selection rules apply so the rotational levels are well coupled
if kT ≈ 6B.
7.2 The energy distribution function
The general form of the equilibrium velocity distribution function is
P(v
x
, v
y
, v
z
)dv
x
dv
y
dv
z
= P(v
x
)dv
x
P(v
y
)dv
y
P(v
z
)dv
z
with
P(v
i
)dv
i
=
1
α

π
exp


v
2
i
α
2

dv
i
where α =

2kT/m is the most probable velocity of a particle. The average velocity is given by 'v` =
2α/

π, and

v
2

=
3
2
α
2
. The distribution as a function of the absolute value of the velocity is given by:
dN
dv
=
4N
α
3

π
v
2
exp


mv
2
2kT

The general form of the energy distribution function then becomes:
P(E)dE =
c(s)
kT

E
kT
1
2
s−1
exp


E
kT

dE
where c(s) is a normalization constant, given by:
1. Even s: s = 2l: c(s) =
1
(l −1)!
2. Odd s: s = 2l +1: c(s) =
2
l

π(2l − 1)!!
Chapter 7: Statistical physics 31
7.3 Pressure on a wall
The number of molecules that collides with a wall with surface A within a time τ is given by:

d
3
N =

0
π

0

0
nAvτ cos(θ)P(v, θ, ϕ)dvdθdϕ
From this follows for the particle flux on the wall: Φ =
1
4
n'v`. For the pressure on the wall then follows:
d
3
p =
2mv cos(θ)d
3
N

, so p =
2
3
n'E`
7.4 The equation of state
If intermolecular forces and the volume of the molecules can be neglected then for gases from p =
2
3
n'E`
and 'E` =
3
2
kT can be derived:
pV = n
s
RT =
1
3
Nm

v
2

Here, n
s
is the number of moles particles and N is the total number of particles within volume V . If the own
volume and the intermolecular forces cannot be neglected the Van der Waals equation can be derived:

p +
an
2
s
V
2

(V −bn
s
) = n
s
RT
There is an isotherme with a horizontal point of inflection. In the Van der Waals equation this corresponds
with the critical temperature, pressure and volume of the gas. This is the upper limit of the area of coexistence
between liquid and vapor. From dp/dV = 0 and d
2
p/dV
2
= 0 follows:
T
cr
=
8a
27bR
, p
cr
=
a
27b
2
, V
cr
= 3bn
s
For the critical point holds: p
cr
V
m,cr
/RT
cr
=
3
8
, which differs from the value of 1 which follows from the
general gas law.
Scaled on the critical quantities, with p

:= p/p
cr
, T

= T/T
cr
and V

m
= V
m
/V
m,cr
with V
m
:= V/n
s
holds:

p

+
3
(V

m
)
2

V

m

1
3

=
8
3
T

Gases behave the same for equal values of the reduced quantities: the law of the corresponding states. A virial
expansion is used for even more accurate views:
p(T, V
m
) = RT

1
V
m
+
B(T)
V
2
m
+
C(T)
V
3
m
+

The Boyle temperature T
B
is the temperature for which the 2nd virial coefficient is 0. In a Van der Waals gas,
this happens at T
B
= a/Rb. The inversion temperature T
i
= 2T
B
.
The equation of state for solids and liquids is given by:
V
V
0
= 1 +γ
p
∆T −κ
T
∆p = 1 +
1
V

∂V
∂T

p
∆T +
1
V

∂V
∂p

T
∆p
32 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
7.5 Collisions between molecules
The collision probability of a particle in a gas that is translated over a distance dx is given by nσdx, where σ is
the cross section. The mean free path is given by =
v
1
nuσ
with u =

v
2
1
+v
2
2
the relative velocity between
the particles. If m
1
< m
2
holds:
u
v
1
=

1 +
m
1
m
2
, so =
1

. If m
1
= m
2
holds: =
1


2
. This means
that the average time between two collisions is given by τ =
1
nσv
. If the molecules are approximated by hard
spheres the cross section is: σ =
1
4
π(D
2
1
+ D
2
2
). The average distance between two molecules is 0.55n
−1/3
.
Collisions between molecules and small particles in a solution result in the Brownian motion. For the average
motion of a particle with radius R can be derived:

x
2
i

=
1
3

r
2

= kTt/3πηR.
A gas is called a Knudsen gas if the dimensions of the gas, something that can easily occur at low
pressures. The equilibrium condition for a vessel which has a hole with surface A in it for which holds that

A/π is: n
1

T
1
= n
2

T
2
. Together with the general gas law follows: p
1
/

T
1
= p
2
/

T
2
.
If two plates move along each other at a distance d with velocity w
x
the viscosity η is given by: F
x
= η
Aw
x
d
.
The velocity profile between the plates is in that case given by w(z) = zw
x
/d. It can be derived that η =
1
3
'v` where v is the thermal velocity.
The heat conductance in a non-moving gas is described by:
dQ
dt
= κA

T
2
−T
1
d

, which results in a temper-
ature profile T(z) = T
1
+z(T
2
−T
1
)/d. It can be derived that κ =
1
3
C
mV
n 'v` /N
A
. Also holds: κ = C
V
η.
A better expression for κ can be obtained with the Eucken correction: κ = (1 + 9R/4c
mV
)C
V
η with an
error <5%.
7.6 Interaction between molecules
For dipole interaction between molecules can be derived that U ∼ −1/r
6
. If the distance between two
molecules approaches the molecular diameter D a repulsing force between the electron clouds appears. This
force can be described by U
rep
∼ exp(−γr) or V
rep
= +C
s
/r
s
with 12 ≤ s ≤ 20. This results in the
Lennard-Jones potential for intermolecular forces:
U
LJ
= 4
¸

D
r

12

D
r

6
¸
with a minimum at r = r
m
. The following holds: D ≈ 0.89r
m
. For the Van der Waals coefficients a and b
and the critical quantities holds: a = 5.275N
2
A
D
3
, b = 1.3N
A
D
3
, kT
kr
= 1.2 and V
m,kr
= 3.9N
A
D
3
.
A more simple model for intermolecular forces assumes a potential U(r) = ∞for r < D, U(r) = U
LJ
for
D ≤ r ≤ 3D and U(r) = 0 for r ≥ 3D. This gives for the potential energy of one molecule: E
pot
=

3D
D
U(r)F(r)dr.
with F(r) the spatial distribution function in spherical coordinates, which for a homogeneous distribution is
given by: F(r)dr = 4nπr
2
dr.
Some useful mathematical relations are:

0
x
n
e
−x
dx = n! ,

0
x
2n
e
−x
2
dx =
(2n)!

π
n!2
2n+1
,

0
x
2n+1
e
−x
2
dx =
1
2
n!
Chapter 8
Thermodynamics
8.1 Mathematical introduction
If there exists a relation f(x, y, z) = 0 between 3 variables, one can write: x = x(y, z), y = y(x, z) and
z = z(x, y). The total differential dz of z is than given by:
dz =

∂z
∂x

y
dx +

∂z
∂y

x
dy
By writing this also for dx and dy it can be obtained that

∂x
∂y

z

∂y
∂z

x

∂z
∂x

y
= −1
Because dz is a total differential holds

dz = 0.
A homogeneous function of degree m obeys: ε
m
F(x, y, z) = F(εx, εy, εz). For such a function Euler’s
theorem applies:
mF(x, y, z) = x
∂F
∂x
+y
∂F
∂y
+z
∂F
∂z
8.2 Definitions
• The isochoric pressure coefficient: β
V
=
1
p

∂p
∂T

V
• The isothermal compressibility: κ
T
= −
1
V

∂V
∂p

T
• The isobaric volume coefficient: γ
p
=
1
V

∂V
∂T

p
• The adiabatic compressibility: κ
S
= −
1
V

∂V
∂p

S
For an ideal gas follows: γ
p
= 1/T, κ
T
= 1/p and β
V
= −1/V .
8.3 Thermal heat capacity
• The specific heat at constant X is: C
X
= T

∂S
∂T

X
• The specific heat at constant pressure: C
p
=

∂H
∂T

p
• The specific heat at constant volume: C
V
=

∂U
∂T

V
34 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
For an ideal gas holds: C
mp
−C
mV
= R. Further, if the temperature is high enough to thermalize all internal
rotational and vibrational degrees of freedom, holds: C
V
=
1
2
sR. Hence C
p
=
1
2
(s +2)R. For their ratio now
follows γ = (2 + s)/s. For a lower T one needs only to consider the thermalized degrees of freedom. For a
Van der Waals gas holds: C
mV
=
1
2
sR +ap/RT
2
.
In general holds:
C
p
−C
V
= T

∂p
∂T

V

∂V
∂T

p
= −T

∂V
∂T

2
p

∂p
∂V

T
≥ 0
Because (∂p/∂V )
T
is always < 0, the following is always valid: C
p
≥ C
V
. If the coefficient of expansion is
0, C
p
= C
V
, and also at T = 0K.
8.4 The laws of thermodynamics
The zeroth law states that heat flows from higher to lower temperatures. The first law is the conservation of
energy. For a closed system holds: Q = ∆U + W, where Q is the total added heat, W the work done and
∆U the difference in the internal energy. In differential form this becomes: dQ = dU +dW, where d means
that the it is not a differential of a quantity of state. For a quasi-static process holds: dW = pdV . So for a
reversible process holds: dQ = dU +pdV .
For an open (flowing) system the first law is: Q = ∆H +W
i
+∆E
kin
+∆E
pot
. One can extract an amount
of work W
t
from the system or add W
t
= −W
i
to the system.
The second lawstates: for a closed systemthere exists an additive quantity S, called the entropy, the differential
of which has the following property:
dS ≥
dQ
T
If the only processes occurring are reversible holds: dS = dQ
rev
/T. So, the entropy difference after a
reversible process is:
S
2
−S
1
=
2

1
dQ
rev
T
So, for a reversible cycle holds:

dQ
rev
T
= 0.
For an irreversible cycle holds:

dQ
irr
T
< 0.
The third law of thermodynamics is (Nernst):
lim
T→0

∂S
∂X

T
= 0
From this it can be concluded that the thermal heat capacity → 0 if T → 0, so absolute zero temperature
cannot be reached by cooling through a finite number of steps.
8.5 State functions and Maxwell relations
The quantities of state and their differentials are:
Internal energy: U dU = TdS −pdV
Enthalpy: H = U +pV dH = TdS +V dp
Free energy: F = U −TS dF = −SdT −pdV
Gibbs free enthalpy: G = H −TS dG = −SdT +V dp
Chapter 8: Thermodynamics 35
From this one can derive Maxwell’s relations:

∂T
∂V

S
= −

∂p
∂S

V
,

∂T
∂p

S
=

∂V
∂S

p
,

∂p
∂T

V
=

∂S
∂V

T
,

∂V
∂T

p
= −

∂S
∂p

T
From the total differential and the definitions of C
V
and C
p
it can be derived that:
TdS = C
V
dT +T

∂p
∂T

V
dV and TdS = C
p
dT −T

∂V
∂T

p
dp
For an ideal gas also holds:
S
m
= C
V
ln

T
T
0

+Rln

V
V
0

+S
m0
and S
m
= C
p
ln

T
T
0

−Rln

p
p
0

+S

m0
Helmholtz’ equations are:

∂U
∂V

T
= T

∂p
∂T

V
−p ,

∂H
∂p

T
= V −T

∂V
∂T

p
for an enlarged surface holds: dW
rev
= −γdA, with γ the surface tension. From this follows:
γ =

∂U
∂A

S
=

∂F
∂A

T
8.6 Processes
The efficiency η of a process is given by: η =
Work done
Heat added
The Cold factor ξ of a cooling down process is given by: ξ =
Cold delivered
Work added
Reversible adiabatic processes
For adiabatic processes holds: W = U
1
− U
2
. For reversible adiabatic processes holds Poisson’s equation:
with γ = C
p
/C
V
one gets that pV
γ
=constant. Also holds: TV
γ−1
=constant and T
γ
p
1−γ
=constant.
Adiabatics exhibit a greater steepness p-V diagram than isothermics because γ > 1.
Isobaric processes
Here holds: H
2
−H
1
=

2
1
C
p
dT. For a reversible isobaric process holds: H
2
−H
1
= Q
rev
.
The throttle process
This is also called the Joule-Kelvin effect and is an adiabatic expansion of a gas through a porous material or a
small opening. Here H is a conserved quantity, and dS > 0. In general this is accompanied with a change in
temperature. The quantity which is important here is the throttle coefficient:
α
H
=

∂T
∂p

H
=
1
C
p
¸
T

∂V
∂T

p
−V
¸
The inversion temperature is the temperature where an adiabatically expanding gas keeps the same tempera-
ture. If T > T
i
the gas heats up, if T < T
i
the gas cools down. T
i
= 2T
B
, with for T
B
: [∂(pV )/∂p]
T
= 0.
The throttle process is e.g. applied in refridgerators.
The Carnotprocess
The system undergoes a reversible cycle with 2 isothemics and 2 adiabatics:
1. Isothermic expansion at T
1
. The system absorbs a heat Q
1
from the reservoir.
2. Adiabatic expansion with a temperature drop to T
2
.
36 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
3. Isothermic compression at T
2
, removing Q
2
from the system.
4. Adiabatic compression to T
1
.
The efficiency for Carnot’s process is:
η = 1 −
[Q
2
[
[Q
1
[
= 1 −
T
2
T
1
:= η
C
The Carnot efficiency η
C
is the maximal efficiency at which a heat machine can operate. If the process is
applied in reverse order and the system performs a work −W the cold factor is given by:
ξ =
[Q
2
[
W
=
[Q
2
[
[Q
1
[ −[Q
2
[
=
T
2
T
1
− T
2
The Stirling process
Stirling’s cycle exists of 2 isothermics and 2 isochorics. The efficiency in the ideal case is the same as for
Carnot’s cycle.
8.7 Maximal work
Consider a system that changes from state 1 into state 2, with the temperature and pressure of the surroundings
given by T
0
and p
0
. The maximum work which can be obtained from this change is, when all processes are
reversible:
1. Closed system: W
max
= (U
1
−U
2
) −T
0
(S
1
−S
2
) +p
0
(V
1
− V
2
).
2. Open system: W
max
= (H
1
−H
2
) −T
0
(S
1
−S
2
) −∆E
kin
−∆E
pot
.
The minimal work needed to attain a certain state is: W
min
= −W
max
.
8.8 Phase transitions
Phase transitions are isothermic and isobaric, so dG = 0. When the phases are indicated by α, β and γ holds:
G
α
m
= G
β
m
and
∆S
m
= S
α
m
−S
β
m
=
r
βα
T
0
where r
βα
is the transition heat of phase β to phase α and T
0
is the transition temperature. The following
holds: r
βα
= r
αβ
and r
βα
= r
γα
−r
γβ
. Further
S
m
=

∂G
m
∂T

p
so G has a twist in the transition point. In a two phase system Clapeyron’s equation is valid:
dp
dT
=
S
α
m
−S
β
m
V
α
m
−V
β
m
=
r
βα
(V
α
m
−V
β
m
)T
For an ideal gas one finds for the vapor line at some distance from the critical point:
p = p
0
e
−r
βα/RT
There exist also phase transitions with r
βα
= 0. For those there will occur only a discontinuity in the second
derivates of G
m
. These second-order transitions appear at organization phenomena.
A phase-change of the 3rd order, so with e.g. [∂
3
G
m
/∂T
3
]
p
non continuous arises e.g. when ferromagnetic
iron changes to the paramagnetic state.
Chapter 8: Thermodynamics 37
8.9 Thermodynamic potential
When the number of particles within a system changes this number becomes a third quantity of state. Because
addition of matter usually takes place at constant p and T, Gis the relevant quantity. If a system exists of more
components this becomes:
dG = −SdT +V dp +
¸
i
µ
i
dn
i
where µ =

∂G
∂n
i

p,T,nj
is called the thermodynamic potential. This is a partial quantity. For V holds:
V =
c
¸
i=1
n
i

∂V
∂n
i

nj,p,T
:=
c
¸
i=1
n
i
V
i
where V
i
is the partial volume of component i. The following holds:
V
m
=
¸
i
x
i
V
i
0 =
¸
i
x
i
dV
i
where x
i
= n
i
/n is the molar fraction of component i. The molar volume of a mixture of two components
can be a concave line in a V -x
2
diagram: the mixing contracts the volume.
The thermodynamic potentials are not independent in a multiple-phase system. It can be derived that
¸
i
n
i

i
= −SdT +V dp, this gives at constant p and T:
¸
i
x
i

i
= 0 (Gibbs-Duhmen).
Each component has as much µ’s as there are phases. The number of free parameters in a system with c
components and p different phases is given by f = c +2 −p.
8.10 Ideal mixtures
For a mixture of n components holds (the index
0
is the value for the pure component):
U
mixture
=
¸
i
n
i
U
0
i
, H
mixture
=
¸
i
n
i
H
0
i
, S
mixture
= n
¸
i
x
i
S
0
i
+∆S
mix
where for ideal gases holds: ∆S
mix
= −nR
¸
i
x
i
ln(x
i
).
For the thermodynamic potentials holds: µ
i
= µ
0
i
+RT ln(x
i
) < µ
0
i
. A mixture of two liquids is rarely ideal:
this is usually only the case for chemically related components or isotopes. In spite of this holds Raoult’s law
for the vapour pressure holds for many binary mixtures: p
i
= x
i
p
0
i
= y
i
p. Here is x
i
the fraction of the ith
component in liquid phase and y
i
the fraction of the ith component in gas phase.
A solution of one component in another gives rise to an increase in the boiling point ∆T
k
and a decrease of
the freezing point ∆T
s
. For x
2
<1 holds:
∆T
k
=
RT
2
k
r
βα
x
2
, ∆T
s
= −
RT
2
s
r
γβ
x
2
with r
βα
the evaporation heat and r
γβ
< 0 the melting heat. For the osmotic pressure Π of a solution holds:
ΠV
0
m1
= x
2
RT.
8.11 Conditions for equilibrium
When a system evolves towards equilibrium the only changes that are possible are those for which holds:
(dS)
U,V
≥ 0 or (dU)
S,V
≤ 0 or (dH)
S,p
≤ 0 or (dF)
T,V
≤ 0 or (dG)
T,p
≤ 0. In equilibrium for each
component holds: µ
α
i
= µ
β
i
= µ
γ
i
.
38 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
8.12 Statistical basis for thermodynamics
The number of possibilities P to distribute N particles on n possible energy levels, each with a g-fold degen-
eracy is called the thermodynamic probability and is given by:
P = N!
¸
i
g
ni
i
n
i
!
The most probable distribution, that with the maximum value for P, is the equilibrium state. When Stirling’s
equation, ln(n!) ≈ nln(n) − n is used, one finds for a discrete system the Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution.
The occupation numbers in equilibrium are then given by:
n
i
=
N
Z
g
i
exp


W
i
kT

The state sum Z is a normalization constant, given by: Z =
¸
i
g
i
exp(−W
i
/kT). For an ideal gas holds:
Z =
V (2πmkT)
3/2
h
3
The entropy can then be defined as: S = k ln(P) . For a system in thermodynamic equilibriumthis becomes:
S =
U
T
+kN ln

Z
N

+kN ≈
U
T
+k ln

Z
N
N!

For an ideal gas, with U =
3
2
kT then holds: S =
5
2
kN +kN ln

V (2πmkT)
3/2
Nh
3

8.13 Application to other systems
Thermodynamics can be applied to other systems than gases and liquids. To do this the term dW = pdV has
to be replaced with the correct work term, like dW
rev
= −Fdl for the stretching of a wire, dW
rev
= −γdA
for the expansion of a soap bubble or dW
rev
= −BdM for a magnetic system.
A rotating, non-charged black hole has a temparature of T = ¯ hc/8πkm. It has an entropy S = Akc
3
/4¯hκ
with A the area of its event horizon. For a Schwarzschild black hole A is given by A = 16πm
2
. Hawkings
area theorem states that dA/dt ≥ 0.
Hence, the lifetime of a black hole ∼ m
3
.
Chapter 9
Transport phenomena
9.1 Mathematical introduction
An important relation is: if X is a quantity of a volume element which travels from position r to r + dr in a
time dt, the total differential dX is then given by:
dX =
∂X
∂x
dx +
∂X
∂y
dy +
∂X
∂z
dz +
∂X
∂t
dt ⇒
dX
dt
=
∂X
∂x
v
x
+
∂X
∂y
v
y
+
∂X
∂z
v
z
+
∂X
∂t
This results in general to:
dX
dt
=
∂X
∂t
+(v ∇)X .
From this follows that also holds:
d
dt

Xd
3
V =

∂t

Xd
3
V +

(X(v n)d
2
A
where the volume V is surrounded by surface A. Some properties of the ∇ operator are:
div(φv ) = φdivv +gradφ v rot(φv ) = φrotv +(gradφ) v rot gradφ =

0
div(u v ) = v (rotu ) −u (rotv ) rot rotv = grad divv −∇
2
v div rotv = 0
div gradφ = ∇
2
φ ∇
2
v ≡ (∇
2
v
1
, ∇
2
v
2
, ∇
2
v
3
)
Here, v is an arbitrary vector field and φ an arbitrary scalar field. Some important integral theorems are:
Gauss:

((v n)d
2
A =

(divv )d
3
V
Stokes for a scalar field:

(φ e
t
)ds =

(n gradφ)d
2
A
Stokes for a vector field:

(v e
t
)ds =

(rotv n)d
2
A
This results in:

((rotv n)d
2
A = 0
Ostrogradsky:

((n v )d
2
A =

(rotv )d
3
A

((φn)d
2
A =

(gradφ)d
3
V
Here, the orientable surface

d
2
A is limited by the Jordan curve

ds.
9.2 Conservation laws
On a volume work two types of forces:
1. The force

f
0
on each volume element. For gravity holds:

f
0
= g.
2. Surface forces working only on the margins:

t. For these holds:

t = n T, where T is the stress tensor.
40 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
T can be split in a part pI representing the normal tensions and a part T

representing the shear stresses:
T = T

+pI, where I is the unit tensor. When viscous aspects can be ignored holds: divT= −gradp.
When the flow velocity is v at position r holds on position r +dr:
v(dr ) = v(r )
....
translation
+ dr (gradv )
. .. .
rotation, deformation, dilatation
The quantity L:=gradv can be split in a symmetric part D and an antisymmetric part W. L = D +W with
D
ij
:=
1
2

∂v
i
∂x
j
+
∂v
j
∂x
i

, W
ij
:=
1
2

∂v
i
∂x
j

∂v
j
∂x
i

When the rotation or vorticity ω = rotv is introduced holds: W
ij
=
1
2
ε
ijk
ω
k
. ω represents the local rotation
velocity:

dr W =
1
2
ω

dr.
For a Newtonian liquid holds: T

= 2ηD. Here, η is the dynamical viscosity. This is related to the shear stress
τ by:
τ
ij
= η
∂v
i
∂x
j
For compressible media can be stated: T

= (η

divv )I + 2ηD. From equating the thermodynamical and
mechanical pressure it follows: 3η

+2η = 0. If the viscosity is constant holds: div(2D) = ∇
2
v +grad divv.
The conservation laws for mass, momentum and energy for continuous media can be written in both integral
and differential form. They are:
Integral notation:
1. Conservation of mass:

∂t

d
3
V +

((v n)d
2
A = 0
2. Conservation of momentum:

∂t

vd
3
V +

(v(v n)d
2
A =

f
0
d
3
V +

(n Td
2
A
3. Conservation of energy:

∂t

(
1
2
v
2
+e)d
3
V +

((
1
2
v
2
+e)(v n)d
2
A =

((q n)d
2
A +

(v

f
0
)d
3
V +

((v n T)d
2
A
Differential notation:
1. Conservation of mass:

∂t
+div (v ) = 0
2. Conservation of momentum:
∂v
∂t
+(v ∇)v =

f
0
+divT =

f
0
−gradp +divT

3. Conservation of energy: T
ds
dt
=
de
dt

p

d
dt
= −divq +T

: D
Here, e is the internal energy per unit of mass E/m and s is the entropy per unit of mass S/m. q = −κ

∇T is
the heat flow. Further holds:
p = −
∂E
∂V
= −
∂e
∂1/
, T =
∂E
∂S
=
∂e
∂s
so
C
V
=

∂e
∂T

V
and C
p
=

∂h
∂T

p
with h = H/m the enthalpy per unit of mass.
Chapter 9: Transport phenomena 41
From this one can derive the Navier-Stokes equations for an incompressible, viscous and heat-conducting
medium:
divv = 0

∂v
∂t
+(v ∇)v = g −gradp +η∇
2
v
C
∂T
∂t
+C(v ∇)T = κ∇
2
T +2ηD : D
with C the thermal heat capacity. The force

F on an object within a flow, when viscous effects are limited to
the boundary layer, can be obtained using the momentum law. If a surface A surrounds the object outside the
boundary layer holds:

F = −

([pn +v(v n)]d
2
A
9.3 Bernoulli’s equations
Starting with the momentum equation one can find for a non-viscous medium for stationary flows, with
(v grad)v =
1
2
grad(v
2
) +(rotv ) v
and the potential equation g = −grad(gh) that:
1
2
v
2
+gh +

dp

= constant along a streamline
For compressible flows holds:
1
2
v
2
+ gh + p/ =constant along a line of flow. If also holds rotv = 0 and
the entropy is equal on each streamline holds
1
2
v
2
+ gh +

dp/ =constant everywhere. For incompressible
flows this becomes:
1
2
v
2
+ gh + p/ =constant everywhere. For ideal gases with constant C
p
and C
V
holds,
with γ = C
p
/C
V
:
1
2
v
2
+
γ
γ −1
p

=
1
2
v
2
+
c
2
γ −1
= constant
With a velocity potential defined by v = gradφ holds for instationary flows:
∂φ
∂t
+
1
2
v
2
+gh +

dp

= constant everywhere
9.4 Characterising of flows by dimensionless numbers
The advantage of dimensionless numbers is that they make model experiments possible: one has to make
the dimensionless numbers which are important for the specific experiment equal for both model and the
real situation. One can also deduce functional equalities without solving the differential equations. Some
dimensionless numbers are given by:
Strouhal: Sr =
ωL
v
Froude: Fr =
v
2
gL
Mach: Ma =
v
c
Fourier: Fo =
a
ωL
2
P´ eclet: Pe =
vL
a
Reynolds: Re =
vL
ν
Prandtl: Pr =
ν
a
Nusselt: Nu =

κ
Eckert: Ec =
v
2
c∆T
Here, ν = η/ is the kinematic viscosity, c is the speed of sound and L is a characteristic length of the system.
α follows fromthe equation for heat transport κ∂
y
T = α∆T and a = κ/c is the thermal diffusion coefficient.
These numbers can be interpreted as follows:
• Re: (stationary inertial forces)/(viscous forces)
42 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
• Sr: (non-stationary inertial forces)/(stationary inertial forces)
• Fr: (stationary inertial forces)/(gravity)
• Fo: (heat conductance)/(non-stationary change in enthalpy)
• Pe: (convective heat transport)/(heat conductance)
• Ec: (viscous dissipation)/(convective heat transport)
• Ma: (velocity)/(speed of sound): objects moving faster than approximately Ma = 0,8 produce shock-
waves which propagate with an angle θ with the velocity of the object. For this angle holds Ma=
1/ arctan(θ).
• Pr and Nu are related to specific materials.
Now, the dimensionless Navier-Stokes equation becomes, with x

= x/L, v

= v/V , grad

= Lgrad, ∇
2
=
L
2

2
and t

= tω:
Sr
∂v

∂t

+(v

)v

= −grad

p +
g
Fr
+

2
v

Re
9.5 Tube flows
For tube flows holds: they are laminar if Re< 2300 with dimension of length the diameter of the tube, and
turbulent if Re is larger. For an incompressible laminar flow through a straight, circular tube holds for the
velocity profile:
v(r) = −
1

dp
dx
(R
2
−r
2
)
For the volume flow holds: Φ
V
=
R

0
v(r)2πrdr = −
π

dp
dx
R
4
The entrance length L
e
is given by:
1. 500 < Re
D
< 2300: L
e
/2R = 0.056Re
D
2. Re > 2300: L
e
/2R ≈ 50
For gas transport at low pressures (Knudsen-gas) holds: Φ
V
=
4R
3
α

π
3
dp
dx
For flows at a small Re holds: ∇p = η∇
2
v and divv = 0. For the total force on a sphere with radius R in a
flow then holds: F = 6πηRv. For large Re holds for the force on a surface A: F =
1
2
C
W
Av
2
.
9.6 Potential theory
The circulation Γ is defined as: Γ =

(v e
t
)ds =

(rotv ) nd
2
A =

(ω n)d
2
A
For non viscous media, if p = p() and all forces are conservative, Kelvin’s theorem can be derived:

dt
= 0
For rotationless flows a velocity potential v = gradφ can be introduced. In the incompressible case follows
from conservation of mass ∇
2
φ = 0. For a 2-dimensional flow a flow function ψ(x, y) can be defined: with
Φ
AB
the amount of liquid flowing through a curve s between the points A and B:
Φ
AB
=
B

A
(v n)ds =
B

A
(v
x
dy −v
y
dx)
Chapter 9: Transport phenomena 43
and the definitions v
x
= ∂ψ/∂y, v
y
= −∂ψ/∂x holds: Φ
AB
= ψ(B) −ψ(A). In general holds:

2
ψ
∂x
2
+

2
ψ
∂y
2
= −ω
z
In polar coordinates holds:
v
r
=
1
r
∂ψ
∂θ
=
∂φ
∂r
, v
θ
= −
∂ψ
∂r
=
1
r
∂φ
∂θ
For source flows with power Q in (x, y) = (0, 0) holds: φ =
Q

ln(r) so that v
r
= Q/2πr, v
θ
= 0.
For a dipole of strength Qin x = a and strength −Qin x = −a follows fromsuperposition: φ = −Qax/2πr
2
where Qa is the dipole strength. For a vortex holds: φ = Γθ/2π.
If an object is surrounded by an uniform main flow with v = ve
x
and such a large Re that viscous effects are
limited to the boundary layer holds: F
x
= 0 and F
y
= −Γv. The statement that F
x
= 0 is d’Alembert’s
paradox and originates from the neglection of viscous effects. The lift F
y
is also created by η because Γ = 0
due to viscous effects. Henxe rotating bodies also create a force perpendicular to their direction of motion: the
Magnus effect.
9.7 Boundary layers
9.7.1 Flow boundary layers
If for the thickness of the boundary layer holds: δ <L holds: δ ≈ L/

Re. With v

the velocity of the main
flow it follows for the velocity v
y
⊥ the surface: v
y
L ≈ δv

. Blasius’ equation for the boundary layer is,
with v
y
/v

= f(y/δ): 2f

+ff

= 0 with boundary conditions f(0) = f

(0) = 0, f

(∞) = 1. From this
follows: C
W
= 0.664 Re
−1/2
x
.
The momentum theorem of Von Karman for the boundary layer is:
d
dx
(ϑv
2
) +δ

v
dv
dx
=
τ
0

where the displacement thickness δ

v and the momentum thickness ϑv
2
are given by:
ϑv
2
=

0
(v −v
x
)v
x
dy , δ

v =

0
(v −v
x
)dy and τ
0
= −η
∂v
x
∂y

y=0
The boundary layer is released from the surface if

∂v
x
∂y

y=0
= 0. This is equivalent with
dp
dx
=
12ηv

δ
2
.
9.7.2 Temperature boundary layers
If the thickness of the temperature boundary layer δ
T
<L holds: 1. If Pr ≤ 1: δ/δ
T


Pr.
2. If Pr 1: δ/δ
T

3

Pr.
9.8 Heat conductance
For non-stationairy heat conductance in one dimension without flow holds:
∂T
∂t
=
κ
c

2
T
∂x
2

where Φ is a source term. If Φ = 0 the solutions for harmonic oscillations at x = 0 are:
T −T

T
max
−T

= exp


x
D

cos

ωt −
x
D

44 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
with D =

2κ/ωc. At x = πD the temperature variation is in anti-phase with the surface. The one-
dimensional solution at Φ = 0 is
T(x, t) =
1
2

πat
exp


x
2
4at

This is mathematical equivalent to the diffusion problem:
∂n
∂t
= D∇
2
n +P −A
where P is the production of and A the discharge of particles. The flow density J = −D∇n.
9.9 Turbulence
The time scale of turbulent velocity variations τ
t
is of the order of: τ
t
= τ

Re/Ma
2
with τ the molecular
time scale. For the velocity of the particles holds: v(t) = 'v` + v

(t) with 'v

(t)` = 0. The Navier-Stokes
equation now becomes:
∂ 'v `
∂t
+('v ` ∇) 'v ` = −
∇'p`

+ν∇
2
'v ` +
divS
R

where S
Rij
= − 'v
i
v
j
` is the turbulent stress tensor. Boussinesq’s assumption is: τ
ij
= −

v

i
v

j

. It is
stated that, analogous to Newtonian media: S
R
= 2ν
t
'D`. Near a boundary holds: ν
t
= 0, far away of a
boundary holds: ν
t
≈ νRe.
9.10 Self organization
For a (semi) two-dimensional flow holds:

dt
=
∂ω
∂t
+J(ω, ψ) = ν∇
2
ω
With J(ω, ψ) the Jacobian. So if ν = 0, ω is conserved. Further, the kinetic energy/mA and the enstrofy V
are conserved: with v = ∇(

kψ)
E ∼ (∇ψ)
2

0
c(k, t)dk = constant , V ∼ (∇
2
ψ)
2

0
k
2
c(k, t)dk = constant
From this follows that in a two-dimensional flow the energy flux goes towards large values of k: larger struc-
tures become larger at the expanse of smaller ones. In three-dimensional flows the situation is just the opposite.
Chapter 10
Quantum physics
10.1 Introduction to quantum physics
10.1.1 Black body radiation
Planck’s law for the energy distribution for the radiation of a black body is:
w(f) =
8πhf
3
c
3
1
e
hf/kT
−1
, w(λ) =
8πhc
λ
5
1
e
hc/λkT
−1
Stefan-Boltzmann’s law for the total power density can be derived from this: P = AσT
4
. Wien’s law for the
maximum can also be derived from this: Tλ
max
= k
W
.
10.1.2 The Compton effect
For the wavelength of scattered light, if light is considered to exist of particles, can be derived:
λ

= λ +
h
mc
(1 −cos θ) = λ +λ
C
(1 −cos θ)
10.1.3 Electron diffraction
Diffraction of electrons at a crystal can be explained by assuming that particles have a wave character with
wavelength λ = h/p. This wavelength is called the Broglie-wavelength.
10.2 Wave functions
The wave character of particles is described by a wavefunction ψ. This wavefunction can be described in
normal or momentum space. Both definitions are each others Fourier transform:
Φ(k, t) =
1

h

Ψ(x, t)e
−ikx
dx and Ψ(x, t) =
1

h

Φ(k, t)e
ikx
dk
These waves define a particle with group velocity v
g
= p/m and energy E = ¯ hω.
The wavefunction can be interpreted as a measure for the probability P to find a particle somewhere (Born):
dP = [ψ[
2
d
3
V . The expectation value 'f` of a quantity f of a system is given by:
'f(t)` =

Ψ

fΨd
3
V , 'f
p
(t)` =

Φ

fΦd
3
V
p
This is also written as 'f(t)` = 'Φ[f[Φ`. The normalizing condition for wavefunctions follows from this:
'Φ[Φ` = 'Ψ[Ψ` = 1.
10.3 Operators in quantum physics
In quantummechanics, classical quantities are translated into operators. These operators are hermitian because
their eigenvalues must be real:

ψ

1

2
d
3
V =

ψ
2
(Aψ
1
)

d
3
V
46 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
When u
n
is the eigenfunction of the eigenvalue equation AΨ = aΨfor eigenvalue a
n
, Ψ can be expanded into
a basis of eigenfunctions: Ψ =
¸
n
c
n
u
n
. If this basis is taken orthonormal, then follows for the coefficients:
c
n
= 'u
n
[Ψ`. If the system is in a state described by Ψ, the chance to find eigenvalue a
n
when measuring A is
given by [c
n
[
2
in the discrete part of the spectrum and [c
n
[
2
da in the continuous part of the spectrum between
a and a + da. The matrix element A
ij
is given by: A
ij
= 'u
i
[A[u
j
`. Because (AB)
ij
= 'u
i
[AB[u
j
` =
'u
i
[A
¸
n
[u
n
` 'u
n
[B[u
j
` holds:
¸
n
[u
n
`'u
n
[ = 1.
The time-dependence of an operator is given by (Heisenberg):
dA
dt
=
∂A
∂t
+
[A, H]
i¯h
with [A, B] ≡ AB − BA the commutator of A and B. For hermitian operators the commutator is always
complex. If [A, B] = 0, the operators A and B have a common set of eigenfunctions. By applying this to p
x
and x follows (Ehrenfest): md
2
'x`
t
/dt
2
= −'dU(x)/dx`.
The first order approximation 'F(x)`
t
≈ F('x`), with F = −dU/dx represents the classical equation.
Before the addition of quantummechanical operators which are a product of other operators, they should be
made symmetrical: a classical product AB becomes
1
2
(AB +BA).
10.4 The uncertainty principle
If the uncertainty ∆A in A is defined as: (∆A)
2
=

ψ[A
op
−'A` [
2
ψ

=

A
2

−'A`
2
it follows:
∆A ∆B ≥
1
2
[ 'ψ[[A, B][ψ` [
From this follows: ∆E ∆t ≥
1
2
¯h, and because [x, p
x
] = i¯h holds: ∆p
x
∆x ≥
1
2
¯h, and ∆L
x
∆L
y

1
2
¯hL
z
.
10.5 The Schr¨ odinger equation
The momentum operator is given by: p
op
= −i¯h∇. The position operator is: x
op
= i¯h∇
p
. The energy
operator is given by: E
op
= i¯h∂/∂t. The Hamiltonian of a particle with mass m, potential energy U and total
energy E is given by: H = p
2
/2m+U. From Hψ = Eψ then follows the Schr ¨ odinger equation:

¯h
2
2m

2
ψ +Uψ = Eψ = i¯h
∂ψ
∂t
The linear combination of the solutions of this equation give the general solution. In one dimension it is:
ψ(x, t) =

¸
+

dE

c(E)u
E
(x) exp


iEt
¯h

The current density J is given by: J =
¯h
2im


∇ψ −ψ∇ψ

)
The following conservation law holds:
∂P(x, t)
∂t
= −∇J(x, t)
10.6 Parity
The parity operator in one dimension is given by {ψ(x) = ψ(−x). If the wavefunction is split in even and
odd functions, it can be expanded into eigenfunctions of {:
ψ(x) =
1
2
(ψ(x) +ψ(−x))
. .. .
even: ψ
+
+
1
2
(ψ(x) −ψ(−x))
. .. .
odd: ψ

[{, H] = 0. The functions ψ
+
=
1
2
(1 + {)ψ(x, t) and ψ

=
1
2
(1 − {)ψ(x, t) both satisfy the Schr¨ odinger
equation. Hence, parity is a conserved quantity.
Chapter 10: Quantum physics 47
10.7 The tunnel effect
The wavefunction of a particle in an ∞ high potential step from x = 0 to x = a is given by ψ(x) =
a
−1/2
sin(kx). The energylevels are given by E
n
= n
2
h
2
/8a
2
m.
If the wavefunction with energy W meets a potential well of W
0
> W the wavefunction will, unlike the
classical case, be non-zero within the potential well. If 1, 2 and 3 are the areas in front, within and behind the
potential well, holds:
ψ
1
= Ae
ikx
+Be
−ikx
, ψ
2
= Ce
ik

x
+De
−ik

x
, ψ
3
= A

e
ikx
with k
2
= 2m(W − W
0
)/¯h
2
and k
2
= 2mW. Using the boundary conditions requiring continuity: ψ =
continuous and ∂ψ/∂x =continuous at x = 0 and x = a gives B, C and D and A

expressed in A. The
amplitude T of the transmitted wave is defined by T = [A

[
2
/[A[
2
. If W > W
0
and 2a = nλ

= 2πn/k

holds: T = 1.
10.8 The harmonic oscillator
For a harmonic oscillator holds: U =
1
2
bx
2
and ω
2
0
= b/m. The Hamiltonian H is then given by:
H =
p
2
2m
+
1
2

2
x
2
=
1
2
¯hω +ωA

A
with
A =

1
2
mωx +
ip

2mω
and A

=

1
2
mωx −
ip

2mω
A = A

is non hermitian. [A, A

] = ¯ h and [A, H] = ¯ hωA. A is a so called raising ladder operator, A

a
lowering ladder operator. HAu
E
= (E −¯hω)Au
E
. There is an eigenfunction u
0
for which holds: Au
0
= 0.
The energy in this ground state is
1
2
¯hω: the zero point energy. For the normalized eigenfunctions follows:
u
n
=
1

n!

A


¯h

n
u
0
with u
0
=
4


π¯h
exp


mωx
2
2¯h

with E
n
= (
1
2
+n)¯ hω.
10.9 Angular momentum
For the angular momentum operators L holds: [L
z
, L
2
] = [L
z
, H] = [L
2
, H] = 0. However, cyclically holds:
[L
x
, L
y
] = i¯hL
z
. Not all components of L can be known at the same time with arbitrary accuracy. For L
z
holds:
L
z
= −i¯h

∂ϕ
= −i¯h

x

∂y
−y

∂x

The ladder operators L
±
are defined by: L
±
= L
x
±iL
y
. Now holds: L
2
= L
+
L

+ L
2
z
−¯hL
z
. Further,
L
±
= ¯ he
±iϕ

±

∂θ
+i cot(θ)

∂ϕ

From [L
+
, L
z
] = −¯hL
+
follows: L
z
(L
+
Y
lm
) = (m+1)¯ h(L
+
Y
lm
).
From [L

, L
z
] = ¯ hL

follows: L
z
(L

Y
lm
) = (m−1)¯ h(L

Y
lm
).
From [L
2
, L
±
] = 0 follows: L
2
(L
±
Y
lm
) = l(l +1)¯ h
2
(L
±
Y
lm
).
Because L
x
and L
y
are hermitian (this implies L

±
= L

) and [L
±
Y
lm
[
2
> 0 follows: l(l +1) − m
2
−m ≥
0 ⇒ −l ≤ m ≤ l. Further follows that l has to be integral or half-integral. Half-odd integral values give no
unique solution ψ and are therefore dismissed.
48 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
10.10 Spin
For the spin operators are defined by their commutation relations: [S
x
, S
y
] = i¯hS
z
. Because the spin operators
do not act in the physical space (x, y, z) the uniqueness of the wavefunction is not a criterium here: also half
odd-integer values are allowed for the spin. Because [L, S] = 0 spin and angular momentum operators do not
have a common set of eigenfunctions. The spin operators are given by

S =
1
2
¯h

σ, with

σ
x
=

0 1
1 0

,

σ
y
=

0 −i
i 0

,

σ
z
=

1 0
0 −1

The eigenstates of S
z
are called spinors: χ = α
+
χ
+
+ α

χ

, where χ
+
= (1, 0) represents the state with
spin up (S
z
=
1
2
¯h) and χ

= (0, 1) represents the state with spin down (S
z
= −
1
2
¯h). Then the probability
to find spin up after a measurement is given by [α
+
[
2
and the chance to find spin down is given by [α

[
2
. Of
course holds [α
+
[
2
+[α

[
2
= 1.
The electron will have an intrinsic magnetic dipole moment

M due to its spin, given by

M = −eg
S

S/2m,
with g
S
= 2(1 +α/2π + ) the gyromagnetic ratio. In the presence of an external magnetic field this gives
a potential energy U = −

M

B. The Schr¨ odinger equation then becomes (because ∂χ/∂x
i
≡ 0):
i¯h
∂χ(t)
∂t
=
eg
S
¯h
4m
σ

Bχ(t)
with σ = (

σ
x
,

σ
y
,

σ
z
). If

B = Be
z
there are two eigenvalues for this problem: χ
±
for E = ±eg
S
¯hB/4m =
±¯hω. So the general solution is given by χ = (ae
−iωt
, be
iωt
). From this can be derived: 'S
x
` =
1
2
¯hcos(2ωt)
and 'S
y
` =
1
2
¯hsin(2ωt). Thus the spin precesses about the z-axis with frequency 2ω. This causes the normal
Zeeman splitting of spectral lines.
The potential operator for two particles with spin ±
1
2
¯h is given by:
V (r) = V
1
(r) +
1
¯h
2
(

S
1

S
2
)V
2
(r) = V
1
(r) +
1
2
V
2
(r)[S(S +1) −
3
2
]
This makes it possible for two states to exist: S = 1 (triplet) or S = 0 (Singlet).
10.11 The Dirac formalism
If the operators for p and E are substituted in the relativistic equation E
2
= m
2
0
c
4
+ p
2
c
2
, the Klein-Gordon
equation is found:


2

1
c
2

2
∂t
2

m
2
0
c
2
¯h
2

ψ(x, t) = 0
The operator ✷ −m
2
0
c
2
/¯h
2
can be separated:

2

1
c
2

2
∂t
2

m
2
0
c
2
¯h
2
=

γ
λ

∂x
λ

m
0
c
¯h

γ
µ

∂x
µ
+
m
0
c
¯h

where the Dirac matrices γ are given by: ¦γ
λ
, γ
µ
¦ = γ
λ
γ
µ

µ
γ
λ
= 2δ
λµ
(In general relativity this becomes
2g
λµ
). From this it can be derived that the γ are hermitian 4 4 matrices given by:
γ
k
=

0 −iσ
k

k
0

, γ
4
=

I 0
0 −I

With this, the Dirac equation becomes:

γ
λ

∂x
λ
+
m
0
c
¯h

ψ(x, t) = 0
where ψ(x) = (ψ
1
(x), ψ
2
(x), ψ
3
(x), ψ
4
(x)) is a spinor.
Chapter 10: Quantum physics 49
10.12 Atomic physics
10.12.1 Solutions
The solutions of the Schr¨ odinger equation in spherical coordinates if the potential energy is a function of r
alone can be written as: ψ(r, θ, ϕ) = R
nl
(r)Y
l,m
l
(θ, ϕ)χ
ms
, with
Y
lm
=
C
lm


P
m
l
(cos θ)e
imϕ
For an atom or ion with one electron holds: R
lm
(ρ) = C
lm
e
−ρ/2
ρ
l
L
2l+1
n−l−1
(ρ)
with ρ = 2rZ/na
0
with a
0
= ε
0
h
2
/πm
e
e
2
. The L
j
i
are the associated Laguere functions and the P
m
l
are the
associated Legendre polynomials:
P
|m|
l
(x) = (1 −x
2
)
m/2
d
|m|
dx
|m|

(x
2
−1)
l

, L
m
n
(x) =
(−1)
m
n!
(n −m)!
e
−x
x
−m
d
n−m
dx
n−m
(e
−x
x
n
)
The parity of these solutions is (−1)
l
. The functions are 2
n−1
¸
l=0
(2l +1) = 2n
2
-folded degenerated.
10.12.2 Eigenvalue equations
The eigenvalue equations for an atom or ion with with one electron are:
Equation Eigenvalue Range
H
op
ψ = Eψ E
n
= µe
4
Z
2
/8ε
2
0
h
2
n
2
n ≥ 1
L
zop
Y
lm
= L
z
Y
lm
L
z
= m
l
¯h −l ≤ m
l
≤ l
L
2
op
Y
lm
= L
2
Y
lm
L
2
= l(l +1)¯ h
2
l < n
S
zop
χ = S
z
χ S
z
= m
s
¯h m
s
= ±
1
2
S
2
op
χ = S
2
χ S
2
= s(s +1)¯ h
2
s =
1
2
10.12.3 Spin-orbit interaction
The total momentum is given by

J =

L +

M. The total magnetic dipole moment of an electron is then

M =

M
L
+

M
S
= −(e/2m
e
)(

L + g
S

S) where g
S
= 2.0023 is the gyromagnetic ratio of the electron.
Further holds: J
2
= L
2
+ S
2
+ 2

L

S = L
2
+ S
2
+ 2L
z
S
z
+ L
+
S

+ L

S
+
. J has quantum numbers j
with possible values j = l ±
1
2
, with 2j +1 possible z-components (m
J
∈ ¦−j, .., 0, .., j¦). If the interaction
energy between S and L is small it can be stated that: E = E
n
+E
SL
= E
n
+a

S

L. It can then be derived
that:
a =
[E
n
[Z
2
α
2
¯h
2
nl(l +1)(l +
1
2
)
After a relativistic correction this becomes:
E = E
n
+
[E
n
[Z
2
α
2
n

3
4n

1
j +
1
2

The fine structure in atomic spectra arises from this. With g
S
= 2 follows for the average magnetic moment:

M
av
= −(e/2m
e
)g¯h

J, where g is the Land´ e-factor:
g = 1 +

S

J
J
2
= 1 +
j(j +1) +s(s +1) −l(l +1)
2j(j +1)
For atoms with more than one electron the following limiting situations occur:
50 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
1. L − S coupling: for small atoms the electrostatic interaction is dominant and the state can be char-
acterized by L, S, J, m
J
. J ∈ ¦[L − S[, ..., L + S − 1, L + S¦ and m
J
∈ ¦−J, ..., J − 1, J¦. The
spectroscopic notation for this interaction is:
2S+1
L
J
. 2S +1 is the multiplicity of a multiplet.
2. j − j coupling: for larger atoms the electrostatic interaction is smaller than the L
i
s
i
interaction of
an electron. The state is characterized by j
i
...j
n
, J, m
J
where only the j
i
of the not completely filled
subshells are to be taken into account.
The energy difference for larger atoms when placed in a magnetic field is: ∆E = gµ
B
m
J
B where g is the
Land´ e factor. For a transition between two singlet states the line splits in 3 parts, for ∆m
J
= −1, 0 + 1. This
results in the normal Zeeman effect. At higher S the line splits up in more parts: the anomalous Zeeman effect.
Interaction with the spin of the nucleus gives the hyperfine structure.
10.12.4 Selection rules
For the dipole transition matrix elements follows: p
0
∼ ['l
2
m
2
[

E r [l
1
m
1
`[. Conservation of angular mo-
mentum demands that for the transition of an electron holds that ∆l = ±1.
For an atom where L − S coupling is dominant further holds: ∆S = 0 (but not strict), ∆L = 0, ±1, ∆J =
0, ±1 except for J = 0 →J = 0 transitions, ∆m
J
= 0, ±1, but ∆m
J
= 0 is forbidden if ∆J = 0.
For an atom where j −j coupling is dominant further holds: for the jumping electron holds, except ∆l = ±1,
also: ∆j = 0, ±1, and for all other electrons: ∆j = 0. For the total atom holds: ∆J = 0, ±1 but no
J = 0 →J = 0 transitions and ∆m
J
= 0, ±1, but ∆m
J
= 0 is forbidden if ∆J = 0.
10.13 Interaction with electromagnetic fields
The Hamiltonian of an electron in an electromagnetic field is given by:
H =
1

( p +e

A)
2
−eV = −
¯h
2


2
+
e

B

L +
e
2

A
2
−eV
where µ is the reduced mass of the system. The term ∼ A
2
can usually be neglected, except for very strong
fields or macroscopic motions. For

B = Be
z
it is given by e
2
B
2
(x
2
+y
2
)/8µ.
When a gauge transformation

A

=

A − ∇f, V

= V + ∂f/∂t is applied to the potentials the wavefunction
is also transformed according to ψ

= ψe
iqef/¯ h
with qe the charge of the particle. Because f = f(x, t), this
is called a local gauge transformation, in contrast with a global gauge transformation which can always be
applied.
10.14 Perturbation theory
10.14.1 Time-independent perturbation theory
To solve the equation (H
0
+λH
1

n
= E
n
ψ
n
one has to find the eigenfunctions of H = H
0
+λH
1
. Suppose
that φ
n
is a complete set of eigenfunctions of the non-perturbed Hamiltonian H
0
: H
0
φ
n
= E
0
n
φ
n
. Because
φ
n
is a complete set holds:
ψ
n
= N(λ)

φ
n
+
¸
k=n
c
nk
(λ)φ
k

When c
nk
and E
n
are being expanded into λ: c
nk
= λc
(1)
nk

2
c
(2)
nk
+
E
n
= E
0
n
+λE
(1)
n

2
E
(2)
n
+
Chapter 10: Quantum physics 51
and this is put into the Schr¨ odinger equation the result is: E
(1)
n
= 'φ
n
[H
1

n
` and
c
(1)
nm
=

m
[H
1

n
`
E
0
n
− E
0
m
if m = n. The second-order correction of the energy is then given by:
E
(2)
n
=
¸
k=n
[ 'φ
k
[H
1

n
` [
2
E
0
n
−E
0
k
. So to first order holds: ψ
n
= φ
n
+
¸
k=n

k
[λH
1

n
`
E
0
n
−E
0
k
φ
k
.
In case the levels are degenerated the above does not hold. In that case an orthonormal set eigenfunctions φ
ni
is chosen for each level n, so that 'φ
mi

nj
` = δ
mn
δ
ij
. Now ψ is expanded as:
ψ
n
= N(λ)

¸
i
α
i
φ
ni

¸
k=n
c
(1)
nk
¸
i
β
i
φ
ki
+

E
ni
= E
0
ni
+ λE
(1)
ni
is approximated by E
0
ni
:= E
0
n
. Substitution in the Schr¨ odinger equation and taking dot
product with φ
ni
gives:
¸
i
α
i

nj
[H
1

ni
` = E
(1)
n
α
j
. Normalization requires that
¸
i

i
[
2
= 1.
10.14.2 Time-dependent perturbation theory
From the Schr¨ odinger equation i¯h
∂ψ(t)
∂t
= (H
0
+λV (t))ψ(t)
and the expansion ψ(t) =
¸
n
c
n
(t) exp

−iE
0
n
t
¯h

φ
n
with c
n
(t) = δ
nk
+λc
(1)
n
(t) +
follows: c
(1)
n
(t) =
λ
i¯h
t

0

n
[V (t

)[φ
k
` exp

i(E
0
n
−E
0
k
)t

¯h

dt

10.15 N-particle systems
10.15.1 General
Identical particles are indistinguishable. For the total wavefunction of a system of identical indistinguishable
particles holds:
1. Particles with a half-odd integer spin (Fermions): ψ
total
must be antisymmetric w.r.t. interchange of
the coordinates (spatial and spin) of each pair of particles. The Pauli principle results from this: two
Fermions cannot exist in an identical state because then ψ
total
= 0.
2. Particles with an integer spin (Bosons): ψ
total
must be symmetric w.r.t. interchange of the coordinates
(spatial and spin) of each pair of particles.
For a system of two electrons there are 2 possibilities for the spatial wavefunction. When a and b are the
quantum numbers of electron 1 and 2 holds:
ψ
S
(1, 2) = ψ
a
(1)ψ
b
(2) +ψ
a
(2)ψ
b
(1) , ψ
A
(1, 2) = ψ
a
(1)ψ
b
(2) −ψ
a
(2)ψ
b
(1)
Because the particles do not approach each other closely the repulsion energy at ψ
A
in this state is smaller.
The following spin wavefunctions are possible:
χ
A
=
1
2

2[χ
+
(1)χ

(2) −χ
+
(2)χ

(1)] m
s
= 0
χ
S
=

χ
+
(1)χ
+
(2) m
s
= +1
1
2

2[χ
+
(1)χ

(2) +χ
+
(2)χ

(1)] m
s
= 0
χ

(1)χ

(2) m
s
= −1
Because the total wavefunction must be antisymmetric it follows: ψ
total
= ψ
S
χ
A
or ψ
total
= ψ
A
χ
S
.
52 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
For N particles the symmetric spatial function is given by:
ψ
S
(1, ..., N) =
¸
ψ(all permutations of 1..N)
The antisymmetric wavefunction is given by the determinant ψ
A
(1, ..., N) =
1

N!
[u
Ei
(j)[
10.15.2 Molecules
The wavefunctions of atoma and b are φ
a
and φ
b
. If the 2 atoms approach each other there are two possibilities:
the total wavefunction approaches the bonding function with lower total energy ψ
B
=
1
2

2(φ
a
+ φ
b
) or
approaches the anti-bonding function with higher energy ψ
AB
=
1
2

2(φ
a
− φ
b
). If a molecular-orbital is
symmetric w.r.t. the connecting axis, like a combination of two s-orbitals it is called a σ-orbital, otherwise a
π-orbital, like the combination of two p-orbitals along two axes.
The energy of a system is: E =
'ψ[H[ψ`
'ψ[ψ`
.
The energy calculated with this method is always higher than the real energy if ψ is only an approximation for
the solutions of Hψ = Eψ. Also, if there are more functions to be chosen, the function which gives the lowest
energy is the best approximation. Applying this to the function ψ =
¸
c
i
φ
i
one finds: (H
ij
− ES
ij
)c
i
= 0.
This equation has only solutions if the secular determinant [H
ij
− ES
ij
[ = 0. Here, H
ij
= 'φ
i
[H[φ
j
` and
S
ij
= 'φ
i

j
`. α
i
:= H
ii
is the Coulomb integral and β
ij
:= H
ij
the exchange integral. S
ii
= 1 and S
ij
is
the overlap integral.
The first approximation in the molecular-orbital theory is to place both electrons of a chemical bond in the
bonding orbital: ψ(1, 2) = ψ
B
(1)ψ
B
(2). This results in a large electron density between the nuclei and
therefore a repulsion. A better approximation is: ψ(1, 2) = C
1
ψ
B
(1)ψ
B
(2)+C
2
ψ
AB
(1)ψ
AB
(2), with C
1
= 1
and C
2
≈ 0.6.
In some atoms, such as C, it is energetical more suitable to form orbitals which are a linear combination of the
s, p and d states. There are three ways of hybridization in C:
1. SP-hybridization: ψ
sp
=
1
2

2(ψ
2s
± ψ
2p
z
). There are 2 hybrid orbitals which are placed on one line
under 180

. Further the 2p
x
and 2p
y
orbitals remain.
2. SP
2
hybridization: ψ
sp
2 = ψ
2s
/

3 +c
1
ψ
2p
z
+c
2
ψ
2p
y
, where (c
1
, c
2
) ∈ ¦(

2/3, 0), (−1/

6, 1/

2)
, (−1/

6, −1/

2)¦. The 3 SP
2
orbitals lay in one plane, with symmetry axes which are at an angle of
120

.
3. SP
3
hybridization: ψ
sp
3 =
1
2

2s
±ψ
2p
z
±ψ
2p
y
±ψ
2p
x
). The 4 SP
3
orbitals form a tetraheder with the
symmetry axes at an angle of 109

28

.
10.16 Quantum statistics
If a system exists in a state in which one has not the disposal of the maximal amount of information about the
system, it can be described by a density matrix ρ. If the probability that the system is in state ψ
i
is given by a
i
,
one can write for the expectation value a of A: 'a` =
¸
i
r
i

i
[A[ψ
i
`.
If ψ is expanded into an orthonormal basis ¦φ
k
¦ as: ψ
(i)
=
¸
k
c
(i)
k
φ
k
, holds:
'A` =
¸
k
(Aρ)
kk
= Tr(Aρ)
where ρ
lk
= c

k
c
l
. ρ is hermitian, with Tr(ρ) = 1. Further holds ρ =
¸
r
i

i
`'ψ
i
[. The probability to find
eigenvalue a
n
when measuring A is given by ρ
nn
if one uses a basis of eigenvectors of A for ¦φ
k
¦. For the
time-dependence holds (in the Schr¨ odinger image operators are not explicitly time-dependent):
i¯h

dt
= [H, ρ]
Chapter 10: Quantum physics 53
For a macroscopic system in equilibrium holds [H, ρ] = 0. If all quantumstates with the same energy are
equally probable: P
i
= P(E
i
), one can obtain the distribution:
P
n
(E) = ρ
nn
=
e
−En/kT
Z
with the state sum Z =
¸
n
e
−En/kT
The thermodynamic quantities are related to these definitions as follows: F = −kT ln(Z), U = 'H` =
¸
n
p
n
E
n
= −

∂kT
ln(Z), S = −k
¸
n
P
n
ln(P
n
). For a mixed state of M orthonormal quantum states with
probability 1/M follows: S = k ln(M).
The distribution function for the internal states for a system in thermal equilibrium is the most probable func-
tion. This function can be found by taking the maximum of the function which gives the number of states with
Stirling’s equation: ln(n!) ≈ nln(n) − n, and the conditions
¸
k
n
k
= N and
¸
k
n
k
W
k
= W. For identical,
indistinguishable particles which obey the Pauli exclusion principle the possible number of states is given by:
P =
¸
k
g
k
!
n
k
!(g
k
−n
k
)!
This results in the Fermi-Dirac statistics. For indistinguishable particles which do not obey the exclusion
principle the possible number of states is given by:
P = N!
¸
k
g
n
k
k
n
k
!
This results in the Bose-Einstein statistics. So the distribution functions which explain how particles are
distributed over the different one-particle states k which are each g
k
-fold degenerate depend on the spin of the
particles. They are given by:
1. Fermi-Dirac statistics: integer spin. n
k
∈ ¦0, 1¦, n
k
=
N
Z
g
g
k
exp((E
k
−µ)/kT) +1
with ln(Z
g
) =
¸
g
k
ln[1 +exp((E
i
−µ)/kT)].
2. Bose-Einstein statistics: half odd-integer spin. n
k
∈ IN, n
k
=
N
Z
g
g
k
exp((E
k
−µ)/kT) −1
with ln(Z
g
) = −
¸
g
k
ln[1 −exp((E
i
−µ)/kT)].
Here, Z
g
is the large-canonical state sum and µ the chemical potential. It is found by demanding
¸
n
k
= N,
and for it holds: lim
T→0
µ = E
F
, the Fermi-energy. N is the total number of particles. The Maxwell-Boltzmann
distribution can be derived from this in the limit E
k
−µ kT:
n
k
=
N
Z
exp


E
k
kT

with Z =
¸
k
g
k
exp


E
k
kT

With the Fermi-energy, the Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics can be written as:
1. Fermi-Dirac statistics: n
k
=
g
k
exp((E
k
−E
F
)/kT) + 1
.
2. Bose-Einstein statistics: n
k
=
g
k
exp((E
k
−E
F
)/kT) −1
.
Chapter 11
Plasma physics
11.1 Introduction
The degree of ionization α of a plasma is defined by: α =
n
e
n
e
+n
0
where n
e
is the electron density and n
0
the density of the neutrals. If a plasma contains also negative charged
ions α is not well defined.
The probability that a test particle collides with another is given by dP = nσdx where σ is the cross section.
The collision frequency ν
c
= 1/τ
c
= nσv. The mean free path is given by λ
v
= 1/nσ. The rate coefficient
K is defined by K = 'σv`. The number of collisions per unit of time and volume between particles of kind 1
and 2 is given by n
1
n
2
'σv` = Kn
1
n
2
.
The potential of an electron is given by:
V (r) =
−e
4πε
0
r
exp


r
λ
D

with λ
D
=

ε
0
kT
e
T
i
e
2
(n
e
T
i
+n
i
T
e
)

ε
0
kT
e
n
e
e
2
because charge is shielded in a plasma. Here, λ
D
is the Debye length. For distances < λ
D
the plasma
cannot be assumed to be quasi-neutral. Deviations of charge neutrality by thermic motion are compensated by
oscillations with frequency
ω
pe
=

n
e
e
2
m
e
ε
0
The distance of closest approximation when two equal charged particles collide for a deviation of π/2 is
2b
0
= e
2
/(4πε
0
1
2
mv
2
). A “neat” plasma is defined as a plasma for which holds: b
0
< n
−1/3
e
< λ
D
< L
p
.
Here L
p
:= [n
e
/∇n
e
[ is the gradient length of the plasma.
11.2 Transport
Relaxation times are defined as τ = 1/ν
c
. Starting with σ
m
= 4πb
2
0
ln(Λ
C
) and with
1
2
mv
2
= kT it can be
found that:
τ
m
=
4πε
2
0
m
2
v
3
ne
4
ln(Λ
C
)
=
8

2πε
2
0

m(kT)
3/2
ne
4
ln(Λ
C
)
For momentum transfer between electrons and ions holds for a Maxwellian velocity distribution:
τ
ee
=



2
0

m
e
(kT
e
)
3/2
n
e
e
4
ln(Λ
C
)
≈ τ
ei
, τ
ii
=



2
0

m
i
(kT
i
)
3/2
n
i
e
4
ln(Λ
C
)
The energy relaxation times for identical particles are equal to the momentum relaxation times. Because for
e-i collisions the energy transfer is only ∼ 2m
e
/m
i
this is a slow process. Approximately holds: τ
ee
: τ
ei
:
τ
ie
: τ
E
ie
= 1 : 1 :

m
i
/m
e
: m
i
/m
e
.
The relaxation for e-o interaction is much more complicated. For T > 10 eV holds approximately: σ
eo
=
10
−17
v
−2/5
e
, for lower energies this can be a factor 10 lower.
The resistivity η = E/J of a plasma is given by:
η =
n
e
e
2
m
e
ν
ei
=
e
2

m
e
ln(Λ
C
)



2
0
(kT
e
)
3/2
Chapter 11: Plasma physics 55
The diffusion coefficient D is defined by means of the flux Γ by

Γ = nv
diff
= −D∇n. The equation
of continuity is ∂
t
n + ∇(nv
diff
) = 0 ⇒ ∂
t
n = D∇
2
n. One finds that D =
1
3
λ
v
v. A rough estimate gives
τ
D
= L
p
/D = L
2
p
τ
c

2
v
. For magnetized plasma’s λ
v
must be replaced with the cyclotron radius. In electrical
fields also holds

J = neµ

E = e(n
e
µ
e
+ n
i
µ
i
)

E with µ = e/mν
c
the mobility of the particles. The Einstein
ratio is:
D
µ
=
kT
e
Because a plasma is electrically neutral electrons and ions are strongly coupled and they don’t diffuse inde-
pendent. The coefficient of ambipolar diffusion D
amb
is defined by

Γ =

Γ
i
=

Γ
e
= −D
amb
∇n
e,i
. From this
follows that
D
amb
=
kT
e
/e −kT
i
/e
1/µ
e
−1/µ
i

kT
e
µ
i
e
In an external magnetic field B
0
particles will move in spiral orbits with cyclotron radius ρ = mv/eB
0
and with cyclotron frequency Ω = B
0
e/m. The helical orbit is perturbed by collisions. A plasma is called
magnetized if λ
v
> ρ
e,i
. So the electrons are magnetized if
ρ
e
λ
ee
=

m
e
e
3
n
e
ln(Λ
C
)



2
0
(kT
e
)
3/2
B
0
< 1
Magnetization of only the electrons is sufficient to confine the plasma reasonable because they are coupled
to the ions by charge neutrality. In case of magnetic confinement holds: ∇p =

J

B. Combined with the
two stationary Maxwell equations for the B-field these form the ideal magneto-hydrodynamic equations. For
a uniformB-field holds: p = nkT = B
2
/2µ
0
.
If both magnetic and electric fields are present electrons and ions will move in the same direction. If

E =
E
r
e
r
+ E
z
e
z
and

B = B
z
e
z
the

E

B drift results in a velocity u = (

E

B)/B
2
and the velocity in the
r, ϕ plane is ˙ r(r, ϕ, t) = u +
˙
ρ(t).
11.3 Elastic collisions
11.3.1 General
The scattering angle of a particle in interaction with another
particle, as shown in the figure at the right is:
χ = π −2b

ra
dr
r
2

1 −
b
2
r
2

W(r)
E
0
Particles with an impact parameter between b and b + db,
moving through a ring with dσ = 2πbdb leave the scattering
area at a solid angle dΩ = 2π sin(χ)dχ. The differential
cross section is then defined as:
I(Ω) =


dΩ

=
b
sin(χ)
∂b
∂χ



❅s

χ
M
b
b
r
a
ϕ
For a potential energy W(r) = kr
−n
follows: I(Ω, v) ∼ v
−4/n
.
For low energies, O(1 eV), σ has a Ramsauer minimum. It arises from the interference of matter waves behind
the object. I(Ω) for angles 0 < χ < λ/4 is larger than the classical value.
56 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
11.3.2 The Coulomb interaction
For the Coulomb interaction holds: 2b
0
= q
1
q
2
/2πε
0
mv
2
0
, so W(r) = 2b
0
/r. This gives b = b
0
cot(
1
2
χ) and
I(Ω =
b
sin(χ)
∂b
∂χ
=
b
2
0
4 sin
2
(
1
2
χ)
Because the influence of a particle vanishes at r = λ
D
holds: σ = π(λ
2
D
− b
2
0
). Because dp = d(mv) =
mv
0
(1 −cos χ) a cross section related to momentum transfer σ
m
is given by:
σ
m
=

(1 −cos χ)I(Ω)dΩ = 4πb
2
0
ln

1
sin(
1
2
χ
min
)

= 4πb
2
0
ln

λ
D
b
0

:= 4πb
2
0
ln(Λ
C
) ∼
ln(v
4
)
v
4
where ln(Λ
C
) is the Coulomb-logarithm. For this quantity holds: Λ
C
= λ
D
/b
0
= 9n(λ
D
).
11.3.3 The induced dipole interaction
The induced dipole interaction, with p = α

E, gives a potential V and an energy W in a dipole field given by:
V (r) =
p e
r
4πε
0
r
2
, W(r) = −
[e[p
8πε
0
r
2
= −
αe
2
2(4πε
0
)
2
r
4
with b
a
=
4

2e
2
α
(4πε
0
)
2
1
2
mv
2
0
holds: χ = π −2b

ra
dr
r
2

1 −
b
2
r
2
+
b
4
a
4r
4
If b ≥ b
a
the charge would hit the atom. Repulsing nuclear forces prevent this to happen. If the scattering
angle is a lot times 2π it is called capture. The cross section for capture σ
orb
= πb
2
a
is called the Langevin
limit, and is a lowest estimate for the total cross section.
11.3.4 The centre of mass system
If collisions of two particles with masses m
1
and m
2
which scatter in the centre of mass system by an angle χ
are compared with the scattering under an angle θ in the laboratory system holds:
tan(θ) =
m
2
sin(χ)
m
1
+m
2
cos(χ)
The energy loss ∆E of the incoming particle is given by:
∆E
E
=
1
2
m
2
v
2
2
1
2
m
1
v
2
1
=
2m
1
m
2
(m
1
+m
2
)
2
(1 −cos(χ))
11.3.5 Scattering of light
Scattering of light by free electrons is called Thomson scattering. The scattering is free from collective effects
if kλ
D
<1. The cross section σ = 6.65 10
−29
m
2
and
∆f
f
=
2v
c
sin(
1
2
χ)
This gives for the scattered energy E
scat
∼ nλ
4
0
/(λ
2
−λ
2
0
)
2
with n the density. If λ λ
0
it is called Rayleigh
scattering. Thomson sccattering is a limit of Compton scattering, which is given by λ

− λ = λ
C
(1 − cos χ)
with λ
C
= h/mc and cannot be used any more if relativistic effects become important.
Chapter 11: Plasma physics 57
11.4 Thermodynamic equilibrium and reversibility
Planck’s radiation law and the Maxwellian velocity distribution hold for a plasma in equilibrium:
ρ(ν, T)dν =
8πhν
3
c
3
1
exp(hν/kT) −1
dν , N(E, T)dE =
2πn
(πkT)
3/2

E exp


E
kT

dE
“Detailed balancing” means that the number of reactions in one direction equals the number of reactions in the
opposite direction because both processes have equal probability if one corrects for the used phase space. For
the reaction
¸
forward
X
forward ←

¸
back
X
back
holds in a plasma in equilibrium microscopic reversibility:
¸
forward
ˆ η
forward
=
¸
back
ˆ η
back
If the velocity distribution is Maxwellian, this gives:
ˆ η
x
=
n
x
g
x
h
3
(2πm
x
kT)
3/2
e
−E
kin
/kT
where g is the statistical weight of the state and n/g := η. For electrons holds g = 2, for excited states usually
holds g = 2j +1 = 2n
2
.
With this one finds for the Boltzmann balance, X
p
+e



X
1
+e

+(E
1p
):
n
B
p
n
1
=
g
p
g
1
exp

E
p
− E
1
kT
e

And for the Saha balance, X
p
+e

+(E
pi
) ←

X
+
1
+2e

:
n
S
p
g
p
=
n
+
1
g
+
1
n
e
g
e
h
3
(2πm
e
kT
e
)
3/2
exp

E
pi
kT
e

Because the number of particles on the left-hand side and right-hand side of the equation is different, a factor
g/V
e
remains. This factor causes the Saha-jump.
From microscopic reversibility one can derive that for the rate coefficients K(p, q, T) := 'σv`
pq
holds:
K(q, p, T) =
g
p
g
q
K(p, q, T) exp

∆E
pq
kT

11.5 Inelastic collisions
11.5.1 Types of collisions
The kinetic energy can be split in a part of and a part in the centre of mass system. The energy in the centre of
mass system is available for reactions. This energy is given by
E =
m
1
m
2
(v
1
−v
2
)
2
2(m
1
+m
2
)
Some types of inelastic collisions important for plasma physics are:
1. Excitation: A
p
+e



A
q
+e

2. Decay: A
q ←

A
p
+hf
58 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
3. Ionisation and 3-particles recombination: A
p
+e



A
+
+2e

4. radiative recombination: A
+
+e



A
p
+hf
5. Stimulated emission: A
q
+ hf →A
p
+2hf
6. Associative ionisation: A
∗∗
+B ←

AB
+
+e

7. Penning ionisation: b.v. Ne

+Ar ←

Ar
+
+Ne + e

8. Charge transfer: A
+
+B ←

A + B
+
9. Resonant charge transfer: A
+
+A ←

A + A
+
11.5.2 Cross sections
Collisions between an electron and an atom can be approximated by a collision between an electron and one
of the electrons of that atom. This results in

d(∆E)
=
πZ
2
e
4
(4πε
0
)
2
E(∆E)
2
Then follows for the transition p →q: σ
pq
(E) =
πZ
2
e
4
∆E
q,q+1
(4πε
0
)
2
E(∆E)
2
pq
For ionization from state p holds to a good approximation: σ
p
= 4πa
2
0
Ry

1
E
p

1
E

ln

1.25βE
E
p

For resonant charge transfer holds: σ
ex
=
A[1 −Bln(E)]
2
1 +CE
3.3
11.6 Radiation
In equilibrium holds for radiation processes:
n
p
A
pq
. .. .
emission
+ n
p
B
pq
ρ(ν, T)
. .. .
stimulated emission
= n
q
B
qp
ρ(ν, T)
. .. .
absorption
Here, A
pq
is the matrix element of the transition p →q, and is given by:
A
pq
=

2
e
2
ν
3
[r
pq
[
2
3¯hε
0
c
3
with r
pq
= 'ψ
p
[r [ψ
q
`
For hydrogenic atoms holds: A
p
= 1.58 10
8
Z
4
p
−4.5
, with A
p
= 1/τ
p
=
¸
q
A
pq
. The intensity I of a line is
given by I
pq
= hfA
pq
n
p
/4π. The Einstein coefficients B are given by:
B
pq
=
c
3
A
pq
8πhν
3
and
B
pq
B
qp
=
g
q
g
p
A spectral line is broadened by several mechanisms:
1. Because the states have a finite life time. The natural life time of a state p is given by τ
p
= 1/
¸
q
A
pq
.
From the uncertainty relation then follows: ∆(hν) τ
p
=
1
2
¯h, this gives
∆ν =
1
4πτ
p
=
¸
q
A
pq

The natural line width is usually <than the broadening due to the following two mechanisms:
Chapter 11: Plasma physics 59
2. The Doppler broadening is caused by the thermal motion of the particles:
∆λ
λ
=
2
c

2 ln(2)kT
i
m
i
This broadening results in a Gaussian line profile:
k
ν
= k
0
exp(−[2

ln 2(ν −ν
0
)/∆ν
D
]
2
), with k the coefficient of absorption or emission.
3. The Stark broadening is caused by the electric field of the electrons:
∆λ
1/2
=
¸
n
e
C(n
e
, T
e
)

2/3
with for the H-β line: C(n
e
, T
e
) ≈ 3 10
14
˚
A
−3/2
cm
−3
.
The natural broadening and the Stark broadening result in a Lorentz profile of a spectral line:
k
ν
=
1
2
k
0
∆ν
L
/[(
1
2
∆ν
L
)
2
+(ν −ν
0
)
2
]. The total line shape is a convolution of the Gauss- and Lorentz profile
and is called a Voigt profile.
The number of transitions p →q is given by n
p
B
pq
ρ and by n
p
n
hf

a
c` = n
p
(ρdν/hν)σ
a
c where dν is the
line width. Then follows for the cross section of absorption processes: σ
a
= B
pq
hν/cdν.
The background radiation in a plasma originates from two processes:
1. Free-Bound radiation, originating from radiative recombination. The emission is given by:
ε
fb
=
C
1
λ
2
z
i
n
i
n
e

kT
e
¸
1 −exp


hc
λkT
e

ξ
fb
(λ, T
e
)
with C
1
= 1.63 10
−43
Wm
4
K
1/2
sr
−1
and ξ the Biberman factor.
2. Free-free radiation, originating from the acceleration of particles in the EM-field of other particles:
ε
ff
=
C
1
λ
2
z
i
n
i
n
e

kT
e
exp


hc
λkT
e

ξ
ff
(λ, T
e
)
11.7 The Boltzmann transport equation
It is assumed that there exists a distribution function F for the plasma so that
F(r, v, t) = F
r
(r, t) F
v
(v, t) = F
1
(x, t)F
2
(y, t)F
3
(z, t)F
4
(v
x
, t)F
5
(v
y
, t)F
6
(v
z
, t)
Then the BTE is:
dF
dt
=
∂F
∂t
+∇
r
(Fv ) +∇
v
(Fa) =

∂F
∂t

coll−rad
Assuming that v does not depend on r and a
i
does not depend on v
i
, holds ∇
r
(Fv ) = v∇F and ∇
v
(Fa) =
a ∇
v
F. This is also true in magnetic fields because ∂a
i
/∂x
i
= 0. The velocity is separated in a thermal
velocity v
t
and a drift velocity w. The total density is given by n =

Fdv and

vFdv = n w.
The balance equations can be derived by means of the moment method:
1. Mass balance:

(BTE)dv ⇒
∂n
∂t
+∇ (n w) =

∂n
∂t

cr
2. Momentum balance:

(BTE)mvdv ⇒mn
d w
dt
+∇T

+∇p = mn'a ` +

R
3. Energy balance:

(BTE)mv
2
dv ⇒
3
2
dp
dt
+
5
2
p∇ w +∇ q = Q
60 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Here, 'a ` = e/m(

E + w

B) is the average acceleration, q =
1
2
nm

v
2
t
v
t

the heat flow,
Q =

mv
2
t
r

∂F
∂t

cr
dv the source term for energy production,

R is a friction term and p = nkT the
pressure.
A thermodynamic derivation gives for the total pressure: p = nkT =
¸
i
p
i

e
2
(n
e
+z
i
n
i
)
24πε
0
λ
D
For the electrical conductance in a plasma follows from the momentum balance, if w
e
w
i
:
η

J =

E −

J

B +∇p
e
en
e
In a plasma where only elastic e-a collisions are important the equilibrium energy distribution function is the
Druyvesteyn distribution:
N(E)dE = Cn
e

E
E
0

3/2
exp
¸

3m
e
m
0

E
E
0

2
¸
dE
with E
0
= eEλ
v
= eE/nσ.
11.8 Collision-radiative models
These models are first-moment equations for excited states. One assumes the Quasi-steady-state solution is
valid, where ∀
p>1
[(∂n
p
/∂t = 0) ∧ (∇ (n
p
w
p
) = 0)]. This results in:

∂n
p>1
∂t

cr
= 0 ,
∂n
1
∂t
+∇ (n
1
w
1
) =

∂n
1
∂t

cr
,
∂n
i
∂t
+∇ (n
i
w
i
) =

∂n
i
∂t

cr
with solutions n
p
= r
0
p
n
S
p
+r
1
p
n
B
p
= b
p
n
S
p
. Further holds for all collision-dominated levels that δb
p
:= b
p
−1 =
b
0
p
−x
eff
with p
eff
=

Ry/E
pi
and 5 ≤ x ≤ 6. For systems in ESP, where only collisional (de)excitation
between levels p and p ± 1 is taken into account holds x = 6. Even in plasma’s far from equilibrium the
excited levels will eventually reach ESP, so from a certain level up the level densities can be calculated.
To find the population densities of the lower levels in the stationary case one has to start with a macroscopic
equilibrium:
Number of populating processes of level p = Number of depopulating processes of level p ,
When this is expanded it becomes:
n
e
¸
q<p
n
q
K
qp
. .. .
coll. excit.
+n
e
¸
q>p
n
q
K
qp
. .. .
coll. deexcit.
+
¸
q>p
n
q
A
qp
. .. .
rad. deex. to
+ n
2
e
n
i
K
+p
. .. .
coll. recomb.
+ n
e
n
i
α
rad
. .. .
rad. recomb
=
n
e
n
p
¸
q<p
K
pq
. .. .
coll. deexcit.
+n
e
n
p
¸
q>p
K
pq
. .. .
coll. excit.
+ n
p
¸
q<p
A
pq
. .. .
rad. deex. from
+n
e
n
p
K
p+
. .. .
coll. ion.
11.9 Waves in plasma’s
Interaction of electromagnetic waves in plasma’s results in scattering and absorption of energy. For electro-
magnetic waves with complex wave number k = ω(n +iκ)/c in one dimension one finds:
E
x
= E
0
e
−κωx/c
cos[ω(t −nx/c)]. The refractive index n is given by:
n = c
k
ω
=
c
v
f
=

1 −
ω
2
p
ω
2
Chapter 11: Plasma physics 61
For disturbances in the z-direction in a cold, homogeneous, magnetized plasma:

B = B
0
e
z
+

ˆ
Be
i(kz−ωt)
and
n = n
0
+ ˆ ne
i(kz−ωt)
(external E fields are screened) follows, with the definitions α = ω
p
/ω and β = Ω/ω
and ω
2
p
= ω
2
pi

2
pe
:

J =

σ

E , with

σ = iε
0
ω
¸
s
α
2
s

¸
¸
¸
¸
1
1 −β
2
s
−iβ
s
1 −β
2
s
0

s
1 −β
2
s
1
1 −β
2
s
0
0 0 1
¸

where the sum is taken over particle species s. The dielectric tensor c, with property:

k (

c

E) = 0
is given by

c =

I −

σ/iε
0
ω.
With the definitions S = 1 −
¸
s
α
2
s
1 −β
2
s
, D =
¸
s
α
2
s
β
s
1 −β
2
s
, P = 1 −
¸
s
α
2
s
follows:

c =

¸
S −iD 0
iD S 0
0 0 P
¸

The eigenvalues of this hermitian matrix are R = S + D, L = S − D, λ
3
= P, with eigenvectors e
r
=
1
2

2(1, i, 0), e
l
=
1
2

2(1, −i, 0) and e
3
= (0, 0, 1). e
r
is connected with a right rotating field for which
iE
x
/E
y
= 1 and e
l
is connected with a left rotating field for which iE
x
/E
y
= −1. When k makes an angle θ
with

B one finds:
tan
2
(θ) =
P(n
2
−R)(n
2
−L)
S(n
2
−RL/S)(n
2
−P)
where n is the refractive index. From this the following solutions can be obtained:
A. θ = 0: transmission in the z-direction.
1. P = 0: E
x
= E
y
= 0. This describes a longitudinal linear polarized wave.
2. n
2
= L: a left, circular polarized wave.
3. n
2
= R: a right, circular polarized wave.
B. θ = π/2: transmission ⊥the B-field.
1. n
2
= P: the ordinary mode: E
x
= E
y
= 0. This is a transversal linear polarized wave.
2. n
2
= RL/S: the extraordinary mode: iE
x
/E
y
= −D/S, an elliptical polarized wave.
Resonance frequencies are frequencies for which n
2
→ ∞, so v
f
= 0. For these holds: tan(θ) = −P/S.
For R → ∞ this gives the electron cyclotron resonance frequency ω = Ω
e
, for L → ∞ the ion cyclotron
resonance frequency ω = Ω
i
and for S = 0 holds for the extraordinary mode:
α
2

1 −
m
i
m
e

2
i
ω
2

=

1 −
m
2
i
m
2
e

2
i
ω
2

1 −

2
i
ω
2

Cut-off frequencies are frequencies for which n
2
= 0, so v
f
→∞. For these holds: P = 0 or R = 0 or L = 0.
In the case that β
2
1 one finds Alfv´ en waves propagating parallel to the field lines. With the Alfv´ en velocity
v
A
=

e

i
ω
2
pe

2
pi
c
2
follows: n =

1 +c/v
A
, and in case v
A
<c: ω = kv
A
.
Chapter 12
Solid state physics
12.1 Crystal structure
A lattice is defined by the 3 translation vectors a
i
, so that the atomic composition looks the same from each
point r and r

= r +

T, where

T is a translation vector given by:

T = u
1
a
1
+ u
2
a
2
+u
3
a
3
with u
i
∈ IN. A
lattice can be constructed from primitive cells. As a primitive cell one can take a parallellepiped, with volume
V
cell
= [a
1
(a
2
a
3
)[
Because a lattice has a periodical structure the physical properties which are connected with the lattice have
the same periodicity (neglecting boundary effects):
n
e
(r +

T ) = n
e
(r )
This periodicity is suitable to use Fourier analysis: n(r ) is expanded as:
n(r ) =
¸
G
n
G
exp(i

G r )
with
n
G
=
1
V
cell

cell

n(r ) exp(−i

G r )dV

G is the reciprocal lattice vector. If

G is written as

G = v
1

b
1
+ v
2

b
2
+ v
3

b
3
with v
i
∈ IN, it follows for the
vectors

b
i
, cyclically:

b
i
= 2π
a
i+1
a
i+2
a
i
(a
i+1
a
i+2
)
The set of

G-vectors determines the R¨ ontgen diffractions: a maximum in the reflected radiation occurs if:

k =

G with ∆

k =

k −

k

. So: 2

k

G = G
2
. From this follows for parallel lattice planes (Bragg reflection)
that for the maxima holds: 2d sin(θ) = nλ.
The Brillouin zone is defined as a Wigner-Seitz cell in the reciprocal lattice.
12.2 Crystal binding
A distinction can be made between 4 binding types:
1. Van der Waals bond
2. Ion bond
3. Covalent or homopolar bond
4. Metalic bond.
For the ion binding of NaCl the energy per molecule is calculated by:
E = cohesive energy(NaCl) – ionization energy(Na) + electron affinity(Cl)
The interaction in a covalent bond depends on the relative spin orientations of the electrons constituing the
bond. The potential energy for two parallel spins is higher than the potential energy for two antiparallel spins.
Furthermore the potential energy for two parallel spins has sometimes no minimum. In that case binding is not
possible.
Chapter 12: Solid state physics 63
12.3 Crystal vibrations
12.3.1 A lattice with one type of atoms
In this model for crystal vibrations only nearest-neighbour interactions are taken into account. The force on
atom s with mass M can then be written as:
F
s
= M
d
2
u
s
dt
2
= C(u
s+1
−u
s
) +C(u
s−1
−u
s
)
Assuming that all solutions have the same time-dependence exp(−iωt) this results in:
−Mω
2
u
s
= C(u
s+1
+u
s−1
−2u
s
)
Further it is postulated that: u
s±1
= u exp(isKa) exp(±iKa).
This gives: u
s
= exp(iKsa). Substituting the later two equations in the fist results in a system of linear
equations, which has only a solution if their determinant is 0. This gives:
ω
2
=
4C
M
sin
2
(
1
2
Ka)
Only vibrations with a wavelength within the first Brillouin Zone have a physical significance. This requires
that −π < Ka ≤ π.
The group velocity of these vibrations is given by:
v
g
=

dK
=

Ca
2
M
cos(
1
2
Ka) .
and is 0 on the edge of a Brillouin Zone. Here, there is a standing wave.
12.3.2 A lattice with two types of atoms
Now the solutions are:
ω
2
= C

1
M
1
+
1
M
2

±C

1
M
1
+
1
M
2

2

4 sin
2
(Ka)
M
1
M
2
Connected with each value of K are two values of ω, as can be
seen in the graph. The upper line describes the optical branch,
the lower line the acoustical branch. In the optical branch,
both types of ions oscillate in opposite phases, in the acoustical
branch they oscillate in the same phase. This results in a much
larger induced dipole moment for optical oscillations, and also a
stronger emission and absorption of radiation. Furthermore each
branch has 3 polarization directions, one longitudinal and two
transversal.


0
K
ω
π/a

2C
M2

2C
M1
12.3.3 Phonons
The quantum mechanical excitation of a crystal vibration with an energy ¯hω is called a phonon. Phonons
can be viewed as quasi-particles: with collisions, they behave as particles with momentum ¯hK. Their total
momentum is 0. When they collide, their momentum need not be conserved: for a normal process holds:
K
1
+ K
2
= K
3
, for an umklapp process holds: K
1
+ K
2
= K
3
+ G. Because phonons have no spin they
behave like bosons.
64 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
12.3.4 Thermal heat capacity
The total energy of the crystal vibrations can be calculated by multiplying each mode with its energy and sum
over all branches K and polarizations P:
U =
¸
K
¸
P
¯hω 'n
k,p
` =
¸
λ

D
λ
(ω)
¯hω
exp(¯ hω/kT) −1

for a given polarization λ. The thermal heat capacity is then:
C
lattice
=
∂U
∂T
= k
¸
λ

D(ω)
(¯ hω/kT)
2
exp(¯ hω/kT)
(exp(¯hω/kT) −1)
2

The dispersion relation in one dimension is given by:
D(ω)dω =
L
π
dK

dω =
L
π

v
g
In three dimensions one applies periodic boundary conditions to a cube with N
3
primitive cells and a volume
L
3
: exp(i(K
x
x +K
y
y +K
z
z)) ≡ exp(i(K
x
(x +L) +K
y
(y +L) + K
z
(z +L))).
Because exp(2πi) = 1 this is only possible if:
K
x
, K
y
, K
z
= 0; ±

L
; ±

L
; ±

L
; ... ±
2Nπ
L
So there is only one allowed value of

K per volume (2π/L)
3
in K-space, or:

L

3
=
V

3
allowed

K-values per unit volume in

K-space, for each polarization and each branch. The total number of
states with a wave vector < K is:
N =

L

3
4πK
3
3
for each polarization. The density of states for each polarization is, according to the Einstein model:
D(ω) =
dN

=

V K
2

2

dK

=
V

3

dA
ω
v
g
The Debye model for thermal heat capacities is a low-temperature approximation which is valid up to ≈ 50K.
Here, only the acoustic phonons are taken into account (3 polarizations), and one assumes that v = ωK,
independent of the polarization. From this follows: D(ω) = V ω
2
/2π
2
v
3
, where v is the speed of sound. This
gives:
U = 3

D(ω) 'n` ¯hωdω =
ωD

0
V ω
2

2
v
3
¯hω
exp(¯ hω/kT) −1
dω =
3V k
2
T
4

2
v
3
¯h
3
xD

0
x
3
dx
e
x
−1
.
Here, x
D
= ¯ hω
D
/kT = θ
D
/T. θ
D
is the Debye temperature and is defined by:
θ
D
=
¯hv
k


2
N
V

1/3
where N is the number of primitive cells. Because x
D
→∞for T →0 it follows from this:
U = 9NkT

T
θ
D

3

0
x
3
dx
e
x
−1
=

4
NkT
4

D
∼ T
4
and C
V
=
12π
4
NkT
3

3
D
∼ T
3
In the Einstein model for the thermal heat capacity one considers only phonons at one frequency, an approxi-
mation for optical phonons.
Chapter 12: Solid state physics 65
12.4 Magnetic field in the solid state
The following graph shows the magnetization versus fieldstrength for different types of magnetism:
diamagnetism
ferro
paramagnetism
χ
m
=
∂M
∂H
M
M
sat
0 H












❤❤
12.4.1 Dielectrics
The quantum mechanical origin of diamagnetism is the Larmorprecession of the spin of the electron. Starting
with a circular electron orbit in an atom with two electrons, there is a Coulomb force F
c
and a magnetic force
on each electron. If the magnetic part of the force is not strong enough to significantly deform the orbit holds:
ω
2
=
F
c
(r)
mr
±
eB
m
ω = ω
2
0
±
eB
m

0
+δ) ⇒ω =

ω
0
±
eB
2m

2
+ ≈ ω
0
±
eB
2m
= ω
0
±ω
L
Here, ω
L
is the Larmor frequency. One electron is accelerated, the other decelerated. Hence there is a net
circular current which results in a magnetic moment µ. The circular current is given by I = −Zeω
L
/2π, and
'µ` = IA = Iπ

ρ
2

=
2
3

r
2

. If N is the number of atoms in the crystal it follows for the susceptibility,
with

M = µN:
χ =
µ
0
M
B
= −
µ
0
NZe
2
6m

r
2

12.4.2 Paramagnetism
Starting with the splitting of energy levels in a weak magnetic field: ∆U
m
− µ

B = m
J

B
B, and with a
distribution f
m
∼ exp(−∆U
m
/kT), one finds for the average magnetic moment 'µ` =
¸
f
m
µ/
¸
f
m
. After
linearization and because
¸
m
J
= 0,
¸
J = 2J + 1 and
¸
m
2
J
=
2
3
J(J +1)(J +
1
2
) it follows that:
χ
p
=
µ
0
M
B
=
µ
0
N 'µ`
B
=
µ
0
J(J +1)g
2
µ
2
B
N
3kT
This is the Curie law, χ
p
∼ 1/T.
12.4.3 Ferromagnetism
A ferromagnet behaves like a paramagnet above a critical temperature T
c
. To describe ferromagnetism a field
B
E
parallel with M is postulated:

B
E
= λµ
0

M. From there the treatment is analogous to the paramagnetic
case:
µ
0
M = χ
p
(B
a
+B
E
) = χ
p
(B
a
+λµ
0
M) = µ
0

1 −λ
C
T

M
From this follows for a ferromagnet: χ
F
=
µ
0
M
B
a
=
C
T −T
c
which is Weiss-Curie’s law.
If B
E
is estimated this way it results in values of about 1000 T. This is clearly unrealistic and suggests another
mechanism. A quantum mechanical approach from Heisenberg postulates an interaction between two neigh-
bouring atoms: U = −2J

S
i

S
j
≡ −µ

B
E
. J is an overlap integral given by: J = 3kT
c
/2zS(S + 1), with
z the number of neighbours. A distinction between 2 cases can now be made:
1. J > 0: S
i
and S
j
become parallel: the material is a ferromagnet.
66 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
2. J < 0: S
i
and S
j
become antiparallel: the material is an antiferromagnet.
Heisenberg’s theory predicts quantized spin waves: magnons. Starting from a model with only nearest neigh-
bouring atoms interacting one can write:
U = −2J

S
p
(

S
p−1
+

S
p+1
) ≈ µ
p

B
p
with

B
p
=
−2J

B
(

S
p−1
+

S
p+1
)
The equation of motion for the magnons becomes:
d

S
dt
=
2J
¯h

S
p
(

S
p−1
+

S
p+1
)
From here the treatment is analogous to phonons: postulate traveling waves of the type

S
p
= uexp(i(pka −
ωt)). This results in a system of linear equations with solution:
¯hω = 4JS(1 −cos(ka))
12.5 Free electron Fermi gas
12.5.1 Thermal heat capacity
The solution with period L of the one-dimensional Schr¨ odinger equation is: ψ
n
(x) = Asin(2πx/λn) with

n
= 2L. From this follows
E =
¯h
2
2m


L

2
In a linear lattice the only important quantum numbers are n and m
s
. The Fermi level is the uppermost filled
level in the ground state, which has the Fermi-energy E
F
. If n
F
is the quantum number of the Fermi level, it
can be expressed as: 2n
F
= N so E
F
= ¯ h
2
π
2
N
2
/8mL. In 3 dimensions holds:
k
F
=


2
N
V

1/3
and E
F
=
¯h
2
2m


2
N
V

2/3
The number of states with energy ≤ E is then: N =
V

2

2mE
¯h
2

3/2
.
and the density of states becomes: D(E) =
dN
dE
=
V

2

2m
¯h
2

3/2

E =
3N
2E
.
The heat capacity of the electrons is approximately 0.01 times the classical expected value
3
2
Nk. This is caused
by the Pauli exclusion principle and the Fermi-Dirac distribution: only electrons within an energy range ∼ kT
of the Fermi level are excited thermally. There is a fraction ≈ T/T
F
excited thermally. The internal energy
then becomes:
U ≈ NkT
T
T
F
and C =
∂U
∂T
≈ Nk
T
T
F
A more accurate analysis gives: C
electrons
=
1
2
π
2
NkT/T
F
∼ T. Together with the T
3
dependence of the
thermal heat capacity of the phonons the total thermal heat capacity of metals is described by: C = γT +AT
3
.
12.5.2 Electric conductance
The equation of motion for the charge carriers is:

F = mdv/dt = ¯ hd

k/dt. The variation of

k is given by
δ

k =

k(t) −

k(0) = −e

Et/¯h. If τ is the characteristic collision time of the electrons, δ

k remains stable if
t = τ. Then holds: 'v ` = µ

E, with µ = eτ/m the mobility of the electrons.
The current in a conductor is given by:

J = nqv = σ

E =

E/ρ = neµ

E. Because for the collision time holds:
1/τ = 1/τ
L
+ 1/τ
i
, where τ
L
is the collision time with the lattice phonons and τ
i
the collision time with the
impurities follows for the resistivity ρ = ρ
L

i
, with lim
T→0
ρ
L
= 0.
Chapter 12: Solid state physics 67
12.5.3 The Hall-effect
If a magnetic field is applied ⊥ to the direction of the current the charge carriers will be pushed aside by the
Lorentz force. This results in a magnetic field ⊥ to the flow direction of the current. If

J = Je
x
and

B = Be
z
than E
y
/E
x
= µB. The Hall coefficient is defined by: R
H
= E
y
/J
x
B, and R
H
= −1/ne if J
x
= neµE
x
.
The Hall voltage is given by: V
H
= Bvb = IB/neh where b is the width of the material and h de height.
12.5.4 Thermal heat conductivity
With = v
F
τ the mean free path of the electrons follows from κ =
1
3
C 'v` : κ
electrons
= π
2
nk
2
Tτ/3m.
From this follows for the Wiedemann-Franz ratio: κ/σ =
1
3
(πk/e)
2
T.
12.6 Energy bands
In the tight-bond approximation it is assumed that ψ = e
ikna
φ(x − na). From this follows for the energy:
'E` = 'ψ[H[ψ` = E
at
− α − 2β cos(ka). So this gives a cosine superimposed on the atomic energy, which
can often be approximated by a harmonic oscillator. If it is assumed that the electron is nearly free one can
postulate: ψ = exp(i

k r ). This is a traveling wave. This wave can be decomposed into two standing waves:
ψ(+) = exp(iπx/a) + exp(−iπx/a) = 2 cos(πx/a)
ψ(−) = exp(iπx/a) −exp(−iπx/a) = 2i sin(πx/a)
The probability density [ψ(+)[
2
is high near the atoms of the lattice and low in between. The probability
density [ψ(−)[
2
is low near the atoms of the lattice and high in between. Hence the energy of ψ(+) is also
lower than the energy of ψ)(−). Suppose that U(x) = U cos(2πx/a), than the bandgap is given by:
E
gap
=
1

0
U(x)

[ψ(+)[
2
−[ψ(−)[
2

dx = U
12.7 Semiconductors
The band structures and the transitions between them of direct and indirect semiconductors are shown in
the figures below. Here it is assumed that the momentum of the absorbed photon can be neglected. For an
indirect semiconductor a transition from the valence- to the conduction band is also possible if the energy of
the absorbed photon is smaller than the band gap: then, also a phonon is absorbed.
Direct transition





✝¤

¤

E conduction
band
ω
g


Indirect transition





✝¤

E



ω

This difference can also be observed in the absorption spectra:
68 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Direct semiconductor


absorption
E
¯hω
g
Indirect semiconductor


absorption
E
E
g
+¯ hΩ



.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
So indirect semiconductors, like Si and Ge, cannot emit any light and are therefore not usable to fabricate
lasers. When light is absorbed holds:

k
h
= −

k
e
, E
h
(

k
h
) = −E
e
(

k
e
), v
h
= v
e
and m
h
= −m

e
if the
conduction band and the valence band have the same structure.
Instead of the normal electron mass one has to use the effective mass within a lattice. It is defined by:
m

=
F
a
=
dp/dt
dv
g
/dt
= ¯ h
dK
dv
g
= ¯ h
2

d
2
E
dk
2

−1
with E = ¯ hω and v
g
= dω/dk and p = ¯ hk.
With the distribution function f
e
(E) ≈ exp((µ − E)/kT) for the electrons and f
h
(E) = 1 − f
e
(E) for the
holes the density of states is given by:
D(E) =
1

2

2m

¯h
2

3/2

E −E
c
with E
c
the energy at the edge of the conductance band. From this follows for the concentrations of the holes
p and the electrons n:
n =

Ec
D
e
(E)f
e
(E)dE = 2

m

kT
2π¯h
2

3/2
exp

µ −E
c
kT

For the product np follows: np = 4

kT
2π¯h
2

3

m

e
m
h
exp


E
g
kT

For an intrinsic (no impurities) semiconductor holds: n
i
= p
i
, for a n − type holds: n > p and in a p − type
holds: n < p.
An exciton is a bound electron-hole pair, rotating on each other as in positronium. The excitation energy of an
exciton is smaller than the bandgap because the energy of an exciton is lower than the energy of a free electron
and a free hole. This causes a peak in the absorption just under E
g
.
12.8 Superconductivity
12.8.1 Description
Asuperconductor is characterized by a zero resistivity if certain quantities are smaller than some critical values:
T < T
c
, I < I
c
and H < H
c
. The BCS-model predicts for the transition temperature T
c
:
T
c
= 1.14Θ
D
exp

−1
UD(E
F
)

while experiments find for H
c
approximately:
H
c
(T) ≈ H
c
(T
c
)

1 −
T
2
T
2
c

.
Chapter 12: Solid state physics 69
Within a superconductor the magnetic field is 0: the Meissner effect.
There are type I and type II superconductors. Because the Meissner effect implies that a superconductor is a
perfect diamagnet holds in the superconducting state:

H = µ
0

M. This holds for a type I superconductor, for
a type II superconductor this only holds to a certain value H
c1
, for higher values of H the superconductor is in
a vortex state to a value H
c2
, which can be 100 times H
c1
. If H becomes larger than H
c2
the superconductor
becomes a normal conductor. This is shown in the figures below.
Type I


µ
0
M
H
H
c

Type II


µ
0
M
H
H
c1
H
c2

The transition to a superconducting state is a second order thermodynamic state transition. This means that
there is a twist in the T −S diagram and a discontinuity in the C
X
−T diagram.
12.8.2 The Josephson effect
For the Josephson effect one considers two superconductors, separated by an insulator. The electron wave-
function in one superconductor is ψ
1
, in the other ψ
2
. The Schr¨ odinger equations in both superconductors is
set equal:
i¯h
∂ψ
1
∂t
= ¯ hTψ
2
, i¯h
∂ψ
2
∂t
= ¯ hTψ
1
¯hT is the effect of the coupling of the electrons, or the transfer interaction through the insulator. The electron
wavefunctions are written as ψ
1
=

n
1
exp(iθ
1
) and ψ
2
=

n
2
exp(iθ
2
). Because a Cooper pair exist of two
electrons holds: ψ ∼

n. From this follows, if n
1
≈ n
2
:
∂θ
1
∂t
=
∂θ
2
∂t
and
∂n
2
∂t
= −
∂n
1
∂t
The Josephson effect results in a current density through the insulator depending on the phase difference as:
J = J
0
sin(θ
2
− θ
1
) = J
0
sin(δ), where J
0
∼ T. With an AC-voltage across the junction the Schr¨ odinger
equations become:
i¯h
∂ψ
1
∂t
= ¯ hTψ
2
−eV ψ
1
and i¯h
∂ψ
2
∂t
= ¯ hTψ
1
+eV ψ
2
This gives: J = J
0
sin

θ
2
−θ
1

2eV t
¯h

.
Hence there is an oscillation with ω = 2eV/¯h.
12.8.3 Flux quantisation in a superconducting ring
For the current density in general holds:

J = qψ

vψ =
nq
m
[¯ h

∇θ −q

A]
From the Meissner effect,

B = 0 and

J = 0, follows: ¯h

∇θ = q

A ⇒

∇θdl = θ
2
− θ
1
= 2πs with s ∈ IN.
Because:


Adl =

(rot

A, n)dσ =

(

B, n)dσ = Ψ follows: Ψ = 2π¯hs/q. The size of a flux quantum
follows by setting s = 1: Ψ = 2π¯h/e = 2.0678 10
−15
Tm
2
.
70 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
12.8.4 Macroscopic quantum interference
From θ
2
−θ
1
= 2eΨ/¯h follows for two parallel junctions: δ
b
− δ
a
=
2eΨ
¯h
, so
J = J
a
+J
b
= 2J
0
sin

δ
0
cos


¯h

This gives maxima if eΨ/¯h = sπ.
12.8.5 The London equation
A current density in a superconductor proportional to the vector potential

A is postulated:

J =

A
µ
0
λ
2
L
or rot

J =

B
µ
0
λ
2
L
where λ
L
=

ε
0
mc
2
/nq
2
. From this follows: ∇
2

B =

B/λ
2
L
.
The Meissner effect is the solution of this equation:

B(x) = B
0
exp(−x/λ
L
). Magnetic fields within a
superconductor drop exponentially.
12.8.6 The BCS model
The BCS model can explain superconductivity in metals. (So far there is no explanation for high-T
c
supercon-
ductance).
A new ground state where the electrons behave like independent fermions is postulated. Because of the in-
teraction with the lattice these pseudo-particles exhibit a mutual attraction. This causes two electrons with
opposite spin to combine to a Cooper pair. It can be proved that this ground state is perfect diamagnetic.
The infinite conductivity is more difficult to explain because a ring with a persisting current is not a real
equilibrium: a state with zero current has a lower energy. Flux quantization prevents transitions between these
states. Flux quantization is related to the existence of a coherent many-particle wavefunction. A flux quantum
is the equivalent of about 10
4
electrons. So if the flux has to change with one flux quantum there has to occur
a transition of many electrons, which is very improbable, or the system must go through intermediary states
where the flux is not quantized so they have a higher energy. This is also very improbable.
Some useful mathematical relations are:

0
xdx
e
ax
+1
=
π
2
12a
2
,

−∞
x
2
dx
(e
x
+1)
2
=
π
2
3
,

0
x
3
dx
e
x
+1
=
π
4
15
And, when

¸
n=0
(−1)
n
=
1
2
follows:

0
sin(px)dx =

0
cos(px)dx =
1
p
.
Chapter 13
Theory of groups
13.1 Introduction
13.1.1 Definition of a group
( is a group for the operation • if:
1. ∀
A,B∈G
⇒A• B ∈ (: ( is closed.
2. ∀
A,B,C∈G
⇒(A • B) • C = A• (B • C): ( obeys the associative law.
3. ∃
E∈G
so that ∀
A∈G
A• E = E • A = A: ( has a unit element.
4. ∀
A∈G

A
−1
∈G
so that A • A
−1
= E: Each element in ( has an inverse.
If also holds:
5. ∀
A,B∈G
⇒A • B = B • A the group is called Abelian or commutative.
13.1.2 The Cayley table
Each element arises only once in each row and column of the Cayley- or multiplication table: because EA
i
=
A
−1
k
(A
k
A
i
) = A
i
each A
i
appears once. There are h positions in each row and column when there are h
elements in the group so each element appears only once.
13.1.3 Conjugated elements, subgroups and classes
B is conjugate to A if ∃
X∈G
such that B = XAX
−1
. Then A is also conjugate to B because B =
(X
−1
)A(X
−1
)
−1
.
If B and C are conjugate to A, B is also conjugate with C.
A subgroup is a subset of ( which is also a group w.r.t. the same operation.
A conjugacy class is the maximumcollection of conjugated elements. Each group can be split up in conjugacy
classes. Some theorems:
• All classes are completely disjoint.
• E is a class itself: for each other element in this class would hold: A = XEX
−1
= E.
• E is the only class which is also a subgroup because all other classes have no unit element.
• In an Abelian group each element is a separate class.
The physical interpretation of classes: elements of a group are usually symmetry operations which map a
symmetrical object into itself. Elements of one class are then the same kind of operations. The opposite need
not to be true.
72 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
13.1.4 Isomorfism and homomorfism; representations
Two groups are isomorphic if they have the same multiplication table. The mapping from group (
1
to (
2
, so
that the multiplication table remains the same is a homomorphic mapping. It need not be isomorphic.
A representation is a homomorphic mapping of a group to a group of square matrices with the usual matrix
multiplication as the combining operation. This is symbolized by Γ. The following holds:
Γ(E) = II , Γ(AB) = Γ(A)Γ(B) , Γ(A
−1
) = [Γ(A)]
−1
For each group there are 3 possibilities for a representation:
1. A faithful representation: all matrices are different.
2. The representation A →det(Γ(A)).
3. The identical representation: A →1.
An equivalent representation is obtained by performing an unitary base transformation: Γ

(A) = S
−1
Γ(A)S.
13.1.5 Reducible and irreducible representations
If the same unitary transformation can bring all matrices of a representation Γ in the same block structure the
representation is called reducible:
Γ(A) =

Γ
(1)
(A) 0
0 Γ
(2)
(A)

This is written as: Γ = Γ
(1)
⊕Γ
(2)
. If this is not possible the representation is called irreducible.
The number of irreducible representations equals the number of conjugacy classes.
13.2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem
13.2.1 Schur’s lemma
Lemma: Each matrix which commutes with all matrices of an irreducible representation is a constant II,
where II is the unit matrix. The opposite is (of course) also true.
Lemma: If there exists a matrix M so that for two irreducible representations of group (, γ
(1)
(A
i
) and
γ
(2)
(A
i
), holds: Mγ
(1)
(A
i
) = γ
(2)
(A
i
)M, than the representations are equivalent, or M = 0.
13.2.2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem
For a set of unequivalent, irreducible, unitary representations holds that, if h is the number of elements in the
group and
i
is the dimension of the i
th
¯
representation:
¸
R∈G
Γ
(i)∗
µν
(R)Γ
(j)
αβ
(R) =
h

i
δ
ij
δ
µα
δ
νβ
13.2.3 Character
The character of a representation is given by the trace of the matrix and is therefore invariant for base trans-
formations: χ
(j)
(R) = Tr(Γ
(j)
(R))
Also holds, with N
k
the number of elements in a conjugacy class:
¸
k
χ
(i)∗
(C
k

(j)
(C
k
)N
k
= hδ
ij
Theorem:
n
¸
i=1

2
i
= h
Chapter 13: Theory of groups 73
13.3 The relation with quantum mechanics
13.3.1 Representations, energy levels and degeneracy
Consider a set of symmetry transformations x

= Rx which leave the Hamiltonian H invariant. These trans-
formations are a group. An isomorfic operation on the wavefunction is given by: P
R
ψ(x ) = ψ(R
−1
x ). This
is considered an active rotation. These operators commute with H: P
R
H = HP
R
, and leave the volume
element unchanged: d(Rx) = dx.
P
R
is the symmetry group of the physical system. It causes degeneracy: if ψ
n
is a solution of Hψ
n
= E
n
ψ
n
than also holds: H(P
R
ψ
n
) = E
n
(P
R
ψ
n
). A degeneracy which is not the result of a symmetry is called an
accidental degeneracy.
Assume an
n
-fold degeneracy at E
n
: then choose an orthonormal set ψ
(n)
ν
, ν = 1, 2, . . . ,
n
. The function
P
R
ψ
(n)
ν
is in the same subspace: P
R
ψ
(n)
ν
=
n
¸
κ=1
ψ
(n)
κ
Γ
(n)
κν
(R)
where Γ
(n)
is an irreducible, unitary representation of the symmetry group ( of the system. Each n corre-
sponds with another energy level. One can purely mathematical derive irreducible representations of a sym-
metry group and label the energy levels with a quantum number this way. A fixed choice of Γ
(n)
(R) defines
the base functions ψ
(n)
ν
. This way one can also label each separate base function with a quantum number.
Particle in a periodical potential: the symmetry operation is a cyclic group: note the operator describing one
translation over one unit as A. Then: ( = ¦A, A
2
, A
3
, . . . , A
h
= E¦.
The group is Abelian so all irreducible representations are one-dimensional. For 0 ≤ p ≤ h −1 follows:
Γ
(p)
(A
n
) = e
2πipn/h
If one defines: k = −
2πp
ah

mod

a

, so: P
A
ψ
p
(x) = ψ
p
(x − a) = e
2πip/h
ψ
p
(x), this gives Bloch’s
theorem: ψ
k
(x) = u
k
(x)e
ikx
, with u
k
(x ±a) = u
k
(x).
13.3.2 Breaking of degeneracy by a perturbation
Suppose the unperturbed system has Hamiltonian H
0
and symmetry group (
0
. The perturbed system has
H = H
0
+ 1, and symmetry group ( ⊂ (
0
. If Γ
(n)
(R) is an irreducible representation of (
0
, it is also a
representation of ( but not all elements of Γ
(n)
in (
0
are also in (. The representation then usually becomes
reducible: Γ
(n)
= Γ
(n1)
⊕ Γ
(n2)
⊕ . . .. The degeneracy is then (possibly partially) removed: see the figure
below.
SpectrumH
0
SpectrumH

n

n3
= dim(Γ
(n3)
)

n2
= dim(Γ
(n2)
)

n1
= dim(Γ
(n1)
)
Theorem: The set of
n
degenerated eigenfunctions ψ
(n)
ν
with energy E
n
is a basis for an
n
-dimensional
irreducible representation Γ
(n)
of the symmetry group.
13.3.3 The construction of a base function
Each function F in configuration space can be decomposed into symmetry types: F =
n
¸
j=1
j
¸
κ=1
f
(j)
κ
The following operator extracts the symmetry types:

j
h
¸
R∈G
Γ
(j)∗
κκ
(R)P
R

F = f
(j)
κ
74 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
This is expressed as: f
(j)
κ
is the part of F that transforms according to the κ
th
¯
row of Γ
(j)
.
F can also be expressed in base functions ϕ: F =
¸
ajκ
c
ajκ
ϕ
(aj)
κ
. The functions f
(j)
κ
are in general not
transformed into each other by elements of the group. However, this does happen if c
jaκ
= c
ja
.
Theorem: Two wavefunctions transforming according to non-equivalent unitary representations or according
to different rows of an unitary irreducible representation are orthogonal:

(i)
κ

(j)
λ
` ∼ δ
ij
δ
κλ
, and 'ϕ
(i)
κ

(i)
κ
` is independent of κ.
13.3.4 The direct product of representations
Consider a physical system existing of two subsystems. The subspace D
(i)
of the system transforms according
to Γ
(i)
. Basefunctions are ϕ
(i)
κ
(x
i
), 1 ≤ κ ≤
i
. Now form all
1

2
products ϕ
(1)
κ
(x
1

(2)
λ
(x
2
). These
define a space D
(1)
⊗D
(2)
.
These product functions transform as:
P
R

(1)
κ
(x
1

(2)
λ
(x
2
)) = (P
R
ϕ
(1)
κ
(x
1
))(P
R
ϕ
(2)
λ
(x
2
))
In general the space D
(1)
⊗D
(2)
can be split up in a number of invariant subspaces:
Γ
(1)
⊗Γ
(2)
=
¸
i
n
i
Γ
(i)
A useful tool for this reduction is that for the characters hold:
χ
(1)
(R)χ
(2)
(R) =
¸
i
n
i
χ
(i)
(R)
13.3.5 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients
With the reduction of the direct-product matrix w.r.t. the basis ϕ
(i)
κ
ϕ
(j)
λ
one uses a new basis ϕ
(aκ)
µ
. These base
functions lie in subspaces D
(ak)
. The unitary base transformation is given by:
ϕ
(ak)
µ
=
¸
κλ
ϕ
(i)
κ
ϕ
(j)
λ
(iκjλ[akµ)
and the inverse transformation by: ϕ
(i)
κ
ϕ
(j)
λ
=
¸
akµ
ϕ
(aκ)
µ
(akµ[iκjλ)
In essence the Clebsch-Gordan coefficients are dot products: (iκjλ[akµ) := 'ϕ
(i)
k
ϕ
(j)
λ

(ak)
µ
`
13.3.6 Symmetric transformations of operators, irreducible tensor operators
Observables (operators) transform as follows under symmetry transformations: A

= P
R
AP
−1
R
. If a set of
operators A
(j)
κ
with 0 ≤ κ ≤
j
transform into each other under the transformations of ( holds:
P
R
A
(j)
κ
P
−1
R
=
¸
ν
A
(j)
ν
Γ
(j)
νκ
(R)
If Γ
(j)
is irreducible they are called irreducible tensor operators A
(j)
with components A
(j)
κ
.
An operator can also be decomposed into symmetry types: A =
¸
jk
a
(j)
k
, with:
a
(j)
κ
=

j
h
¸
R∈G
Γ
(j)∗
κκ
(R)

(P
R
AP
−1
R
)
Chapter 13: Theory of groups 75
Theorem: Matrix elements H
ij
of the operator H which is invariant under ∀
A∈G
, are 0 between states which
transformaccording to non-equivalent irreducible unitary representations or according to different rows of such
a representation. Further 'ϕ
(i)
κ
[H[ψ
(i)
κ
` is independent of κ. For H = 1 this becomes the previous theorem.
This is applied in quantum mechanics in perturbation theory and variational calculus. Here one tries to diag-
onalize H. Solutions can be found within each category of functions ϕ
(i)
κ
with common i and κ: H is already
diagonal in categories as a whole.
Perturbation calculus can be applied independent within each category. With variational calculus the try func-
tion can be chosen within a separate category because the exact eigenfunctions transform according to a row
of an irreducible representation.
13.3.7 The Wigner-Eckart theorem
Theorem: The matrix element 'ϕ
(i)
λ
[A
(j)
κ

(k)
µ
` can only be = 0 if Γ
(j)
⊗ Γ
(k)
= . . . ⊕ Γ
(i)
⊕ . . .. If this is
the case holds (if Γ
(i)
appears only once, otherwise one has to sum over a):

(i)
λ
[A
(j)
κ

(k)
µ
` = (iλ[jκkµ)'ϕ
(i)
|A
(j)

(k)
`
This theorem can be used to determine selection rules: the probability of a dipole transition is given by ( is
the direction of polarization of the radiation):
P
D
=

2
e
2
f
3
[r
12
[
2
3¯hε
0
c
3
with r
12
= 'l
2
m
2
[ r [l
1
m
1
`
Further it can be used to determine intensity ratios: if there is only one value of a the ratio of the matrix
elements are the Clebsch-Gordan coefficients. For more a-values relations between the intensity ratios can be
stated. However, the intensity ratios are also dependent on the occupation of the atomic energy levels.
13.4 Continuous groups
Continuous groups have h = ∞. However, not all groups with h = ∞ are continuous, e.g. the translation
group of an spatially infinite periodic potential is not continuous but does have h = ∞.
13.4.1 The 3-dimensional translation group
For the translation of wavefunctions over a distance a holds: P
a
ψ(x) = ψ(x − a). Taylor expansion near x
gives:
ψ(x −a) = ψ(x) −a
dψ(x)
dx
+
1
2
a
2
d
2
ψ(x)
dx
2
−+. . .
Because the momentum operator in quantum mechanics is given by: p
x
=
¯h
i

∂x
, this can be written as:
ψ(x −a) = e
−iapx/¯ h
ψ(x)
13.4.2 The 3-dimensional rotation group
This group is called SO(3) because a faithful representation can be constructed from orthogonal 33 matrices
with a determinant of +1.
For an infinitesimal rotation around the x-axis holds:
P
δθx
ψ(x, y, z) ≈ ψ(x, y +zδθ
x
, z −yδθ
x
)
= ψ(x, y, z) +

zδθ
x

∂y
−yδθ
x

∂z

ψ(x, y, z)
=

1 −
iδθ
x
L
x
¯h

ψ(x, y, z)
76 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Because the angular momentum operator is given by: L
x
=
¯h
i

z

∂y
−y

∂z

.
So in an arbitrary direction holds: Rotations: P
α,n
= exp(−iα(n

J )/¯h)
Translations: P
a,n
= exp(−ia(n p)/¯h)
J
x
, J
y
and J
z
are called the generators of the 3-dim. rotation group, p
x
, p
y
and p
z
are called the generators of
the 3-dim. translation group.
The commutation rules for the generators can be derived from the properties of the group for multiplications:
translations are interchangeable ↔p
x
p
y
−p
y
p
x
= 0.
Rotations are not generally interchangeable: consider a rotation around axis n in the xz-plane over an angle
α. Then holds: P
α,n
= P
−θ,y
P
α,x
P
θ,y
, so:
e
−iα(n·

J )/¯ h
= e
iθJy/¯ h
e
−iαJx/¯ h
e
−iθJy/¯ h
If α and θ are very small and are expanded to second order, and the corresponding terms are put equal with
n

J = J
x
cos θ +J
z
sin θ, it follows from the αθ term: J
x
J
y
−J
y
J
x
= i¯hJ
z
.
13.4.3 Properties of continuous groups
The elements R(p
1
, ..., p
n
) depend continuously on parameters p
1
, ..., p
n
. For the translation group this are
e.g. an
x
, an
y
and an
z
. It is demanded that the multiplication and inverse of an element Rdepend continuously
on the parameters of R.
The statement that each element arises only once in each row and column of the Cayley table holds also for
continuous groups. The notion conjugacy class for continuous groups is defined equally as for discrete groups.
The notion representation is fitted by demanding continuity: each matrix element depends continuously on
p
i
(R).
Summation over all group elements is for continuous groups replaced by an integration. If f(R) is a function
defined on (, e.g. Γ
αβ
(R), holds:

G
f(R)dR :=

p1

pn
f(R(p
1
, ..., p
n
))g(R(p
1
, ..., p
n
))dp
1
dp
n
Here, g(R) is the density function.
Because of the properties of the Cayley table is demanded:

f(R)dR =

f(SR)dR. This fixes g(R) except
for a constant factor. Define new variables p

by: SR(p
i
) = R(p

i
). If one writes: dV := dp
1
dp
n
holds:
g(S) = g(E)
dV
dV

Here,
dV
dV

is the Jacobian:
dV
dV

= det

∂p
i
∂p

j

, and g(E) is constant.
For the translation group holds: g(a) = constant = g(

0 ) because g(an)da

= g(

0 )da and da

= da.
This leads to the fundamental orthogonality theorem:

G
Γ
(i)∗
µν
(R)Γ
(j)
αβ
(R)dR =
1

i
δ
ij
δ
µα
δ
νβ

G
dR
and for the characters hold:

G
χ
(i)∗
(R)χ
(j)
(R)dR = δ
ij

G
dR
Compact groups are groups with a finite group volume:

G
dR < ∞.
Chapter 13: Theory of groups 77
13.5 The group SO(3)
One can take 2 parameters for the direction of the rotational axis and one for the angle of rotation ϕ. The
parameter space is a collection points ϕn within a sphere with radius π. The diametrical points on this sphere
are equivalent because R
n,π
= R
n,−π
.
Another way to define parameters is by means of Eulers angles. If α, β and γ are the 3 Euler angles, defined
as:
1. The spherical angles of axis 3 w.r.t. xyz are θ, ϕ := β, α. Now a rotation around axis 3 remains possible.
2. The spherical angles of the z-axis w.r.t. 123 are θ, ϕ := β, π −γ.
then the rotation of a quantum mechanical system is described by:
ψ →e
−iαJz¯ h
e
−iβJy/¯ h
e
−iγJz/¯ h
ψ. So P
R
= e
−iε(n·

J )/¯ h
.
All irreducible representations of SO(3) can be constructed from the behaviour of the spherical harmonics
Y
lm
(θ, ϕ) with −l ≤ m ≤ l and for a fixed l:
P
R
Y
lm
(θ, ϕ) =
¸
m

Y
lm
(θ, ϕ)D
(l)
mm
(R)
D
(l)
is an irreducible representation of dimension 2l +1. The character of D
(l)
is given by:
χ
(l)
(α) =
l
¸
m=−l
e
imα
= 1 +2
l
¸
k=0
cos(kα) =
sin([l +
1
2
]α)
sin(
1
2
α)
In the performed derivation α is the rotational angle around the z-axis. This expression is valid for all rotations
over an angle α because the classes of SO(3) are rotations around the same angle around an axis with an
arbitrary orientation.
Via the fundamental orthogonality theorem for characters one obtains the following expression for the density
function (which is normalized so that g(0) = 1):
g(α) =
sin
2
(
1
2
α)
(
1
2
α)
2
With this result one can see that the given representations of SO(3) are the only ones: the character of another
representation χ

would have to be ⊥ to the already found ones, so χ

(α) sin
2
(
1
2
α) = 0∀α ⇒ χ

(α) = 0∀α.
This is contradictory because the dimension of the representation is given by χ

(0).
Because fermions have an half-odd integer spin the states ψ
sms
with s =
1
2
and m
s
= ±
1
2
constitute a 2-dim.
space which is invariant under rotations. A problem arises for rotations over 2π:
ψ1
2
ms
→e
−2πiSz/¯ h
ψ1
2
ms
= e
−2πims
ψ1
2
ms
= −ψ1
2
ms
However, in SO(3) holds: R
z,2π
= E. So here holds E → ±II. Because observable quantities can always be
written as 'φ[ψ` or 'φ[A[ψ`, and are bilinear in the states, they do not change sign if the states do. If only one
state changes sign the observable quantities do change.
The existence of these half-odd integer representations is connected with the topological properties of SO(3):
the group is two-fold coherent through the identification R
0
= R

= E.
13.6 Applications to quantum mechanics
13.6.1 Vectormodel for the addition of angular momentum
If two subsystems have angular momentum quantum numbers j
1
and j
2
the only possible values for the total
angular momentumare J = j
1
+j
2
, j
1
+j
2
−1, ..., [j
1
−j
2
[. This can be derived from group theory as follows:
from χ
(j1)
(α)χ
(j2)
(α) =
¸
J
n
j
χ
(J)
(α) follows:
D
(j1)
⊗D
(j2)
= D
(j1+j2)
⊕D
(j1+j2−1)
⊕... ⊕D
(|j1−j2|)
78 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
The states can be characterized by quantum numbers in two ways: with j
1
, m
1
, j
2
, m
2
and with j
1
, j
2
, J, M.
The Clebsch-Gordan coefficients, for SO(3) called the Wigner coefficients, can be chosen real, so:
ψ
j1j2JM
=
¸
m1m2
ψ
j1m1j2m2
(j
1
m
1
j
2
m
2
[JM)
ψ
j1m1j2m2
=
¸
JM
ψ
j1j2JM
(j
1
m
1
j
2
m
2
[JM)
13.6.2 Irreducible tensor operators, matrixelements and selection rules
Some examples of the behaviour of operators under SO(3)
1. Suppose j = 0: this gives the identical representation with
j
= 1. This state is described by a
scalar operator. Because P
R
A
(0)
0
P
−1
R
= A
(0)
0
this operator is invariant, e.g. the Hamiltonian of a
free atom. Then holds: 'J

M

[H[JM` ∼ δ
MM
δ
JJ
.
2. A vector operator:

A = (A
x
, A
y
, A
z
). The cartesian components of a vector operator transform equally
as the cartesian components of r by definition. So for rotations around the z-axis holds:
D(R
α,z
) =

¸
cos α −sinα 0
sin α cos α 0
0 0 1
¸

The transformed operator has the same matrix elements w.r.t. P
R
ψ and P
R
φ:

P
R
ψ[P
R
A
x
P
−1
R
[P
R
φ

= 'ψ[A
x
[φ`, and χ(R
α,z
) = 1 + 2 cos(α). According to the equation for
characters this means one can choose base operators which transform like Y
1m
(θ, ϕ). These turn out to
be the spherical components:
A
(1)
+1
= −
1

2
(A
x
+iA
y
), A
(1)
0
= A
z
, A
(1)
−1
=
1

2
(A
x
−iA
y
)
3. A cartesian tensor of rank 2: T
ij
is a quantity which transforms under rotations like U
i
V
j
, where

U and

V are vectors. So T
ij
transforms like P
R
T
ij
P
−1
R
=
¸
kl
T
kl
D
ki
(R)D
lj
(R), so like D
(1)
⊗ D
(1)
=
D
(2)
⊕ D
(1)
⊕ D
(0)
. The 9 components can be split in 3 invariant subspaces with dimension 1 (D
(0)
),
3 (D
(1)
) and 5 (D
(2)
). The new base operators are:
I. Tr(T ) = T
xx
+T
yy
+T
zz
. This transforms as the scalar

U

V , so as D
(0)
.
II. The 3 antisymmetric components A
z
=
1
2
(T
xy
−T
yx
), etc. These transform as the vector

U

V ,
so as D
(1)
.
III. The 5 independent components of the traceless, symmetric tensor S:
S
ij
=
1
2
(T
ij
+T
ji
) −
1
3
δ
ij
Tr(T). These transform as D
(2)
.
Selection rules for dipole transitions
Dipole operators transform as D
(1)
: for an electric dipole transfer is the operator er, for a magnetic e(

L +
2

S )/2m.
From the Wigner-Eckart theorem follows: 'J

M

[A
(1)
κ
[JM` = 0 except D
(J

)
is a part of D
(1)
⊗ D
(J)
=
D
(J+1)
⊕ D
(J)
⊕ D
(|J−1|)
. This means that J

∈ ¦J + 1, J, [J − 1[¦: J

= J or J

= J ± 1, except
J

= J = 0.
Land´ e-equation for the anomalous Zeeman splitting
According to Land´ e’s model the interaction between a magnetic moment with an external magnetic field is
determined by the projection of

M on

J because

L and

S precede fast around

J. This can also be understood
Chapter 13: Theory of groups 79
from the Wigner-Eckart theorem: from this follows that the matrix elements from all vector operators show a
certain proportionality. For an arbitrary operator

A follows:
'αjm

[

A[αjm` =
'αjm[

A

J [αjm`
j(j +1)¯ h
2
'αjm

[

J [αjm`
13.7 Applications to particle physics
The physics of a system does not change after performing a transformation ψ

= e

ψ where δ is a constant.
This is a global gauge transformation: the phase of the wavefunction changes everywhere by the same amount.
There exists some freedomin the choice of the potentials

A and φ at the same

E and

B: gauge transformations
of the potentials do not change

E and

B (See chapter 2 and 10). The solution ψ

of the Schr¨ odinger equation
with the transformed potentials is: ψ

= e
−iqf(r,t)
ψ.
This is a local gauge transformation: the phase of the wavefunction changes different at each position. The
physics of the system does not change if

A and φ are also transformed. This is now stated as a guide principle:
the “right of existence” of the electromagnetic field is to allow local gauge invariance.
The gauge transformations of the EM-field form a group: U(1), unitary 1 1-matrices. The split-off of charge
in the exponent is essential: it allows one gauge field for all charged particles, independent of their charge.
This concept is generalized: particles have a “special charge” Q. The group elements now are
P
R
= exp(−iQΘ).
Other force fields than the electromagnetic field can also be understood this way. The weak interaction together
with the electromagnetic interaction can be described by a force field that transforms according to U(1)⊗SU(2),
and consists of the photon and three intermediary vector bosons. The colour force is described by SU(3), and
has a gauge field that exists of 8 types of gluons.
In general the group elements are given by P
R
= exp(−i

T

Θ), where Θ
n
are real constants and T
n
operators
(generators), like Q. The commutation rules are given by [T
i
, T
j
] = i
¸
k
c
ijk
T
k
. The c
ijk
are the structure
constants of the group. For SO(3) these constants are c
ijk
= ε
ijk
, here ε
ijk
is the complete antisymmetric
tensor with ε
123
= +1.
These constants can be found with the help of group product elements: because ( is closed holds:
e
i

Θ·

T
e
i

Θ

·

T
e
−i

Θ·

T
e
−i

Θ

·

T
= e
−i

Θ

·

T
. Taylor expansion and setting equal Θ
n
Θ
m
-terms results in the com-
mutation rules.
The group SU(2) has 3 free parameters: because it is unitary there are 4 real conditions over 4 complex
parameters, and the determinant has to be +1, remaining 3 free parameters.
Each unitary matrix U can be written as: U = e
−iH
. Here, H is a Hermitian matrix. Further it always holds
that: det(U) = e
−iTr(H)
.
For each matrix of SU(2) holds that Tr(H)=0. Each Hermitian, traceless 2 2 matrix can be written as a linear
combination of the 3 Pauli-matrices σ
i
. So these matrices are a choice for the operators of SU(2). One can
write: SU(2)=¦exp(−
1
2

Θ)¦.
In abstraction, one can consider an isomorphic group where only the commutation rules are considered to be
known regarding the operators T
i
: [T
1
, T
2
] = iT
3
, etc.
In elementary particle physics the T
i
can be interpreted e.g. as the isospin operators. Elementary particles can
be classified in isospin-multiplets, these are the irreducible representations of SU(2). The classification is:
1. The isospin-singlet ≡ the identical representation: e
−i

Θ
= 1 ⇒T
i
= 0
2. The isospin-doublet ≡ the faithful representation of SU(2) on 2 2 matrices.
80 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
The group SU(3) has 8 free parameters. (The group SU(N) has N
2
− 1 free parameters). The Hermitian,
traceless operators are 3 SU(2)-subgroups in the e
1
e
2
, e
1
e
3
and the e
2
e
3
plane. This gives 9 matrices, which
are not all 9 linear independent. By taking a linear combination one gets 8 matrices.
In the Lagrange density for the colour force one has to substitute

∂x

D
Dx
:=

∂x

8
¸
i=1
T
i
A
i
x
The terms of 3rd and 4th power in A show that the colour field interacts with itself.
Chapter 14
Nuclear physics
14.1 Nuclear forces
The mass of a nucleus is given by:
M
nucl
= Zm
p
+Nm
n
−E
bind
/c
2
The binding energy per nucleon is given in
the figure at the right. The top is at
56
26
Fe,
the most stable nucleus. With the constants
a
1
= 15.760 MeV
a
2
= 17.810 MeV
a
3
= 0.711 MeV
a
4
= 23.702 MeV
a
5
= 34.000 MeV
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(MeV)
E

0 40 80 120 160 200 240
A →
and A = Z +N, in the droplet or collective model of the nucleus the binding energy E
bind
is given by:
E
bind
c
2
= a
1
A−a
2
A
2/3
−a
3
Z(Z −1)
A
1/3
−a
4
(N −Z)
2
A
+a
5
A
−3/4
These terms arise from:
1. a
1
: Binding energy of the strong nuclear force, approximately ∼ A.
2. a
2
: Surface correction: the nucleons near the surface are less bound.
3. a
3
: Coulomb repulsion between the protons.
4. a
4
: Asymmetry term: a surplus of protons or neutrons has a lower binding energy.
5. a
5
: Pair off effect: nuclei with an even number of protons or neutrons are more stable because groups of
two protons or neutrons have a lower energy. The following holds:
Z even, N even: = +1, Z odd, N odd: = −1.
Z even, N odd: = 0, Z odd, N even: = 0.
The Yukawa potential can be derived if the nuclear force can to first approximation, be considered as an
exchange of virtual pions:
U(r) = −
W
0
r
0
r
exp


r
r
0

With ∆E ∆t ≈ ¯h, E
γ
= m
0
c
2
and r
0
= c∆t follows: r
0
= ¯ h/m
0
c.
In the shell model of the nucleus one assumes that a nucleon moves in an average field of other nucleons.
Further, there is a contribution of the spin-orbit coupling ∼

L

S: ∆V
ls
=
1
2
(2l + 1)¯ hω. So each level
(n, l) is split in two, with j = l ±
1
2
, where the state with j = l +
1
2
has the lowest energy. This is just
the opposite for electrons, which is an indication that the L − S interaction is not electromagnetical. The
energy of a 3-dimensional harmonic oscillator is E = (N +
3
2
)¯ hω. N = n
x
+ n
y
+ n
z
= 2(n − 1) + l
where n ≥ 1 is the main oscillator number. Because −l ≤ m ≤ l and m
s
= ±
1
2
¯h there are 2(2l + 1)
82 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
substates which exist independently for protons and neutrons. This gives rise to the so called magical numbers:
nuclei where each state in the outermost level are filled are particulary stable. This is the case if N or Z
∈ ¦2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82, 126¦.
14.2 The shape of the nucleus
A nucleus is to first approximation spherical with a radius of R = R
0
A
1/3
. Here, R
0
≈ 1.4 10
−15
m, constant
for all nuclei. If the nuclear radius is measured including the charge distribution one obtains R
0
≈ 1.2 10
−15
m. The shape of oscillating nuclei can be described by spherical harmonics:
R = R
0
¸
1 +
¸
lm
a
lm
Y
m
l
(θ, ϕ)
¸
l = 0 gives rise to monopole vibrations, density vibrations, which can be applied to the theory of neutron stars.
l = 1 gives dipole vibrations, l = 2 quadrupole, with a
2,0
= β cos γ and a
2,±2
=
1
2

2β sin γ where β is the
deformation factor and γ the shape parameter. The multipole moment is given by µ
l
= Zer
l
Y
m
l
(θ, ϕ). The
parity of the electric moment is Π
E
= (−1)
l
, of the magnetic moment Π
M
= (−1)
l+1
.
There are 2 contributions to the magnetic moment:

M
L
=
e
2m
p

L and

M
S
= g
S
e
2m
p

S.
where g
S
is the spin-gyromagnetic ratio. For protons holds g
S
= 5.5855 and for neutrons g
S
= −3.8263.
The z-components of the magnetic moment are given by M
L,z
= µ
N
m
l
and M
S,z
= g
S
µ
N
m
S
. The resulting
magnetic moment is related to the nuclear spin I according to

M = g
I
(e/2m
p
)

I. The z-component is then
M
z
= µ
N
g
I
m
I
.
14.3 Radioactive decay
The number of nuclei decaying is proportional to the number of nuclei:
˙
N = −λN. This gives for the number
of nuclei N: N(t) = N
0
exp(−λt). The half life time follows from τ 1
2
λ = ln(2). The average life time
of a nucleus is τ = 1/λ. The probability that N nuclei decay within a time interval is given by a Poisson
distribution:
P(N)dt = N
0
λ
N
e
−λ
N!
dt
If a nucleus can decay into more final states then holds: λ =
¸
λ
i
. So the fraction decaying into state i is
λ
i
/
¸
λ
i
. There are 5 types of natural radioactive decay:
1. α-decay: the nucleus emits a He
2+
nucleus. Because nucleons tend to order themselves in groups of
2p+2n this can be considered as a tunneling of a He
2+
nucleus through a potential barrier. The tunnel
probability P is
P =
incoming amplitude
outgoing amplitude
= e
−2G
with G =
1
¯h

2m

[V (r) −E]dr
G is called the Gamow factor.
2. β-decay. Here a proton changes into a neutron or vice versa:
p
+
→n
0
+W
+
→n
0
+e
+

e
, and n
0
→p
+
+W

→p
+
+e


e
.
3. Electron capture: here, a proton in the nucleus captures an electron (usually from the K-shell).
4. Spontaneous fission: a nucleus breaks apart.
5. γ-decay: here the nucleus emits a high-energetic photon. The decay constant is given by
λ =
P(l)
¯hω

E
γ
(¯ hc)
2

E
γ
R
¯hc

2l
∼ 10
−4l
Chapter 14: Nuclear physics 83
where l is the quantum number for the angular momentum and P the radiated power. Usually the
decay constant of electric multipole moments is larger than the one of magnetic multipole moments.
The energy of the photon is E
γ
= E
i
− E
f
− T
R
, with T
R
= E
2
γ
/2mc
2
the recoil energy, which
can usually be neglected. The parity of the emitted radiation is Π
l
= Π
i
Π
f
. With I the quantum
number of angular momentum of the nucleus, L = ¯ h

I(I +1), holds the following selection rule:
[

I
i

I
f
[ ≤ ∆l ≤ [

I
i
+

I
f
[.
14.4 Scattering and nuclear reactions
14.4.1 Kinetic model
If a beam with intensity I hits a target with density n and length x (Rutherford scattering) the number of
scatterings R per unit of time is equal to R = Inxσ. From this follows that the intensity of the beam decreases
as −dI = Inσdx. This results in I = I
0
e
−nσx
= I
0
e
−µx
.
Because dR = R(θ, ϕ)dΩ/4π = Inxdσ it follows:

dΩ
=
R(θ, ϕ)
4πnxI
If N particles are scattered in a material with density n then holds:
∆N
N
= n

dΩ
∆Ω∆x
For Coulomb collisions holds:

dΩ

C
=
Z
1
Z
2
e
2
8πε
0
µv
2
0
1
sin
4
(
1
2
θ)
14.4.2 Quantum mechanical model for n-p scattering
The initial state is a beam of neutrons moving along the z-axis with wavefunction ψ
init
= e
ikz
and current
density J
init
= v[ψ
init
[
2
= v. At large distances from the scattering point they have approximately a spherical
wavefunction ψ
scat
= f(θ)e
ikr
/r where f(θ) is the scattering amplitude. The total wavefunction is then given
by
ψ = ψ
in

scat
= e
ikz
+f(θ)
e
ikr
r
The particle flux of the scattered particles is v[ψ
scat
[
2
= v[f(θ)[
2
dΩ. From this it follows that σ(θ) = [f(θ)[
2
.
The wavefunction of the incoming particles can be expressed as a sum of angular momentum wavefunctions:
ψ
init
= e
ikz
=
¸
l
ψ
l
The impact parameter is related to the angular momentum with L = bp = b¯hk, so bk ≈ l. At very low energy
only particles with l = 0 are scattered, so
ψ = ψ

0
+
¸
l>0
ψ
l
and ψ
0
=
sin(kr)
kr
If the potential is approximately rectangular holds: ψ

0
= C
sin(kr +δ
0
)
kr
The cross section is then σ(θ) =
sin
2

0
)
k
2
so σ =

σ(θ)dΩ =
4π sin
2

0
)
k
2
At very low energies holds: sin
2

0
) =
¯h
2
k
2
/2m
W
0
+W
with W
0
the depth of the potential well. At higher energies holds: σ =

k
2
¸
l
sin
2

l
)
84 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
14.4.3 Conservation of energy and momentum in nuclear reactions
If a particle P
1
collides with a particle P
2
which is in rest w.r.t. the laboratory system and other particles are
created, so
P
1
+P
2

¸
k>2
P
k
the total energy Q gained or required is given by Q = (m
1
+m
2

¸
k>2
m
k
)c
2
.
The minimal required kinetic energy T of P
1
in the laboratory system to initialize the reaction is
T = −Q
m
1
+m
2
+
¸
m
k
2m
2
If Q < 0 there is a threshold energy.
14.5 Radiation dosimetry
Radiometric quantities determine the strength of the radiation source(s). Dosimetric quantities are related to
the energy transfer from radiation to matter. Parameters describing a relation between those are called inter-
action parameters. The intensity of a beam of particles in matter decreases according to I(s) = I
0
exp(−µs).
The deceleration of a heavy particle is described by the Bethe-Bloch equation:
dE
ds

q
2
v
2
The fluention is given by Φ = dN/dA. The flux is given by φ = dΦ/dt. The energy loss is defined by Ψ =
dW/dA, and the energy flux density ψ = dΨ/dt. The absorption coefficient is given by µ = (dN/N)/dx.
The mass absorption coefficient is given by µ/.
The radiation dose X is the amount of charge produced by the radiation per unit of mass, with unit C/kg. An
old unit is the R¨ ontgen: 1Ro= 2.58 10
−4
C/kg. With the energy-absorption coefficient µ
E
follows:
X =
dQ
dm
=

E
W
Ψ
where W is the energy required to disjoin an elementary charge.
The absorbed dose D is given by D = dE
abs
/dm, with unit Gy=J/kg. An old unit is the rad: 1 rad=0.01 Gy.
The dose tempo is defined as
˙
D. It can be derived that
D =
µ
E

Ψ
The Kerma K is the amount of kinetic energy of secundary produced particles which is produced per mass
unit of the radiated object.
The equivalent dose H is a weight average of the absorbed dose per type of radiation, where for each type
radiation the effects on biological material is used for the weight factor. These weight factors are called the
quality factors. Their unit is Sv. H = QD. If the absorption is not equally distributed also weight factors w
per organ need to be used: H =
¸
w
k
H
k
. For some types of radiation holds:
Radiation type Q
R¨ ontgen, gamma radiation 1
β, electrons, mesons 1
Thermic neutrons 3 to 5
Fast neutrons 10 to 20
protons 10
α, fission products 20
Chapter 15
Quantum field theory & Particle physics
15.1 Creation and annihilation operators
A state with more particles can be described by a collection occupation numbers [n
1
n
2
n
3
`. Hence the
vacuum state is given by [000 `. This is a complete description because the particles are indistinguishable.
The states are orthonormal:
'n
1
n
2
n
3
[n

1
n

2
n

3
` =

¸
i=1
δ
nin

i
The time-dependent state vector is given by
Ψ(t) =
¸
n1n2···
c
n1n2···
(t)[n
1
n
2
`
The coefficients c can be interpreted as follows: [c
n1n2···
[
2
is the probability to find n
1
particles with momen-
tum

k
1
, n
2
particles with momentum

k
2
, etc., and 'Ψ(t)[Ψ(t)` =
¸
[c
ni
(t)[
2
= 1. The expansion of the states
in time is described by the Schr¨ odinger equation
i
d
dt
[Ψ(t)` = H[Ψ(t)`
where H = H
0
+ H
int
. H
0
is the Hamiltonian for free particles and keeps [c
ni
(t)[
2
constant, H
int
is the
interaction Hamiltonian and can increase or decrease a c
2
at the cost of others.
All operators which can change occupation numbers can be expanded in the a and a

operators. a is the
annihilation operator and a

the creation operator, and:
a(

k
i
)[n
1
n
2
n
i
` =

n
i
[n
1
n
2
n
i
−1 `
a

(

k
i
)[n
1
n
2
n
i
` =

n
i
+1 [n
1
n
2
n
i
+1 `
Because the states are normalized holds a[0` = 0 and a(

k
i
)a

(

k
i
)[n
i
` = n
i
[n
i
`. So aa

is an occupation
number operator. The following commutation rules can be derived:
[a(

k
i
), a(

k
j
)] = 0 , [a

(

k
i
), a

(

k
j
)] = 0 , [a(

k
i
), a

(

k
j
)] = δ
ij
Hence for free spin-0 particles holds: H
0
=
¸
i
a

(

k
i
)a(

k
i
)¯ hω
ki
15.2 Classical and quantum fields
Starting with a real field Φ
α
(x) (complex fields can be split in a real and an imaginary part), the Lagrange
density L is a function of the position x = (x, ict) through the fields: L = L(Φ
α
(x), ∂
ν
Φ
α
(x)). The La-
grangian is given by L =

L(x)d
3
x. Using the variational principle δI(Ω) = 0 and with the action-integral
I(Ω) =

L(Φ
α
, ∂
ν
Φ
α
)d
4
x the field equation can be derived:
∂L
∂Φ
α


∂x
ν
∂L
∂(∂
ν
Φ
α
)
= 0
The conjugated field is, analogous to momentum in classical mechanics, defined as:
Π
α
(x) =
∂L

˙
Φ
α
86 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
With this, the Hamilton density becomes H(x) = Π
α
˙
Φ
α
−L(x).
Quantization of a classical field is analogous to quantization in point mass mechanics: the field functions are
considered as operators obeying certain commutation rules:

α
(x), Φ
β
(x

)] = 0 , [Π
α
(x), Π
β
(x

)] = 0 , [Φ
α
(x), Π
β
(x

)] = iδ
αβ
(x −x

)
15.3 The interaction picture
Some equivalent formulations of quantum mechanics are possible:
1. Schr¨ odinger picture: time-dependent states, time-independent operators.
2. Heisenberg picture: time-independent states, time-dependent operators.
3. Interaction picture: time-dependent states, time-dependent operators.
The interaction picture can be obtained from the Schr¨ odinger picture by an unitary transformation:
[Φ(t)` = e
iH
S
0

S
(t)` and O(t) = e
iH
S
0
O
S
e
−iH
S
0
The index
S
denotes the Schr¨ odinger picture. From this follows:
i
d
dt
[Φ(t)` = H
int
(t)[Φ(t)` and i
d
dt
O(t) = [O(t), H
0
]
15.4 Real scalar field in the interaction picture
It is easy to find that, with M := m
2
0
c
2
/¯h
2
, holds:

∂t
Φ(x) = Π(x) and

∂t
Π(x) = (∇
2
−M
2
)Φ(x)
From this follows that Φ obeys the Klein-Gordon equation (✷ − M
2
)Φ = 0. With the definition k
2
0
=

k
2
+M
2
:= ω
2
k
and the notation

k x −ik
0
t := kx the general solution of this equation is:
Φ(x) =
1

V
¸

k
1


k

a(

k )e
ikx
+a

(

k )e
−ikx

, Π(x) =
i

V
¸

k

1
2
ω
k

−a(

k )e
ikx
+a

(

k )e
−ikx

The field operators contain a volume V , which is used as normalization factor. Usually one can take the limit
V →∞.
In general it holds that the term with e
−ikx
, the positive frequency part, is the creation part, and the negative
frequency part is the annihilation part.
the coefficients have to be each others hermitian conjugate because Φ is hermitian. Because Φ has only one
component this can be interpreted as a field describing a particle with spin zero. From this follows that the
commutation rules are given by [Φ(x), Φ(x

)] = i∆(x −x

) with
∆(y) =
1
(2π)
3

sin(ky)
ω
k
d
3
k
∆(y) is an odd function which is invariant for proper Lorentz transformations (no mirroring). This is consistent
with the previously found result [Φ(x, t, Φ(x

, t)] = 0. In general holds that ∆(y) = 0 outside the light cone.
So the equations obey the locality postulate.
The Lagrange density is given by: L(Φ, ∂
ν
Φ) = −
1
2
(∂
ν
Φ∂
ν
Φ +m
2
Φ
2
). The energy operator is given by:
H =

H(x)d
3
x =
¸

k
¯hω
k
a

(

k )a(

k )
Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 87
15.5 Charged spin-0 particles, conservation of charge
The Lagrange density of charged spin-0 particles is given by: L = −(∂
ν
Φ∂
ν
Φ

+M
2
ΦΦ

).
Noether’s theorem connects a continuous symmetry of L and an additive conservation law. Suppose that
L((Φ
α
)

, ∂
ν

α
)

) = L(Φ
α
, ∂
ν
Φ
α
) and there exists a continuous transformation between Φ
α
and Φ
α
such
as Φ
α
= Φ
α
+f
α
(Φ). Then holds

∂x
ν

∂L
∂(∂
ν
Φ
α
)
f
α

= 0
This is a continuity equation ⇒conservation law. Which quantity is conserved depends on the symmetry. The
above Lagrange density is invariant for a change in phase Φ → Φe

: a global gauge transformation. The
conserved quantity is the current density J
µ
(x) = −ie(Φ∂
µ
Φ

− Φ


µ
Φ). Because this quantity is 0 for real
fields a complex field is needed to describe charged particles. When this field is quantized the field operators
are given by
Φ(x) =
1

V
¸

k
1


k

a(

k )e
ikx
+b

(

k )e
−ikx

, Φ

(x) =
1

V
¸

k
1


k

a

(

k )e
ikx
+b(

k )e
−ikx

Hence the energy operator is given by:
H =
¸

k
¯hω
k

a

(

k )a(

k ) +b

(

k )b(

k )

and the charge operator is given by:
Q(t) = −i

J
4
(x)d
3
x ⇒Q =
¸

k
e

a

(

k )a(

k ) −b

(

k )b(

k )

From this follows that a

a := N
+
(

k ) is an occupation number operator for particles with a positive charge
and b

b := N

(

k ) is an occupation number operator for particles with a negative charge.
15.6 Field functions for spin-
1
2
particles
Spin is defined by the behaviour of the solutions ψ of the Dirac equation. A scalar field Φ has the property
that, if it obeys the Klein-Gordon equation, the rotated field
˜
Φ(x) := Φ(Λ
−1
x) also obeys it. Λ denotes
4-dimensional rotations: the proper Lorentz transformations. These can be written as:
˜
Φ(x) = Φ(x)e
−in·

L
with L
µν
= −i¯h

x
µ

∂x
ν
−x
ν

∂x
µ

For µ ≤ 3, ν ≤ 3 these are rotations, for ν = 4, µ = 4 these are Lorentz transformations.
A rotated field
˜
ψ obeys the Dirac equation if the following condition holds:
˜
ψ(x) = D(Λ)ψ(Λ
−1
x). This
results in the condition D
−1
γ
λ
D = Λ
λµ
γ
µ
. One finds: D = e
in·

S
with S
µν
= −i
1
2
¯hγ
µ
γ
ν
. Hence:
˜
ψ(x) = e
−i(S+L)
ψ(x) = e
−iJ
ψ(x)
Then the solutions of the Dirac equation are given by:
ψ(x) = u
r
±
( p )e
−i( p·x±Et)
Here, r is an indication for the direction of the spin, and ± is the sign of the energy. With the notation
v
r
( p ) = u
r

(− p ) and u
r
( p ) = u
r
+
( p ) one can write for the dot products of these spinors:
u
r
+
( p )u
r

+
( p ) =
E
M
δ
rr
, u
r

( p )u
r


( p ) =
E
M
δ
rr
, u
r
+
( p )u
r


( p ) = 0
88 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Because of the factor E/M this is not relativistic invariant. A Lorentz-invariant dot product is defined by
ab := a

γ
4
b, where a := a

γ
4
is a row spinor. From this follows:
u
r
( p )u
r

( p ) = δ
rr
, v
r
( p )v
r

( p ) = −δ
rr
, u
r
( p )v
r

( p ) = 0
Combinations of the type aa give a 4 4 matrix:
2
¸
r=1
u
r
( p )u
r
( p ) =
−iγ
λ
p
λ
+M
2M
,
2
¸
r=1
v
r
( p )v
r
( p ) =
−iγ
λ
p
λ
−M
2M
The Lagrange density which results in the Dirac equation and having the correct energy normalization is:
L(x) = −ψ(x)

γ
µ

∂x
µ
+M

ψ(x)
and the current density is J
µ
(x) = −ieψγ
µ
ψ.
15.7 Quantization of spin-
1
2
fields
The general solution for the fieldoperators is in this case:
ψ(x) =

M
V
¸
p
1

E
¸
r

c
r
( p )u
r
( p )e
ipx
+d

r
( p )v
r
( p )e
−ipx

and
ψ(x) =

M
V
¸
p
1

E
¸
r

c

r
( p )u
r
( p )e
−ipx
+d
r
( p )v
r
( p )e
ipx

Here, c

and c are the creation respectively annihilation operators for an electron and d

and d the creation
respectively annihilation operators for a positron. The energy operator is given by
H =
¸
p
E
p
2
¸
r=1

c

r
( p )c
r
( p ) −d
r
( p )d

r
( p )

To prevent that the energy of positrons is negative the operators must obey anti commutation rules in stead of
commutation rules:
[c
r
( p ), c

r
( p )]
+
= [d
r
( p ), d

r
( p )]
+
= δ
rr
δ
pp
, all other anti commutators are 0.
The field operators obey

α
(x), ψ
β
(x

)] = 0 , [ψ
α
(x), ψ
β
(x

)] = 0 , [ψ
α
(x), ψ
β
(x

)]
+
= −iS
αβ
(x −x

)
with S(x) =

γ
λ

∂x
λ
−M

∆(x)
The anti commutation rules give besides the positive-definite energy also the Pauli exclusion principle and the
Fermi-Dirac statistics: because c

r
( p )c

r
( p ) = −c

r
( p )c

r
( p ) holds: ¦c

r
(p)¦
2
= 0. It appears to be impossible
to create two electrons with the same momentum and spin. This is the exclusion principle. Another way to see
this is the fact that ¦N
+
r
( p )¦
2
= N
+
r
( p ): the occupation operators have only eigenvalues 0 and 1.
To avoid infinite vacuum contributions to the energy and charge the normal product is introduced. The expres-
sion for the current density now becomes J
µ
= −ieN(ψγ
µ
ψ). This product is obtained by:
• Expand all fields into creation and annihilation operators,
• Keep all terms which have no annihilation operators, or in which they are on the right of the creation
operators,
• In all other terms interchange the factors so that the annihilation operators go to the right. By an inter-
change of two fermion operators add a minus sign, by interchange of two boson operators not. Assume
hereby that all commutators are zero.
Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 89
15.8 Quantization of the electromagnetic field
Starting with the Lagrange density L = −
1
2
∂A
ν
∂x
µ
∂A
ν
∂x
µ
it follows for the field operators A(x):
A(x) =
1

V
¸

k
1


k
4
¸
m=1

a
m
(

k )
m
(

k )e
ikx
+a

(

k )
m
(

k )

e
−ikx

The operators obey [a
m
(

k ), a

m
(

k )] = δ
mm
δ
kk
. All other commutators are 0. m gives the polarization
direction of the photon: m = 1, 2 gives transversal polarized, m = 3 longitudinal polarized and m = 4
timelike polarized photons. Further holds:
[A
µ
(x), A
ν
(x

)] = iδ
µν
D(x −x

) with D(y) = ∆(y)[
m=0
In spite of the fact that A
4
= iV is imaginary in the classical case, A
4
is still defined to be hermitian be-
cause otherwise the sign of the energy becomes incorrect. By changing the definition of the inner product in
configuration space the expectation values for A
1,2,3
(x) ∈ IR and for A
4
(x) become imaginary.
If the potentials satisfy the Lorentz gauge condition ∂
µ
A
µ
= 0 the E and B operators derived from these
potentials will satisfy the Maxwell equations. However, this gives problems with the commutation rules. It is
now demanded that only those states are permitted for which holds
∂A
+
µ
∂x
µ
[Φ` = 0
This results in:

∂A
µ
∂x
µ

= 0.
From this follows that (a
3
(

k ) − a
4
(

k ))[Φ` = 0. With a local gauge transformation one obtains N
3
(

k ) = 0
and N
4
(

k ) = 0. However, this only applies to free EM-fields: in intermediary states in interactions there
can exist longitudinal and timelike photons. These photons are also responsible for the stationary Coulomb
potential.
15.9 Interacting fields and the S-matrix
The S(scattering)-matrix gives a relation between the initial and final states of an interaction: [Φ(∞)` =
S[Φ(−∞)`. If the Schr¨ odinger equation is integrated:
[Φ(t)` = [Φ(−∞)` −i
t

−∞
H
int
(t
1
)[Φ(t
1
)`dt
1
and perturbation theory is applied one finds that:
S =

¸
n=0
(−i)
n
n!

T ¦H
int
(x
1
) H
int
(x
n
)¦ d
4
x
1
d
4
x
n


¸
n=0
S
(n)
Here, the T-operator means a time-ordered product: the terms in such a product must be ordered in increasing
time order from the right to the left so that the earliest terms act first. The S-matrix is then given by: S
ij
=

i
[S[Φ
j
` = 'Φ
i
[Φ(∞)`.
The interaction Hamilton density for the interaction between the electromagnetic and the electron-positron
field is: H
int
(x) = −J
µ
(x)A
µ
(x) = ieN(ψγ
µ
ψA
µ
)
When this is expanded as: H
int
= ieN


+



µ

+


)(A
+
µ
+A

µ
)

90 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
eight terms appear. Each term corresponds with a possible process. The term ieψ
+
γ
µ
ψ
+
A

µ
acting on [Φ`
gives transitions where A

µ
creates a photon, ψ
+
annihilates an electron and ψ
+
annihilates a positron. Only
terms with the correct number of particles in the initial and final state contribute to a matrix element 'Φ
i
[S[Φ
j
`.
Further the factors in H
int
can create and thereafter annihilate particles: the virtual particles.
The expressions for S
(n)
contain time-ordered products of normal products. This can be written as a sum of
normal products. The appearing operators describe the minimal changes necessary to change the initial state
into the final state. The effects of the virtual particles are described by the (anti)commutator functions. Some
time-ordened products are:
T ¦Φ(x)Φ(y)¦ = N ¦Φ(x)Φ(y)¦ +
1
2

F
(x −y)
T

ψ
α
(x)ψ
β
(y)
¸
= N

ψ
α
(x)ψ
β
(y)
¸

1
2
S
F
αβ
(x −y)
T ¦A
µ
(x)A
ν
(y)¦ = N ¦A
µ
(x)A
ν
(y)¦ +
1
2
δ
µν
D
F
µν
(x −y)
Here, S
F
(x) = (γ
µ

µ
−M)∆
F
(x), D
F
(x) = ∆
F
(x)[
m=0
and

F
(x) =

1
(2π)
3

e
ikx
ω

k
d
3
k if x
0
> 0
1
(2π)
3

e
−ikx
ω

k
d
3
k if x
0
< 0
The term
1
2

F
(x − y) is called the contraction of Φ(x) and Φ(y), and is the expectation value of the time-
ordered product in the vacuum state. Wick’s theorem gives an expression for the time-ordened product of
an arbitrary number of field operators. The graphical representation of these processes are called Feynman
diagrams. In the x-representation each diagram describes a number of processes. The contraction functions
can also be written as:

F
(x) = lim
→0
−2i
(2π)
4

e
ikx
k
2
+m
2
−i
d
4
k and S
F
(x) = lim
→0
−2i
(2π)
4

e
ipx

µ
p
µ
−M
p
2
+M
2
−i
d
4
p
In the expressions for S
(2)
this gives rise to terms δ(p +k −p

−k

). This means that energy and momentum
is conserved. However, virtual particles do not obey the relation between energy and momentum.
15.10 Divergences and renormalization
It turns out that higher orders contribute infinite terms because only the sum p + k of the four-momentum of
the virtual particles is fixed. An integration over one of them becomes ∞. In the x-representation this can
be understood because the product of two functions containing δ-like singularities is not well defined. This is
solved by discounting all divergent diagrams in a renormalization of e and M. It is assumed that an electron, if
there would not be an electromagnetical field, would have a mass M
0
and a charge e
0
unequal to the observed
mass M and charge e. In the Hamilton and Lagrange density of the free electron-positron field appears M
0
.
So this gives, with M = M
0
+∆M:
L
e−p
(x) = −ψ(x)(γ
µ

µ
+M
0
)ψ(x) = −ψ(x)(γ
µ

µ
+M)ψ(x) +∆Mψ(x)ψ(x)
and H
int
= ieN(ψγ
µ
ψA
µ
) −i∆eN(ψγ
µ
ψA
µ
).
15.11 Classification of elementary particles
Elementary particles can be categorized as follows:
1. Hadrons: these exist of quarks and can be categorized in:
I. Baryons: these exist of 3 quarks or 3 antiquarks.
Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 91
II. Mesons: these exist of one quark and one antiquark.
2. Leptons: e
±
, µ
±
, τ
±
, ν
e
, ν
µ
, ν
τ
, ν
e
, ν
µ
, ν
τ
.
3. Field quanta: γ, W
±
, Z
0
, gluons, gravitons (?).
An overview of particles and antiparticles is given in the following table:
Particle spin (¯h) B L T T
3
S C B

charge (e) m
0
(MeV) antipart.
u 1/2 1/3 0 1/2 1/2 0 0 0 +2/3 5 u
d 1/2 1/3 0 1/2 −1/2 0 0 0 −1/3 9 d
s 1/2 1/3 0 0 0 −1 0 0 −1/3 175 s
c 1/2 1/3 0 0 0 0 1 0 +2/3 1350 c
b 1/2 1/3 0 0 0 0 0 −1 −1/3 4500 b
t 1/2 1/3 0 0 0 0 0 0 +2/3 173000 t
e

1/2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 0.511 e
+
µ

1/2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 105.658 µ
+
τ

1/2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 1777.1 τ
+
ν
e
1/2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0(?) ν
e
ν
µ
1/2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0(?) ν
µ
ν
τ
1/2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0(?) ν
τ
γ 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 γ
gluon 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gluon
W
+
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +1 80220 W

Z 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 91187 Z
graviton 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 graviton
Here B is the baryon number and L the lepton number. It is found that there are three different lepton numbers,
one for e, µ and τ, which are separately conserved. T is the isospin, with T
3
the projection of the isospin on
the third axis, C the charmness, S the strangeness and B

the bottomness. The anti particles have quantum
numbers with the opposite sign except for the total isospin T. The composition of (anti)quarks of the hadrons
is given in the following table, together with their mass in MeV in their ground state:
π
0 1
2

2(uu+dd) 134.9764 J/Ψ cc 3096.8 Σ
+
d d s 1197.436
π
+
ud 139.56995 Υ bb 9460.37 Ξ
0
u s s 1314.9
π

du 139.56995 p
+
u u d 938.27231 Ξ
0
u s s 1314.9
K
0
sd 497.672 p

u u d 938.27231 Ξ

d s s 1321.32
K
0
ds 497.672 n
0
u d d 939.56563 Ξ
+
d s s 1321.32
K
+
us 493.677 n
0
u d d 939.56563 Ω

s s s 1672.45
K

su 493.677 Λ u d s 1115.684 Ω
+
s s s 1672.45
D
+
cd 1869.4 Λ u d s 1115.684 Λ
+
c
u d c 2285.1
D

dc 1869.4 Σ
+
u u s 1189.37 ∆
2−
u u u 1232.0
D
0
cu 1864.6 Σ

u u s 1189.37 ∆
2+
u u u 1232.0
D
0
uc 1864.6 Σ
0
u d s 1192.55 ∆
+
u u d 1232.0
F
+
cs 1969.0 Σ
0
u d s 1192.55 ∆
0
u d d 1232.0
F

sc 1969.0 Σ

d d s 1197.436 ∆

d d d 1232.0
Each quark can exist in two spin states. So mesons are bosons with spin 0 or 1 in their ground state, while
baryons are fermions with spin
1
2
or
3
2
. There exist excited states with higher internal L. Neutrino’s have a
helicity of −
1
2
while antineutrino’s have only +
1
2
as possible value.
The quantum numbers are subject to conservation laws. These can be derived from symmetries in the La-
grange density: continuous symmetries give rise to additive conservation laws, discrete symmetries result in
multiplicative conservation laws.
Geometrical conservation laws are invariant under Lorentz transformations and the CPT-operation. These are:
1. Mass/energy because the laws of nature are invariant for translations in time.
92 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
2. Momentum because the laws of nature are invariant for translations in space.
3. Angular momentum because the laws of nature are invariant for rotations.
Dynamical conservation laws are invariant under the CPT-operation. These are:
1. Electrical charge because the Maxwell equations are invariant under gauge transformations.
2. Colour charge is conserved.
3. Isospin because QCD is invariant for rotations in T-space.
4. Baryon number and lepton number are conserved but not under a possible SU(5) symmetry of the laws
of nature.
5. Quarks type is only conserved under the colour interaction.
6. Parity is conserved except for weak interactions.
The elementary particles can be classified into three families:
leptons quarks antileptons antiquarks
1st generation e

d e
+
d
ν
e
u ν
e
u
2nd generation µ

s µ
+
s
ν
µ
c ν
µ
c
3rd generation τ

b τ
+
b
ν
τ
t ν
τ
t
Quarks exist in three colours but because they are confined these colours cannot be seen directly. The color
force does not decrease with distance. The potential energy will become high enough to create a quark-
antiquark pair when it is tried to disjoin an (anti)quark from a hadron. This will result in two hadrons and not
in free quarks.
15.12 P and CP-violation
It is found that the weak interaction violates P-symmetry, and even CP-symmetry is not conserved. Some
processes which violate P symmetry but conserve the combination CP are:
1. µ-decay: µ

→e


µ

e
. Left-handed electrons appear more than 1000as much as right-handed
ones.
2. β-decay of spin-polarized
60
Co:
60
Co →
60
Ni +e


e
. More electrons with a spin parallel to the Co
than with a spin antiparallel are created: (parallel−antiparallel)/(total)=20%.
3. There is no connection with the neutrino: the decay of the Λ particle through: Λ → p
+
+ π

and
Λ →n
0

0
has also these properties.
The CP-symmetry was found to be violated by the decay of neutral Kaons. These are the lowest possible states
with a s-quark so they can decay only weakly. The following holds: C[K
0
` = η[K
0
` where η is a phase factor.
Further holds P[K
0
` = −[K
0
` because K
0
and K
0
have an intrinsic parity of −1. From this follows that K
0
and K
0
are not eigenvalues of CP: CP[K
0
` = [K
0
`. The linear combinations
[K
0
1
` :=
1
2

2([K
0
` +[K
0
`) and [K
0
2
` :=
1
2

2([K
0
` − [K
0
`)
are eigenstates of CP: CP[K
0
1
` = +[K
0
1
` and CP[K
0
2
` = −[K
0
2
`. A base of K
0
1
and K
0
2
is practical while
describing weak interactions. For colour interactions a base of K
0
and K
0
is practical because then the number
u−number u is constant. The expansion postulate must be used for weak decays:
[K
0
` =
1
2
('K
0
1
[K
0
` +'K
0
2
[K
0
`)
Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 93
The probability to find a final state with CP= −1 is
1
2
[

K
0
2
[K
0

[
2
, the probability of CP=+1 decay is
1
2
[

K
0
1
[K
0

[
2
.
The relation between the mass eigenvalues of the quarks (unaccented) and the fields arising in the weak currents
(accented) is (u

, c

, t

) = (u, c, t), and:

¸
d

s

b

¸

=

¸
1 0 0
0 cos θ
2
sinθ
2
0 −sinθ
2
cos θ
2
¸

¸
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 e

¸

¸
cos θ
1
sin θ
1
0
−sin θ
1
cos θ
1
0
0 0 1
¸

¸
1 0 0
0 cos θ
3
sinθ
3
0 −sinθ
3
cos θ
3
¸

¸
d
s
b
¸

θ
1
≡ θ
C
is the Cabibbo angle: sin(θ
C
) ≈ 0.23 ±0.01.
15.13 The standard model
When one wants to make the Lagrange density which describes a field invariant for local gauge transformations
from a certain group, one has to perform the transformation

∂x
µ

D
Dx
µ
=

∂x
µ
−i
g
¯h
L
k
A
k
µ
Here the L
k
are the generators of the gauge group (the “charges”) and the A
k
µ
are the gauge fields. g is the
matching coupling constant. The Lagrange density for a scalar field becomes:
L = −
1
2
(D
µ
Φ

D
µ
Φ +M
2
Φ

Φ) −
1
4
F
a
µν
F
µν
a
and the field tensors are given by: F
a
µν
= ∂
µ
A
a
ν
−∂
ν
A
a
µ
+gc
a
lm
A
l
µ
A
m
ν
.
15.13.1 The electroweak theory
The electroweak interaction arises from the necessity to keep the Lagrange density invariant for local gauge
transformations of the group SU(2)⊗U(1). Right- and left-handed spin states are treated different because the
weak interaction does not conserve parity. If a fifth Dirac matrix is defined by:
γ
5
:= γ
1
γ
2
γ
3
γ
4
= −

¸
¸
¸
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
¸

the left- and right- handed solutions of the Dirac equation for neutrino’s are given by:
ψ
L
=
1
2
(1 +γ
5
)ψ and ψ
R
=
1
2
(1 −γ
5

It appears that neutrino’s are always left-handed while antineutrino’s are always right-handed. The hypercharge
Y , for quarks given by Y = B +S +C +B

+T

, is defined by:
Q =
1
2
Y +T
3
so [Y, T
k
] = 0. The group U(1)
Y
⊗SU(2)
T
is taken as symmetry group for the electroweak interaction because
the generators of this group commute. The multiplets are classified as follows:
e

R
ν
eL
e

L
u
L
d

L
u
R
d
R
T 0
1
2
1
2
0 0
T
3
0
1
2

1
2
1
2

1
2
0 0
Y −2 −1
1
3
4
3

2
3
94 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
Now, 1 field B
µ
(x) is connected with gauge group U(1) and 3 gauge fields

A
µ
(x) are connected with SU(2).
The total Lagrange density (minus the fieldterms) for the electron-fermion field now becomes:
L
0,EW
= −(ψ
νe,L
, ψ
eL

µ


µ
−i
g
¯h

A
µ
(
1
2
σ) −
1
2
i
g

¯h
B
µ
(−1)

ψ
νe,L
ψ
eL


ψ
eR
γ
µ


µ

1
2
i
g

¯h
(−2)B
µ

ψ
eR
Here,
1
2
σ are the generators of T and −1 and −2 the generators of Y .
15.13.2 Spontaneous symmetry breaking: the Higgs mechanism
All leptons are massless in the equations above. Their mass is probably generated by spontaneous symmetry
breaking. This means that the dynamic equations which describe the systemhave a symmetry which the ground
state does not have. It is assumed that there exists an isospin-doublet of scalar fields Φ with electrical charges
+1 and 0 and potential V (Φ) = −µ
2
Φ

Φ + λ(Φ

Φ)
2
. Their antiparticles have charges −1 and 0. The extra
terms in L arising from these fields, L
H
= (D

Φ)

(D
µ
L
Φ) − V (Φ), are globally U(1)⊗SU(2) symmetric.
Hence the state with the lowest energy corresponds with the state Φ

(x)Φ(x) = v = µ
2
/2λ =constant.
The field can be written (were ω
±
and z are Nambu-Goldstone bosons which can be transformed away, and
m
φ
= µ

2) as:
Φ =

Φ
+
Φ
0

=


+
(v +φ −iz)/

2

and '0[Φ[0` =

0
v/

2

Because this expectation value = 0 the SU(2) symmetry is broken but the U(1) symmetry is not. When the
gauge fields in the resulting Lagrange density are separated one obtains:
W

µ
=
1
2

2(A
1
µ
+iA
2
µ
) , W
+
µ
=
1
2

2(A
1
µ
−iA
2
µ
)
Z
µ
=
gA
3
µ
−g

B
µ

g
2
+g
2
≡ A
3
µ
cos(θ
W
) −B
µ
sin(θ
W
)
A
µ
=
g

A
3
µ
+gB
µ

g
2
+g
2
≡ A
3
µ
sin(θ
W
) +B
µ
cos(θ
W
)
where θ
W
is called the Weinberg angle. For this angle holds: sin
2

W
) = 0.255 ± 0.010. Relations for the
masses of the field quanta can be obtained from the remaining terms: M
W
=
1
2
vg and M
Z
=
1
2
v

g
2
+g
2
,
and for the elementary charge holds: e =
gg

g
2
+g
2
= g

cos(θ
W
) = g sin(θ
W
)
Experimentally it is found that M
W
= 80.022 ±0.26 GeV/c
2
and M
Z
= 91.187 ±0.007 GeV/c
2
. According
to the weak theory this should be: M
W
= 83.0 ±0.24 GeV/c
2
and M
Z
= 93.8 ±2.0 GeV/c
2
.
15.13.3 Quantumchromodynamics
Coloured particles interact because the Lagrange density is invariant for the transformations of the group SU(3)
of the colour interaction. A distinction can be made between two types of particles:
1. “White” particles: they have no colour charge, the generator

T = 0.
2. “Coloured” particles: the generators

T are 8 3 3 matrices. There exist three colours and three anti-
colours.
The Lagrange density for coloured particles is given by
L
QCD
= i
¸
k
Ψ
k
γ
µ
D
µ
Ψ
k
+
¸
k,l
Ψ
k
M
kl
Ψ
l

1
4
F
a
µν
F
µν
a
The gluons remain massless because this Lagrange density does not contain spinless particles. Because left-
and right- handed quarks now belong to the same multiplet a mass term can be introduced. This term can be
brought in the form M
kl
= m
k
δ
kl
.
Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 95
15.14 Path integrals
The development in time of a quantum mechanical system can, besides with Schr¨ odingers equation, also be
described by a path integral (Feynman):
ψ(x

, t

) =

F(x

, t

, x, t)ψ(x, t)dx
in which F(x

, t

, x, t) is the amplitude of probability to find a system on time t

in x

if it was in x on time t.
Then,
F(x

, t

, x, t) =

exp

iS[x]
¯h

d[x]
where S[x] is an action-integral: S[x] =

L(x, ˙ x, t)dt. The notation d[x] means that the integral has to be
taken over all possible paths [x]:

d[x] := lim
n→∞
1
N
¸
n

−∞
dx(t
n
)

in which N is a normalization constant. To each path is assigned a probability amplitude exp(iS/¯h). The
classical limit can be found by taking δS = 0: the average of the exponent vanishes, except where it is
stationary. In quantum fieldtheory, the probability of the transition of a fieldoperator Φ(x, −∞) to Φ

(x, ∞)
is given by
F(Φ

(x, ∞), Φ(x, −∞)) =

exp

iS[Φ]
¯h

d[Φ]
with the action-integral
S[Φ] =


L(Φ, ∂
ν
Φ)d
4
x
15.15 Unification and quantum gravity
The strength of the forces varies with energy and the reciprocal coupling constants approach each other with
increasing energy. The SU(5) model predicts complete unification of the electromagnetical, weak and colour
forces at 10
15
GeV. It also predicts 12 extra X bosons which couple leptons and quarks and are i.g. responsible
for proton decay, with dominant channel p
+
→ π
0
+ e
+
, with an average lifetime of the proton of 10
31
year.
This model has been experimentally falsified.
Supersymmetric models assume a symmetry between bosons and fermions and predict partners for the cur-
rently known particles with a spin which differs
1
2
. The supersymmetric SU(5) model predicts unification at
10
16
GeV and an average lifetime of the proton of 10
33
year. The dominant decay channels in this theory are
p
+
→K
+

µ
and p
+
→K
0

+
.
Quantum gravity plays only a role in particle interactions at the Planck dimensions, where λ
C
≈ R
S
: m
Pl
=

hc/G = 3 10
19
GeV, t
Pl
= h/m
Pl
c
2
=

hG/c
5
= 10
−43
sec and r
Pl
= ct
Pl
≈ 10
−35
m.
Chapter 16
Astrophysics
16.1 Determination of distances
The parallax is mostly used to determine distances in nearby space. The parallax is the angular difference
between two measurements of the position of the object from different view-points. If the annual parallax is
given by p, the distance R of the object is given by R = a/ sin(p), in which a is the radius of the Earth’s orbit.
The clusterparallax is used to determine the distance of a group of stars by using their motion w.r.t. a fixed
background. The tangential velocity v
t
and the radial velocity v
r
of the stars along the sky are given by
v
r
= V cos(θ) , v
t
= V sin(θ) = ωR
where θ is the angle between the star and the point of convergence and
ˆ
R the
distance in pc. This results, with v
t
= v
r
tan(θ), in:
R =
v
r
tan(θ)
ω

ˆ
R =
1

p
where p is the parallax in arc seconds. The parallax is then given by
p =
4.74µ
v
r
tan(θ)
RR-Lyrae
Type 2
Type 1
0,1 0,3 1 3 10 30 100
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
P (days) →
'M`
with µ de proper motion of the star in

/yr. A method to determine the distance of objects which are somewhat
further away, like galaxies and star clusters, uses the period-Brightness relation for Cepheids. This relation is
shown in the above figure for different types of stars.
16.2 Brightness and magnitudes
The brightness is the total radiated energy per unit of time. Earth receives s
0
= 1.374 kW/m
2
from the Sun.
Hence, the brightness of the Sun is given by L

= 4πr
2
s
0
= 3.82 10
26
W. It is also given by:
L

= 4πR
2

0
πF
ν

where πF
ν
is the monochromatic radiation flux. At the position of an observer this is πf
ν
, with f
ν
= (R/r)
2
F
ν
if absorption is ignored. If A
ν
is the fraction of the flux which reaches Earth’s surface, the transmission factor
is given by R
ν
and the surface of the detector is given by πa
2
, then the apparent brightness b is given by:
b = πa
2

0
f
ν
A
ν
R
ν

The magnitude m is defined by:
b
1
b
2
= (100)
1
5
(m2−m1)
= (2.512)
m2−m1
Chapter 16: Astrophysics 97
because the human eye perceives lightintensities logaritmical. From this follows that m
2
− m
1
= 2.5
10
log(b
1
/b
2
), or: m = −2.5
10
log(b) + C. The apparent brightness of a star if this star would be at a distance
of 10 pc is called the absolute brightness B: B/b = (ˆ r/10)
2
. The absolute magnitude is then given by
M = −2.5
10
log(B) +C, or: M = 5 +m−5
10
log(ˆ r). When an interstellar absorption of 10
−4
/pc is taken
into account one finds:
M = (m−4 10
−4
ˆ r) +5 −5
10
log(ˆ r)
If a detector detects all radiation emitted by a source one would measure the absolute bolometric magnitude.
If the bolometric correction BC is given by
BC = 2.5
10
log

Energy flux received
Energy flux detected

= 2.5
10
log

f
ν

f
ν
A
ν
R
ν

holds: M
b
= M
V
−BC where M
V
is the visual magnitude. Further holds
M
b
= −2.5
10
log

L
L

+4.72
16.3 Radiation and stellar atmospheres
The radiation energy passing through a surface dA is dE = I
ν
(θ, ϕ) cos(θ)dνdΩdAdt, where I
µ
is the
monochromatical intensity [Wm
−2
sr
−1
Hz
−1
]. When there is no absorption the quantity I
ν
is independent
of the distance to the source. Planck’s law holds for a black body:
I
ν
(T) ≡ B
ν
(T) =
c

w
ν
(T) =
2hν
3
c
2
1
exp(hν/kT) −1
The radiation transport through a layer can then be written as:
dI
ν
ds
= −I
ν
κ
ν
+j
ν
Here, j
ν
is the coefficient of emission and κ
ν
the coefficient of absorption.

ds is the thickness of the layer.
The optical thickness τ
ν
of the layer is given by τ
ν
=

κ
ν
ds. The layer is optically thin if τ
ν
< 1, the layer
is optically thick if τ
ν
1. For a stellar atmosphere in LTE holds: j
ν
= κ
ν
B
ν
(T). Then also holds:
I
ν
(s) = I
ν
(0)e
−τν
+B
ν
(T)(1 −e
−τν
)
16.4 Composition and evolution of stars
The structure of a star is described by the following equations:
dM(r)
dr
= 4π(r)r
2
dp(r)
dr
= −
GM(r)(r)
r
2
L(r)
dr
= 4π(r)ε(r)r
2

dT(r)
dr

rad
= −
3
4
L(r)
4πr
2
κ(r)
4σT
3
(r)
, (Eddington), or

dT(r)
dr

conv
=
T(r)
p(r)
γ −1
γ
dp(r)
dr
, (convective energy transport)
Further, for stars of the solar type, the composing plasma can be described as an ideal gas:
p(r) =
(r)kT(r)
µm
H
98 Physics Formulary by ir. J.C.A. Wevers
where µ is the average molecular mass, usually well approximated by:
µ =

nm
H
=
1
2X +
3
4
Y +
1
2
Z
where X is the mass fraction of H, Y the mass fraction of He and Z the mass fraction of the other elements.
Further holds:
κ(r) = f((r), T(r), composition) and ε(r) = g((r), T(r), composition)
Convection will occur when the star meets the Schwartzschild criterium:

dT
dr

conv
<

dT
dr

rad
Otherwise the energy transfer takes place by radiation. For stars in quasi-hydrostatic equilibrium hold the
approximations r =
1
2
R, M(r) =
1
2
M, dM/dr = M/R, κ ∼ and ε ∼ T
µ
(this last assumption is only
valid for stars on the main sequence). For pp-chains holds µ ≈ 5 and for the CNO chains holds µ = 12 tot 18.
It can be derived that L ∼ M
3
: the mass-brightness relation. Further holds: L ∼ R
4
∼ T
8
eff
. This results in
the equation for the main sequence in the Hertzsprung-Russel diagram:
10
log(L) = 8
10
log(T
eff
) +constant
16.5 Energy production in stars
The net reaction from which most stars gain their energy is: 4
1
H →
4
He +2e
+
+2ν
e
+γ.
This reaction produces 26.72 MeV. Two reaction chains are responsible for this reaction. The slowest, speed-
limiting reaction is shown in boldface. The energy between brackets is the energy carried away by the neutrino.
1. The proton-proton chain can be divided into two subchains:
1
H+p
+

2
D+e
+

e
, and then
2
D + p →
3
He +γ.
I. pp1:
3
He +
3
He →2p
+
+
4
He. There is 26.21 + (0.51) MeV released.
II. pp2:
3
He +α →
7
Be +γ
i.
7
Be +e


7
Li +ν, then
7
Li +p
+
→2
4
He +γ. 25.92 + (0.80) MeV.
ii.
7
Be +p
+

8
B +γ, then
8
B +e
+
→2
4
He +ν. 19.5 + (7.2) MeV.
Both
7
Be chains become more important with raising T.
2. The CNO cycle. The first chain releases 25.03 + (1.69) MeV, the second 24.74 + (1.98) MeV. The
reactions are shown below.
−→ `

15
N + p
+
→α +
12
C
15
N + p
+

16
O+γ
↓ ↓
15
O+e
+

15
N +ν
12
C +p
+

13
N +γ
16
O+p
+

17
F +γ
↑ ↓ ↓
14
N+p
+

15
O+γ
13
N →
13
C +e
+

17
F →
17
O+e
+

↓ ↓
` ←
13
C +p
+

14
N +γ
17
O+p
+
→α +
14
N
←−
The ∇ operator 99
The ∇-operator
In cartesian coordinates (x, y, z) holds:

∇ =

∂x
e
x
+

∂y
e
y
+

∂z
e
z
, gradf =

∇f =
∂f
∂x
e
x
+
∂f
∂y
e
y
+
∂f
∂z
e
z
div a =

∇ a =
∂a
x
∂x
+
∂a
y
∂y
+
∂a
z
∂z
, ∇
2
f =

2
f
∂x
2
+

2
f
∂y
2
+

2
f
∂z
2
rot a =

∇a =

∂a
z
∂y

∂a
y
∂z

e
x
+

∂a
x
∂z

∂a
z
∂x

e
y
+

∂a
y
∂x

∂a
x
∂y

e
z
In cylinder coordinates (r, ϕ, z) holds:

∇ =

∂r
e
r
+
1
r

∂ϕ
e
ϕ
+

∂z
e
z
, gradf =
∂f
∂r
e
r
+
1
r
∂f
∂ϕ
e
ϕ
+
∂f
∂z
e
z
div a =
∂a
r
∂r
+
a
r
r
+
1
r
∂a
ϕ
∂ϕ
+
∂a
z
∂z
, ∇
2
f =

2
f
∂r
2
+
1
r
∂f
∂r
+
1
r
2

2
f
∂ϕ
2
+

2
f
∂z
2
rot a =

1
r
∂a
z
∂ϕ

∂a
ϕ
∂z

e
r
+

∂a
r
∂z

∂a
z
∂r

e
ϕ
+

∂a
ϕ
∂r
+
a
ϕ
r

1
r
∂a
r
∂ϕ

e
z
In spherical coordinates (r, θ, ϕ) holds:

∇ =

∂r
e
r
+
1
r

∂θ
e
θ
+
1
r sinθ

∂ϕ
e
ϕ
gradf =
∂f
∂r
e
r
+
1
r
∂f
∂θ
e
θ
+
1
r sin θ
∂f
∂ϕ
e
ϕ
div a =
∂a
r
∂r
+
2a
r
r
+
1
r
∂a
θ
∂θ
+
a
θ
r tanθ
+
1
r sinθ
∂a
ϕ
∂ϕ
rot a =

1
r
∂a
ϕ
∂θ
+
a
θ
r tanθ

1
r sinθ
∂a
θ
∂ϕ

e
r
+

1
r sin θ
∂a
r
∂ϕ

∂a
ϕ
∂r

a
ϕ
r

e
θ
+

∂a
θ
∂r
+
a
θ
r

1
r
∂a
r
∂θ

e
ϕ

2
f =

2
f
∂r
2
+
2
r
∂f
∂r
+
1
r
2

2
f
∂θ
2
+
1
r
2
tanθ
∂f
∂θ
+
1
r
2
sin
2
θ

2
f
∂ϕ
2
General orthonormal curvelinear coordinates (u, v, w) can be obtained fromcartesian coordinates by the trans-
formation x = x(u, v, w). The unit vectors are then given by:
e
u
=
1
h
1
∂x
∂u
, e
v
=
1
h
2
∂x
∂v
, e
w
=
1
h
3
∂x
∂w
where the factors h
i
set the norm to 1. Then holds:
gradf =
1
h
1
∂f
∂u
e
u
+
1
h
2
∂f
∂v
e
v
+
1
h
3
∂f
∂w
e
w
div a =
1
h
1
h
2
h
3


∂u
(h
2
h
3
a
u
) +

∂v
(h
3
h
1
a
v
) +

∂w
(h
1
h
2
a
w
)

rot a =
1
h
2
h
3

∂(h
3
a
w
)
∂v

∂(h
2
a
v
)
∂w

e
u
+
1
h
3
h
1

∂(h
1
a
u
)
∂w

∂(h
3
a
w
)
∂u

e
v
+
1
h
1
h
2

∂(h
2
a
v
)
∂u

∂(h
1
a
u
)
∂v

e
w

2
f =
1
h
1
h
2
h
3
¸

∂u

h
2
h
3
h
1
∂f
∂u

+

∂v

h
3
h
1
h
2
∂f
∂v

+

∂w

h
1
h
2
h
3
∂f
∂w

100 The SI units
The SI units
Basic units
Quantity Unit Sym.
Length metre m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
Therm. temp. kelvin K
Electr. current ampere A
Luminous intens. candela cd
Amount of subst. mol mol
Extra units
Plane angle radian rad
solid angle sterradian sr
Derived units with special names
Quantity Unit Sym. Derivation
Frequency hertz Hz s
−1
Force newton N kg m s
−2
Pressure pascal Pa N m
−2
Energy joule J N m
Power watt W J s
−1
Charge coulomb C A s
El. Potential volt V W A
−1
El. Capacitance farad F C V
−1
El. Resistance ohm Ω V A
−1
El. Conductance siemens S A V
−1
Mag. flux weber Wb V s
Mag. flux density tesla T Wb m
−2
Inductance henry H Wb A
−1
Luminous flux lumen lm cd sr
Illuminance lux lx lm m
−2
Activity bequerel Bq s
−1
Absorbed dose gray Gy J kg
−1
Dose equivalent sievert Sv J kg
−1
Prefixes
yotta Y 10
24
giga G 10
9
deci d 10
−1
pico p 10
−12
zetta Z 10
21
mega M 10
6
centi c 10
−2
femto f 10
−15
exa E 10
18
kilo k 10
3
milli m 10
−3
atto a 10
−18
peta P 10
15
hecto h 10
2
micro µ 10
−6
zepto z 10
−21
tera T 10
12
deca da 10 nano n 10
−9
yocto y 10
−24

c 1995, 2009 J.C.A. Wevers Dear reader,

Version: December 16, 2009

A This document contains a 108 page L TEX file which contains a lot equations in physics. It is written at advanced undergraduate/postgraduate level. It is intended to be a short reference for anyone who works with physics and often needs to look up equations.

This, and a Dutch version of this file, (johanw@xs4all.nl).

can be obtained from the author,

Johan Wevers

It can also be obtained on the WWW. See http://www.xs4all.nl/˜johanw/index.html, where also a Postscript version is available. If you find any errors or have any comments, please let me know. I am always open for suggestions and possible corrections to the physics formulary.
A A The Physics Formulary is made with teTEX and LTEX version 2.09. It can be possible that your L TEX version has problems compiling the file. The most probable source of problems would be the use of large bezier curves and/or emTEX specials in pictures. If you prefer the notation in which vectors are typefaced in boldface, uncomment the redefinition of the \vec command in the TEX file and recompile the file.

This work is licenced under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Netherlands License. To view a copy of this licence, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/nl/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 171 Second Street, Suite 300, San Francisco, California 94105, USA. Johan Wevers

Contents
Contents Physical Constants 1 Mechanics 1.1 Point-kinetics in a fixed coordinate system . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Polar coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Relative motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Point-dynamics in a fixed coordinate system . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Force, (angular)momentum and energy . . . . . 1.3.2 Conservative force fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Gravitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Orbital equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.5 The virial theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Point dynamics in a moving coordinate system . . . . . 1.4.1 Apparent forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Tensor notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Dynamics of masspoint collections . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 The centre of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Dynamics of rigid bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Moment of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Principal axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.3 Time dependence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Variational Calculus, Hamilton and Lagrange mechanics 1.7.1 Variational Calculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Hamilton mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.3 Motion around an equilibrium, linearization . . . 1.7.4 Phase space, Liouville’s equation . . . . . . . . 1.7.5 Generating functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electricity & Magnetism 2.1 The Maxwell equations . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Force and potential . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Gauge transformations . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Energy of the electromagnetic field . . . . 2.5 Electromagnetic waves . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Electromagnetic waves in vacuum 2.5.2 Electromagnetic waves in matter . 2.6 Multipoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Electric currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Depolarizing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Mixtures of materials . . . . . . . . . . . I 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .1 The Lorentz transformation . . . . . . . 6. . . . .3 Principal planes . . . . . . . .2 Red and blue shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . .9 Special optical effects . . . . .4 Green functions for the initial-value problem . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2. . . . . . . the Einstein tensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Riemannian geometry. . . . . .2 Spherical waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Waves in long conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Cosmology . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . .A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Statistical physics 7. . . . . . . . . . .4 The general solution in one dimension 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The equation of state . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Diffraction . . 3. . . . . . .1 Lenses . . .3 Matrix methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . .3 The stationary phase method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Mechanic oscillations . .2 The line element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 22 22 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 30 30 30 31 31 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The trajectory of a photon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The bending of light . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Plane waves . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Optics 6. . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Gravitational waves . . .II Physics Formulary by ir. . . . . . . . 4. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . .1 The wave equation . . . . .5 Waveguides and resonating cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Solutions of the wave equation .10 The Fabry-Perot interferometer . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Waves 5. . . . . . . . . .5 Collisions between molecules . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The energy distribution function 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. .2. . 6.7 Prisms and dispersion . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Planetary orbits and the perihelion shift . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Pendulums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 General relativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Pressure on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 6. . . . . . . . . . 3. . 6. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Magnification . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . .3 Cylindrical waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . Wevers 3 Relativity 3. . . . . . . . .6 Non-linear wave equations . . . . . . . . . 6. . 7. .2 Mirrors . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Aberrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Oscillations 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . .1 Harmonic oscillations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Reflection and transmission . . . . . . . . . .2 Paraxial geometrical optics . . . . . . .3 Electric oscillations . . .5 Coupled conductors and transformers 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . .1 Special relativity . . . . .6 Polarization . .3 The stress-energy tensor and the field tensor 3. . . . . . . . .

. . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . .13 Interaction with electromagnetic fields . . . . . . .8 Heat conductance . . . . . . . . .12. . . . .2 Time-dependent perturbation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . .2 The Compton effect . . . . .4 Selection rules . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Thermodynamic potential . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Turbulence . . . . . 10. . . . .8 Phase transitions . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 The harmonic oscillator . 10. . . . . . . . . . . .4 The uncertainty principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Mathematical introduction .7 Boundary layers . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Physics Formulary by ir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Thermal heat capacity . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Application to other systems . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Introduction to quantum physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Solutions . . . . .7 Maximal work .6 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Atomic physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Self organization . . . . . . .2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Statistical basis for thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Electron diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Eigenvalue equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . .C. . . . . . . . .3 Spin-orbit interaction . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . .5 The Schr¨ dinger equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Wave functions . . . . . . . . . . .4 Characterising of flows by dimensionless numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Temperature boundary layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. o 10. . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Potential theory .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The laws of thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . .1 Mathematical introduction . . . . . . . . . . . Wevers III 7. . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Transport phenomena 9. . . . .14 Perturbation theory . 10. . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . .10 Spin . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Interaction between molecules . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Bernoulli’s equations . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A. . .5 State functions and Maxwell relations 8. . . . . . . . . . 10 Quantum physics 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 35 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 41 41 42 42 43 43 43 43 44 44 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 47 48 48 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 50 51 8 Thermodynamics 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Angular momentum . . . .7 The tunnel effect . . .3 Operators in quantum physics .14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 The Dirac formalism . 9. . . .11 Conditions for equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Black body radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . .2 Conservation laws . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Tube flows . . . . . .1 Time-independent perturbation theory 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. 10. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Flow boundary layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Ideal mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IV Physics Formulary by ir.6 The BCS model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Crystal vibrations .8 Collision-radiative models . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 11. . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Semiconductors . . . .8. . . . . . . . .6 Radiation . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . .5 The London equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Electric conductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Elastic collisions . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . 11. .7 The Boltzmann transport equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Solid state physics 12. . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . 11. . 12. . . . . .A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Description . . . .2 Cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . 12. . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Crystal binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . .4 The centre of mass system . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Thermodynamic equilibrium and reversibility 11. . . . . . . . . .8 Superconductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Thermal heat capacity . . .5. . . . . . .5 Free electron Fermi gas . 12. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Transport . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .8. .4 Macroscopic quantum interference . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Dielectrics . . . . . 12. .16 Quantum statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Paramagnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8. . .1 Thermal heat capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . 11.3 The Hall-effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . .5 Scattering of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Waves in plasma’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Energy bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 N-particle systems 10. . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Flux quantisation in a superconducting ring 12. .2 Molecules 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Thermal heat conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . .15. . . . . .15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wevers 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . 51 51 52 52 54 54 54 55 55 56 56 56 56 57 57 57 58 58 59 60 60 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 67 67 67 67 68 68 69 69 70 70 70 11 Plasma physics 11. . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . .5. .2 The Coulomb interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Ferromagnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Types of collisions .3 The induced dipole interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Phonons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Josephson effect . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Magnetic field in the solid state . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . .1 Crystal structure . . . . . . .5 Inelastic collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .2 A lattice with two types of atoms . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 A lattice with one type of atoms . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . .2 Classical and quantum fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Symmetric transformations of operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Divergences and renormalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . .7 Applications to particle physics . . . . . .1 Nuclear forces . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Quantization of the electromagnetic field . . 13. . . . Wevers V 13 Theory of groups 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Character . . . . . . .12 P and CP-violation . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . 71 71 71 71 71 72 72 72 72 72 72 73 73 73 73 74 74 74 75 75 75 75 76 77 77 77 78 79 81 81 82 82 83 83 83 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 89 89 90 90 92 93 93 94 . . . . . . . . . .5 Charged spin-0 particles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .6 Field functions for spin. . . . . . . . . . .3 Conjugated elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . 14. . . . . .2 particles . . . . . . 15 Quantum field theory & Particle physics 15. . . .1 The 3-dimensional translation group . . .2 The shape of the nucleus . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .11 Classification of elementary particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem . . . . . . . . .7 The Wigner-Eckart theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The construction of a base function . .3 Properties of continuous groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The direct product of representations . . . .1 Definition of a group . . . .3 Radioactive decay . . . . . 13. . . . . .Physics Formulary by ir. . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . . . 13. . . . . 13. 15. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13 The standard model . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . .3. . . . . . .1 Creation and annihilation operators . 14. . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 Schur’s lemma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Breaking of degeneracy by a perturbation . . . . .C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Representations. . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . .9 Interacting fields and the S-matrix . . .3 The relation with quantum mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .3 Conservation of energy and momentum in nuclear reactions 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . irreducible tensor operators .3. . . . . . . . . 15. .4. . . . .1 Introduction . . .3. . . . .2 Quantum mechanical model for n-p scattering . . . . . . . subgroups and classes . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem . . . . . . . .2 fields . . . . . . . . . . . .4. .1 Kinetic model . . . . . . . . 1 15. . . . . . . . . .4 Real scalar field in the interaction picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The electroweak theory . . . 14. . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . .5 The group SO(3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . .4 Continuous groups .5 Radiation dosimetry . . . . . . . . 14. . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The interaction picture .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .2 Spontaneous symmetry breaking: the Higgs mechanism . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Reducible and irreducible representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Quantization of spin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .2. matrixelements and selection rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Scattering and nuclear reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Applications to quantum mechanics . . . . . 1 15. . .2 The Cayley table . . . . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . 14. . . . . 15. . . .1 Vectormodel for the addition of angular momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . energy levels and degeneracy . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . 13. .4. .1. .2 Irreducible tensor operators. . . . . . . . . . 14 Nuclear physics 14. . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . 13. .2 The 3-dimensional rotation group . . . . . . . . . conservation of charge . . . . . .4 Isomorfism and homomorfism. . . . . 15. . . . . 13.

. . . . . .13. . . . . . . .3 Quantumchromodynamics . . . .3 Radiation and stellar atmospheres 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ∇-operator The SI units 94 95 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 99 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Brightness and magnitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C. . . .1 Determination of distances . . . 15. . . . . .VI Physics Formulary by ir. . . . . . . . . . 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. .4 Composition and evolution of stars 16. . . . . . .15 Unification and quantum gravity . . . . . . .14 Path integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wevers 15. 15. . . 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Energy production in stars . . . . . . . 16 Astrophysics 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0857 · 1016 ≈ (75 ± 25) C m3 kg−1 s−2 m/s (def) F/m H/m Nm2 C−2 Js Js Am2 ˚ A eV m m kg Wm−2 K−4 mK J·mol −1 ·K−1 mol−1 J/K kg kg kg kg J/T m kg days m kg hours days m m m km·s −1 ·Mpc−1 1 12 12 m( 6 C) D M T RA MA TA Tropical year AU lj pc H .24219879 1.38 6.989 · 1030 25.595 2.976 · 1024 23.14159265358979323846 2. κ α = e 2 /2hcε0 c ε0 µ0 h h ¯ = h/2π µ B = e¯ /2me h a0 Ry λ Ce = h/me c λ Cp = h/mp c µH σ kW R NA k = R/N A me mp mn mu = µN 1.Physical Constants Name Number π Number e Euler’s constant Elementary charge Gravitational constant Fine-structure constant Speed of light in vacuum Permittivity of the vacuum Permeability of the vacuum (4πε0 )−1 Planck’s constant Dirac’s constant Bohr magneton Bohr radius Rydberg’s constant Electron Compton wavelength Proton Compton wavelength Reduced mass of the H-atom Stefan-Boltzmann’s constant Wien’s constant Molar gasconstant Avogadro’s constant Boltzmann’s constant Electron mass Proton mass Neutron mass Elementary mass unit Nuclear magneton Diameter of the Sun Mass of the Sun Rotational period of the Sun Radius of Earth Mass of Earth Rotational period of Earth Earth orbital period Astronomical unit Light year Parsec Hubble constant Symbol π e n Value 3.1045755 · 10−31 5.6726231 · 10−27 1.52918 13.60217733 · 10 −19 6.6260755 · 10 −34 1.96 365.5772156649 k=1 Unit γ = lim n→∞ e G.67259 · 10 −11 ≈ 1/137 2.99792458 · 10 8 8.9876 · 109 6.6605656 · 10−27 5.67032 · 10 −8 2.3214 · 10−15 9.71828182845904523536 1/k − ln(n) = 0.1093897 · 10−31 1.378 · 106 5.0221367 · 1023 1.380658 · 10−23 9.2741 · 10−24 0.4959787066 · 10 11 9.854187 · 10−12 4π · 10−7 8.4605 · 10 15 3.8978 · 10−3 8.2463 · 10−12 1.0508 · 10−27 1392 · 106 1.0545727 · 10−34 9.674954 · 10−27 1.31441 6.

r(t) = r0 + v(t)dt . t) = d(mv ) dv dm m=const dp = =m +v = ma dt dt dt dt . a = (¨ − rθ2 )er + (2r θ + rθ)eθ . the velocity v and the acceleration a are defined by: r = (x. y. v = (x.3 Point-dynamics in a fixed coordinate system 1.1 Definitions The position r.1.1 Force.Chapter 1 Mechanics 1.2 Polar coordinates Polar coordinates are defined by: x = r cos(θ). a point Q holds: r D = rQ + ω × vQ ˙ with QD = rD − rQ and ω = θ. y. means that the quantity is defined in a moving system of coordinates. v = rer + rθeθ . e˙θ = −θer ˙ ˙ ¨ The velocity and the acceleration are derived from: r = re r . So.1 Point-kinetics in a fixed coordinate system 1. y . z).1. z). ˙ ˙ ˙ x ¨ ¨ The following holds: s(t) = s0 + |v(t)|dt . en = |v| ds ρ |e˙t | For the curvature k and the radius of curvature ρ holds: k= d2 r det 1 dϕ = 2 = .2 Relative motion For the motion of a point D w. (angular)momentum and energy Newton’s 2nd law connects the force on an object and the resulting acceleration of the object where the momentum is given by p = mv: F (r. In a moving system holds: v = vQ + v + ω × r and a = aQ + a + α × r + 2ω × v + ω × (ω × r ) with ω × (ω × r ) = −ω 2 r n 1. y = r sin(θ). a = (¨.t. z ). v(t) = v0 + a(t)dt When the acceleration is constant this gives: v(t) = v 0 + at and s(t) = s0 + v0 t + 1 at2 .r. ˙ r ˙˙ 1. for the unit coordinate vectors holds: ˙ ˙ e˙r = θeθ .3. ρ= ds ds ds |k| 1. v. 2 For the unit vectors in a direction ⊥ to the orbit e t and parallel to it e n holds: et = dr ˙ v v e˙t = et = en . ω2 ¨ Further holds: α = θ.

|L| = mr2 ω. ˙ For the power P holds: P = W = F · v. if F is conservative: W =constant. delivered by a force. 2 The kick S is given by: S = ∆p = F dt 2 2 The work A. 1. is A = 1 F · ds = 1 F cos(α)ds ˙ The torque τ is related to the angular momentum L: τ = L = r × F . From Gauss law it then follows: ∇ 2 V = 4πG . 1. The following equation is valid: τ =− Hence. if F ⊥ v then ∆T = 0 and U = 0.3.Chapter 1: Mechanics 3 Newton’s 3rd law is given by: Faction = −Freaction . except when the motion starts. The force of friction is usually proportional to the force perpendicular to the surface.4 Orbital equations If V = V (r) one can derive from the equations of Lagrange for φ the conservation of angular momentum: ∂L ∂V d = = 0 ⇒ (mr2 φ) = 0 ⇒ Lz = mr2 φ = constant ∂φ ∂φ dt For the radial position as a function of time can be found that: dr dt The angular equation is then: r 2 = L2 2(W − V ) − 2 2 m m r −1 φ − φ0 = 0 mr2 L L2 2(W − V ) − 2 2 m m r dr r −2 field = arccos 1 + 1 r 1 r0 − 1 r0 + km/L2 z If F = F (r): L =constant. . For such a force field also holds: r1 F · ds = 0 ⇒ U = U0 − r0 F · ds So the work delivered by a conservative force field depends not on the trajectory covered but only on the starting and ending points of the motion.3. and L = r × p = mv × r.2 Conservative force fields A conservative force can be written as the gradient of a potential: Fcons = −∇U .3 Gravitation The Newtonian law of gravitation is (in GRT one also uses κ instead of G): Fg = −G m1 m2 er r2 The gravitational potential is then given by V = −Gm/r.3. 1. From this follows that ∇ × F = 0. the conditions for a mechanical equilibrium are: ∂U ∂θ Fi = 0 and τi = 0. the kinetic energy T and the potential energy ˙ ˙ U holds: W = T + U . when a threshold has to be overcome: F fric = f · Fnorm · et . T = −U with T = 1 mv 2 . For the total energy W .

curved towards the centre of force.4 Point dynamics in a moving coordinate system 1.4 Physics Formulary by ir. or: x2 + y 2 = ( − εx)2 2W L2 k L2 . 2. Centrifugal force: Fcf = mω 2 rn = −Fcp . Fcp = − mv 2 er r . The different apparent forces are given by: 1. If the surface between the orbit covered between t 1 and t2 and the focus C around which the planet moves is A(t1 . t2 ). Transformation of the origin: F or = −maa 2. J.A. k < 0 and ε = 0: a circle. Other combinations are not possible: the total energy in a repulsive force field is always positive so ε > 1. 3. 4.C. Now. Orbits with an equal ε are of equal shape. Coriolis force: Fcor = −2mω × v 4. a = = 2M 2 Gµ tot G µ Mtot a 1−ε 2W a is half the√ length of the long axis of the elliptical orbit in case the orbit is closed. Kepler’s 2nd law is LC (t2 − t1 ) A(t1 . t2 ) = 2m Kepler’s 3rd law is. 5 types of orbits are possible: = 1. Wevers Kepler’s orbital equations In a force field F = kr −2 . k < 0 and ε = 1: a parabole. ε2 = 1 + 2 3 2 = 1 − . The equation of the orbit is: r(θ) = with 1 + ε cos(θ − θ0 ) . curved away from the centre of force. 1. Half the length of the short axis is b = a . k > 0 and ε > 1: a hyperbole.4.5 The virial theorem The virial theorem for one particle is: mv · r = 0 ⇒ T = − 1 F · r = 2 The virial theorem for a collection of particles is: T = −1 2 particles 1 2 r dU dr = 1 n U if U = − 2 k rn Fi · ri + pairs Fij · rij These propositions can also be written as: 2E kin + Epot = 0. 5. the orbits are conic sections with the origin of the force in one of the foci (Kepler’s 1st law). with T the period and M tot the total mass of the system: T2 4π 2 = 3 a GMtot 1. k < 0 and 0 < ε < 1: an ellipse. ε is the excentricity of the orbit. k < 0 and ε > 1: a hyperbole.3. Rotation: Fα = −mα × r 3.1 Apparent forces The total force in a moving coordinate system can be found by subtracting the apparent forces from the forces working in the reference frame: F = F − Fapp .

r.t. with the reduced mass µ given by: 2 2 ˙ 1 1 1 = + µ m1 m2 The motion within and outside the centre of mass can be separated: ˙ ˙ Loutside = τoutside . The changes in the relative velocities can be derived from: S = ∆p = 2 µ(vaft − vbefore ). Linside = τinside p = mvm . F12 = µu 1. dt ∂ xβ dt ¯ The chain rule gives: d2 xα d dxα d = = 2 dt dt dt dt so: x ∂xα d¯β β dt ∂x ¯ = ¯ d¯β d x ∂xα d2 xβ + β dt2 ∂x ¯ dt dt ∂xα ∂ xβ ¯ ∂ 2 xα d¯γ x x ∂ ∂xα d¯γ d ∂xα = = β γ ∂ xβ dt dt ∂ x ¯ ∂x ¯ ¯ ∂ xβ ∂ xγ dt ¯ ¯ d2 xα ¯ x ∂xα d2 xβ ∂ 2 xα d¯γ = + β γ 2 β dt2 dt ∂x ¯ ∂ x ∂ x dt ¯ ¯ d2 xα = Fα dt2 = Fα dxβ dxγ . dt dt d¯β x dt This leads to: Hence the Newtonian equation of motion m will be transformed into: m d2 xα dxβ dxγ + Γα βγ 2 dt dt dt The apparent forces are taken from he origin to the effect side in the way Γ α βγ 1. Further holds ∆ LC = CB × S.5. holds: p = mv m 2 is constant.5 Dynamics of masspoint collections 1.r.2 Tensor notation Transformation of the Newtonian equations of motion to x α = xα (x) gives: dxα ∂xα d¯β x = . the kinetic energy becomes: T = 1 Mtot R2 + 1 µr2 .1 The centre of mass ˙ The velocity w. . the coordinates of the centre of mass are given by: R= m1 r1 + m2 r2 m1 + m2 ˙ With r = r1 − r2 .t. and T = 1 mvm is constant.5.2 Collisions With collisions. the centre of mass R is given by v − R. p S =constant and L w. The coordinates of the centre of mass are given by: rm = mi ri mi In a 2-particle system. Fext = mam .Chapter 1: Mechanics 5 1. where B are the coordinates of the collision and C an arbitrary other position. B is constant.4.

3 Time dependence For torque of force τ holds: ¨ τ = Iθ . c. Wevers 1.6. t)dt = 0 with δ(a) = δ(b) = 0 and δ ˙ du dx = d (δu) dx . The torque T is defined by: T = F × d. Ik 1. axis ⊥ through c. Hamilton and Lagrange mechanics 1. Iii = Ii .6. q.m. m I I = 1 mR2 2 I = 1 µR2 2 I = 2 mR2 5 I = 1 ml2 3 I = ma 2 1.D = Iw. which is given by: I= i mi ri 2 .o.6 Physics Formulary by ir. in the continuous case: I= Further holds: Li = I ij ωj .t.C.1 Moment of Inertia The angular momentum in a moving coordinate system is given by: L = Iω + Ln where I is the moment of inertia with respect to a central axis.6. d L =τ −ω×L dt 1. I I = mR 2 I = 1 mR2 4 I = 2 mR2 3 I= I= 1 2 12 ml 1 2 12 m(a Object Massive cylinder Halter Massive sphere Bar.7 Variational Calculus.r. For a principal axis holds: ∂I ∂I ∂I = = = 0 so Ln = 0 ∂ωx ∂ωy ∂ωz The following holds: ω k = −aijk ωi ωj with aijk = ˙ Ii − Ij if I1 ≤ I2 ≤ I3 . Rectangle. Object Cavern cylinder Disc. axis b thr.r.o.C + m(DM )2 if axis C axis D.6 Dynamics of rigid bodies 1. axis in plane disc through m Cavern sphere Bar. T = Wrot = 1 ωIij ei ej = 1 Iω 2 2 2 or. J.1 Variational Calculus Starting with: b δ a L(q. axis ⊥ plane thr. Iij = Iji = − k m V r n dV = 2 r n dm mk xi xj 2 Steiner’s theorem is: Iw.m.7.A.t.2 Principal axes Each rigid body has (at least) 3 principal axes which stand ⊥ to each other. axis ⊥ through end + b2 ) Rectangle.

2 Hamilton mechanics The Lagrangian is given by: L = T (qi ) − V (qi ). pj } = 0. p) = p 2 /2m + 1 mω 2 x2 . φ). V (q) = V (0) + Vik qi qk with Vik = 0 ∂2V ∂qi ∂qk 0 With T = 1 (Mik qi qk ) one receives the set of equations M q + V q = 0. {pi . with inverse θ = arctan(−p/mωx) and I = p2 /2mω + 1 mωx2 it follows: H(θ. This leads to the eigenfrequencies of the problem: aT V ak 2 k 2 .7. pj } = δij where {. This is elegant from a relativistic point of view: this is equivalent to the transformation of the momentum 4-vector p α → pα − qAα . ˙ ˙ ¨ 2 this set of equations has solutions if det(V − ω 2 M ) = 0. The general solution is a superposition if ωk = T ak M ak eigenvibrations. ∂qi i ∂ ∂pi so ∇ · v = i ∂ ∂H ∂ ∂H − ∂qi ∂pi ∂pi ∂qi . } is the Poisson bracket: ∂A ∂B ∂A ∂B {A. {qi . obtained by the canonical transformation x = 2I/mω cos(θ) and p = − 2Imω sin(θ).7.3 Motion around an equilibrium. which make the Hamilton equations the equations of motion for the system. If q i (t) = ai exp(iωt) is substituted. the new problem becomes: δJ(u) − λδK(u) = 0. Liouville’s equation In phase space holds: ∇= i ∂ . With new coordinates 2 √ (θ. B} = − ∂qi ∂pi ∂pi ∂qi i The Hamiltonian of a Harmonic oscillator is given by H(x.4 Phase space. 1. dt ∂pi ∂H dpi =− dt ∂qi Coordinates are canonical if the following holds: {q i . linearization For natural systems around equilibrium the following equations are valid: ∂V ∂qi = 0 . I). 1. A gauge transformation on the potentials A α corresponds with a canonical transformation. ˙ 2 qi pi − L. The Hamiltonian is given by: H = ˙ ˙ dimensions holds: L = T − U = 1 m(r2 + r2 φ2 ) − U (r.Chapter 1: Mechanics 7 the equations of Lagrange can be derived: ∂L d ∂L = dt ∂ qi ˙ ∂qi When there are additional conditions applying to the variational problem δJ(u) = 0 of the type K(u) =constant. I) = ωI. qj } = 0. 1. 2 The Hamiltonian of a charged particle with charge q in an external electromagnetic field is given by: H= 1 p − qA 2m 2 + qV This Hamiltonian can be derived from the Hamiltonian of a free particle H = p 2 /2m with the transformations p → p − q A and H → H − qV . In 2 ˙ If the used coordinates are canonical the Hamilton equations are the equations of motion for the system: ∂H dqi = .7. If the equilibrium is stable holds: ∀k that ω k > 0.

H} + For an arbitrary quantity A holds: dA ∂A = {A. t) one can derive the following Hamilton equations with the new Hamiltonian K: dQi ∂K = . Qi . t) ˙ .A. Qi . Qi . J. t) + ˙ qi = − ∂F4 ∂F4 ∂F4 . .5 Generating functions Starting with the coordinate transformation: Qi = Qi (qi . t) .8 Physics Formulary by ir. Qi . this can be written as: { . Pi . K =H+ ∂pi ∂Qi ∂t dF4 (pi . If −pi qi − H = Pi Qi − K(Pi . t) . Pi = − .C. pi . K=H+ ∂qi ∂Pi ∂t dF3 (pi . K =H+ ∂qi ∂Qi ∂t dF2 (qi . t) + ˙ qi = − ∂F3 ∂F3 ∂F3 . F2 . H} + dt ∂t Liouville’s theorem can than be written as: d = 0 . Qi . ∂ t + ∇ · ( v ) = 0 holds. the coordinates follow from: dt ∂K dPi =− dt ∂Qi ∂F1 ∂F1 ∂F1 . Qi . t) . F3 and F4 are called generating functions. If pi qi − H = Pi Qi − K(Pi . or: dt pdq = constant ∂ =0 ∂t 1. t) + dt pi = ∂F2 ∂F2 ∂F2 .7. K=H+ ∂pi ∂Pi ∂t The functions F 1 . a distinction between 4 cases can be made: 1. If pi qi − H = −Pi Qi − K(Pi . the coordinates follow from: dt 4. t) − ˙ pi = dF1 (qi . Pi = − . dt ∂Pi Now. Qi = . t) Pi = Pi (qi . Wevers If the equation of continuity. Pi . the coordinates follow from: dt ˙ 3. If −pi qi − H = −Pi Qi − K(Pi . pi . the coordinates follow from: ˙ 2. Qi = .

M = m/Vol. the magnetization M and the magnetic flux density B depend on each other according to: B = µ0 (H + M ) = µ0 µr H. The electric displacement D. with χm = µ0 nm2 0 3kT 2. The magnetic field in point P which results from an electric current is given by the law of Biot-Savart.included + For the fluxes holds: Ψ = (D · n )d2 A. Those can be written both as differential and integral equations: (D · n )d2 A = Qfree. E = 4πε0 εr r2 Q The Lorentzforce is the force which is felt by a charged particle that moves through a magnetic field. The origin of this force is a relativistic transformation of the Coulomb force: FL = Q(v × B ) = l(I × B ).2 Force and potential The force and the electric field between 2 point charges are given by: F12 = Q1 Q2 F er .1 The Maxwell equations The classical electromagnetic field can be described by the Maxwell equations.Chapter 2 Electricity & Magnetism 2. µr = 1 + χm . εr = 1 + χe . 2 The potentials are given by: V 12 = − 1 E · ds and A = 1 B × r. Φ = ∇ × H = Jfree + (B · n )d2 A. polarization P and electric field strength E depend on each other according to: D = ε0 E + P = ε0 εr E. with χe = np2 0 3ε0 kT The magnetic field strength H. also known as the law of Laplace. d l I and r points from d l to P : dBP = µ0 I dl × er 4πr2 If the current is time-dependent one has to take retardation into account: the substitution I(t) → I(t − r/c) has to be applied. In here.included (B · n )d2 A = 0 E · ds = − dΦ dt dΨ dt ∇ · D = ρfree ∇·B = 0 ∇×E =− ∂B ∂t ∂D ∂t H · ds = Ifree. 2 . P = p0 /Vol.

2. λ 2 J⊥ (r )eik·r d3 r The energy density of the electromagnetic wave of a vibrating dipole at a large distance is: w = ε0 E 2 = p2 sin2 (θ)ω 4 0 sin2 (kr − ωt) .5 Electromagnetic waves 2. This separates the differential equations for A and V : ✷V = − .A. B = ∇×A ∂t Further holds the relation: c 2 B = v × E.C. t) = A(r ) exp(−iωt) with: A(r ) = µ 4π J(r ) exp(ik|r − r |) 3 1 d r . 1. t) = −f (r. Wevers Here. Further.4 Energy of the electromagnetic field The energy density of the electromagnetic field is: dW = w = HdB + EdD dVol The energy density can be expressed in the potentials and currents as follows: wmag = 1 2 J · A d3 x . Two common choices are: ρ 1 ∂V = 0. 16π 2 ε0 r2 c4 w t = p2 sin2 (θ)ω 4 ck 4 |p |2 0 . 2. the freedom remains to apply a gauge transformation. the freedom remains to apply a limiting condition. Coulomb gauge: ∇ · A = 0. with c = (ε 0 µ0 )−1/2 : Ψ(r. P = 2 ε r 2 c4 32π 0 12πε0 The radiated energy can be derived from the Poynting vector S: S = E × H = cW ev . The radiation pressure p s is given by ps = (1 + R)|S |/c. wel = 1 2 ρV d3 x 2. 2. Lorentz-gauge: ∇ · A + 2 c ∂t ε0 ✷A = −µ0 J. if d. This results in a canonical transformation of the Hamiltonian. t) has the general solution. J. where R is the coefficient of reflection.5. The irradiance is the time-averaged of the Poynting vector: I = | S | t .1 Electromagnetic waves in vacuum The wave equation ✷Ψ(r. t) = J(r ) exp(−iωt) and A(r.3 Gauge transformations The potentials of the electromagnetic fields transform as follows when a gauge transformation is applied:   A = A − ∇f ∂f  V =V + ∂t so the fields E and B do not change. The fields can be derived from the potentials as follows: ∂A E = −∇V − . t − |r − r |/c) 3 d r 4π|r − r | exp(ik|r − r |) 3 d r |r − r | r: If this is written as: J(r. . t) = f (r.10 Physics Formulary by ir. V (r ) = |r − r | 4πε k2 dP = dΩ 32π 2 ε0 c ρ(r ) A derivation via multipole expansion will show that for the radiated energy holds. If ρ = 0 and J = 0 holds V = 0 and follows A from ✷A = 0.

µω . The electric dipole: dipole moment: p = Qle. the wave vanishes after approximately one wavelength. If k is written in the form k := k + ik it follows that: 1 2 εµ k =ω 1+ 1+ 1 and k = ω (ρεω)2 1 2 εµ −1 + 1+ 1 (ρεω)2 This results in a damped wave: E = E exp(−k n · r ) exp(i(k n · r − ωt)). k1 = ρdV r cos(θ)ρdV 1 2 i 2 2 (3zi − ri ) • Quadrupole: l = 2. . are: ∇2 − εµ ∂2 µ ∂ − ∂t2 ρ ∂t E =0. k = (1 + i) 2ρ 2. W = −µ × Bout |µ| = 2B −µ 3µ · r Magnetic field: B = − µ . k 0 = • Dipole: l = 1. The electric current is given by: ∂t I= dQ = dt (J · n )d2 A For most conductors holds: J = E/ρ. The torque is: τ = p × Eout 4πεr3 r2 √ 2.7 Electric currents The continuity equation for charge is: ∂ρ + ∇ · J = 0. The magnetic dipole: dipole moment: if r A: µ = I × (Ae⊥ ). where e goes from ⊕ to . and F = (p · ∇)Eext . The moment is: τ = µ × Bout 4πr3 r2 2. and W = −p · Eout . with c mat = (εµ)−1/2 the lightspeed in matter. where ρ is the resistivity.2 Electromagnetic waves in matter The wave equations in matter.6 Multipoles Because 1 1 = |r − r | r ∞ 0 r r l Pl (cos θ) the potential can be written as: V = Q 4πε n kn rn For the lowest-order terms this results in: • Monopole: l = 0. 3p · r Q Electric field: E ≈ − p .Chapter 2: Electricity & Magnetism 11 2. If the material is a good conductor. k 2 = 1. ∇2 − εµ ∂2 µ ∂ − ∂t2 ρ ∂t B=0 give. the second from the conductance current. F = (µ · ∇)Bout 2 mv⊥ .5. after substitution of monochromatic plane waves: E = E exp(i(k ·r −ωt)) and B = B exp(i(k ·r −ωt)) the dispersion relation: iµω k 2 = εµω 2 + ρ The first term arises from the displacement current.

depending on the direction of the current: the Peltier effect. For a few limiting cases of an ellipsoid holds: a thin plane: N = 1. the field strength within and outside the material will change because the material will be polarized or magnetized. dt µN I where l is the length. This effect can be amplified with semiconductors. this results in a self-inductance which opposes the original change: dI Vselfind = −L . The current through a 2 dV . Further holds: φi εi −1 ≤ ε∗ ≤ i φi εi i . 2 The capacity is defined by: C = Q/V . J. If a current flows through two different. with 0 ≤ N ≤ 1. The generated or removed heat is given by: W = Πxy It. Kirchhoff’s equations apply: for a knot holds: along a closed path holds: Vn = In Rn = 0. In = 0.7 mV/K. For a NTC holds: R(T ) = C exp(−B/T ) where B and C depend only on the material. a long. R the radius The magnetic induction within a coil is approximated by: B = √ 2 + 4R2 l and N the number of coils. 3 2. 2. The accumulated energy is given by W = 1 CV 2 . the contact area will heat up or cool down. where R0 = ρl/A. If the current If the flux enclosed by a conductor changes this results in an induced voltage V ind = −N dt flowing through a conductor changes. For a capacitor holds: C = ε 0 εr A/d where d is the distance between the plates and A the surface of one plate. connecting conductors x and y.2 − 0. If a conductor encloses a flux Φ holds: Φ = LI. thin bar: N = 0. Wevers dΦ .A. If the medium has an ellipsoidal shape and one of the principal axes is parallel with the external field E0 or B0 then the depolarizing is field homogeneous. Edep = Emat − E0 = − NP ε0 Hdep = Hmat − H0 = −N M N is a constant depending only on the shape of the object placed in the field. a sphere: N = 1 . The thermic voltage between 2 metals is given by: V = γ(T − T 0 ). For a Cu-Konstantane connection holds: γ ≈ 0.C.8 Depolarizing field If a dielectric material is placed in an electric or magnetic field.9 Mixtures of materials The average electric displacement in a material which is inhomogenious on a mesoscopic scale is given by: −1 φ2 (1 − x) where x = ε1 /ε2 . capacity is given by I = −C dt For most PTC resistors holds approximately: R = R 0 (1 + αT ). The electric field strength between the plates is E = σ/ε 0 = Q/ε0 A where σ is the surface charge. The energy contained within a coil is given by W = 1 LI 2 and L = µN 2 A/l.12 Physics Formulary by ir. For a sphere holds: Φ = D = εE = ε∗ E where ε∗ = ε1 1 − Φ(ε∗ /ε2 ) 1 2 3 + 3 x. In an electrical net with only stationary currents.

with 0 the quantities in a co-moving reference frame and r the quantities in a frame moving with velocity v w. lr = l0 /γ. it. mass and time transform according to: ∆t r = γ∆t0 .1 Special relativity 3. t=γ t + 2 c c If v = vex holds: px = γ px − βW c .1 The Lorentz transformation The Lorentz transformation (x . t)) leaves the wave equation invariant if c is invariant: ∂2 ∂2 1 ∂2 ∂2 ∂2 ∂2 1 ∂2 ∂2 + 2+ 2− 2 2 = + + − 2 2 ∂x2 ∂y ∂z c ∂t ∂x 2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 c ∂t This transformation can also be found when ds 2 = ds 2 is demanded. x = γ(x + vt ) xv xv t =γ t− 2 . The proper time τ is defined as: dτ 2 = ds2 /c2 . t ) = (x (x. .t. The general form of the Lorentz transformation is given by: x =x+ where γ= (γ − 1)(x · v )v x·v − γvt . t). z = z and: x = γ(x − vt) . B = γ B− v×E c2 Length.1. W = γ(W − vpx ) v2 − v1 v1 v2 1− 2 c . so ∆τ = ∆t/γ. t (x.r.Chapter 3 Relativity 3. this becomes y = y. t = γ t − 2 |v|2 c 1 2 1 − v2 c The velocity difference v between two observers transforms according to: v = γ 1− v1 · v2 c2 −1 v2 + (γ − 1) v1 · v2 2 v1 − γv1 v1 If the velocity is parallel to the x-axis. For energy and momentum holds: W = m r c2 = γW0 . v = With β = v/c the electric field of a moving charge is given by: E= Q (1 − β 2 )er 4πε0 r2 (1 − β 2 sin2 (θ))3/2 The electromagnetic field transforms according to: E = γ(E + v × B ) . mr = γm0 .

For particles with zero rest mass (photons).3 The stress-energy tensor and the field tensor The stress-energy tensor is given by: Tµν = ( c2 + p)uµ uν + pgµν + 1 α Fµα Fν + 1 gµν F αβ Fαβ 4 c2 The conservation laws can than be written as: ∇ ν T µν = 0.2 General relativity 3.1. icρ). From δ ds = 0 the equations of motion can be derived: d2 xα dxβ dxγ =0 + Γα βγ 2 ds ds ds . also ⊥ to the direction of motion. κM ∆f = 2. 0 3. The difference of two 4-vectors transforms also as dxα . Gravitational redshift: 3. J. The Maxwell equations can than be written as: ∂ν F µν = µ0 J µ . iV /c) and Jµ := (J. ∂λ Fµν + ∂µ Fνλ + ∂ν Fλµ = 0 The equations of motion for a charged particle in an EM field become with the field tensor: dpα = qFαβ uβ dτ 3.A. for particles with zero restmass (so with v = c) holds: U α Uα = 0. resulting in e.C. The relation with the “common” velocity a 4-vector. Wevers W 2 = m2 c4 + p2 c2 . icγ).14 Physics Formulary by ir. For particles with nonzero restmass holds: U α Uα = −c2 .g. p = mr v = γm0 v = W v/c2 .2. The geodesic postulate: free falling particles move along geodesics of space-time with the proper time τ or arc length s as parameter. the cosmic background radiation: R0 λ0 = . The force is defined by 0 F = dp/dt.and blueshift. The electromagnetic field tensor is given by: Fαβ = ∂Aβ ∂Aα − α ∂x ∂xβ with Aµ := (A. the Einstein tensor The basic principles of general relativity are: 1. the use of a free parameter is required because for them holds ds = 0.2 Red and blue shift There are three causes of red and blue shifts: 1. and pc = W β where β = v/c. λ1 R1 3. f rc 2. iW/c). The 4-vector for the velocity is given by U α = dτ i i α i u := dx /dt is: U = (γu .1. Redshift because the universe expands. Motion: with e v · er = cos(ϕ) follows: v cos(ϕ) f =γ 1− .1 Riemannian geometry. The 4-vector for energy and momentum is given by: pα = m0 U α = (γpi . 4-vectors have the property that their modulus is independent of the observer: their components can change after a coordinate transformation but not their modulus. f c This can give both red. So: pα pα = −m2 c2 = p2 − W 2 /c2 .

3. For a second-order tensor holds: [∇ α . This metric is singular for r = 2m = 2κM/c 2 . By a proper choice of the coordinate system it is possible to make the metric locally flat in each point xi : gαβ (xi ) = ηαβ :=diag(−1. m := M κ/c2 is the geometrical mass of an object with mass M . From this. 1). The external Schwarzschild metric applies in vacuum outside a spherical mass distribution. 1. ∇k aij = ∂k aij − Γki alj − Γkj ajl and ∇k a = ∂k a + Γkl a + Γkl a . that implies that its escape velocity is > c. σµ βν σν βµ βν βµ µ The Ricci tensor is a contraction of the Riemann tensor: R αβ := Rαµβ . j ∂xk ∂ xl ∂x ¯ µ µ σ σ µ are the Christoffel symbols. The equation R αβµν = 0 has as only solution a flat space.2. This constant plays a role in inflatory models of the universe. it is called a black hole. where the covariant derivative is given by ∇j ai = ∂j ai + Γi ak and ∇j ai = ∂j ai − Γk ak . µ The Riemann tensor is defined as: R ναβ T ν := ∇α ∇β T µ − ∇β ∇α T µ . for which 2 holds: ∇β Gαβ = 0. This metric. The most general form of the field equations is: R αβ − 1 gαβ R + Λgαβ = 2 3. and dΩ 2 = dθ2 + sin2 θdϕ2 . The following α holds: Rβµν = ∂µ Γα − ∂ν Γα + Γα Γσ − Γα Γσ . the Laplace equation from Newtonian gravitation can be derived by stating: g µν = ηµν + hµν . the components of g µν are associated with the potentials and the derivatives of g µν with the field strength. which are of second order in g µν . this results in ∇2 h00 = 8πκ /c2 . They are defined by: . The Newtonian limit of this metric is given by: ds2 = −(1 + 2V )c2 dt2 + (1 − 2V )(dx2 + dy 2 + dz 2 ) where V = −κM/r is the Newtonian gravitation potential. Here. where |h| 1.2 The line element The metric tensor in an Euclidean space is given by: g ij = k 2 µ ν ∂ xk ∂ xk ¯ ¯ . 1. The principle of equivalence: inertial mass ≡ gravitational mass ⇒ gravitation is equivalent with a curved space-time were particles move along geodesics. The Kruskal-Szekeres coordinates are used to solve certain problems with the Schwarzschild metric near r = 2m. where R := Rα is the Ricci scalar. 8πκ Tαβ c2 where Λ is the cosmological constant. If an object is smaller than its event horizon 2m. In general relativity. In special relativity this becomes ds 2 = −c2 dt2 + dx2 + dy 2 + dz 2 . 1. ∂xi ∂xj In general holds: ds = gµν dx dx . ij jk Γi = jk g il 2 ∂g k ∂glj ∂glk + − jl k j ∂x ∂x ∂x . With the variational principle δ (L(gµν ) − Rc2 /16πκ) |g|d4 x = 0 for variations gµν → gµν + δgµν the Einstein field equations can be derived: Gαβ = 8πκ Tαβ c2 . for Euclidean spaces this reduces to: Γ i = jk ¯ ∂ 2 xl ∂xi . ηµν :=diag(−1. which is symmetric: Rαβ = Rβα . ∇β ]Tν = Rσαβ Tν + Rναβ Tσ . 1. which can also be written as R αβ = 8πκ µ (Tαβ − 1 gαβ Tµ ) 2 c2 For empty space this is equivalent to R αβ = 0. ∇k ai = j j il i l i i l l l ij ij i lj ∂k aj − Γkj al + Γkl aj . is called the Minkowski metric. In the stationary case. The Bianchi identities are: ∇ λ Rαβµν + ∇ν Rαβλµ + ∇µ Rαβνλ = 0. α The Einstein tensor is given by: G αβ := Rαβ − 1 g αβ R.Chapter 3: Relativity 15 2. The Einstein equations are 10 independent equations. and is given by: ds2 = −1 + 2m r c2 dt2 + 1 − 2m r −1 dr2 + r2 dΩ2 Here. 1).

The line element in these coordinates is given by: ds2 = − 32m3 −r/2m 2 e (dv − du2 ) + r2 dΩ2 r The line r = 2m corresponds to u = v = 0. For the perihelion shift then follows: ∆ϕ = 2πε = 6πm2 /h2 per orbit. this results in an elliptical orbit: u 0 (ϕ) = A + B cos(ϕ) with A = m/h2 and B an arbitrary constant.16 Physics Formulary by ir. This is equivalent to the problem δ ds2 = δ gij dxi dxj = 0. For the metric outside a rotating. In zeroth order. This term can ˙ κM h2 in the classical case also be found from a potential V (r) = − 1+ 2 . a = 0) then √ follows that within the surface R E = m + m2 − a2 cos2 θ (de ergosphere) no particle can be at rest. a = L/M c and e = κQ/ε0 c2 . this corresponds with r = 0. . J.C. The perihelion of a planet is the point for which r is minimal. Substituting the external Schwarzschild metric yields for a planetary orbit: du dϕ d2 u +u dϕ2 = m du 3mu + 2 dϕ h where u := 1/r and h = r 2 ϕ =constant. In first order. be solved with perturbation theory. This is the case if cos(ϕ − εϕ) = 0 ⇒ ϕ ≈ 2πn(1 + ε). Wevers • r > 2m:    u        v  = r r − 1 exp cosh 2m 4m r r − 1 exp sinh 2m 4m 1− 1− r r exp sinh 2m 4m r r exp cosh 2m 4m t 4m t 4m t 4m t 4m = • r < 2m:    u        v  = = • r = 2m: here. The term 3mu is not present in the classical solution. the variational problem δ ds = 0 has to be solved. the Kruskal coordinates are singular. this becomes: u1 (ϕ) = A + B cos(ϕ − εϕ) + ε A + B2 B2 − cos(2ϕ) 2A 6A where ε = 3m2 /h2 is small. the limit x 0 → ∞ with u = v and x0 → −∞ with u = −v. charged spherical mass the Newman metric applies: ds2 = 1− 2mr − e2 r2 + a2 cos2 θ c2 dt2 − r2 + a2 cos2 θ r2 − 2mr + a2 − e2 sin2 θdϕ2 + dr2 − (r2 + a2 cos2 θ)dθ2 − sin2 θ(dϕ)(cdt) r 2 + a2 + (2mr − e2 )a2 sin2 θ r2 + a2 cos2 θ 2a(2mr − e2 ) r2 + a2 cos2 θ where m = κM/c2 . The Kruskal coordinates are only singular on the hyperbole v 2 − u2 = 1. or can. r r The orbital equation gives r =constant as solution. 3. after dividing by du/dϕ. which is necessary to eliminate the coordinate singularity there.A.3 Planetary orbits and the perihelion shift To find a planetary orbit. or u maximal. √ A rotating charged black hole has an event horizon with R S = m + m2 − a2 − e2 .2. For the Kerr metric (e = 0. On the line dv = ±du holds dθ = dϕ = ds = 0. Near rotating black holes frame dragging occurs because g tϕ = 0.

2 The hereto related critical density is c = 3H 2 /8πκ. The expansion velocity of the universe becomes negative 2 after some time: the universe starts collapsing. .j (xi xj − 1 δij r2 )d3 x the mass quadrupole moment. This gives 3 possible conditions for the universe (here. From this. q = 1 .2. W < 0. W is the total amount of energy in the universe): 1. Elliptical universe: k = 1. Hyperbolical universe: k = −1. and has the value ≈ (75 ± 25) km·s −1 ·Mpc−1 . 3 3.Chapter 3: Relativity 17 3. q < positive forever. 2.5 Gravitational waves Starting with the approximation g µν = ηµν + hµν for weak gravitational fields and the definition h µν = hµν − 1 ηµν hα it follows that ✷hµν = 0 if the gauge condition ∂h µν /∂xν = 0 is satisfied. 1 2. This is a measure of the velocity with which galaxies far away are moving away from each other.4 The trajectory of a photon For the trajectory of a photon (and for each particle with zero restmass) holds ds 2 = 0. Each point is equivalent to each other point for a fixed x 0 . is given by: G dE =− 5 dt 5c with Qij = d3 Qij dt3 2 i. 3. 2. W > 0. Substituting the external Schwarzschild metric results in the following orbital equation: du dϕ d2 u + u − 3mu dϕ2 =0 3. The 3-dimensional spaces are isotrope for a certain value of x 0 . The expansion velocity of the universe → 0 if t → ∞.6 Cosmology If for the universe as a whole is assumed: 1. it α 2 follows that the loss of energy of a mechanical system. q > 1 .2. There exists a global time coordinate which acts as x 0 of a Gaussian coordinate system. Parabolical universe: k = 0.2. if the occurring velocities are c and for wavelengths the size of the system. then the Robertson-Walker metric can be derived for the line element: ds2 = −c2 dt2 + 2 r0 R2 (t) kr2 1− 2 4r0 (dr2 + r2 dΩ2 ) For the scalefactor R(t) the following equations can be derived: ˙ ˙ ¨ R2 + kc2 2R R2 + kc2 Λ 8πκp 8πκ + + = − 2 + Λ and = 2 2 R R c R 3 3 where p is the pressure and parameter q: the density of the universe. W = 0. If Λ = 0 can be derived for the deceleration q=− ¨ RR 4πκ = ˙2 3H 2 R ˙ where H = R/R is Hubble’s constant. The expansion velocity of the universe remains 3.

The quality of the system ω0 √ ω Cm is given by Q = . and the width is 2∆ω B = ω0 /Q. iω dtn 4. This is the case for ω A = ω0 1 − 1 Q2 . The phase angle is ϕ := arctan(X/R). In the resonance √ curve |Z|/ Cm is plotted against ω/ω0 . For a critical by ωD = ω0 1 − 4Q2 damped oscillation (k 2 = 4mC) holds ωD = 0. A strong damped oscillation (k 2 > 4mC) drops like (if k2 4mC) x(t) ≈ x0 exp(−t/τ ). and for the velocity holds: x = √ ˙ 2 ) + ikω −ω i Cmδ + k ω ω0 ˙ − . The amplitude resonance frequency ω A is the frequency where iωZ is minimal. The width of this curve is characterized by the points where |Z(ω)| = √ |Z(ω0 )| 2. ˆ where Ψ is the amplitude.Chapter 4 Oscillations 4. The quality of a coil is Q = ωL/R. In these points holds: R = X and δ = ±Q −1 . A weak damped oscillation (k 2 < 4mC) dies out after T D = 2π/ωD . This is equal to ω 0 . 4. A superposition of several harmonic oscillations with the same frequency results in another harmonic oscillation: ˆ ˆ Ψi cos(αi ± ωt) = Φ cos(β ± ωt) i with: tan(β) = i ˆ Ψi sin(αi ) ˆ Ψi cos(αi ) i ˆ and Φ2 = i ˆ Ψ2 + 2 i j>i i ˆ ˆ Ψi Ψj cos(αi − αj ) For harmonic oscillations holds: x(t)dt = dn x(t) x(t) and = (iω)n x(t). It is given 1 .1 Harmonic oscillations ˆ ˆ The general form of a harmonic oscillation is: Ψ(t) = Ψei(ωt±ϕ) ≡ Ψ cos(ωt ± ϕ). The impedance of a resistor is R. The quantity Z = F/x is called the impedance of the system. The stiffness of an oscillating system is given by F/x. of a capacitor 1/iωC and of a self inductor iωL. The total impedance in case several elements are positioned is given by: . With ω0 = C/m follows: x= where δ = 2 m(ω0 F F .2 Mechanic oscillations For a construction with a spring with constant C parallel to a damping k which is connected to a mass M . to ˆ which a periodic force F (t) = F cos(ωt) is applied holds the equation of motion m¨ = F (t) − k x − Cx.3 Electric oscillations The impedance is given by: Z = R + iX. this becomes −mω 2 x = F − Cx − ikωx. x ˙ 2 With complex amplitudes. 2 The damping frequency ω D is a measure for the time in which an oscillating system comes to rest. k The frequency with minimal |Z| is called velocity resonance frequency.

Chapter 4: Oscillations

19

1. Series connection: V = IZ, Ztot =
i

Zi , Ltot =
i

Li ,

1 = Ctot

i

1 Z0 , Z = R(1 + iQδ) , Q= Ci R

2. parallel connection: V = IZ, 1 = Ztot Here, Z0 = 1 1 , = Zi Ltot 1 , Ctot = Li Ci , Q =
i

i

i

R R , Z= Z0 1 + iQδ

L 1 . and ω0 = √ C LC

ˆ ˆ The power given by a source is given by P (t) = V (t) · I(t), so P t = Veff Ieff cos(∆φ) 1ˆˆ 1 ˆ2 1 ˆ2 = 2 V I cos(φv − φi ) = 2 I Re(Z) = 2 V Re(1/Z), where cos(∆φ) is the work factor.

4.4 Waves in long conductors
These cables are in use for signal transfer, e.g. coax cable. For them holds: Z 0 = The transmission velocity is given by v = dx dx . dL dC dL dx . dx dC

4.5 Coupled conductors and transformers
For two coils enclosing each others flux holds: if Φ 12 is the part of the flux originating from I 2 through coil 2 which is enclosed by coil 1, than holds Φ 12 = M12 I2 , Φ21 = M21 I1 . For the coefficients of mutual induction Mij holds: N 1 Φ1 N 2 Φ2 M12 = M21 := M = k L1 L2 = = ∼ N1 N2 I2 I1 where 0 ≤ k ≤ 1 is the coupling factor. For a transformer is k ≈ 1. At full load holds: V1 I2 iωM = =− ≈− V2 I1 iωL2 + Rload L1 N1 =− L2 N2

4.6 Pendulums
The oscillation time T = 1/f , and for different types of pendulums is given by: • Oscillating spring: T = 2π • Physical pendulum: T = 2π • Torsion pendulum: T = 2π m/C if the spring force is given by F = C · ∆l. I/τ with τ the moment of force and I the moment of inertia. I/κ with κ = 2lm the constant of torsion and I the moment of inertia. πr4 ∆ϕ

• Mathematical pendulum: T = 2π lum.

l/g with g the acceleration of gravity and l the length of the pendu-

Chapter 5

Waves
5.1 The wave equation
The general form of the wave equation is: ✷u = 0, or: ∇2 u − 1 ∂2u ∂2u ∂2u ∂2u 1 ∂2u = + 2 + 2 − 2 2 =0 2 ∂t2 2 v ∂x ∂y ∂z v ∂t

where u is the disturbance and v the propagation velocity. In general holds: v = f λ. By definition holds: kλ = 2π and ω = 2πf . In principle, there are two types of waves: 1. Longitudinal waves: for these holds k 2. Transversal waves: for these holds k v u.

v ⊥ u.

The phase velocity is given by v ph = ω/k. The group velocity is given by: vg = dω dvph k dn = vph + k = vph 1 − dk dk n dk

where n is the refractive index of the medium. If v ph does not depend on ω holds: v ph = vg . In a dispersive medium it is possible that vg > vph or vg < vph , and vg · vf = c2 . If one wants to transfer information with a wave, e.g. by modulation of an EM wave, the information travels with the velocity at with a change in the electromagnetic field propagates. This velocity is often almost equal to the group velocity. For some media, the propagation velocity follows from: • Pressure waves in a liquid or gas: v = κ/ , where κ is the modulus of compression. γp/ = γRT /M. E/

• For pressure waves in a gas also holds: v =

• Pressure waves in a thin solid bar with diameter << λ: v = • waves in a string: v = Fspan l/m

• Surface waves on a liquid: v =

gλ 2πγ 2πh + tanh 2π λ λ where h is the depth of the liquid and γ the surface tension. If h

λ holds: v ≈

√ gh.

5.2 Solutions of the wave equation
5.2.1 Plane waves
In n dimensions a harmonic plane wave is defined by:
n

u(x, t) = 2n u cos(ωt) ˆ
i=1

sin(ki xi )

Chapter 5: Waves

21

The equation for a harmonic traveling plane wave is: u(x, t) = u cos( k · x ± ωt + ϕ) ˆ If waves reflect at the end of a spring this will result in a change in phase. A fixed end gives a phase change of π/2 to the reflected wave, with boundary condition u(l) = 0. A lose end gives no change in the phase of the reflected wave, with boundary condition (∂u/∂x) l = 0. If an observer is moving w.r.t. the wave with a velocity v obs , he will observe a change in frequency: the f vf − vobs Doppler effect. This is given by: = . f0 vf

5.2.2 Spherical waves
When the situation is spherical symmetric, the homogeneous wave equation is given by: 1 ∂ 2 (ru) ∂ 2 (ru) − =0 v 2 ∂t2 ∂r2 with general solution: u(r, t) = C1 f (r − vt) g(r + vt) + C2 r r

5.2.3 Cylindrical waves
When the situation has a cylindrical symmetry, the homogeneous wave equation becomes: 1 ∂2u 1 ∂ − v 2 ∂t2 r ∂r r ∂u ∂r =0

This is a Bessel equation, with solutions which can be written as Hankel functions. For sufficient large values of r these are approximated by: u ˆ u(r, t) = √ cos(k(r ± vt)) r

5.2.4 The general solution in one dimension
Starting point is the equation: ∂m ∂ 2 u(x, t) = bm m 2 ∂t ∂x m=0
N

u(x, t)

R. where bm ∈ I Substituting u(x, t) = Aei(kx−ωt) gives two solutions ω j = ωj (k) as dispersion relations. The general solution is given by:

u(x, t) =
−∞

a(k)ei(kx−ω1 (k)t) + b(k)ei(kx−ω2 (k)t) dk

Because in general the frequencies ω j are non-linear in k there is dispersion and the solution cannot be written any more as a sum of functions depending only on x ± vt: the wave front transforms.

5.3 The stationary phase method
Usually the Fourier integrals of the previous section cannot be calculated exactly. If ω j (k) ∈ I the stationary R phase method can be applied. Assuming that a(k) is only a slowly varying function of k, one can state that the parts of the k-axis where the phase of kx − ω(k)t changes rapidly will give no net contribution to the integral because the exponent oscillates rapidly there. The only areas contributing significantly to the integral are areas d (kx − ω(k)t) = 0. Now the following approximation is possible: with a stationary phase, determined by dk
∞ N

a(k)ei(kx−ω(k)t) dk ≈
−∞ i=1


d2 ω(ki ) 2 dki

1 exp −i 4 π + i(ki x − ω(ki )t)

C. t)dx + −∞ g(x )P (x. then the solution of the wave equation with arbitrary initial P (x.4 Green functions for the initial-value problem This method is preferable if the solutions deviate much from the stationary solutions. pointed from 1 to 2. x . 0) = 0 and ∂t ∂u(x. x . y)ei(kz−ωt) and B(x. t) is the solution with ∂Q(x.5 Waveguides and resonating cavities The boundary conditions for a perfect conductor can be derived from the Maxwell equations.n : λ = 2 (m/a)2 + (n/b)2 . If n is a unit vector ⊥ the surface. t) = 1 2 [δ(x − x − vt) + δ(x − x + vt)] if |x − x | < vt if |x − x | > vt 1 2v 0 Further holds the relation: Q(x. For ω < ω .22 Physics Formulary by ir. x . t) = P (x. x . 0) = δ(x − x ) and ∂t ∂P (x. Starting with the wave equation in one dimension. 0) = δ(x − x ). if B z and Ez are not ≡ 0: ∂Bz i ∂Ez k − εµω εµω 2 − k 2 ∂x ∂y ∂Bz i ∂Ez + εµω k Ex = εµω 2 − k 2 ∂x ∂y Bx = Now one can distinguish between three cases: 1. Boundary condition: E z |surf = 0. y)ei(kz−ωt) . x . Ez ≡ 0: the Transversal Electric modes (TE). 0) = 0. x . Boundary condition: ∂Bz ∂n = 0. Wevers 5. t) the solution with initial values initial values Q(x. x . like point-like excitations. J. From this one can now deduce that. than holds: n · (D2 − D1 ) = σ n · (B2 − B1 ) = 0 n × (E2 − E1 ) = 0 n × (H2 − H1 ) = K In a waveguide holds because of the cylindrical symmetry: E(x. with ∇ 2 = ∂ 2 /∂x2 holds: if Q(x. In rectangular conductors the following expression can be found for the cut-off frequency for modes TE m. 0) conditions f (x) = u(x. surf By = ∂Bz i ∂Ez k + εµω εµω 2 − k 2 ∂y ∂x ∂Bz i ∂Ez − εµω k Ey = εµω 2 − k 2 ∂y ∂x For the TE and TM modes this gives an eigenvalue problem for E z resp. x . t)dx P and Q are called the propagators. t) = B(x. x .n of TMm. 2. Therefore. t) ∂t 5. ω is called the cut-off frequency. and K is a surface current density.A. x . Bz ≡ 0: the Transversal Magnetic modes (TM). x . t) = E(x. and P (x. Bz with boundary conditions: ∂2 ∂2 + 2 ∂x2 ∂y ψ = −γ 2 ψ with eigenvalues γ 2 := εµω 2 − k 2 This gives a discrete solution ψ with eigenvalue γ 2 : k = εµω 2 − γ 2 . t) = ∂P (x. t) = −∞ f (x )Q(x. 0) and g(x) = is given by: ∂t ∞ ∞ u(x. x . They are defined by: Q(x. k is imaginary and the wave is damped.

Ez and Bz are zero everywhere: the Transversal electromagnetic mode (TEM). 0 ≤ τ ≤ N with ∂τn /∂t = εn and if the secular terms are put 0 one obtains: d dt 1 2 dx dt 2 2 + 1 ω0 x2 2 = εω0 (1 − βx2 ) dx dt 2 This is an energy equation. ky = . b and c the possible wave numbers are given n1 π n2 π n3 π .Chapter 5: Waves 23 3. Than holds: k = √ ±ω εµ and vf = vg . the 2nd term becomes larger −1 and diminishes the growth. the right-hand side changes sign and an increase in energy changes into a decrease of energy.6 Non-linear wave equations The Van der Pol equation is given by: dx d2 x 2 + ω0 x = 0 − εω0 (1 − βx2 ) dt2 dt βx2 can be ignored for very small values of the amplitude. Oscillations on a time scale ∼ ω 0 can exist. with a = b = c. If x 2 > 1/β. secular terms ∼ εt. If it is assumed that there exist timescales τn . 3 . The Korteweg-De Vries equation is given by: ∂u ∂3u ∂u ∂u + − au + b2 3 = 0 ∂t ∂x ∂x ∂x non−lin dispersive This equation is for example a model for ion-acoustic waves in a plasma. 3 dimensional resonating cavity with edges a. For this equation. This mechanism limits the growth of oscillations. While x is growing. just as if here were no waveguide. Substitution of x ∼ e iωt gives: ω = 2 1− 1 2 2 ε ). frequency. kz = This results in the possible frequencies f = vk/2π in the cavity: by: kx = a b c f= v 2 n2 n2 n2 y x z + 2 + 2 a2 b c For a cubic cavity. Further k ∈ I so there exists no cut-off R. 5. besides periodic. If x is expanded as x = x (0) + (1) 2 (2) εx + ε x + · · · and this is substituted one obtains. 1 2 ω0 (iε ± The lowest-order instabilities grow as 1 2 εω0 . In a rectangular. soliton solutions of the following form exist: −d u(x − ct) = cosh2 (e(x − ct)) with c = 1 + 1 ad and e2 = ad/(12b2 ). the possible number of oscillating modes N L for longitudinal waves is given by: 4πa3 f 3 NL = 3v 3 Because transversal waves have two possible polarizations holds for them: N T = 2NL . Energy is conserved if the left-hand side is 0.

More n ak general. From this the equation of Cauchy can be derived: n = a 0 + a1 /λ2 . f is the focal length and R 1 and R2 are the curvature radii of both surfaces. if ∆n > 1 holds: ∆ϕ = π. This is described by: n2 = 1 + ne e 2 ε0 m fj 2 ω0. Further holds: 1 1 1 = − f v b . followed by a light ray in material can be found from Fermat’s principle: 2 2 2 δ 1 dt = δ 1 n(s) ds = 0 ⇒ δ c 1 n(s)ds = 0 6. λ2k k=0 For an electromagnetic wave in general holds: n = √ εr µr . it is possible to expand n as: n = . For a double concave lens holds R 1 < 0. Snell’s law is: n2 λ1 v1 = = n1 λ2 v2 If ∆n ≤ 1. for which holds: that vg = c/(1 + (ne e2 /2ε0 mω 2 )). From this follows j j where ne is the electron density and f j the oscillator strength. for a double convex lens holds R 1 > 0 and R2 < 0. For the refraction at a spherical surface with radius R holds: n2 n1 − n2 n1 − = v b R where |v| is the distance of the object and |b| the distance of the image.1 The bending of light For the refraction at a surface holds: n i sin(θi ) = nt sin(θt ) where n is the refractive index of the material. The refraction of light in a material is caused by scattering from atoms.j − ω 2 − iδω fj = 1.1 Lenses The Gaussian lens formula can be deduced from Fermat’s principle with the approximations cos ϕ = 1 and sin ϕ = ϕ. the change in phase of the light is ∆ϕ = 0. R2 > 0. The path.2.2 Paraxial geometrical optics 6. Applying this twice results in: 1 = (nl − 1) f 1 1 − R2 R1 where nl is the refractive index of the lens.Chapter 6 Optics 6.

.2. If the lens is surrounded by the same medium on both sides. The f-number is defined by f /Dobjective. Spherical aberration can be reduced by not using spherical mirrors.4 Magnification The linear magnification is defined by: N = − b v αsyst αnone The angular magnification is defined by: N α = − where αsys is the size of the retinal image with the optical system and α none the size of the retinal image without the system. For a telescope holds: N = f objective /focular. as is seen by an incoming light ray: Quantity R f v b + Concave surface Converging lens Real object Virtual image − Convex surface Diverging lens Virtual object Real image 6.2.2 Mirrors For images of mirrors holds: 1 1 2 h2 1 = + = + f v b R 2 1 1 − R v 2 where h is the perpendicular distance from the point the light ray hits the mirror to the optical axis. Further holds: N · N α = 1. If the lens is described by a matrix m ij than for the distances h1 and h2 to the boundary of the lens holds: h1 = n m11 − 1 m22 − 1 . h2 = n m12 m12 N1 r r r O N2 6.2. the nodal points are the same as the principal points H. A parabolical mirror has no spherical aberration for light rays parallel with the optical axis and is therefore often used for telescopes.Chapter 6: Optics 25 D := 1/f is called the dioptric power of a lens. For a lens with thickness d and diameter D holds to a good approximation: 1/f = 8(n − 1)d/D 2 . The used signs are: Quantity R f v b + Concave mirror Concave mirror Real object Real image − Convex mirror Convex mirror Virtual object Virtual image 6. The plane ⊥ the optical axis through the principal points is called the principal plane.3 Principal planes The nodal points N of a lens are defined by the figure on the right. For two lenses placed on a line with distance d holds: 1 1 1 d = + − f f1 f2 f1 f2 In these equations the following signs are being used for refraction at a spherical surface.

6. If the coefficient of reflection R and transmission T are defined as (with θi = θr ): Ir It cos(θt ) R≡ and T ≡ Ii Ii cos(θi ) . These are: 1. and a part will be refracted at an angle according to Snell’s law. Field curvature can be corrected by the human eye.t. t⊥ ≡ r ≡ E0i E0i ⊥ E0i E0i ⊥ where E0r is the reflected amplitude and E 0t the transmitted amplitude. y) with α the angle with the optical axis and y the distance to the optical axis. a spherical surface does not make a perfect lens. The change of a light ray interacting with an optical system can be obtained using a matrix multiplication: n1 α1 n2 α2 =M y2 y1 where Tr(M ) = 1. J. It makes a difference whether the E field of the wave is ⊥ or w. Astigmatism: from each point of an object not on the optical axis the image is an ellipse because the thickness of the lens is not the same everywhere. Wevers 6.C. This curvature can be both positive or negative. 4. Then the Fresnel equations are: r = tan(θi − θt ) sin(θt − θi ) . Using N lenses makes it possible to obtain the same f for N wavelengths. This can be partially corrected with a lens which is composed of more lenses with different functions n i (λ). the surface. Further away of the optical axis they are curved.A.4 Aberrations Lenses usually do not give a perfect image. Incomming rays far from the optical axis will more bent.3 Matrix methods A light ray can be described by a vector (nα. Chromatic aberration is caused by the fact that n = n(λ). 6. Spherical aberration is caused by second-order effects which are usually ignored. 2. 5.r. Refraction at a surface with dioptric power D: M T = 6. Coma is caused by the fact that the principal planes of a lens are only flat near the principal axis. 3. t⊥ = sin(θt + θi ) cos(θt − θi ) sin(θt + θi ) The following holds: t ⊥ − r⊥ = 1 and t + r = 1. When the coefficients of reflection r and transmission t are defined as: E0r E0r E0t E0t .26 Physics Formulary by ir. r⊥ ≡ .5 Reflection and transmission If an electromagnetic wave hits a transparent medium part of the wave will reflect at the same angle as the incident angle. r⊥ = tan(θi + θt ) sin(θt + θi ) t = 2 sin(θt ) cos(θi ) 2 sin(θt ) cos(θi ) . M is a product of elementary matrices. Distorsion gives abberations near the edges of the image. This can be corrected with a combination of positive and negative lenses. Some causes are: 1. Transfer along length l: M R = 1 0 l/n 1 1 0 −D 1 2. t ≡ .

fast axis horizontal e iπ/4 e iπ/4 1 2 1 2 Homogene circular polarizor right Homogene circular polarizer left 6.r. Imax and Imin are the maximum and minimum intensities when the light passes a polarizer. The state of a polarized light ray can also be described by the Jones vector: E= E0x eiϕx E0y eiϕy For the √ horizontal P -state holds: E = (1. the R-state is given by √ E = 1 2(1.Chapter 6: Optics 27 with I = |S| it follows: R + T = 1. fast axis vertical plate. This angle is called Brewster’s angle. 0). For some types of optical equipment the Jones matrix M is given by: Horizontal linear polarizer: Vertical linear polarizer: Linear polarizer at +45 ◦ Lineair polarizer at −45 ◦ 1 4 -λ 1 4 -λ 1 2 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 −1 1 1 0 0 −i 1 0 0 i 1 i −i 1 1 i −i 1 plate. for the vertical P -state E = (0. the incident direction. A special case is r = 0. S2 = 2I2 − 2I1 . 6.t. The situation with r ⊥ = 0 is not possible. 1). Then holds S 1 = 2I1 . The state of a light ray can be described by the Stokes-parameters: start with 4 filters which each transmits half the intensity. −i) and the L-state by E = 1 2(1. The first is independent of the polarization. where α is the apex angle. while the fourth is a circular polarizer which is opaque for L-states. θ i is the angle between the incident angle and a line perpendicular to the surface and θ i is the angle between the ray leaving the prism and a line perpendicular to the surface. i). If polarized light passes through a polarizer Malus law applies: I(θ) = I(0) cos 2 (θ) where θ is the angle of the polarizer. S3 = 2I3 − 2I1 and S4 = 2I4 − 2I1 .6 Polarization The polarization is defined as: P = Ip Imax − Imin = Ip + Iu Imax + Imin where the intensity of the polarized light is given by I p and the intensity of the unpolarized light is given by Iu . When θ i varies there is an angle for which δ becomes minimal. The change in state of a light beam after passage of 2 2 optical equipment can be described as E2 = M · E1 . This happens if the angle between the reflected and transmitted rays is 90 ◦ . From Snell’s law it then follows: tan(θ i ) = n. the second and third are linear polarizers with the transmission axes horizontal and at +45 ◦ .7 Prisms and dispersion A light ray passing through a prism is refracted twice and aquires a deviation from its original direction δ = θi + θi + α w. For the refractive index of the prism now holds: sin( 1 (δmin + α)) 2 n= sin( 1 α) 2 .

22λ/D where D is the diameter of the slit. 6. The maxima in intensity are given by d sin(θ) = kλ.g. This is described by the obliquity or inclination factor.t. The refractive index in this area can usually be approximated by Cauchy’s formula. 2 Diffraction limits the resolution of a system. 6. in which they are parallel. The minimum difference between two wavelengths that gives a separated diffraction pattern in a multiple slit geometry is given by ∆λ/λ = nN where N is the number of lines and n the order of the pattern. The diffraction through a spherical aperture with radius a is described by: I(θ) = I0 J1 (ka sin(θ)) ka sin(θ) 2 The diffraction pattern of a rectangular aperture at distance R with length a in the x-direction and b in the y-direction is described by: 2 2 sin(α ) sin(β ) I(x. Incident light rays can now be split up in two parts: the ordinary wave is linear polarized ⊥ the plane through the transmission direction and the optical axis. which happens e. J. This is the minimum angle ∆θ min between two incident rays coming from points far away for which their refraction patterns can be detected separately.8 Diffraction Fraunhofer diffraction occurs far away from the source(s). at trigonal. When X rays are diffracted at a crystal holds for the position of the maxima in intensity Bragg’s relation: 2d sin(θ) = nλ where d is the distance between the crystal layers. the principal axes. In case n 2 = n3 = n1 .28 Physics Formulary by ir. There are at least 3 directions.r. the optical axis. For the first factor follows: 2 sin( 1 α) dδ 2 = dn cos( 1 (δmin + α)) 2 D= For visible light usually holds dn/dλ < 0: shorter wavelengths are stronger bent than longer. The extraordinary wave is linear polarized .C. which describes the directionality of the secondary emissions: E(θ) = 1 E0 (1 + cos(θ)) where θ is the angle w. For a circular slit holds: ∆θmin = 1. b the width of a slit and d the distance between the slits. This results in 3 refractive indices n i which can be used to construct Fresnel’s ellipsoid. hexagonal and tetragonal crystals there is one optical axis in the direction of n1 .A. For a grating holds: ∆θ min = 2λ/(N a cos(θm )) where a is the distance between two peaks and N the number of peaks.9 Special optical effects • Birefringe and dichroism. Close at the source the Fraunhofermodel is invalid because it ignores the angle-dependence of the reflected waves. D is not parallel with E if the polarizability P of a material is not equal in all directions. The Fraunhofer diffraction of light passing through multiple slits is described by: 2 2 sin(u) sin(N v) I(θ) = · I0 u sin(v) where u = πb sin(θ)/λ. y) = I0 α β where α = kax/2R and β = kby/2R. Wevers The dispersion of a prism is defined by: dδ dδ dn = dλ dn dλ where the first factor depends on the shape and the second on the composition of the prism. N is the number of slits. v = πd sin(θ)/λ.

Chapter 6: Optics 29 in the plane through the transmission direction and the optical axis. The difference in refractive index in the two directions is given by: ∆n = λ0 KE 2 . where K is the Kerr constant of the material. . 6. In that case. the retardation is given by: ∆ϕ = 2πK V 2 /d2 . For a quarter-wave plate holds: ∆ϕ = π/2. The finesse F is defined as F = 1 π F . Incident light will have a phase shift of ∆ϕ = 2πd(|n 0 − ne |)/λ0 if an uniaxial crystal is cut in such a way that the optical axis is parallel with the front and back plane. The 2 maximum resolution is then given by ∆f min = c/2ndF . The retardation in a Pockels cell is ∆ϕ = 2πn3 r63 V /λ0 where r63 is the 6-3 element of the electro-optic tensor. the ordinary will not. Here. ˘ • Cerenkov radiation arises when a charged particle with v q > vf arrives. These crystals are also piezoelectric: their polarization changes when a pressure is applied and vice versa: P = pd + ε0 χE. The radiation is emitted within a cone with an apex angle α with sin(α) = c/c medium = c/nvq . R the reflection factor and A the absorption factor. • Retarders: waveplates and compensators. Dichroism is caused by a different absorption of the ordinary and extraordinary wave in some materials. 0 • The Faraday effect: the polarization of light passing through material with length d and to which a magnetic field is applied in the propagation direction is rotated by an angle β = VBd where V is the Verdet constant. λ0 is the wavelength in vacuum and n 0 and ne the refractive indices for the ordinary and extraordinary wave. • The Kerr-effect: isotropic. Double images occur when the incident ray makes an angle with the optical axis: the extraordinary wave will refract.10 The Fabry-Perot interferometer For a Fabry-Perot interferometer holds in general: T + R + A = 1 where T is the transmission factor. transparent materials can become birefringent when placed in an electric field. If F is given by F = 4R/(1 − R)2 it follows for the intensity distribution: A It = 1− Ii 1−R 2 1 1 + F sin2 (θ) €€ € q € Source Lens ✛✲ d Screen Focussing lens √ √ The width of the peaks at half height is given by γ = 4/ F . the optical axis is parallel to E. The term [1 + F sin2 (θ)]−1 := A(θ) is called the Airy function. where V is the applied voltage. • The Pockels or linear electro-optical effect can occur in 20 (from a total of 32) crystal symmetry classes. namely those without a centre of symmetry. If the electrodes have an effective length and are separated by a distance d.

7. There are 3 translational degrees of freedom. The average energy of a molecule in thermodynamic equilibrium is E tot = 1 skT . A linear molecule has 2 rotational degrees of freedom and a non-linear molecule 3. Wvib = (v + 1 )¯ ω0 2 h 2I The vibrational levels are excited if kT ≈ ¯ ω. Because vibrational degrees of freedom account for both kinetic and potential energy they count double. Even s: s = 2l: c(s) = 1 (l − 1)! 2l π(2l − 1)!! E kT 1 2 s−1 exp − E kT dE 2. for linear molecules this results in a total of s = 6n − 5.1 Degrees of freedom A molecule consisting of n atoms has s = 3n degrees of freedom. given by: 1. For homonuclear molecules additional selection rules apply so the rotational levels are well coupled if kT ≈ 6B.Chapter 7 Statistical physics 7.2 The energy distribution function The general form of the equilibrium velocity distribution function is P (vx . Odd s: s = 2l + 1: c(s) = √ . The distribution as a function of the absolute value of the velocity is given by: 2 4N mv 2 dN = 3 √ v 2 exp − dv α π 2kT The general form of the energy distribution function then becomes: c(s) P (E)dE = kT where c(s) is a normalization constant. Each degree of freedom of a 2 molecule has in principle the same energy: the principle of equipartition. For non-linear molecules this gives s = 6n − 6. and v 2 = 3 α2 . The rotational and vibrational energy of a molecule are: Wrot = h ¯2 l(l + 1) = Bl(l + 1) . a linear molecule has s = 3n − 5 vibrational degrees of freedom and a non-linear molecule s = 3n − 6. So. the rotational levels of a hetronuclear molecule are excited if h kT ≈ 2B. vz )dvx dvy dvz = P (vx )dvx · P (vy )dvy · P (vz )dvz with P (vi )dvi = v2 1 √ exp − i2 α α π dvi where α = 2kT /m is the most probable velocity of a particle. The average velocity is given by v = √ 2α/ π. vy .

Chapter 7: Statistical physics 31 7. If the own volume and the intermolecular forces cannot be neglected the Van der Waals equation can be derived: p+ an2 s V2 (V − bns ) = ns RT There is an isotherme with a horizontal point of inflection. For the pressure on the wall then follows: 2 2mv cos(θ)d3 N .3 Pressure on a wall The number of molecules that collides with a wall with surface A within a time τ is given by: ∞ π 2π d N= 0 0 0 3 nAvτ cos(θ)P (v. so p = n E Aτ 3 7. In a Van der Waals gas. The inversion temperature T i = 2TB .cr /RTcr = general gas law. Vm ) = RT 1 B(T ) C(T ) + + + ··· 2 3 Vm Vm Vm The Boyle temperature T B is the temperature for which the 2nd virial coefficient is 0. In the Van der Waals equation this corresponds with the critical temperature. T ∗ = T /Tcr and Vm = Vm /Vm. this happens at T B = a/Rb. with p ∗ := p/pcr . ϕ)dvdθdϕ From this follows for the particle flux on the wall: Φ = d3 p = 1 4n v . pcr = . A virial expansion is used for even more accurate views: p(T. Vcr = 3bns 27bR 27b2 3 8. From dp/dV = 0 and d 2 p/dV 2 = 0 follows: Tcr = 8a a . ns is the number of moles particles and N is the total number of particles within volume V . which differs from the value of 1 which follows from the ∗ Scaled on the critical quantities. θ. pressure and volume of the gas. The equation of state for solids and liquids is given by: V 1 = 1 + γp ∆T − κT ∆p = 1 + V0 V ∂V ∂T ∆T + p 1 V ∂V ∂p ∆p T .cr with Vm := V /ns holds: p∗ + 3 ∗ (Vm )2 ∗ Vm − 1 3 = 8T∗ 3 Gases behave the same for equal values of the reduced quantities: the law of the corresponding states. For the critical point holds: p cr Vm.4 The equation of state If intermolecular forces and the volume of the molecules can be neglected then for gases from p = and E = 3 kT can be derived: 2 1 pV = ns RT = N m v 2 3 2 3n E Here. This is the upper limit of the area of coexistence between liquid and vapor.

5 Collisions between molecules The collision probability of a particle in a gas that is translated over a distance dx is given by nσdx.9NA D3 . which for a homogeneous distribution is given by: F (r)dr = 4nπr 2 dr.6 Interaction between molecules For dipole interaction between molecules can be derived that U ∼ −1/r 6 . The following holds: D ≈ 0. 0 x e 2n −x2 √ (2n)! π dx = . This means . Collisions between molecules and small particles in a solution result in the Brownian motion.2 and Vm. A more simple model for intermolecular forces assumes a potential U (r) = ∞ for r < D. b = 1. The heat conductance in a non-moving gas is described by: 7. J. If two plates move along each other at a distance d with velocity w x the viscosity η is given by: Fx = η Awx .A. something that can easily occur at low pressures. If m1 = m2 holds: = the particles. Wevers 7. This force can be described by U rep ∼ exp(−γr) or Vrep = +Cs /rs with 12 ≤ s ≤ 20. The average distance between two molecules is 0.275N AD3 . n!22n+1 ∞ x2n+1 e−x dx = 1 n! 2 0 2 . For the average motion of a particle with radius R can be derived: x2 = 1 r2 = kT t/3πηR. The equilibrium condition for a vessel which has a hole with surface A in it for which holds that √ √ √ √ A/π is: n1 T1 = n2 T2 . This gives for the potential energy of one molecule: E pot = 3D U (r)F (r)dr. The mean free path is given by = nuσ u m1 1 1 √ . It can be derived that η = 1 v where v is the thermal velocity. This results in the Lennard-Jones potential for intermolecular forces: ULJ = 4 D r 12 − D r 6 with a minimum at r = rm . kTkr = 1.89r m . Some useful mathematical relations are: ∞ ∞ x e 0 n −x dx = n! .C.55n −1/3. D with F (r) the spatial distribution function in spherical coordinates. i 3 A gas is called a Knudsen gas if the dimensions of the gas. If the molecules are approximated by hard that the average time between two collisions is given by τ = nσv 1 2 2 spheres the cross section is: σ = 4 π(D1 + D2 ). 3 A better expression for κ can be obtained with the Eucken correction: κ = (1 + 9R/4c mV )CV · η with an error <5%.32 Physics Formulary by ir.3NA D3 . If the distance between two molecules approaches the molecular diameter D a repulsing force between the electron clouds appears.kr = 3. so = v1 m2 nσ nσ 2 1 . U (r) = U LJ for D ≤ r ≤ 3D and U (r) = 0 for r ≥ 3D. It can be derived that κ = 1 CmV n v /NA . Also holds: κ = CV η. where σ is v1 2 2 with u = v1 + v2 the relative velocity between the cross section. Together with the general gas law follows: p 1 / T1 = p2 / T2 . 3 T2 − T1 dQ = κA . d The velocity profile between the plates is in that case given by w(z) = zw x /d. which results in a temperdt d ature profile T (z) = T 1 + z(T2 − T1 )/d. If m1 m2 holds: = 1+ . For the Van der Waals coefficients a and b 2 and the critical quantities holds: a = 5.

A homogeneous function of degree m obeys: ε m F (x. κT = 1/p and βV = −1/V . 8. εz).2 Definitions • The isochoric pressure coefficient: β V = • The isothermal compressibility: κ T = − • The isobaric volume coefficient: γ p = 1 V 1 V 1 p 1 V ∂p ∂T ∂V ∂p ∂V ∂T ∂V ∂p V T p • The adiabatic compressibility: κ S = − S For an ideal gas follows: γ p = 1/T . one can write: x = x(y.Chapter 8 Thermodynamics 8.1 Mathematical introduction If there exists a relation f (x. y.3 Thermal heat capacity • The specific heat at constant X is: C X = T • The specific heat at constant pressure: C p = • The specific heat at constant volume: C V = ∂S ∂T ∂H ∂T ∂U ∂T X p V . z). y = y(x. y. z) = 0 between 3 variables. For such a function Euler’s theorem applies: ∂F ∂F ∂F +y +z mF (x. z) = F (εx. εy. z) and z = z(x. z) = x ∂x ∂y ∂z 8. The total differential dz of z is than given by: dz = ∂z ∂x dx + y ∂z ∂y dy x By writing this also for dx and dy it can be obtained that ∂x ∂y Because dz is a total differential holds · z ∂y ∂z · x ∂z ∂x = −1 y dz = 0. y. y).

the entropy difference after a reversible process is: 2 S2 − S1 = 1 d Qrev T So. W the work done and ∆U the difference in the internal energy. if the temperature is high enough to thermalize all internal rotational and vibrational degrees of freedom. called the entropy. holds: C V = 1 sR. for a reversible cycle holds: For an irreversible cycle holds: d Qrev = 0. so absolute zero temperature cannot be reached by cooling through a finite number of steps. In differential form this becomes: d Q = dU + d W .C. If the coefficient of expansion is 0. 2 In general holds: Cp − CV = T ∂p ∂T · V ∂V ∂T = −T p ∂V ∂T 2 p ∂p ∂V ≥0 T Because (∂p/∂V )T is always < 0. For a lower T one needs only to consider the thermalized degrees of freedom. T The third law of thermodynamics is (Nernst): lim ∂S ∂X =0 T T →0 From this it can be concluded that the thermal heat capacity → 0 if T → 0.5 State functions and Maxwell relations The quantities of state and their differentials are: Internal energy: Enthalpy: Free energy: Gibbs free enthalpy: U H = U + pV F = U − TS G = H − TS dU = T dS − pdV dH = T dS + V dp dF = −SdT − pdV dG = −SdT + V dp . So for a reversible process holds: d Q = dU + pdV . and also at T = 0K. For their ratio now 2 2 follows γ = (2 + s)/s. T d Qirr < 0. Cp = CV . J. For a Van der Waals gas holds: CmV = 1 sR + ap/RT 2. the differential of which has the following property: dQ dS ≥ T If the only processes occurring are reversible holds: dS = d Q rev /T . The second law states: for a closed system there exists an additive quantity S.34 Physics Formulary by ir. where Q is the total added heat. 8. So. the following is always valid: C p ≥ CV . For a quasi-static process holds: d W = pdV . For a closed system holds: Q = ∆U + W . 8. Further. One can extract an amount of work Wt from the system or add W t = −Wi to the system.A. where d means that the it is not a differential of a quantity of state. For an open (flowing) system the first law is: Q = ∆H + W i + ∆Ekin + ∆Epot . The first law is the conservation of energy.4 The laws of thermodynamics The zeroth law states that heat flows from higher to lower temperatures. Wevers For an ideal gas holds: C mp − CmV = R. Hence Cp = 1 (s + 2)R.

Chapter 8: Thermodynamics 35 From this one can derive Maxwell’s relations: ∂T ∂V =− S ∂p ∂S . and dS > 0. Isothermic expansion at T 1 . p ∂p ∂T = V ∂S ∂V . Here H is a conserved quantity. with γ the surface tension. For a reversible isobaric process holds: H 2 − H1 = Qrev . Also holds: T V γ−1 =constant and T γ p1−γ =constant. Adiabatics exhibit a greater steepness p-V diagram than isothermics because γ > 1. Adiabatic expansion with a temperature drop to T 2 . 2. if T < T i the gas cools down. The throttle process is e. T ∂V ∂T =− p ∂S ∂p T From the total differential and the definitions of C V and Cp it can be derived that: T dS = CV dT + T For an ideal gas also holds: Sm = CV ln T T0 + R ln V V0 + Sm0 and Sm = Cp ln T T0 − R ln p p0 + Sm0 ∂p ∂T dV and T dS = Cp dT − T V ∂V ∂T dp p Helmholtz’ equations are: ∂U ∂V =T T ∂p ∂T −p . The system absorbs a heat Q 1 from the reservoir. The quantity which is important here is the throttle coefficient: αH = ∂T ∂p = H 2 1 Cp dT . The Carnotprocess The system undergoes a reversible cycle with 2 isothemics and 2 adiabatics: 1. T i = 2TB . In general this is accompanied with a change in temperature. . For reversible adiabatic processes holds Poisson’s equation: with γ = Cp /CV one gets that pV γ =constant.6 Processes The efficiency η of a process is given by: η = Work done Heat added Cold delivered Work added The Cold factor ξ of a cooling down process is given by: ξ = Reversible adiabatic processes For adiabatic processes holds: W = U 1 − U2 . with for TB : [∂(pV )/∂p]T = 0.g. Isobaric processes Here holds: H2 − H1 = The throttle process This is also called the Joule-Kelvin effect and is an adiabatic expansion of a gas through a porous material or a small opening. V ∂T ∂p = S ∂V ∂S . From this follows: γ= ∂U ∂A = S ∂F ∂A T 8. V ∂H ∂p =V −T T ∂V ∂T p for an enlarged surface holds: d W rev = −γdA. applied in refridgerators. If T > Ti the gas heats up. 1 T Cp ∂V ∂T −V p The inversion temperature is the temperature where an adiabatically expanding gas keeps the same temperature.

so dG = 0.36 Physics Formulary by ir.8 Phase transitions Phase transitions are isothermic and isobaric. A phase-change of the 3rd order. 8. Further Sm = ∂Gm ∂T p so G has a twist in the transition point. The efficiency in the ideal case is the same as for Carnot’s cycle. |Q2 | T2 |Q2 | = = W |Q1 | − |Q2 | T1 − T2 8. when all processes are reversible: 1. when ferromagnetic iron changes to the paramagnetic state.7 Maximal work Consider a system that changes from state 1 into state 2.A.g.g. For those there will occur only a discontinuity in the second derivates of Gm . [∂ 3 Gm /∂T 3 ]p non continuous arises e. 4. so with e. with the temperature and pressure of the surroundings given by T 0 and p0 . These second-order transitions appear at organization phenomena. Open system: Wmax = (H1 − H2 ) − T0 (S1 − S2 ) − ∆Ekin − ∆Epot . J. Closed system: Wmax = (U1 − U2 ) − T0 (S1 − S2 ) + p0 (V1 − V2 ). . Adiabatic compression to T 1 . The following holds: rβα = rαβ and rβα = rγα − rγβ . When the phases are indicated by α. Isothermic compression at T 2 . β and γ holds: Gα = Gβ and m m rβα α β ∆Sm = Sm − Sm = T0 where rβα is the transition heat of phase β to phase α and T 0 is the transition temperature. 2. The efficiency for Carnot’s process is: η =1− T2 |Q2 | =1− := ηC |Q1 | T1 The Carnot efficiency η C is the maximal efficiency at which a heat machine can operate. removing Q 2 from the system. Wevers 3.C. The maximum work which can be obtained from this change is. If the process is applied in reverse order and the system performs a work −W the cold factor is given by: ξ= The Stirling process Stirling’s cycle exists of 2 isothermics and 2 isochorics. In a two phase system Clapeyron’s equation is valid: β S α − Sm dp rβα = m = α−Vβ α − V β )T dT Vm (Vm m m For an ideal gas one finds for the vapor line at some distance from the critical point: p = p0 e−rβα/RT There exist also phase transitions with r βα = 0. The minimal work needed to attain a certain state is: W min = −Wmax .

In equilibrium for each component holds: µ α = µβ = µγ . this gives at constant p and T : xi dµi = 0 (Gibbs-Duhmen).9 Thermodynamic potential When the number of particles within a system changes this number becomes a third quantity of state.10 Ideal mixtures For a mixture of n components holds (the index Umixture = i 0 is the value for the pure component): ni Hi0 . Here is xi the fraction of the ith i component in liquid phase and y i the fraction of the ith component in gas phase. Because addition of matter usually takes place at constant p and T .V ≤ 0 or (dG)T. For the osmotic pressure Π of a solution holds: 0 ΠVm1 = x2 RT .T i=1 ni Vi where Vi is the partial volume of component i. 8. A mixture of two liquids is rarely ideal: i i this is usually only the case for chemically related components or isotopes. It can be derived that ni dµi = −SdT + V dp.p ≤ 0. i i i . G is the relevant quantity.nj c V = i=1 ni ∂V ∂ni c := nj .V ≤ 0 or (dH)S. The following holds: Vm 0 = i xi Vi xi dVi i = where xi = ni /n is the molar fraction of component i. This is a partial quantity. The number of free parameters in a system with c components and p different phases is given by f = c + 2 − p. Smixture = n i i 0 xi Si + ∆Smix ni Ui0 . Hmixture = where for ideal gases holds: ∆S mix = −nR i xi ln(xi ). For the thermodynamic potentials holds: µ i = µ0 + RT ln(xi ) < µ0 . ∆Ts = − s x2 rβα rγβ with rβα the evaporation heat and r γβ < 0 the melting heat.T.p ≤ 0 or (dF )T. For x2 1 holds: ∆Tk = 2 RTk RT 2 x2 . 8.p.11 Conditions for equilibrium When a system evolves towards equilibrium the only changes that are possible are those for which holds: (dS)U.V ≥ 0 or (dU )S. The thermodynamic potentials are not independent in a multiple-phase system. In spite of this holds Raoult’s law for the vapour pressure holds for many binary mixtures: p i = xi p0 = yi p. If a system exists of more components this becomes: µi dni dG = −SdT + V dp + i where µ = ∂G ∂ni is called the thermodynamic potential. i i Each component has as much µ’s as there are phases. The molar volume of a mixture of two components can be a concave line in a V -x 2 diagram: the mixing contracts the volume.Chapter 8: Thermodynamics 37 8. A solution of one component in another gives rise to an increase in the boiling point ∆T k and a decrease of the freezing point ∆T s . For V holds: p.

The occupation numbers in equilibrium are then given by: ni = N Wi gi exp − Z kT gi exp(−Wi /kT ). given by: Z = Z= V (2πmkT )3/2 h3 The entropy can then be defined as: S = k ln(P ) .A. the lifetime of a black hole ∼ m 3 . J. one finds for a discrete system the Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution. To do this the term d W = pdV has to be replaced with the correct work term. When Stirling’s equation. with U = 3 kT then holds: S = 5 kN + kN ln 2 2 V (2πmkT )3/2 N h3 8. that with the maximum value for P . Hawkings area theorem states that dA/dt ≥ 0. . It has an entropy S = Akc 3 /4¯ κ ¯ h with A the area of its event horizon. is the equilibrium state. each with a g-fold degeneracy is called the thermodynamic probability and is given by: P = N! i n gi i ni ! The most probable distribution.38 Physics Formulary by ir.12 Statistical basis for thermodynamics The number of possibilities P to distribute N particles on n possible energy levels. Hence. For an ideal gas holds: i The state sum Z is a normalization constant.13 Application to other systems Thermodynamics can be applied to other systems than gases and liquids. A rotating. like d W rev = −F dl for the stretching of a wire. ln(n!) ≈ n ln(n) − n is used. For a system in thermodynamic equilibrium this becomes: S= U + kN ln T Z N + kN ≈ U + k ln T ZN N! For an ideal gas. d W rev = −γdA for the expansion of a soap bubble or d W rev = −BdM for a magnetic system.C. Wevers 8. non-charged black hole has a temparature of T = hc/8πkm. For a Schwarzschild black hole A is given by A = 16πm 2 .

dt ∂t d dt Xd3 V = ∂ ∂t Xd3 V + X(v · n )d2 A This results in general to: From this follows that also holds: where the volume V is surrounded by surface A.1 Mathematical introduction An important relation is: if X is a quantity of a volume element which travels from position r to r + dr in a time dt. For gravity holds: f0 = g. where T is the stress tensor. ∇2 v2 .Chapter 9 Transport phenomena 9. ∇2 v3 ) rot gradφ = 0 div rotv = 0 Here. the orientable surface d2 A is limited by the Jordan curve 9. the total differential dX is then given by: dX = ∂X ∂X ∂X dX ∂X ∂X ∂X ∂X ∂X dx + dy + dz + dt ⇒ = vx + vy + vz + ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂t dt ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂t ∂X dX = + (v · ∇)X . Surface forces working only on the margins: t. 2. The force f0 on each volume element. Some properties of the ∇ operator are: div(φv ) = φdivv + gradφ · v div(u × v ) = v · (rotu ) − u · (rotv ) div gradφ = ∇2 φ rot(φv ) = φrotv + (gradφ) × v rot rotv = grad divv − ∇2 v ∇2 v ≡ (∇2 v1 . . For these holds: t = n T. Some important integral theorems are: Gauss: Stokes for a scalar field: Stokes for a vector field: This results in: Ostrogradsky: (v · n )d2 A = (φ · et )ds = (v · et )ds = (divv )d3 V (n × gradφ)d2 A (rotv · n )d2 A (rotv · n )d2 A = 0 (n × v )d2 A = (φn )d2 A = (rotv )d3 A (gradφ)d3 V ds.2 Conservation laws On a volume work two types of forces: 1. Here. v is an arbitrary vector field and φ an arbitrary scalar field.

Conservation of energy: T de p d ds = − = −divq + T : D dt dt dt Here. 2 For a Newtonian liquid holds: T = 2ηD. Wevers T can be split in a part pI representing the normal tensions and a part T representing the shear stresses: T = T + pI. Conservation of mass: ∂ + div · ( v ) = 0 ∂t ∂v + ( v · ∇)v = f0 + divT = f0 − gradp + divT ∂t 2. deformation.A. Here. dilatation The quantity L:=gradv can be split in a symmetric part D and an antisymmetric part W. J. From equating the thermodynamical and mechanical pressure it follows: 3η + 2η = 0. When the flow velocity is v at position r holds on position r + dr: v(dr ) = v(r ) translation + dr · (gradv ) rotation. When viscous aspects can be ignored holds: divT= −gradp. q = −κ ∇T is the heat flow. If the viscosity is constant holds: div(2D) = ∇ 2 v + grad divv. η is the dynamical viscosity. Further holds: ∂e ∂E ∂e ∂E =− . L = D + W with Dij := 1 2 ∂vj ∂vi + ∂xj ∂xi . Wij := 1 2 ∂vj ∂vi − ∂xj ∂xi When the rotation or vorticity ω = rotv is introduced holds: W ij = 1 εijk ωk . ω represents the local rotation 2 velocity: dr · W = 1 ω × dr. The conservation laws for mass. They are: Integral notation: 1. Conservation of mass: ∂ ∂t ∂ ∂t d3 V + (v · n )d2 A = 0 v(v · n )d2 A = f0 d3 V + n · T d2 A 2. e is the internal energy per unit of mass E/m and s is the entropy per unit of mass S/m. momentum and energy for continuous media can be written in both integral and differential form. Conservation of energy: ∂ ∂t − vd3 V + ( 1 v 2 + e) d3 V + 2 ( 1 v 2 + e) (v · n )d2 A = 2 (v · n T)d2 A (q · n )d2 A + (v · f0 )d3 V + Differential notation: 1. where I is the unit tensor. . Conservation of momentum: 3.C. Conservation of momentum: 3.40 Physics Formulary by ir. This is related to the shear stress τ by: ∂vi τij = η ∂xj For compressible media can be stated: T = (η divv )I + 2ηD. T = = p=− ∂V ∂1/ ∂S ∂s so ∂e ∂h CV = and Cp = ∂T V ∂T p with h = H/m the enthalpy per unit of mass.

2 with γ = Cp /CV : γ p c2 1 2 = 1 v2 + = constant 2v + γ − 1 2 γ −1 With a velocity potential defined by v = gradφ holds for instationary flows: ∂φ 1 2 + 2 v + gh + ∂t dp = constant everywhere 9. when viscous effects are limited to the boundary layer. These numbers can be interpreted as follows: • Re: (stationary inertial forces)/(viscous forces) . One can also deduce functional equalities without solving the differential equations.Chapter 9: Transport phenomena 41 From this one can derive the Navier-Stokes equations for an incompressible. c is the speed of sound and L is a characteristic length of the system. If a surface A surrounds the object outside the boundary layer holds: F =− [pn + v(v · n )]d2 A 9. If also holds rotv = 0 and 2 the entropy is equal on each streamline holds 1 v 2 + gh + dp/ =constant everywhere.4 Characterising of flows by dimensionless numbers The advantage of dimensionless numbers is that they make model experiments possible: one has to make the dimensionless numbers which are important for the specific experiment equal for both model and the real situation. can be obtained using the momentum law.3 Bernoulli’s equations Starting with the momentum equation one can find for a non-viscous medium for stationary flows. viscous and heat-conducting medium: divv ∂v + (v · ∇)v ∂t C ∂T + C(v · ∇)T ∂t = = = 0 g − gradp + η∇2 v κ∇2 T + 2ηD : D with C the thermal heat capacity. For ideal gases with constant C p and CV holds. For incompressible 2 flows this becomes: 1 v 2 + gh + p/ =constant everywhere. with (v · grad)v = 1 grad(v 2 ) + (rotv ) × v 2 and the potential equation g = −grad(gh) that: 1 2 2v + gh + dp = constant along a streamline For compressible flows holds: 1 v 2 + gh + p/ =constant along a line of flow. α follows from the equation for heat transport κ∂ y T = α∆T and a = κ/ c is the thermal diffusion coefficient. Some dimensionless numbers are given by: Strouhal: Sr = Fourier: Prandtl: ωL v a Fo = ωL2 ν Pr = a v2 gL vL P´ clet: Pe = e a Lα Nusselt: Nu = κ Froude: Fr = Mach: v c vL Reynolds: Re = ν v2 Eckert: Ec = c∆T Ma = Here. The force F on an object within a flow. ν = η/ is the kinematic viscosity.

grad = Lgrad.42 Physics Formulary by ir. and turbulent if Re is larger. For large Re holds for the force on a surface A: F = 1 CW A v 2 . the dimensionless Navier-Stokes equation becomes.056ReD √ 4R3 α π dp 3 dx 2 For flows at a small Re holds: ∇p = η∇ v and divv = 0. y) can be defined: with ΦAB the amount of liquid flowing through a curve s between the points A and B: B B ΦAB = A (v · n )ds = A (vx dy − vy dx) . For a 2-dimensional flow a flow function ψ(x. Wevers • Sr: (non-stationary inertial forces)/(stationary inertial forces) • Fr: (stationary inertial forces)/(gravity) • Fo: (heat conductance)/(non-stationary change in enthalpy) • Pe: (convective heat transport)/(heat conductance) • Ec: (viscous dissipation)/(convective heat transport) • Ma: (velocity)/(speed of sound): objects moving faster than approximately Ma = 0. Now. • Pr and Nu are related to specific materials.A. with x = x/L. J. For the total force on a sphere with radius R in a flow then holds: F = 6πηRv. v = v/V . In the incompressible case follows from conservation of mass ∇ 2 φ = 0.5 Tube flows For tube flows holds: they are laminar if Re< 2300 with dimension of length the diameter of the tube. For an incompressible laminar flow through a straight.C. 2 For gas transport at low pressures (Knudsen-gas) holds: Φ V = 2. if p = p( ) and all forces are conservative.8 produce shockwaves which propagate with an angle θ with the velocity of the object. Kelvin’s theorem can be derived: dΓ =0 dt For rotationless flows a velocity potential v = gradφ can be introduced. Re > 2300: Le /2R ≈ 50 9.6 Potential theory The circulation Γ is defined as: Γ = (v · et )ds = (rotv ) · nd2 A = (ω · n )d2 A For non viscous media. For this angle holds Ma= 1/ arctan(θ). circular tube holds for the velocity profile: 1 dp 2 (R − r2 ) v(r) = − 4η dx R For the volume flow holds: Φ V = 0 v(r)2πrdr = − π dp 4 R 8η dx The entrance length L e is given by: 1. ∇ 2 = L2 ∇2 and t = tω: g ∂v ∇ 2v + (v · ∇ )v = −grad p + Sr + ∂t Fr Re 9. 500 < ReD < 2300: Le /2R = 0.

For source flows with power Q in (x. x The momentum theorem of Von Karman for the boundary layer is: τ0 d dv (ϑv 2 ) + δ ∗ v = dx dx where the displacement thickness δ ∗ v and the momentum thickness ϑv 2 are given by: ∞ ∞ ∗ ϑv = 0 2 (v − vx )vx dy . If an object is surrounded by an uniform main flow with v = ve x and such a large Re that viscous effects are limited to the boundary layer holds: F x = 0 and Fy = − Γv. The statement that Fx = 0 is d’Alembert’s paradox and originates from the neglection of viscous effects. δ v = 0 (v − vx )dy and τ0 = −η ∂vx ∂y ∂vx ∂y y=0 The boundary layer is released from the surface if = 0.8 Heat conductance For non-stationairy heat conductance in one dimension without flow holds: κ ∂2T ∂T = +Φ ∂t c ∂x2 where Φ is a source term.Chapter 9: Transport phenomena 43 and the definitions v x = ∂ψ/∂y. dx δ2 9. With v∞ the velocity of the main flow it follows for the velocity v y ⊥ the surface: vy L ≈ δv∞ . For a vortex holds: φ = Γθ/2π.7. vy = −∂ψ/∂x holds: ΦAB = ψ(B) − ψ(A). If Φ = 0 the solutions for harmonic oscillations at x = 0 are: x T − T∞ x cos ωt − = exp − Tmax − T∞ D D .1 Flow boundary layers √ If for the thickness of the boundary layer holds: δ L holds: δ ≈ L/ Re. y) = (0. vθ = 0.2 Temperature boundary layers If the thickness of the temperature boundary layer δ T √ L holds: 1. 9.7. f (∞) = 1. Henxe rotating bodies also create a force perpendicular to their direction of motion: the Magnus effect. vθ = − = r ∂θ ∂r ∂r r ∂θ Q ln(r) so that vr = Q/2πr. with vy /v∞ = f (y/δ): 2f + f f = 0 with boundary conditions f (0) = f (0) = 0. In general holds: ∂2ψ ∂2ψ + = −ωz 2 ∂x ∂y 2 In polar coordinates holds: ∂φ 1 ∂φ 1 ∂ψ ∂ψ = . If Pr 1: δ/δT ≈ 3 Pr. If Pr ≤ 1: δ/δ T ≈ √ Pr. The lift F y is also created by η because Γ = 0 due to viscous effects. From this follows: CW = 0. 9. 0) holds: φ = 2π vr = For a dipole of strength Q in x = a and strength −Q in x = −a follows from superposition: φ = −Qax/2πr 2 where Qa is the dipole strength.7 Boundary layers 9. 2.664 Re−1/2 . Blasius’ equation for the boundary layer is. This is equivalent with y=0 12ηv∞ dp = .

9 Turbulence √ The time scale of turbulent velocity variations τ t is of the order of: τ t = τ Re/Ma2 with τ the molecular time scale. Near a boundary holds: ν t = 0. The flow density J = −D∇n. Further. 9.44 Physics Formulary by ir. J. t)dk = constant From this follows that in a two-dimensional flow the energy flux goes towards large values of k: larger structures become larger at the expanse of smaller ones. 9. The onedimensional solution at Φ = 0 is 1 x2 T (x. far away of a boundary holds: ν t ≈ νRe. t) = √ exp − 4at 2 πat This is mathematical equivalent to the diffusion problem: ∂n = D∇2 n + P − A ∂t where P is the production of and A the discharge of particles. The Navier-Stokes equation now becomes: ∂ v ∇ p divSR + ( v · ∇) v = − + ν∇2 v + ∂t where SR ij = − vi vj is the turbulent stress tensor. V ∼ (∇ ψ) ∼ 2 2 0 k 2 E(k.A. ω is conserved. For the velocity of the particles holds: v(t) = v + v (t) with v (t) = 0. analogous to Newtonian media: S R = 2 νt D . ψ) the Jacobian. Boussinesq’s assumption is: τ ij = − vi vj . In three-dimensional flows the situation is just the opposite. At x = πD the temperature variation is in anti-phase with the surface. So if ν = 0. ψ) = ν∇2 ω dt ∂t With J(ω.C.10 Self organization ∂ω dω = + J(ω. the kinetic energy/mA and the enstrofy V are conserved: with v = ∇ × ( kψ) For a (semi) two-dimensional flow holds: ∞ ∞ E ∼ (∇ψ) ∼ 2 0 E(k. It is stated that. Wevers with D = 2κ/ω c. t)dk = constant . .

The expectation value f of a quantity f of a system is given by: f (t) = Ψ∗ f Ψd3 V .1. This wavefunction can be described in normal or momentum space.2 The Compton effect For the wavelength of scattered light. 10. Both definitions are each others Fourier transform: 1 Φ(k. w(λ) = 3 5 ehc/λkT − 1 hf /kT − 1 c λ e Stefan-Boltzmann’s law for the total power density can be derived from this: P = AσT 4 . t) = √ h Φ(k.3 Electron diffraction Diffraction of electrons at a crystal can be explained by assuming that particles have a wave character with wavelength λ = h/p. 10. These operators are hermitian because their eigenvalues must be real: ∗ ψ1 Aψ2 d3 V = ψ2 (Aψ1 )∗ d3 V .3 Operators in quantum physics In quantum mechanics. ¯ The wavefunction can be interpreted as a measure for the probability P to find a particle somewhere (Born): dP = |ψ|2 d3 V . if light is considered to exist of particles. t)e−ikx dx and Ψ(x. t) = √ h 1 Ψ(x.1. classical quantities are translated into operators.1. Wien’s law for the maximum can also be derived from this: T λ max = kW . This wavelength is called the Broglie-wavelength.1 Introduction to quantum physics 10.2 Wave functions The wave character of particles is described by a wavefunction ψ. 10.Chapter 10 Quantum physics 10. t)eikx dk These waves define a particle with group velocity v g = p/m and energy E = hω. can be derived: λ =λ+ h (1 − cos θ) = λ + λC (1 − cos θ) mc 10.1 Black body radiation Planck’s law for the energy distribution for the radiation of a black body is: w(f ) = 1 1 8πhf 3 8πhc . The normalizing condition for wavefunctions follows from this: Φ|Φ = Ψ|Ψ = 1. fp (t) = Φ∗ f Φd3 Vp This is also written as f (t) = Φ|f |Φ .

. H] = 0. For hermitian operators the commutator is always complex. then follows for the coefficients: cn = un |Ψ . B] ≡ AB − BA the commutator of A and B. t) The following conservation law holds: = −∇J(x. Because (AB)ij = ui |AB|uj = |un un | = 1.C. If the wavefunction is split in even and odd functions. Hence. The matrix element A ij is given by: Aij = ui |A|uj . t) = The current density J is given by: J = + dE c(E)uE (x) exp − iEt h ¯ h ¯ (ψ ∗ ∇ψ − ψ∇ψ ∗ ) 2im ∂P (x. the chance to find eigenvalue a n when measuring A is given by |c n |2 in the discrete part of the spectrum and |c n |2 da in the continuous part of the spectrum between a and a + da. t) and ψ − = 1 (1 − P)ψ(x. The functions ψ + = 1 (1 + P)ψ(x. From Hψ = Eψ then follows the Schr odinger equation: ¨ − h ¯2 2 ∂ψ ∇ ψ + U ψ = Eψ = i¯ h 2m ∂t The linear combination of the solutions of this equation give the general solution. Ψ can be expanded into a basis of eigenfunctions: Ψ = cn un .5 The Schr¨ dinger equation o The momentum operator is given by: p op = −i¯ ∇. If [A. The position operator is: x op = i¯ ∇p . H] = + dt ∂t i¯ h with [A. B]|ψ | 2 From this follows: ∆E · ∆t ≥ 1 ¯ . p x ] = i¯ holds: ∆px · ∆x ≥ 1 ¯ . If the system is in a state described by Ψ. J. they should be made symmetrical: a classical product AB becomes 1 (AB + BA). the operators A and B have a common set of eigenfunctions. it can be expanded into eigenfunctions of P: ψ(x) = 1 (ψ(x) + ψ(−x)) + 1 (ψ(x) − ψ(−x)) 2 2 even: ψ+ odd: ψ− [P. The Hamiltonian of a particle with mass m. In one dimension it is: ψ(x. and ∆Lx · ∆Ly ≥ 1 ¯ Lz . h 2h 2h 2h 2 it follows: 10. with F = −dU/dx represents the classical equation. B] = 0. Before the addition of quantummechanical operators which are a product of other operators. By applying this to p x and x follows (Ehrenfest): md 2 x t /dt2 = − dU (x)/dx .A.46 Physics Formulary by ir. t) both satisfy the Schr¨ dinger o 2 2 equation. and because [x. If this basis is taken orthonormal. ui |A |un un |B|uj holds: n n n The time-dependence of an operator is given by (Heisenberg): dA ∂A [A. The first order approximation F (x) t ≈ F ( x ). Wevers When un is the eigenfunction of the eigenvalue equation AΨ = aΨ for eigenvalue a n . The energy h h operator is given by: E op = i¯ ∂/∂t.4 The uncertainty principle If the uncertainty ∆A in A is defined as: (∆A) 2 = ψ|Aop − A |2 ψ = A2 − A ∆A · ∆B ≥ 1 | ψ|[A.6 Parity The parity operator in one dimension is given by Pψ(x) = ψ(−x). t) ∂t 10. 2 10. parity is a conserved quantity. potential energy U and total h energy E is given by: H = p 2 /2m + U .

h The energy in this ground state is 1 ¯ ω: the zero point energy. 2 A† √ h ¯ n u0 with u0 = 4 mωx2 mω exp − π¯ h 2¯ h 10. within and behind the potential well. There is an eigenfunction u 0 for which holds: Au 0 = 0. ψ2 = Ceik x + De−ik x .7 The tunnel effect The wavefunction of a particle in an ∞ high potential step from x = 0 to x = a is given by ψ(x) = a−1/2 sin(kx). h Because Lx and Ly are hermitian (this implies L † = L∓ ) and |L± Ylm |2 > 0 follows: l(l + 1) − m2 − m ≥ ± 0 ⇒ −l ≤ m ≤ l. Lz ] = hL− follows: Lz (L− Ylm ) = (m − 1)¯ (L− Ylm ). Using the boundary conditions requiring continuity: ψ = h continuous and ∂ψ/∂x =continuous at x = 0 and x = a gives B. The Hamiltonian H is then given by: 2 H= with A= 1 2 mωx p2 + 1 mω 2 x2 = 1 ¯ ω + ωA† A 2h 2m 2 ip and A† = +√ 2mω 1 2 mωx ip −√ 2mω A = A† is non hermitian. . holds: ψ1 = Aeikx + Be−ikx . However. If W > W0 and 2a = nλ = 2πn/k holds: T = 1. cyclically holds: [Lx . C and D and A expressed in A. The amplitude T of the transmitted wave is defined by T = |A |2 /|A|2 . ¯ h From [L2 . ψ3 = A eikx with k 2 = 2m(W − W0 )/¯ 2 and k 2 = 2mW . L± ] = 0 follows: L2 (L± Ylm ) = l(l + 1)¯ 2 (L± Ylm ). Half-odd integral values give no unique solution ψ and are therefore dismissed. h z ¯ L± = he±iϕ ± ∂ ∂ + i cot(θ) ∂θ ∂ϕ h h From [L+ . H] = 0. H] = hωA. be non-zero within the potential well. 2 and 3 are the areas in front. Further. unlike the classical case. If the wavefunction with energy W meets a potential well of W 0 > W the wavefunction will. A is a so called raising ladder operator. Lz ] = −¯ L+ follows: Lz (L+ Ylm ) = (m + 1)¯ (L+ Ylm ). Not all components of L can be known at the same time with arbitrary accuracy. For L z h holds: ∂ ∂ ∂ Lz = −i¯ = −i¯ x h −y h ∂ϕ ∂y ∂x The ladder operators L ± are defined by: L ± = Lx ± iLy . HAu E = (E − ¯ ω)AuE . Ly ] = i¯ Lz . From [L− . Now holds: L2 = L+ L− + L2 − ¯ Lz . L2 ] = [Lz . For the normalized eigenfunctions follows: 2h 1 un = √ n! h with En = ( 1 + n)¯ ω. The energylevels are given by E n = n2 h2 /8a2 m. If 1. A † ] = h and [A. H] = [L2 . 10.8 The harmonic oscillator 2 For a harmonic oscillator holds: U = 1 bx2 and ω0 = b/m. A † a ¯ ¯ lowering ladder operator. [A.9 Angular momentum For the angular momentum operators L holds: [L z . Further follows that l has to be integral or half-integral.Chapter 10: Quantum physics 47 10.

48 Physics Formulary by ir. Sy ] = i¯ Sz .10 Spin For the spin operators are defined by their commutation relations: [S x . γ4 = I 0 0 −I where ψ(x) = (ψ1 (x). Because the spin operators h do not act in the physical space (x. The electron will have an intrinsic magnetic dipole moment M due to its spin. Thus the spin precesses about the z-axis with frequency 2ω. From this can be derived: S x = 1 ¯ cos(2ωt) h h 2 and Sy = 1 ¯ sin(2ωt). This causes the normal 2h Zeeman splitting of spectral lines.C. σz = 1 0 0 −1 The eigenstates of S z are called spinors: χ = α+ χ+ + α− χ− . t) = 0 0 iσk −iσk 0 . ψ3 (x). z) the uniqueness of the wavefunction is not a criterium here: also half odd-integer values are allowed for the spin. Then the probability 2h 2h to find spin up after a measurement is given by |α + |2 and the chance to find spin down is given by |α − |2 . J. S] = 0 spin and angular momentum operators do not have a common set of eigenfunctions. given by M = −egS S/2m. The spin operators are given by S = 1 ¯ σ. where χ+ = (1. Of course holds |α+ |2 + |α− |2 = 1. the Klein-Gordon 0 equation is found: 1 ∂2 m 2 c2 ∇2 − 2 2 − 02 ψ(x. the Dirac equation becomes: γλ m0 c ∂ + ∂xλ h ¯ ψ(x. So the general solution is given by χ = (ae −iωt .11 The Dirac formalism If the operators for p and E are substituted in the relativistic equation E 2 = m2 c4 + p2 c2 . σ y . t) = 0 c ∂t h ¯ The operator ✷ − m 2 c2 /¯ 2 can be separated: h 0 ∇2 − 1 ∂2 m 2 c2 − 02 = 2 ∂t2 c h ¯ γλ m0 c ∂ − ∂xλ h ¯ γµ m0 c ∂ + ∂xµ h ¯ where the Dirac matrices γ are given by: {γ λ . σy = 0 −i i 0 . Because [L. ψ2 (x). The Schr¨ dinger equation then becomes (because ∂χ/∂x i ≡ 0): o i¯ h egS ¯ ∂χ(t) h = σ · Bχ(t) ∂t 4m with σ = (σ x . Wevers 10. . y. 10. σ z ). The potential operator for two particles with spin ± 1 ¯ is given by: 2h V (r) = V1 (r) + 1 (S1 · S2 )V2 (r) = V1 (r) + 1 V2 (r)[S(S + 1) − 3 ] 2 2 h ¯2 This makes it possible for two states to exist: S = 1 (triplet) or S = 0 (Singlet). γµ } = γλ γµ + γµ γλ = 2δλµ (In general relativity this becomes 2gλµ ). From this it can be derived that the γ are hermitian 4 × 4 matrices given by: γk = With this. beiωt ). ψ4 (x)) is a spinor. 0) represents the state with spin up (Sz = 1 ¯ ) and χ− = (0.A. 1) represents the state with spin down (S z = − 1 ¯ ). If B = Bez there are two eigenvalues for this problem: χ ± for E = ±egS ¯ B/4m = h ±¯ ω. with gS = 2(1 + α/2π + · · ·) the gyromagnetic ratio. In the presence of an external magnetic field this gives a potential energy U = − M · B. with 2h σx = 0 1 1 0 .

1 Solutions The solutions of the Schr¨ dinger equation in spherical coordinates if the potential energy is a function of r o alone can be written as: ψ(r. where g is the Land´ -factor: h e g =1+ S·J j(j + 1) + s(s + 1) − l(l + 1) =1+ J2 2j(j + 1) For atoms with more than one electron the following limiting situations occur: . Lm (x) = n n−1 l=0 (−1)m n! −x −m dn−m −x n e x (e x ) (n − m)! dxn−m The parity of these solutions is (−1) l .. 0. with 2j + 1 possible z-components (m J ∈ {−j.0023 is the gyromagnetic ratio of the electron.Chapter 10: Quantum physics 49 10. . The Lj are the associated Laguere functions and the P lm are the i associated Legendre polynomials: Pl |m| (x) = (1 − x2 )m/2 d|m| (x2 − 1)l dx|m| .12.. It can then be derived that: |En |Z 2 α2 a= 2 h ¯ nl(l + 1)(l + 1 ) 2 After a relativistic correction this becomes: E = En + |En |Z 2 α2 n 3 1 − 4n j + 1 2 The fine structure in atomic spectra arises from this. Further holds: J 2 = L2 + S 2 + 2L · S = L2 + S 2 + 2Lz Sz + L+ S− + L− S+ .ml (θ. 10. ϕ)χms . ϕ) = R nl (r)Yl. . with Clm Ylm = √ Plm (cos θ)eimϕ 2π For an atom or ion with one electron holds: R lm (ρ) = Clm e−ρ/2 ρl L2l+1 (ρ) n−l−1 with ρ = 2rZ/na0 with a0 = ε0 h2 /πme e2 .12 Atomic physics 10. If the interaction 2 energy between S and L is small it can be stated that: E = E n + ESL = En + aS · L.. j}). The total magnetic dipole moment of an electron is then M = ML + MS = −(e/2me )(L + gS S) where gS = 2.3 Spin-orbit interaction The total momentum is given by J = L + M .2 Eigenvalue equations The eigenvalue equations for an atom or ion with with one electron are: Equation Hop ψ = Eψ Lzop Ylm = Lz Ylm L2 Ylm op = L Ylm 2 Eigenvalue En = µe4 Z 2 /8ε2 h2 n2 0 L z = ml ¯ h L = l(l + 1)¯ h Sz = ms ¯ h S 2 = s(s + 1)¯ 2 h 2 2 Range n≥1 −l ≤ ml ≤ l l<n ms = ± 1 2 s= 1 2 Szop χ = Sz χ 2 Sop χ = S 2 χ 10.12. With g S = 2 follows for the average magnetic moment: Mav = −(e/2me )g¯ J.. The functions are 2 (2l + 1) = 2n2 -folded degenerated. J has quantum numbers j with possible values j = l ± 1 . θ.12.

except ∆l = ±1. ∆L = 0.jn . At higher S the line splits up in more parts: the anomalous Zeeman effect. For a transition between two singlet states the line splits in 3 parts.14. t).4 Selection rules For the dipole transition matrix elements follows: p 0 ∼ | l2 m2 |E · r |l1 m1 |. J − 1.12. but ∆mJ = 0 is forbidden if ∆J = 0. J. L + S} and mJ ∈ {−J. this is called a local gauge transformation. Because φn is a complete set holds:     cnk (λ)φk ψn = N (λ) φn +   k=n When cnk and En are being expanded into λ: c nk = λcnk + λ2 cnk + · · · (1) (2) 0 En = En + λEn + λ2 En + · · · (1) (2) ..50 Physics Formulary by ir. except for very strong fields or macroscopic motions.. mJ where only the j i of the not completely filled subshells are to be taken into account. L + S − 1.. S. ±1. Suppose 0 that φn is a complete set of eigenfunctions of the non-perturbed Hamiltonian H 0 : H0 φn = En φn . but ∆mJ = 0 is forbidden if ∆J = 0. .. This e results in the normal Zeeman effect. For an atom where j − j coupling is dominant further holds: for the jumping electron holds. 2S + 1 is the multiplicity of a multiplet. J ∈ {|L − S|. The state is characterized by j i . ±1.13 Interaction with electromagnetic fields The Hamiltonian of an electron in an electromagnetic field is given by: H= e2 2 1 h ¯2 e (p + eA)2 − eV = − ∇2 + A − eV B·L+ 2µ 2µ 2µ 2µ where µ is the reduced mass of the system. ±1. for ∆m J = −1. 0 + 1. Wevers 1. ∆J = 0. V = V + ∂f /∂t is applied to the potentials the wavefunction h is also transformed according to ψ = ψeiqef /¯ with qe the charge of the particle.14 Perturbation theory 10. in contrast with a global gauge transformation which can always be applied. mJ . ±1 except for J = 0 → J = 0 transitions. The spectroscopic notation for this interaction is: 2S+1 LJ . J. The energy difference for larger atoms when placed in a magnetic field is: ∆E = gµ B mJ B where g is the Land´ factor. . j − j coupling: for larger atoms the electrostatic interaction is smaller than the L i · si interaction of an electron. Because f = f (x. 10..C. 2. 10. For an atom where L − S coupling is dominant further holds: ∆S = 0 (but not strict).. Conservation of angular momentum demands that for the transition of an electron holds that ∆l = ±1. J.1 Time-independent perturbation theory To solve the equation (H 0 + λH1 )ψn = En ψn one has to find the eigenfunctions of H = H 0 + λH1 . J}. ±1 but no J = 0 → J = 0 transitions and ∆mJ = 0. and for all other electrons: ∆j = 0. L − S coupling: for small atoms the electrostatic interaction is dominant and the state can be characterized by L. 10. Interaction with the spin of the nucleus gives the hyperfine structure. ±1.A. The term ∼ A 2 can usually be neglected. When a gauge transformation A = A − ∇f . also: ∆j = 0. ∆m J = 0... For B = Bez it is given by e2 B 2 (x2 + y 2 )/8µ. For the total atom holds: ∆J = 0.

interchange of the coordinates (spatial and spin) of each pair of particles. For a system of two electrons there are 2 possibilities for the spatial wavefunction.2 Time-dependent perturbation theory From the Schr¨ dinger equation i¯ o h and the expansion ψ(t) = n t ∂ψ(t) = (H0 + λV (t))ψ(t) ∂t 0 −iEn t h ¯ cn (t) exp φn with cn (t) = δnk + λcn (t) + · · · (1) follows: c(1) (t) n λ = i¯ h 0 φn |V (t )|φk exp 0 0 i(En − Ek )t h ¯ dt 10.Chapter 10: Quantum physics 51 and this is put into the Schr¨ dinger equation the result is: E n = φn |H1 |φn and o φm |H1 |φn c(1) = if m = n. i i (1) 10. 0 0 − E0 0 En En − Ek k k=n k=n (1) In case the levels are degenerated the above does not hold. Now ψ is expanded as:     (1) ψn = N (λ) αi φni + λ cnk βi φki + · · ·   i k=n i 0 0 0 Eni = Eni + λEni is approximated by E ni := En .t. 2. When a and b are the quantum numbers of electron 1 and 2 holds: ψS (1. ψA (1.t. So to first order holds: ψ n = φn + φk . 2) = ψa (1)ψb (2) − ψa (2)ψb (1) Because the particles do not approach each other closely the repulsion energy at ψ A in this state is smaller. Substitution in the Schr¨ dinger equation and taking dot o (1) product with φni gives: αi φnj |H1 |φni = En αj . The following spin wavefunctions are possible: √ χA = 1 2[χ+ (1)χ− (2) − χ+ (2)χ− (1)] ms = 0 2  ms = +1  χ+ (1)χ+ (2) √ 1 χS = 2[χ+ (1)χ− (2) + χ+ (2)χ− (1)] ms = 0  2 χ− (1)χ− (2) ms = −1 Because the total wavefunction must be antisymmetric it follows: ψ total = ψS χA or ψtotal = ψA χS .15. Particles with a half-odd integer spin (Fermions): ψ total must be antisymmetric w. 2) = ψa (1)ψb (2) + ψa (2)ψb (1) . The Pauli principle results from this: two Fermions cannot exist in an identical state because then ψ total = 0. interchange of the coordinates (spatial and spin) of each pair of particles.r.15 N-particle systems 10. The second-order correction of the energy is then given by: nm 0 0 En − Em | φk |H1 |φn |2 φk |λH1 |φn (2) En = . . so that φ mi |φnj = δmn δij . In that case an orthonormal set eigenfunctions φ ni is chosen for each level n. Normalization requires that |αi |2 = 1.r.14. For the total wavefunction of a system of identical indistinguishable particles holds: 1. Particles with an integer spin (Bosons): ψ total must be symmetric w.1 General Identical particles are indistinguishable.

N ) = ψ(all permutations of 1. the connecting axis. This results in a large electron density between the nuclei and therefore a repulsion..r. one can write for the expectation value a of A: a = ri ψi |A|ψi . SP2 hybridization: ψ sp2 = ψ2s / 3 + c1 ψ2pz + c2 ψ2py .15. otherwise a π-orbital. it can be described by a density matrix ρ.. the function which gives the lowest energy is the best approximation. In some atoms. . 3. like a combination of two s-orbitals it is called a σ-orbital. ψ|ψ The energy calculated with this method is always higher than the real energy if ψ is only an approximation for the solutions of Hψ = Eψ. (−1/ 6.. it is energetical more suitable to form orbitals which are a linear combination of the s.N ) 1 The antisymmetric wavefunction is given by the determinant ψ A (1. J. i If ψ is expanded into an orthonormal basis {φ k } as: ψ (i) = k ck φk . if there are more functions to be chosen. Applying this to the function ψ = ci φi one finds: (Hij − ESij )ci = 0.16 Quantum statistics If a system exists in a state in which one has not the disposal of the maximal amount of information about the system.. Hij = φi |H|φj and Sij = φi |φj . with C1 = 1 and C2 ≈ 0. holds: (i) A = k (Aρ)kk = Tr(Aρ) ri |ψi ψi |. 0).. (−1/ 6. N ) = √ |uEi (j)| N! 10. S ii = 1 and Sij is the overlap integral. αi := Hii is the Coulomb integral and β ij := Hij the exchange integral. Here. ρ is hermitian. Further the 2p x and 2py orbitals remain.C. such as C. like the combination of two p-orbitals along two axes. with symmetry axes which are at an angle of 120◦ . 10..6. −1/ 2)}. A better approximation is: ψ(1. c2 ) ∈ {( 2/3. The 4 SP3 orbitals form a tetraheder with the 2 symmetry axes at an angle of 109 ◦28 . p and d states. Further holds ρ = k eigenvalue an when measuring A is given by ρ nn if one uses a basis of eigenvectors of A for {φ k }.52 Physics Formulary by ir. with Tr(ρ) = 1. If a molecular-orbital is 2 symmetric w. where (c1 . This equation has only solutions if the secular determinant |H ij − ESij | = 0. 1/ 2) √ √ .. SP-hybridization: ψ sp = 1 2(ψ2s ± ψ2pz ). There are 2 hybrid orbitals which are placed on one line 2 under 180◦ . For the time-dependence holds (in the Schr¨ dinger image operators are not explicitly time-dependent): o i¯ h dρ = [H. If the probability that the system is in state ψ i is given by ai . √ √ √ 2. The 3 SP2 orbitals lay in one plane.A. 2) = C 1 ψB (1)ψB (2) + C2 ψAB (1)ψAB (2). The energy of a system is: E = ψ|H|ψ . 2) = ψ B (1)ψB (2). The probability to find where ρlk = c∗ cl . ρ] dt . SP3 hybridization: ψ sp3 = 1 (ψ2s ± ψ2pz ± ψ2py ± ψ2px ).t. . If the 2 atoms approach each other there are two possibilities: √ the total wavefunction approaches the bonding function with lower total energy ψ B = 1 2(φa + φb ) or 2 √ approaches the anti-bonding function with higher energy ψ AB = 1 2(φa − φb ). Wevers For N particles the symmetric spatial function is given by: ψS (1.2 Molecules The wavefunctions of atom a and b are φ a and φb . There are three ways of hybridization in C: √ 1. The first approximation in the molecular-orbital theory is to place both electrons of a chemical bond in the bonding orbital: ψ(1. Also.

nk = N with ln(Zg ) = − gk ln[1 − exp((Ei − µ)/kT )]. 1}. Stirling’s equation: ln(n!) ≈ n ln(n) − n. nk = N . For indistinguishable particles which do not obey the exclusion principle the possible number of states is given by: P = N! k n gk k nk ! This results in the Bose-Einstein statistics. ρ] = 0. Bose-Einstein statistics: nk = . one can obtain the distribution: Pn (E) = ρnn = e−En /kT with the state sum Z = Z e−En /kT n The thermodynamic quantities are related to these definitions as follows: F = −kT ln(Z). n k ∈ {0. For a mixed state of M orthonormal quantum states with pn En = − ∂kT n n probability 1/M follows: S = k ln(M ). Here. Fermi-Dirac statistics: integer spin. The distribution function for the internal states for a system in thermal equilibrium is the most probable function. nk = with ln(Zg ) = gk ln[1 + exp((Ei − µ)/kT )]. exp((Ek − EF )/kT ) + 1 gk . The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be derived from this in the limit E k − µ nk = Ek N exp − Z kT T →0 kT : gk exp − k with Z = Ek kT With the Fermi-energy. the Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics can be written as: 1. and the conditions k k indistinguishable particles which obey the Pauli exclusion principle the possible number of states is given by: P = k gk ! nk !(gk − nk )! This results in the Fermi-Dirac statistics. Fermi-Dirac statistics: nk = gk . So the distribution functions which explain how particles are distributed over the different one-particle states k which are each g k -fold degenerate depend on the spin of the particles. Bose-Einstein statistics: half odd-integer spin. Zg is the large-canonical state sum and µ the chemical potential. the Fermi-energy. They are given by: 1. If all quantumstates with the same energy are equally probable: P i = P (Ei ). N is the total number of particles. n k ∈ I . U = H = ∂ ln(Z). This function can be found by taking the maximum of the function which gives the number of states with nk = N and nk Wk = W . gk N Zg exp((Ek − µ)/kT ) + 1 gk N Zg exp((Ek − µ)/kT ) − 1 2. S = −k Pn ln(Pn ). It is found by demanding and for it holds: lim µ = EF . For identical. exp((Ek − EF )/kT ) − 1 2.Chapter 10: Quantum physics 53 For a macroscopic system in equilibrium holds [H.

2 Transport Relaxation times are defined as τ = 1/ν c . for lower energies this can be a factor 10 lower. 2 Here Lp := |ne /∇ne | is the gradient length of the plasma. Deviations of charge neutrality by thermic motion are compensated by oscillations with frequency ωpe = ne e 2 me ε 0 The distance of closest approximation when two equal charged particles collide for a deviation of π/2 is −1/3 2b0 = e2 /(4πε0 1 mv 2 ). A “neat” plasma is defined as a plasma for which holds: b 0 < ne λD Lp . The relaxation for e-o interaction is much more complicated. τii = τee = ne e4 ln(ΛC ) ni e4 ln(ΛC ) The energy relaxation times for identical particles are equal to the momentum relaxation times. The degree of ionization α of a plasma is defined by: α = The probability that a test particle collides with another is given by dP = nσdx where σ is the cross section. If a plasma contains also negative charged ions α is not well defined. The mean free path is given by λ v = 1/nσ. The number of collisions per unit of time and volume between particles of kind 1 and 2 is given by n 1 n2 σv = Kn1 n2 . The potential of an electron is given by: V (r) = −e r exp − 4πε0 r λD with λD = ε0 kTe Ti ≈ e T i + ni T e ) ε0 kTe ne e 2 e2 (n because charge is shielded in a plasma. For T > 10 eV holds approximately: σ eo = −2/5 . The collision frequency ν c = 1/τc = nσv.1 Introduction ne ne + n0 where ne is the electron density and n 0 the density of the neutrals. Starting with σm = 4πb2 ln(ΛC ) and with 1 mv 2 = kT it can be 0 2 found that: √ 2 2 3 2√ 3/2 8 2πε0 m(kT ) 4πε m v τm = 4 0 = ne ln(ΛC ) ne4 ln(ΛC ) For momentum transfer between electrons and ions holds for a Maxwellian velocity distribution: √ √ √ √ 6π 3ε2 me (kTe )3/2 6π 3ε2 mi (kTi )3/2 0 0 ≈ τei . Approximately holds: τ ee : τei : E τie : τie = 1 : 1 : mi /me : mi /me .Chapter 11 Plasma physics 11. The rate coefficient K is defined by K = σv . Here. For distances < λ D the plasma cannot be assumed to be quasi-neutral. 11. 10−17 ve The resistivity η = E/J of a plasma is given by: √ e2 me ln(ΛC ) ne e 2 √ 2 η= = me νei 6π 3ε0 (kTe )3/2 . λ D is the Debye length. Because for e-i collisions the energy transfer is only ∼ 2m e /mi this is a slow process.

O(1 eV). It arises from the interference of matter waves behind the object. From this follows that kTe /e − kTi /e kTe µi Damb = ≈ 1/µe − 1/µi e In an external magnetic field B 0 particles will move in spiral orbits with cyclotron radius ρ = mv/eB 0 and with cyclotron frequency Ω = B 0 e/m. ϕ plane is r(r. The differential cross section is then defined as: I(Ω) = b ∂b dσ = dΩ sin(χ) ∂χ For a potential energy W (r) = kr −n follows: I(Ω. t) = u + ρ(t). The coefficient of ambipolar diffusion D amb is defined by Γ = Γi = Γe = −Damb ∇ne. For low energies.i .Chapter 11: Plasma physics 55 The diffusion coefficient D is defined by means of the flux Γ by Γ = nvdiff = −D∇n.1 General The scattering angle of a particle in interaction with another particle. A rough estimate gives 3 τD = Lp /D = L2 τc /λ2 . So the electrons are magnetized if √ me e3 ne ln(ΛC ) ρe √ 2 = <1 λee 6π 3ε0 (kTe )3/2 B0 Magnetization of only the electrons is sufficient to confine the plasma reasonable because they are coupled to the ions by charge neutrality. If E = Er er + Ez ez and B = Bz ez the E × B drift results in a velocity u = ( E × B )/B 2 and the velocity in the ˙ r. The equation of continuity is ∂ t n + ∇(nvdiff ) = 0 ⇒ ∂t n = D∇2 n.3. One finds that D = 1 λv v. For magnetized plasma’s λ v must be replaced with the cyclotron radius. In electrical p v fields also holds J = neµE = e(ne µe + ni µi )E with µ = e/mνc the mobility of the particles. moving through a ring with dσ = 2πbdb leave the scattering area at a solid angle dΩ = 2π sin(χ)dχ. For a uniform B-field holds: p = nkT = B 2 /2µ0 . In case of magnetic confinement holds: ∇p = J × B. as shown in the figure at the right is: ∞ b s ❅ ❘ ❅ ra b ✻ ❄ ϕ M χ χ = π − 2b ra dr r2 1− b2 W (r) − r2 E0 Particles with an impact parameter between b and b + db. A plasma is called magnetized if λv > ρe.3 Elastic collisions 11. Combined with the two stationary Maxwell equations for the B-field these form the ideal magneto-hydrodynamic equations. ˙ 11. v) ∼ v −4/n . If both magnetic and electric fields are present electrons and ions will move in the same direction. σ has a Ramsauer minimum. The Einstein ratio is: kT D = µ e Because a plasma is electrically neutral electrons and ions are strongly coupled and they don’t diffuse independent. The helical orbit is perturbed by collisions. .i . ϕ. I(Ω) for angles 0 < χ < λ/4 is larger than the classical value.

Repulsing nuclear forces prevent this to happen. Because dp = d(mv) = 0 D mv0 (1 − cos χ) a cross section related to momentum transfer σ m is given by: σm = (1 − cos χ)I(Ω)dΩ = 4πb2 ln 0 1 sin( 1 χmin ) 2 = 4πb2 ln 0 λD b0 := 4πb2 ln(ΛC ) ∼ 0 ln(v 4 ) v4 where ln(ΛC ) is the Coulomb-logarithm.2 The Coulomb interaction 2 For the Coulomb interaction holds: 2b 0 = q1 q2 /2πε0 mv0 . and is a lowest estimate for the total cross section. The scattering is free from collective effects if kλD 1.3.3.3. If λ λ 0 it is called Rayleigh 0 0 scattering. This gives b = b0 cot( 1 χ) and 2 I(Ω = b ∂b b2 0 = sin(χ) ∂χ 4 sin2 ( 1 χ) 2 Because the influence of a particle vanishes at r = λ D holds: σ = π(λ2 − b2 ). J. 11. The cross section for capture σ orb = πb2 is called the Langevin a limit. with p = α E. Wevers 11. For this quantity holds: Λ C = λD /b0 = 9n(λD ). 11. so W (r) = 2b0 /r.65 · 10 −29 m2 and ∆f 2v = sin( 1 χ) 2 f c This gives for the scattered energy E scat ∼ nλ4 /(λ2 − λ2 )2 with n the density. W (r) = − =− 4πε0 r2 8πε0 r2 2(4πε0 )2 r4 ∞ with ba = 4 2e2 α holds: χ = π − 2b 2 (4πε0 )2 1 mv0 2 dr r2 1− b2 b4 + a4 2 r 4r ra If b ≥ ba the charge would hit the atom. which is given by λ − λ = λC (1 − cos χ) with λC = h/mc and cannot be used any more if relativistic effects become important.3 The induced dipole interaction The induced dipole interaction.56 Physics Formulary by ir.4 The centre of mass system If collisions of two particles with masses m 1 and m2 which scatter in the centre of mass system by an angle χ are compared with the scattering under an angle θ in the laboratory system holds: tan(θ) = m2 sin(χ) m1 + m2 cos(χ) The energy loss ∆E of the incoming particle is given by: ∆E = E 1 2 2 m2 v2 1 2 2 m1 v1 = 2m1 m2 (1 − cos(χ)) (m1 + m2 )2 11. Thomson sccattering is a limit of Compton scattering. The cross section σ = 6. .A.C. If the scattering angle is a lot times 2π it is called capture.5 Scattering of light Scattering of light by free electrons is called Thomson scattering.3. gives a potential V and an energy W in a dipole field given by: V (r) = |e|p αe2 p · er .

T ) exp gq kT pq holds: 11. X p + e− + (Epi ) → X+ + 2e− : ← 1 nS n+ ne h3 p 1 = + exp gp g1 ge (2πme kTe )3/2 Epi kTe Because the number of particles on the left-hand side and right-hand side of the equation is different. From microscopic reversibility one can derive that for the rate coefficients K(p. q. T ) = ∆Epq gp K(p. Decay: Aq → Ap + hf ← .1 Types of collisions The kinetic energy can be split in a part of and a part in the centre of mass system.4 Thermodynamic equilibrium and reversibility Planck’s radiation law and the Maxwellian velocity distribution hold for a plasma in equilibrium: ρ(ν. q. This factor causes the Saha-jump. this gives: ηx = ˆ h3 nx e−Ekin /kT gx (2πmx kT )3/2 where g is the statistical weight of the state and n/g := η. Excitation: Ap + e− → Aq + e− ← 2.5 Inelastic collisions 11. T )dν = 2πn √ 1 E 8πhν 3 dν . With this one finds for the Boltzmann balance.5. X p + e− → X1 + e− + (E1p ): ← nB gp p = exp n1 g1 Ep − E1 kTe And for the Saha balance. for excited states usually holds g = 2j + 1 = 2n2 . The energy in the centre of mass system is available for reactions. This energy is given by E= m1 m2 (v1 − v2 )2 2(m1 + m2 ) Some types of inelastic collisions important for plasma physics are: 1. For electrons holds g = 2. T ) := σv K(q. a factor g/Ve remains. T )dE = E exp − 3 3/2 c exp(hν/kT ) − 1 kT (πkT ) dE “Detailed balancing” means that the number of reactions in one direction equals the number of reactions in the opposite direction because both processes have equal probability if one corrects for the used phase space. N (E.Chapter 11: Plasma physics 57 11. For the reaction Xforward → Xback ← forward back holds in a plasma in equilibrium microscopic reversibility: ηforward = ˆ forward back ηback ˆ If the velocity distribution is Maxwellian. p.

T ) emission stimulated emission absorption Here.q+1 (4πε0 )2 E(∆E)2 pq 1 1 − Ep E ln 1.6 Radiation In equilibrium holds for radiation processes: np Apq + np Bpq ρ(ν.25βE Ep For ionization from state p holds to a good approximation: σ p = 4πa2 Ry 0 For resonant charge transfer holds: σ ex = A[1 − B ln(E)]2 1 + CE 3. Associative ionisation: A∗∗ + B → AB+ + e− ← 7. The natural life time of a state p is given by τ p = 1/ q Apq . this gives 2h ∆ν = The natural line width is usually 1 = 4πτp Apq q 4π than the broadening due to the following two mechanisms: . with Ap = 1/τp = given by Ipq = hf Apq np /4π. Because the states have a finite life time. Ne ∗ + Ar → Ar+ + Ne + e− ← 8.v. Wevers 3.58 · 108 Z 4 p−4.2 Cross sections Collisions between an electron and an atom can be approximated by a collision between an electron and one of the electrons of that atom. Apq is the matrix element of the transition p → q. Penning ionisation: b. Stimulated emission: Aq + hf → Ap + 2hf 6.5 . This results in πZ 2 e4 dσ = d(∆E) (4πε0 )2 E(∆E)2 Then follows for the transition p → q: σ pq (E) = πZ 2 e4 ∆Eq. J.3 11. Ionisation and 3-particles recombination: A p + e− → A+ + 2e− ← 4. radiative recombination: A + + e− → Ap + hf ← 5.C.5. The Einstein coefficients B are given by: Bpq = c3 Apq Bpq gq and = 8πhν 3 Bqp gp A spectral line is broadened by several mechanisms: 1. From the uncertainty relation then follows: ∆(hν) · τ p = 1 ¯ . The intensity I of a line is q For hydrogenic atoms holds: A p = 1.A.58 Physics Formulary by ir. and is given by: Apq = 8π 2 e2 ν 3 |rpq |2 with rpq = ψp |r |ψq 3¯ ε0 c3 h Apq . T ) = nq Bqp ρ(ν. Resonant charge transfer: A + + A → A + A+ ← 11. Charge transfer: A + + B → A + B+ ← 9.

The background radiation in a plasma originates from two processes: 1. 2. The total density is given by n = F dv and vF dv = nw. The balance equations can be derived by means of the moment method: 1. The velocity is separated in a thermal velocity vt and a drift velocity w. Momentum balance: 3. Then follows for the cross section of absorption processes: σ a = Bpq hν/cdν. t) · Fv (v. This is also true in magnetic fields because ∂a i /∂xi = 0. Te ) 2/3 ˚ with for the H-β line: C(n e . The total line shape is a convolution of the Gauss. t)F6 (vz . Te ) ≈ 3 · 1014 A−3/2 cm−3 . Te ) 11. originating from the acceleration of particles in the EM-field of other particles: εf f = C1 zi ni ne hc √ exp − λ2 kTe λkTe ξf f (λ. The Stark broadening is caused by the electric field of the electrons: ∆λ1/2 = ne C(ne . t)F5 (vy . t) = Fr (r. t) = F1 (x. The Doppler broadening is caused by the thermal motion of the particles: ∆λ 2 = λ c 2 ln(2)kTi mi This broadening results in a Gaussian line profile: √ kν = k0 exp(−[2 ln 2(ν − ν0 )/∆νD ]2 ). The emission is given by: εf b = C1 zi ni ne hc √ 1 − exp − 2 λ λkTe kTe ξf b (λ. t)F2 (y. The natural broadening and the Stark broadening result in a Lorentz profile of a spectral line: 1 kν = 1 k0 ∆νL /[( 2 ∆νL )2 + (ν − ν0 )2 ].and Lorentz profile 2 and is called a Voigt profile.7 The Boltzmann transport equation It is assumed that there exists a distribution function F for the plasma so that F (r. Te ) with C1 = 1. t) Then the BTE is: ∂F dF = + ∇r · (F v ) + ∇v · (F a ) = dt ∂t ∂F ∂t coll−rad Assuming that v does not depend on r and a i does not depend on v i . t)F3 (z. Energy balance: (BTE)mvdv ⇒ mn dw + ∇T + ∇p = mn a + R dt (BTE)mv 2 dv ⇒ 3 dp 5 + p∇ · w + ∇ · q = Q 2 dt 2 . Mass balance: (BTE)dv ⇒ ∂n + ∇ · (nw) = ∂t ∂n ∂t cr 2.Chapter 11: Plasma physics 59 2. The number of transitions p → q is given by n p Bpq ρ and by np nhf σa c = np (ρdν/hν)σa c where dν is the line width. 3. with k the coefficient of absorption or emission. originating from radiative recombination. v.63 · 10−43 Wm4 K1/2 sr−1 and ξ the Biberman factor. t)F4 (vx . holds ∇r ·(F v ) = v·∇F and ∇v ·(F a ) = a · ∇v F . Free-Bound radiation. Free-free radiation.

This results in: ∂np>1 ∂t =0 .60 Physics Formulary by ir. R is a friction term and p = nkT the r ∂t cr pressure. coll. deexcit.C. if w e ηJ = E − J × B + ∇pe ene In a plasma where only elastic e-a collisions are important the equilibrium energy distribution function is the Druyvesteyn distribution: N (E)dE = Cne with E0 = eEλv = eE/nσ. 2 2 mvt ∂F Q = dv the source term for energy production. nq Kqp + ne q>p nq Kqp + q>p nq Aqp + n2 ni K+p + ne ni αrad = e coll. One assumes the Quasi-steady-state solution is valid. rad. deexcit. deex. where only collisional (de)excitation between levels p and p ± 1 is taken into account holds x = 6. recomb. When this is expanded it becomes: ne q<p coll. cr ∂n1 + ∇ · (n1 w1 ) = ∂t b p nS . a = e/m(E + w × B ) is the average acceleration. J. rad. p ∂n1 ∂t . where ∀p>1 [(∂np /∂t = 0) ∧ (∇ · (np wp ) = 0)]. E E0 3/2 exp − 3me m0 E E0 2 dE 11. so from a certain level up the level densities can be calculated. excit. ion. Wevers Here. recomb rad. excit. A thermodynamic derivation gives for the total pressure: p = nkT = i pi − e2 (ne + zi ni ) 24πε0 λD wi : For the electrical conductance in a plasma follows from the momentum balance. For electromagnetic waves with complex wave number k = ω(n + iκ)/c in one dimension one finds: Ex = E0 e−κωx/c cos[ω(t − nx/c)]. 0 1 rp nS +rp nB p p To find the population densities of the lower levels in the stationary case one has to start with a macroscopic equilibrium: Number of populating processes of level p = Number of depopulating processes of level p . ne np q<p Kpq + ne np q>p Kpq + np q<p Apq + ne np Kp+ coll. q = 1 nm vt2 vt the heat flow. coll. Even in plasma’s far from equilibrium the excited levels will eventually reach ESP.8 Collision-radiative models These models are first-moment equations for excited states. from 11. deex.9 Waves in plasma’s Interaction of electromagnetic waves in plasma’s results in scattering and absorption of energy. The refractive index n is given by: n=c c k = = ω vf 1− 2 ωp ω2 . For systems in ESP. cr ∂ni + ∇ · (ni wi ) = ∂t ∂ni ∂t cr with solutions np = = Further holds for all collision-dominated levels that δb p := bp −1 = −x b0 peff with peff = Ry/Epi and 5 ≤ x ≤ 6.A. to coll.

With the Alfv´ n velocity e e vA = follows: n = 1 + c/vA . Resonance frequencies are frequencies for which n 2 → ∞. 1). with the definitions α = ω p /ω and β = Ω/ω 2 2 2 and ωp = ωpi + ωpe:  J = σ E . For R → ∞ this gives the electron cyclotron resonance frequency ω = Ω e . an elliptical polarized wave. θ = π/2: transmission ⊥ the B-field. This is a transversal linear polarized wave. 2. −i. 1. L = S − D. with property: k · (E · E) = 0 is given by E = I − σ/iε0 ω.Chapter 11: Plasma physics 61 ˆ For disturbances in the z-direction in a cold. The dielectric tensor E. P =1− 2 1 − βs −iD S 0  0 0  P α2 s s follows: S E =  iD 0 The eigenvalues of this hermitian matrix are R = S + D. For these holds: tan(θ) = −P/S. so vf = 0. For these holds: P = 0 or R = 0 or L = 0. n2 = R: a right. From this the following solutions can be obtained: A. B. With the definitions S = 1 − s α2 s . λ 3 = P . n2 = P : the ordinary mode: E x = Ey = 0. homogeneous. with σ = iε0 ω s   α2  s  1 2 1 − βs iβs 2 1 − βs 0 −iβs 2 1 − βs 1 2 1 − βs 0  0   0   1 where the sum is taken over particle species s. n2 = RL/S: the extraordinary mode: iE x /Ey = −D/S. When k makes an angle θ with B one finds: P (n2 − R)(n2 − L) tan2 (θ) = S(n2 − RL/S)(n2 − P ) where n is the refractive index. P = 0: Ex = Ey = 0. el = 2 2(1. er is connected with a right rotating field for which iEx /Ey = 1 and el is connected with a left rotating field for which iE x /Ey = −1. 3. magnetized plasma: B = B0 ez + Bei(kz−ωt) and i(kz−ωt) n = n0 + ne ˆ (external E fields are screened) follows. 0) and e3 = (0. 0). circular polarized wave. 2. i. 0. so vf → ∞. with eigenvectors e r = √ √ 1 1 2 2(1. θ = 0: transmission in the z-direction. . D= 2 1 − βs  s α2 βs s . for L → ∞ the ion cyclotron resonance frequency ω = Ω i and for S = 0 holds for the extraordinary mode: α2 1 − m i Ω2 i me ω 2 = 1− m 2 Ω2 i i m2 ω 2 e 1− Ω2 i ω2 Cut-off frequencies are frequencies for which n 2 = 0. circular polarized wave. n2 = L: a left. and in case vA 2 ωpe Ωe Ωi 2 2 c + ωpi c: ω = kvA . 1. In the case that β 2 1 one finds Alfv´ n waves propagating parallel to the field lines. This describes a longitudinal linear polarized wave.

so that the atomic composition looks the same from each point r and r = r + T . Van der Waals bond 2. For the ion binding of NaCl the energy per molecule is calculated by: E = cohesive energy(NaCl) – ionization energy(Na) + electron affinity(Cl) The interaction in a covalent bond depends on the relative spin orientations of the electrons constituing the bond. Metalic bond.2 Crystal binding A distinction can be made between 4 binding types: 1. cyclically: ai+1 × ai+2 bi = 2π ai · (ai+1 × ai+2 ) The set of G-vectors determines the R¨ ntgen diffractions: a maximum in the reflected radiation occurs if: o ∆k = G with ∆k = k − k . with volume Vcell = |a1 · (a2 × a3 )| Because a lattice has a periodical structure the physical properties which are connected with the lattice have the same periodicity (neglecting boundary effects): ne (r + T ) = ne (r ) This periodicity is suitable to use Fourier analysis: n(r ) is expanded as: n(r ) = G nG exp(iG · r ) with nG = 1 Vcell cell n(r ) exp(−iG · r )dV G is the reciprocal lattice vector. So: 2k · G = G2 . A N lattice can be constructed from primitive cells. where T is a translation vector given by: T = u1 a1 + u2 a2 + u3 a3 with ui ∈ I . If G is written as G = v1 b1 + v2 b2 + v3 b3 with vi ∈ I . From this follows for parallel lattice planes (Bragg reflection) that for the maxima holds: 2d sin(θ) = nλ. . Ion bond 3. 12. As a primitive cell one can take a parallellepiped. it follows for the N vectors bi .1 Crystal structure A lattice is defined by the 3 translation vectors a i . In that case binding is not possible. Furthermore the potential energy for two parallel spins has sometimes no minimum. The Brillouin zone is defined as a Wigner-Seitz cell in the reciprocal lattice. Covalent or homopolar bond 4. The potential energy for two parallel spins is higher than the potential energy for two antiparallel spins.Chapter 12 Solid state physics 12.

they behave as particles with momentum ¯ K. the lower line the acoustical branch. 12. as can be seen in the graph.3. Their total h momentum is 0. This requires that −π < Ka ≤ π. When they collide.1 A lattice with one type of atoms In this model for crystal vibrations only nearest-neighbour interactions are taken into account. . In the optical branch. The force on atom s with mass M can then be written as: Fs = M d2 us = C(us+1 − us ) + C(us−1 − us ) dt2 Assuming that all solutions have the same time-dependence exp(−iωt) this results in: −M ω 2 us = C(us+1 + us−1 − 2us ) Further it is postulated that: u s±1 = u exp(isKa) exp(±iKa). one longitudinal and two transversal.3 Phonons The quantum mechanical excitation of a crystal vibration with an energy ¯ ω is called a phonon. This results in a much larger induced dipole moment for optical oscillations. This gives: us = exp(iKsa). The upper line describes the optical branch. which has only a solution if their determinant is 0. Furthermore each branch has 3 polarization directions. both types of ions oscillate in opposite phases. The group velocity of these vibrations is given by: vg = dω = dK Ca2 cos( 1 Ka) . Phonons h can be viewed as quasi-particles: with collisions. Substituting the later two equations in the fist results in a system of linear equations. Here.Chapter 12: Solid state physics 63 12. their momentum need not be conserved: for a normal process holds: K1 + K2 = K3 . 2 M and is 0 on the edge of a Brillouin Zone.2 A lattice with two types of atoms Now the solutions are: ω2 = C 1 1 + M1 M2 ±C 1 1 + M1 M2 2 ω ✻ − 4 sin2 (Ka) M1 M2 2C M2 2C M1 Connected with each value of K are two values of ω. for an umklapp process holds: K 1 + K2 = K3 + G.3. and also a stronger emission and absorption of radiation. 0 ✲ K π/a 12.3. This gives: ω2 = 4C sin2 ( 1 Ka) 2 M Only vibrations with a wavelength within the first Brillouin Zone have a physical significance. in the acoustical branch they oscillate in the same phase. Because phonons have no spin they behave like bosons.3 Crystal vibrations 12. there is a standing wave.

± . The density of states for each polarization is.. for each polarization and each branch. . Here.3. only the acoustic phonons are taken into account (3 polarizations). . Wevers 12. Kz = 0.. θD is the Debye temperature and is defined by: ¯ θD = h ¯v k 6π 2 N V 1/3 where N is the number of primitive cells. Because exp(2πi) = 1 this is only possible if: Kx . This gives: ωD U =3 D(ω) n ¯ ωdω = h 0 3V k 2 T 4 V ω2 h ¯ω dω = 2π 2 v 3 exp(¯ ω/kT ) − 1 h 2π 2 v 3 ¯ 3 h xD 0 x3 dx . ± .A.p = λ Dλ (ω) h ¯ω dω exp(¯ ω/kT ) − 1 h for a given polarization λ.64 Physics Formulary by ir. xD = hωD /kT = θD /T . The total number of states with a wave vector < K is: 3 L 4πK 3 N= 2π 3 for each polarization. where v is the speed of sound. independent of the polarization. ex − 1 Here.4 Thermal heat capacity The total energy of the crystal vibrations can be calculated by multiplying each mode with its energy and sum over all branches K and polarizations P : U= K P h ¯ ω nk. and one assumes that v = ωK. or: L 2π 3 = V 8π 3 allowed K-values per unit volume in K-space. Because x D → ∞ for T → 0 it follows from this: U = 9N kT T θD 3 ∞ 0 3π 4 N kT 4 x3 dx 12π 4 N kT 3 = ∼ T 4 and CV = ∼ T3 3 x−1 e 5θD 5θD In the Einstein model for the thermal heat capacity one considers only phonons at one frequency. according to the Einstein model: D(ω) = dN = dω V K2 2π 2 dK V = dω 8π 3 dAω vg The Debye model for thermal heat capacities is a low-temperature approximation which is valid up to ≈ 50K. ± 4π 6π 2N π 2π .C. ± L L L L So there is only one allowed value of K per volume (2π/L) 3 in K-space. an approximation for optical phonons. J. The thermal heat capacity is then: Clattice = ∂U =k ∂T D(ω) λ h (¯ ω/kT )2 exp(¯ ω/kT ) h dω (exp(¯ ω/kT ) − 1)2 h The dispersion relation in one dimension is given by: D(ω)dω = L dK L dω dω = π dω π vg In three dimensions one applies periodic boundary conditions to a cube with N 3 primitive cells and a volume L3 : exp(i(Kx x + Ky y + Kz z)) ≡ exp(i(Kx (x + L) + Ky (y + L) + Kz (z + L))). Ky . From this follows: D(ω) = V ω 2 /2π 2 v 3 .

If the magnetic part of the force is not strong enough to significantly deform the orbit holds: ω2 = Fc (r) eB eB 2 ± ω = ω0 ± (ω0 + δ) ⇒ ω = mr m m ω0 ± eB 2m 2 + · · · ≈ ω0 ± eB = ω0 ± ωL 2m Here. To describe ferromagnetism a field BE parallel with M is postulated: BE = λµ0 M . the other decelerated. 3 with M = µN : µ0 N Ze2 2 µ0 M =− r χ= B 6m 12.4. with z the number of neighbours.4 Magnetic field in the solid state The following graph shows the magnetization versus fieldstrength for different types of magnetism: M ✻ Msat χm ∂M = ∂H ferro paramagnetism 0 ❤❤❤❤ ❤❤❤ diamagnetism ❤❤❤❤ ❤ ✲ H 12. After distribution fm ∼ exp(−∆Um /kT ). and with a fm µ/ fm . One electron is accelerated. From there the treatment is analogous to the paramagnetic case: C µ0 M = χp (Ba + BE ) = χp (Ba + λµ0 M ) = µ0 1 − λ M T From this follows for a ferromagnet: χ F = µ0 M C = which is Weiss-Curie’s law. A quantum mechanical approach from Heisenberg postulates an interaction between two neighbouring atoms: U = −2J Si · Sj ≡ −µ · BE . one finds for the average magnetic moment µ = linearization and because mJ = 0. J is an overlap integral given by: J = 3kT c /2zS(S + 1). This is clearly unrealistic and suggests another mechanism. Starting with a circular electron orbit in an atom with two electrons. Hence there is a net circular current which results in a magnetic moment µ. there is a Coulomb force F c and a magnetic force on each electron.4. and µ = IA = Iπ ρ2 = 2 Iπ r2 .1 Dielectrics The quantum mechanical origin of diamagnetism is the Larmorprecession of the spin of the electron.3 Ferromagnetism A ferromagnet behaves like a paramagnet above a critical temperature T c . If N is the number of atoms in the crystal it follows for the susceptibility. The circular current is given by I = −Zeω L /2π. µ0 N µ µ0 J(J + 1)g 2 µ2 N µ0 M B = = B B 3kT 12. χp ∼ 1/T .4. . Ba T − Tc If BE is estimated this way it results in values of about 1000 T.Chapter 12: Solid state physics 65 12. J > 0: Si and Sj become parallel: the material is a ferromagnet. A distinction between 2 cases can now be made: 1. ωL is the Larmor frequency. J = 2J + 1 and m2 = 2 J(J + 1)(J + 1 ) it follows that: J 3 2 χp = This is the Curie law.2 Paramagnetism Starting with the splitting of energy levels in a weak magnetic field: ∆U m − µ · B = mJ gµB B.

The current in a conductor is given by: J = nqv = σ E = E/ρ = neµE. Together with the T 3 dependence of the 2 thermal heat capacity of the phonons the total thermal heat capacity of metals is described by: C = γT + AT 3 .01 times the classical expected value 3 N k. The Fermi level is the uppermost filled level in the ground state. This is caused 2 by the Pauli exclusion principle and the Fermi-Dirac distribution: only electrons within an energy range ∼ kT of the Fermi level are excited thermally. The internal energy then becomes: T ∂U T ≈ Nk and C = U ≈ N kT TF ∂T TF A more accurate analysis gives: C electrons = 1 π 2 N kT /TF ∼ T . This results in a system of linear equations with solution: hω = 4JS(1 − cos(ka)) ¯ 12.1 Thermal heat capacity The solution with period L of the one-dimensional Schr¨ dinger equation is: ψ n (x) = A sin(2πx/λn) with o nλn = 2L. 12. There is a fraction ≈ T /T F excited thermally.5.66 Physics Formulary by ir. Then holds: v = µ E. which has the Fermi-energy E F . Wevers 2.5 Free electron Fermi gas 12. √ 3N . with lim ρL = 0. If τ is the characteristic collision time of the electrons. Starting from a model with only nearest neighbouring atoms interacting one can write: U = −2J Sp · (Sp−1 + Sp+1 ) ≈ µp · Bp with Bp = −2J (Sp−1 + Sp+1 ) gµB The equation of motion for the magnons becomes: 2J dS = Sp × (Sp−1 + Sp+1 ) dt h ¯ From here the treatment is analogous to phonons: postulate traveling waves of the type Sp = u exp(i(pka − ωt)). T →0 . J < 0: Si and Sj become antiparallel: the material is an antiferromagnet. Heisenberg’s theory predicts quantized spin waves: magnons. The variation of k is given by ¯ δ k = k(t) − k(0) = −eEt/¯ .2 Electric conductance The equation of motion for the charge carriers is: F = mdv/dt = hdk/dt. it can be expressed as: 2n F = N so EF = h2 π 2 N 2 /8mL. where τL is the collision time with the lattice phonons and τ i the collision time with the impurities follows for the resistivity ρ = ρ L + ρi .5. From this follows h ¯ 2 nπ 2 E= 2m L In a linear lattice the only important quantum numbers are n and m s .A. with µ = eτ /m the mobility of the electrons. δ k remains stable if h t = τ . If nF is the quantum number of the Fermi level. J. Because for the collision time holds: 1/τ = 1/τL + 1/τi .C. In 3 dimensions holds: ¯ kF = 3π 2 N V 1/3 and EF = V 3π 2 h ¯2 2m 3π 2 N V 3/2 2/3 The number of states with energy ≤ E is then: N = and the density of states becomes: D(E) = 2mE h ¯2 2m h ¯2 3/2 . 2E V dN = dE 2π 2 E= The heat capacity of the electrons is approximately 0.

This results in a magnetic field ⊥ to the flow direction of the current. which can often be approximated by a harmonic oscillator.5. conduction E band ✻ • ¤ ✻ ✞✆ ω ✝¤ g ✞✆ ✝ ◦ E ✻ ✛ • Ω ✞ ✻ ω ✝¤ ✞✆ ✝ ◦ Direct transition This difference can also be observed in the absorption spectra: Indirect transition . This is a traveling wave. If J = Jex and B = Bez than Ey /Ex = µB. So this gives a cosine superimposed on the atomic energy. Hence the energy of ψ(+) is also lower than the energy of ψ)(−).Chapter 12: Solid state physics 67 12.3 The Hall-effect If a magnetic field is applied ⊥ to the direction of the current the charge carriers will be pushed aside by the Lorentz force. For an indirect semiconductor a transition from the valence. 12. This wave can be decomposed into two standing waves: ψ(+) = ψ(−) = exp(iπx/a) + exp(−iπx/a) = 2 cos(πx/a) exp(iπx/a) − exp(−iπx/a) = 2i sin(πx/a) The probability density |ψ(+)| 2 is high near the atoms of the lattice and low in between. also a phonon is absorbed. than the bandgap is given by: 1 Egap = 0 U (x) |ψ(+)|2 − |ψ(−)|2 dx = U 12. The Hall coefficient is defined by: R H = Ey /Jx B.6 Energy bands In the tight-bond approximation it is assumed that ψ = e ikna φ(x − na).5. and RH = −1/ne if Jx = neµEx .4 Thermal heat conductivity With = vF τ the mean free path of the electrons follows from κ = 1 C v 3 From this follows for the Wiedemann-Franz ratio: κ/σ = 1 (πk/e)2 T . 3 : κelectrons = π 2 nk 2 T τ /3m. Here it is assumed that the momentum of the absorbed photon can be neglected.7 Semiconductors The band structures and the transitions between them of direct and indirect semiconductors are shown in the figures below. 12. The probability density |ψ(−)|2 is low near the atoms of the lattice and high in between.to the conduction band is also possible if the energy of the absorbed photon is smaller than the band gap: then. Suppose that U (x) = U cos(2πx/a). From this follows for the energy: E = ψ|H|ψ = Eat − α − 2β cos(ka). The Hall voltage is given by: V H = Bvb = IB/neh where b is the width of the material and h de height. If it is assumed that the electron is nearly free one can postulate: ψ = exp(ik · r ).

It is defined by: m∗ = dp/dt dK F = =h ¯ = h2 ¯ a dvg /dt dvg d2 E dk 2 −1 with E = hω and vg = dω/dk and p = hk. For the product np follows: np = 4 An exciton is a bound electron-hole pair. . rotating on each other as in positronium. like Si and Ge. The BCS-model predicts for the transition temperature T c : Tc = 1. This causes a peak in the absorption just under E g . ✡ . ..8 Superconductivity 12. −1 U D(EF ) ..8. Eg + hΩ ¯ h ¯ ωg ✲E ✲ E Direct semiconductor Indirect semiconductor So indirect semiconductors..C. 12. J.1 Description A superconductor is characterized by a zero resistivity if certain quantities are smaller than some critical values: T < Tc . The excitation energy of an exciton is smaller than the bandgap because the energy of an exciton is lower than the energy of a free electron and a free hole. . cannot emit any light and are therefore not usable to fabricate lasers. Wevers absorption ✻ absorption ✻ . . . ✡ . Eh (kh ) = −Ee (ke ).68 Physics Formulary by ir. When light is absorbed holds: kh = −ke .. ..14ΘD exp while experiments find for H c approximately: Hc (T ) ≈ Hc (Tc ) 1 − T2 2 Tc . I < Ic and H < Hc .. vh = ve and mh = −m∗ if the e conduction band and the valence band have the same structure. for a n − type holds: n > p and in a p − type holds: n < p. ..A. Instead of the normal electron mass one has to use the effective mass within a lattice. ✡ . . ¯ ¯ With the distribution function f e (E) ≈ exp((µ − E)/kT ) for the electrons and f h (E) = 1 − fe (E) for the holes the density of states is given by: D(E) = 1 2π 2 2m∗ h ¯2 3/2 E − Ec with Ec the energy at the edge of the conductance band. . From this follows for the concentrations of the holes p and the electrons n: ∞ n= Ec De (E)fe (E)dE = 2 3 m∗ kT 2π¯ 2 h 3/2 exp µ − Ec kT kT Eg m∗ mh exp − e kT 2π¯ 2 h For an intrinsic (no impurities) semiconductor holds: n i = pi .

2 The Josephson effect For the Josephson effect one considers two superconductors. The Schr¨ dinger equations in both superconductors is o set equal: ∂ψ2 ∂ψ1 = hT ψ2 . This holds for a type I superconductor. This is shown in the figures below. With an AC-voltage across the junction the Schr¨ dinger o equations become: ∂ψ1 ∂ψ2 i¯ h = hT ψ2 − eV ψ1 and i¯ ¯ = hT ψ1 + eV ψ2 ¯ h ∂t ∂t This gives: J = J0 sin θ2 − θ1 − 2eV t . B = 0 and J = 0. if n 1 ≈ n2 : ∂θ1 ∂θ2 ∂n2 ∂n1 = and =− ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t The Josephson effect results in a current density through the insulator depending on the phase difference as: J = J0 sin(θ2 − θ1 ) = J0 sin(δ). i¯ ¯ = hT ψ1 ¯ h i¯ h ∂t ∂t h ¯ T is the effect of the coupling of the electrons. The size of a flux quantum h follows by setting s = 1: Ψ = 2π¯ /e = 2. From this follows.3 Flux quantisation in a superconducting ring For the current density in general holds: J = qψ ∗ vψ = nq [¯ ∇θ − q A ] h m From the Meissner effect. in the other ψ 2 .Chapter 12: Solid state physics 69 Within a superconductor the magnetic field is 0: the Meissner effect. The electron √ √ wavefunctions are written as ψ 1 = n1 exp(iθ1 ) and ψ2 = n2 exp(iθ2 ). The electron wavefunction in one superconductor is ψ 1 . If H becomes larger than H c2 the superconductor becomes a normal conductor. separated by an insulator. Because the Meissner effect implies that a superconductor is a perfect diamagnet holds in the superconducting state: H = µ0 M . h . h 12. h ¯ Hence there is an oscillation with ω = 2eV /¯ . n )dσ = (B. follows: ¯ ∇θ = q A ⇒ ∇θdl = θ2 − θ1 = 2πs with s ∈ I . n )dσ = Ψ follows: Ψ = 2π¯ s/q. where J0 ∼ T . for a type II superconductor this only holds to a certain value H c1 .0678 · 10 −15 Tm2 .8. 12. Because a Cooper pair exist of two √ electrons holds: ψ ∼ n. or the transfer interaction through the insulator. This means that there is a twist in the T − S diagram and a discontinuity in the C X − T diagram. for higher values of H the superconductor is in a vortex state to a value H c2 . There are type I and type II superconductors. which can be 100 times H c1 . µ0 M ✻                 Hc Type I µ0 M ✻ ·  · ·  · · ·   · · · · ·   · · · ·   Hc1 Type II ✲H ✲ H Hc2 The transition to a superconducting state is a second order thermodynamic state transition.8. h N Because: Adl = (rotA.

From this follows: ∇2 B = B/λ2 . Magnetic fields within a superconductor drop exponentially. so h ¯ This gives maxima if eΨ/¯ = sπ. p . when (−1) = n=0 n 1 2 follows: 0 sin(px)dx = 0 cos(px)dx = 1 .6 The BCS model The BCS model can explain superconductivity in metals. A new ground state where the electrons behave like independent fermions is postulated. It can be proved that this ground state is perfect diamagnetic. L The Meissner effect is the solution of this equation: B(x) = B0 exp(−x/λL ).8. This causes two electrons with opposite spin to combine to a Cooper pair.C. J. Flux quantization is related to the existence of a coherent many-particle wavefunction. ax + 1 e 12a2 ∞ 0 ∞ −∞ x2 dx π2 . which is very improbable. This is also very improbable. Flux quantization prevents transitions between these states.8. 12.5 The London equation A current density in a superconductor proportional to the vector potential A is postulated: J= where λL = −A −B or rotJ = 2 µ0 λL µ0 λ2 L ε0 mc2 /nq 2 . = x + 1)2 (e 3 ∞ π4 x3 dx = x+1 e 15 0 And. or the system must go through intermediary states where the flux is not quantized so they have a higher energy. So if the flux has to change with one flux quantum there has to occur a transition of many electrons. (So far there is no explanation for high-T c superconductance). Some useful mathematical relations are: ∞ ∞ ∞ π2 xdx = .8. A flux quantum is the equivalent of about 10 4 electrons. Wevers 12. Because of the interaction with the lattice these pseudo-particles exhibit a mutual attraction.A.70 Physics Formulary by ir. h 12.4 Macroscopic quantum interference From θ2 − θ1 = 2eΨ/¯ follows for two parallel junctions: δ b − δa = h J = Ja + Jb = 2J0 sin δ0 cos eΨ h ¯ 2eΨ . The infinite conductivity is more difficult to explain because a ring with a persisting current is not a real equilibrium: a state with zero current has a lower energy.

∀A∈G ∃A−1 ∈G so that A • A−1 = E: Each element in G has an inverse.3 Conjugated elements. 4. A subgroup is a subset of G which is also a group w. 2. subgroups and classes B is conjugate to A if ∃ X∈G such that B = XAX −1 .1 Introduction 13.or multiplication table: because EA i = A−1 (Ak Ai ) = Ai each Ai appears once. ∀A. 13.C∈G ⇒ (A • B) • C = A • (B • C): G obeys the associative law. .B. Elements of one class are then the same kind of operations. ∀A. The opposite need not to be true.1. 13. ∀A. There are h positions in each row and column when there are h k elements in the group so each element appears only once. Each group can be split up in conjugacy classes. Then A is also conjugate to B because B = (X −1 )A(X −1 )−1 . A conjugacy class is the maximum collection of conjugated elements.Chapter 13 Theory of groups 13. Some theorems: • All classes are completely disjoint. the same operation.1. 3. If B and C are conjugate to A.B∈G ⇒ A • B ∈ G: G is closed.B∈G ⇒ A • B = B • A the group is called Abelian or commutative.t. • In an Abelian group each element is a separate class. • E is a class itself: for each other element in this class would hold: A = XEX −1 = E. If also holds: 5. The physical interpretation of classes: elements of a group are usually symmetry operations which map a symmetrical object into itself. B is also conjugate with C.r. ∃E∈G so that ∀A∈G A • E = E • A = A: G has a unit element.1 Definition of a group G is a group for the operation • if: 1.2 The Cayley table Each element arises only once in each row and column of the Cayley. • E is the only class which is also a subgroup because all other classes have no unit element.1.

13. Γ(AB) = Γ(A)Γ(B) . where I is the unit matrix. The identical representation: A → 1. or M = 0.2. γ (1) (Ai ) and γ (2) (Ai ). The representation A → det(Γ(A)).A. I Lemma: If there exists a matrix M so that for two irreducible representations of group G. irreducible. 3. J. if h is the number of elements in the group and i is the dimension of the i th representation: ¯ (i)∗ Γµν (R)Γαβ (R) = R∈G (j) h i δij δµα δνβ 13.2.72 Physics Formulary by ir.1. Wevers 13. holds: M γ (1) (Ai ) = γ (2) (Ai )M . with Nk the number of elements in a conjugacy class: k n 2 i i=1 χ(i)∗ (Ck )χ(j) (Ck )Nk = hδij Theorem: =h . This is symbolized by Γ. representations Two groups are isomorphic if they have the same multiplication table. than the representations are equivalent. unitary representations holds that. It need not be isomorphic.1 Schur’s lemma Lemma: Each matrix which commutes with all matrices of an irreducible representation is a constant ×I I.2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem For a set of unequivalent.4 Isomorfism and homomorfism.1. 13. The mapping from group G 1 to G2 .3 Character The character of a representation is given by the trace of the matrix and is therefore invariant for base transformations: χ(j) (R) = Tr(Γ(j) (R)) Also holds.2. The opposite is (of course) also true. The following holds: Γ(E) = I . If this is not possible the representation is called irreducible.5 Reducible and irreducible representations If the same unitary transformation can bring all matrices of a representation Γ in the same block structure the representation is called reducible: Γ(A) = Γ(1) (A) 0 0 Γ(2) (A) This is written as: Γ = Γ(1) ⊕ Γ(2) . 2. A representation is a homomorphic mapping of a group to a group of square matrices with the usual matrix multiplication as the combining operation. A faithful representation: all matrices are different. An equivalent representation is obtained by performing an unitary base transformation: Γ (A) = S −1 Γ(A)S. Γ(A−1 ) = [Γ(A)]−1 I For each group there are 3 possibilities for a representation: 1. The number of irreducible representations equals the number of conjugacy classes. 13.2 The fundamental orthogonality theorem 13.C. so that the multiplication table remains the same is a homomorphic mapping.

These operators commute with H: P R H = HPR .3 The construction of a base function n j Each function F in configuration space can be decomposed into symmetry types: F = j=1 κ=1 (j) fκ The following operator extracts the symmetry types: j h Γ(j)∗ (R)PR κκ R∈G (j) F = fκ . .Chapter 13: Theory of groups 73 13. For 0 ≤ p ≤ h − 1 follows: Γ(p) (An ) = e2πipn/h If one defines: k = − 2πp 2π mod . this gives Bloch’s ah a theorem: ψk (x) = uk (x)eikx . A3 . and symmetry group G ⊂ G 0 . Ah = E}. An isomorfic operation on the wavefunction is given by: P R ψ(x ) = ψ(R−1 x ).3. PR is the symmetry group of the physical system. and leave the volume element unchanged: d(Rx ) = dx. . energy levels and degeneracy Consider a set of symmetry transformations x = Rx which leave the Hamiltonian H invariant.1 Representations.3. . n (n) n.. . A 2 . Then: G = {A. . If Γ(n) (R) is an irreducible representation of G 0 . ν = 1. with uk (x ± a) = uk (x). it is also a representation of G but not all elements of Γ (n) in G0 are also in G. The degeneracy is then (possibly partially) removed: see the figure below. Each n corresponds with another energy level. with energy En is a basis for an n -dimensional 13. unitary representation of the symmetry group G of the system. Assume an PR ψν (n) n -fold degeneracy at E n : then choose an orthonormal set ψ ν . This is considered an active rotation. n1 n n2 n3 = dim(Γ(n1 ) ) = dim(Γ(n2 ) ) = dim(Γ(n3 ) ) Spectrum H0 Spectrum H (n) Theorem: The set of n degenerated eigenfunctions ψ ν irreducible representation Γ (n) of the symmetry group. The perturbed system has H = H0 + V. One can purely mathematical derive irreducible representations of a symmetry group and label the energy levels with a quantum number this way.2 Breaking of degeneracy by a perturbation Suppose the unperturbed system has Hamiltonian H 0 and symmetry group G 0 . This way one can also label each separate base function with a quantum number.3 The relation with quantum mechanics 13. A fixed choice of Γ (n) (R) defines (n) the base functions ψ ν . so: PA ψp (x) = ψp (x − a) = e2πip/h ψp (x). . .3. It causes degeneracy: if ψ n is a solution of Hψn = En ψn than also holds: H(PR ψn ) = En (PR ψn ). The group is Abelian so all irreducible representations are one-dimensional. . . These transformations are a group. Particle in a periodical potential: the symmetry operation is a cyclic group: note the operator describing one translation over one unit as A. A degeneracy which is not the result of a symmetry is called an accidental degeneracy. The function (n) is in the same subspace: PR ψν = κ=1 (n) (n) ψκ Γ(n) (R) κν where Γ is an irreducible. 13. The representation then usually becomes reducible: Γ(n) = Γ(n1 ) ⊕ Γ(n2 ) ⊕ . 2. .

A. These base ϕ(i) ϕλ (iκjλ|akµ) κ ϕ(aκ) (akµ|iκjλ) µ akµ (i) (j) (ak) (j) and the inverse transformation by: ϕ (i) ϕλ = κ (j) In essence the Clebsch-Gordan coefficients are dot products: (iκjλ|akµ) := ϕ k ϕλ |ϕµ 13. The subspace D (i) of the system transforms according (i) (1) (2) to Γ(i) . with: (j) a(j) = κ j h −1 Γ(j)∗ (R) (PR APR ) κκ R∈G . 13.4 The direct product of representations Consider a physical system existing of two subsystems. The unitary base transformation is given by: (ak) ϕµ = κλ (i) (j) (aκ) . Theorem: Two wavefunctions transforming according to non-equivalent unitary representations or according to different rows of an unitary irreducible representation are orthogonal: (i) (j) (i) (i) ϕκ |ψλ ∼ δij δκλ .t.74 Physics Formulary by ir.3. These define a space D (1) ⊗ D(2) .r. Now form all 1 × 2 products ϕκ (x1 )ϕλ (x2 ).5 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients With the reduction of the direct-product matrix w.3. An operator can also be decomposed into symmetry types: A = jk ak . These product functions transform as: PR (ϕ(1) (x1 )ϕλ (x2 )) = (PR ϕ(1) (x1 ))(PR ϕλ (x2 )) κ κ In general the space D (1) ⊗ D(2) can be split up in a number of invariant subspaces: Γ(1) ⊗ Γ(2) = i (2) (2) ni Γ(i) A useful tool for this reduction is that for the characters hold: χ(1) (R)χ(2) (R) = i ni χ(i) (R) 13. Basefunctions are ϕκ (xi ). the basis ϕ κ ϕλ one uses a new basis ϕµ functions lie in subspaces D (ak) . this does happen if c jaκ = cja .6 Symmetric transformations of operators. Wevers This is expressed as: fκ is the part of F that transforms according to the κ th row of Γ(j) . ¯ (j) F can also be expressed in base functions ϕ: F = ajκ cajκ ϕκ (aj) .C. If a set of (j) operators Aκ with 0 ≤ κ ≤ j transform into each other under the transformations of G holds: −1 PR A(j) PR = κ ν A(j) Γ(j) (R) ν νκ (j) If Γ(j) is irreducible they are called irreducible tensor operators A (j) with components A κ . The functions f κ (j) are in general not transformed into each other by elements of the group. 1 ≤ κ ≤ i . However. and ϕκ |ψκ is independent of κ.3. irreducible tensor operators −1 Observables (operators) transform as follows under symmetry transformations: A = PR APR . J.

If this is the case holds (if Γ (i) appears only once. For H = 1 this becomes the previous theorem. 13. z) ≈ = = ψ(x. dx 2 dx2 h ¯ ∂ .4 Continuous groups Continuous groups have h = ∞. e.. z − yδθx ) ∂ ∂ ψ(x. 13. Solutions can be found within each category of functions ϕ κ with common i and κ: H is already diagonal in categories as a whole. This is applied in quantum mechanics in perturbation theory and variational calculus.2 The 3-dimensional rotation group This group is called SO(3) because a faithful representation can be constructed from orthogonal 3 × 3 matrices with a determinant of +1. otherwise one has to sum over a): (k) ϕλ |A(j) |ψµ = (iλ|jκkµ) ϕ(i) A(j) ψ (k) κ (i) (i) (j) (k) This theorem can be used to determine selection rules: the probability of a dipole transition is given by ( is the direction of polarization of the radiation): PD = 8π 2 e2 f 3 |r12 |2 with r12 = l2 m2 | · r |l1 m1 3¯ ε0 c3 h Further it can be used to determine intensity ratios: if there is only one value of a the ratio of the matrix elements are the Clebsch-Gordan coefficients. However. Here one tries to diag(i) onalize H. ⊕ Γ(i) ⊕ .7 The Wigner-Eckart theorem Theorem: The matrix element ϕ λ |Aκ |ψµ can only be = 0 if Γ (j) ⊗ Γ(k) = . Taylor expansion near x gives: dψ(x) 1 2 d2 ψ(x) ψ(x − a) = ψ(x) − a + a − +. Perturbation calculus can be applied independent within each category. However. . the translation group of an spatially infinite periodic potential is not continuous but does have h = ∞.. the intensity ratios are also dependent on the occupation of the atomic energy levels.. z) . Further ϕ κ |H|ψκ is independent of κ.4. y. not all groups with h = ∞ are continuous.3.g. y + zδθx . For an infinitesimal rotation around the x-axis holds: Pδθx ψ(x. this can be written as: Because the momentum operator in quantum mechanics is given by: p x = i ∂x h ψ(x − a) = e−iapx /¯ ψ(x) 13. . For more a-values relations between the intensity ratios can be stated.4. . z) 1− h ¯ ψ(x. y. 13.1 The 3-dimensional translation group For the translation of wavefunctions over a distance a holds: P a ψ(x) = ψ(x − a). z) + zδθx − yδθx ∂y ∂z iδθx Lx ψ(x. .Chapter 13: Theory of groups 75 Theorem: Matrix elements Hij of the operator H which is invariant under ∀ A∈G . y. y. are 0 between states which transform according to non-equivalent irreducible unitary representations or according to different rows of such (i) (i) a representation. With variational calculus the try function can be chosen within a separate category because the exact eigenfunctions transform according to a row of an irreducible representation.

. If one writes: dV := dp1 · · · dpn holds: g(S) = g(E) dV dV is the Jacobian: = det dV dV ∂pi ∂pj dV dV Here. .g. .. . Rotations are not generally interchangeable: consider a rotation around axis n in the xz-plane over an angle α. If f (R) is a function defined on G. pn ) depend continuously on parameters p 1 . pn ))g(R(p1 . p x .x Pθ. Jy and Jz are called the generators of the 3-dim. translation group.4. J.y Pα.. .n = P−θ. any and anz . so: h h h h e−iα(n·J )/¯ = eiθJy /¯ e−iαJx /¯ e−iθJy /¯ If α and θ are very small and are expanded to second order. anx . and g(E) is constant.3 Properties of continuous groups The elements R(p1 .76 Physics Formulary by ir. and the corresponding terms are put equal with n · J = Jx cos θ + Jz sin θ. It is demanded that the multiplication and inverse of an element R depend continuously on the parameters of R.. py and pz are called the generators of the 3-dim. The notion representation is fitted by demanding continuity: each matrix element depends continuously on pi (R). pn ))dp1 · · · dpn Here. g(R) is the density function. The commutation rules for the generators can be derived from the properties of the group for multiplications: translations are interchangeable ↔ p x py − py px = 0. For the translation group holds: g(a) = constant = g( 0 ) because g(an )da = g(0 )da and da = da. rotation group.. h 13.n = exp(−iα(n · J )/¯ ) h Pa. Define new variables p by: SR(pi ) = R(pi ). Summation over all group elements is for continuous groups replaced by an integration. .. This fixes g(R) except for a constant factor. pn .n = exp(−ia(n · p )/¯ ) h Jx . Then holds: Pα... The notion conjugacy class for continuous groups is defined equally as for discrete groups.C. Γ αβ (R). ∂y ∂z P α.A.g. This leads to the fundamental orthogonality theorem: (i)∗ Γµν (R)Γαβ (R)dR = G (j) 1 i δij δµα δνβ G dR and for the characters hold: χ(i)∗ (R)χ(j) (R)dR = δij G G G dR Compact groups are groups with a finite group volume: dR < ∞.. The statement that each element arises only once in each row and column of the Cayley table holds also for continuous groups. it follows from the αθ term: J x Jy − Jy Jx = i¯ Jz ..y .. holds: f (R)dR := G p1 ··· pn f (R(p1 . For the translation group this are e. Because of the properties of the Cayley table is demanded: f (R)dR = f (SR)dR.. . Wevers Because the angular momentum operator is given by: L x = So in an arbitrary direction holds: Rotations: Translations: h ¯ i z ∂ ∂ −y . e.

1 Because fermions have an half-odd integer spin the states ψ sms with s = 1 and ms = ± 2 constitute a 2-dim. . defined as: 1. ⊕ D(|j1 −j2 |) .t.1 Vectormodel for the addition of angular momentum If two subsystems have angular momentum quantum numbers j 1 and j2 the only possible values for the total angular momentum are J = j 1 + j2 . they do not change sign if the states do. If only one state changes sign the observable quantities do change. The parameter space is a collection points ϕn within a sphere with radius π. 13. The character of D (l) is given by: l l χ(l) (α) = m=−l eimα = 1 + 2 k=0 cos(kα) = sin([l + 1 ]α) 2 sin( 1 α) 2 In the performed derivation α is the rotational angle around the z-axis.5 The group SO(3) One can take 2 parameters for the direction of the rotational axis and one for the angle of rotation ϕ. 2 This is contradictory because the dimension of the representation is given by χ (0).−π . The existence of these half-odd integer representations is connected with the topological properties of SO(3): the group is two-fold coherent through the identification R 0 = R2π = E. α. |j1 − j2 |.. The diametrical points on this sphere are equivalent because R n.r.6. If α. The spherical angles of axis 3 w. Now a rotation around axis 3 remains possible.π = Rn. in SO(3) holds: R z. All irreducible representations of SO(3) can be constructed from the behaviour of the spherical harmonics Ylm (θ.r. So PR = e−iε(n·J )/¯ . 2.2π = E. ϕ)Dmm (R) (l) D (l) is an irreducible representation of dimension 2l + 1. ϕ := β. so χ (α) sin2 ( 1 α) = 0∀α ⇒ χ (α) = 0∀α.. and are bilinear in the states. Via the fundamental orthogonality theorem for characters one obtains the following expression for the density function (which is normalized so that g(0) = 1): g(α) = sin2 ( 1 α) 2 ( 1 α)2 2 With this result one can see that the given representations of SO(3) are the only ones: the character of another representation χ would have to be ⊥ to the already found ones. β and γ are the 3 Euler angles.. This can be derived from group theory as follows: from χ(j1 ) (α)χ(j2 ) (α) = nj χ(J) (α) follows: J D(j1 ) ⊗ D(j2 ) = D(j1 +j2 ) ⊕ D(j1 +j2 −1) ⊕ .. xyz are θ. This expression is valid for all rotations over an angle α because the classes of SO(3) are rotations around the same angle around an axis with an arbitrary orientation. ϕ := β. 2 space which is invariant under rotations.Chapter 13: Theory of groups 77 13. Another way to define parameters is by means of Eulers angles. A problem arises for rotations over 2π: h ψ 1 ms → e−2πiSz /¯ ψ 1 ms = e−2πims ψ 1 ms = −ψ 1 ms 2 2 2 2 However.. The spherical angles of the z-axis w. 123 are θ.t.6 Applications to quantum mechanics 13. j1 + j2 − 1. π − γ. then the rotation of a quantum mechanical system is described by: h ¯ h h ψ → e−iαJz h e−iβJy /¯ e−iγJz /¯ ψ. ϕ) with −l ≤ m ≤ l and for a fixed l: PR Ylm (θ. ϕ) = m Ylm (θ. So here holds E → ±I Because observable quantities can always be I. written as φ|ψ or φ|A|ψ .

2 Irreducible tensor operators. m2 and with j1 . The 3 antisymmetric components A z = 1 (Txy − Tyx ). A−1 = √ (Ax − iAy ) 2 2 3. This means that J ∈ {J + 1. Because P R A0 PR = A0 this operator is invariant. The 5 independent components of the traceless. Wevers The states can be characterized by quantum numbers in two ways: with j 1 .t. So for rotations around the z-axis holds:   cos α − sin α 0 D(Rα. M . This state is described by a (0) −1 (0) scalar operator. This can also be understood (1) kl . These transform as the vector U × V .A. So T ij transforms like PR Tij PR = Tkl Dki (R)Dlj (R). j2 . so as D (0) .C. The 9 components can be split in 3 invariant subspaces with dimension 1 (D (0) ). J. A cartesian tensor of rank 2: T ij is a quantity which transforms under rotations like U i Vj .z ) = 1 + 2 cos(α). except J = J = 0. Az ). the Hamiltonian of a free atom. Tr(T ) = Txx + Tyy + Tzz . e. The new base operators are: I. ϕ). 2 so as D(1) .z ) =  sin α cos α 0  0 0 1 The transformed operator has the same matrix elements w. where U and −1 V are vectors. 2 3 Selection rules for dipole transitions Dipole operators transform as D (1) : for an electric dipole transfer is the operator er.r.6. and χ(Rα. This transforms as the scalar U · V . J. P R ψ and PR φ: −1 PR ψ|PR Ax PR |PR φ = ψ|Ax |φ . From the Wigner-Eckart theorem follows: J M |Aκ |JM = 0 except D (J ) is a part of D (1) ⊗ D(J) = D(J+1) ⊕ D(J) ⊕ D(|J−1|) . for a magnetic e( L + 2S )/2m. According to the equation for characters this means one can choose base operators which transform like Y 1m (θ. The Clebsch-Gordan coefficients. 2. II. for SO(3) called the Wigner coefficients. Ay . 3 (D (1) ) and 5 (D (2) ).78 Physics Formulary by ir. The cartesian components of a vector operator transform equally as the cartesian components of r by definition. A vector operator: A = (Ax . These transform as D (2) . A0 = Az . Suppose j = 0: this gives the identical representation with j = 1. etc. |J − 1|}: J = J or J = J ± 1. so: ψj1 j2 JM ψj1 m1 j2 m2 = m1 m2 ψj1 m1 j2 m2 (j1 m1 j2 m2 |JM ) = JM ψj1 j2 JM (j1 m1 j2 m2 |JM ) 13. j2 . symmetric tensor S: Sij = 1 (Tij + Tji ) − 1 δij Tr(T ). m1 . so like D (1) ⊗ D(1) = D(2) ⊕ D(1) ⊕ D(0) . Then holds: J M |H|JM ∼ δMM δJJ . These turn out to be the spherical components: 1 1 (1) (1) (1) A+1 = − √ (Ax + iAy ). can be chosen real. Land´ -equation for the anomalous Zeeman splitting e According to Land´ ’s model the interaction between a magnetic moment with an external magnetic field is e determined by the projection of M on J because L and S precede fast around J. III. matrixelements and selection rules Some examples of the behaviour of operators under SO(3) 1. J.g.

Elementary particles can be classified in isospin-multiplets. Tj ] = i cijk Tk . H is a Hermitian matrix. Each Hermitian. here εijk is the complete antisymmetric tensor with ε123 = +1. The group elements now are PR = exp(−iQΘ). unitary 1 × 1-matrices. In elementary particle physics the T i can be interpreted e. The isospin-doublet ≡ the faithful representation of SU(2) on 2 × 2 matrices. as the isospin operators. Here. The isospin-singlet ≡ the identical representation: e −iT ·Θ = 1 ⇒ Ti = 0 2. 2 In abstraction. The split-off of charge in the exponent is essential: it allows one gauge field for all charged particles. Each unitary matrix U can be written as: U = e −iH . these are the irreducible representations of SU(2). independent of their charge. This is now stated as a guide principle: the “right of existence” of the electromagnetic field is to allow local gauge invariance. T2 ] = iT3 . So these matrices are a choice for the operators of SU(2). For an arbitrary operator A follows: αjm |A|αjm = αjm|A · J |αjm j(j + 1)¯ 2 h αjm |J |αjm 13. etc. Further it always holds that: det(U ) = e−iTr(H) .7 Applications to particle physics The physics of a system does not change after performing a transformation ψ = eiδ ψ where δ is a constant. where Θn are real constants and T n operators (generators). In general the group elements are given by P R = exp(−iT · Θ). The group SU(2) has 3 free parameters: because it is unitary there are 4 real conditions over 4 complex parameters. remaining 3 free parameters.g. The cijk are the structure k constants of the group. one can consider an isomorphic group where only the commutation rules are considered to be known regarding the operators T i : [T1 . This is a local gauge transformation: the phase of the wavefunction changes different at each position. One can write: SU(2)={exp(− 1 iσ · Θ)}. The classification is: 1. Other force fields than the electromagnetic field can also be understood this way. The solution ψ of the Schr¨ dinger equation with the transformed potentials is: ψ = e−iqf (r. The gauge transformations of the EM-field form a group: U(1).Chapter 13: Theory of groups 79 from the Wigner-Eckart theorem: from this follows that the matrix elements from all vector operators show a certain proportionality. and consists of the photon and three intermediary vector bosons. Taylor expansion and setting equal Θ n Θ m -terms results in the commutation rules.t) ψ. There exists some freedom in the choice of the potentials A and φ at the same E and B: gauge transformations o of the potentials do not change E and B (See chapter 2 and 10). These constants can be found with the help of group product elements: because G is closed holds: eiΘ·T eiΘ ·T e−iΘ·T e−iΘ ·T = e−iΘ ·T . This concept is generalized: particles have a “special charge” Q. The physics of the system does not change if A and φ are also transformed. traceless 2 × 2 matrix can be written as a linear combination of the 3 Pauli-matrices σ i . . The commutation rules are given by [T i . The colour force is described by SU(3). and the determinant has to be +1. For each matrix of SU(2) holds that Tr(H)=0. like Q. This is a global gauge transformation: the phase of the wavefunction changes everywhere by the same amount. The weak interaction together with the electromagnetic interaction can be described by a force field that transforms according to U(1)⊗SU(2). For SO(3) these constants are c ijk = εijk . and has a gauge field that exists of 8 types of gluons.

Wevers The group SU(3) has 8 free parameters. In the Lagrange density for the colour force one has to substitute D ∂ ∂ → := − Ti Ai x ∂x Dx ∂x i=1 8 The terms of 3rd and 4th power in A show that the colour field interacts with itself. J.C.A. which are not all 9 linear independent. The Hermitian. (The group SU(N ) has N 2 − 1 free parameters). traceless operators are 3 SU(2)-subgroups in the e 1 e2 .80 Physics Formulary by ir. e1 e3 and the e2 e3 plane. This gives 9 matrices. . By taking a linear combination one gets 8 matrices.

Chapter 14 Nuclear physics 14.711 23. there is a contribution of the spin-orbit coupling ∼ L · S: ∆Vls = 1 (2l + 1)¯ ω. This is just 2 2 the opposite for electrons. N even: = +1. The energy of a 3-dimensional harmonic oscillator is E = (N + 3 )¯ ω. approximately ∼ A.1 Nuclear forces The mass of a nucleus is given by: Mnucl = Zmp + N mn − Ebind /c2 The binding energy per nucleon is given in the figure at the right. The top is at 56 Fe. Z odd. where the state with j = l + 1 has the lowest energy. be considered as an exchange of virtual pions: r W0 r0 exp − U (r) = − r r0 With ∆E · ∆t ≈ h. 26 the most stable nucleus. The following holds: Z even. a5 : Pair off effect: nuclei with an even number of protons or neutrons are more stable because groups of two protons or neutrons have a lower energy.702 34. N even: = 0. Eγ = m0 c2 and r0 = c∆t follows: r0 = h/m0 c. With the constants a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 = = = = = 15. The Yukawa potential can be derived if the nuclear force can to first approximation. l) is split in two. N odd: = 0. 5.000 MeV MeV MeV MeV MeV 9 8 ↑ 7 E 6 (MeV) 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 40 80 120 160 A→ 200 240 and A = Z + N .810 0. Z odd. with j = l ± 1 .760 17. So each level h 2 (n. 3. a1 : Binding energy of the strong nuclear force. 4. 2. Because −l ≤ m ≤ l and m s = ± 1 ¯ there are 2(2l + 1) 2h . Z even. in the droplet or collective model of the nucleus the binding energy E bind is given by: Z(Z − 1) (N − Z)2 Ebind + a5 A−3/4 = a1 A − a2 A2/3 − a3 − a4 2 1/3 c A A These terms arise from: 1. a2 : Surface correction: the nucleons near the surface are less bound. N odd: = −1. ¯ ¯ In the shell model of the nucleus one assumes that a nucleon moves in an average field of other nucleons. which is an indication that the L − S interaction is not electromagnetical. a4 : Asymmetry term: a surplus of protons or neutrons has a lower binding energy. N = nx + ny + nz = 2(n − 1) + l 2 h where n ≥ 1 is the main oscillator number. a3 : Coulomb repulsion between the protons. Further.

The parity of the electric moment is Π E = (−1)l . constant for all nuclei. and n0 → p+ + W− → p+ + e− + ν e . β-decay.82 Physics Formulary by ir.C. The average life time 2 of a nucleus is τ = 1/λ.5855 and for neutrons g S = −3. The tunnel probability P is P = 1 incoming amplitude = e−2G with G = outgoing amplitude h ¯ 2m [V (r) − E]dr G is called the Gamow factor. 8. 2. The z-components of the magnetic moment are given by M L. 82. e e L and MS = gS S. 14. If the nuclear radius is measured including the charge distribution one obtains R 0 ≈ 1. α-decay: the nucleus emits a He 2+ nucleus. The multipole moment is given by µ l = Zerl Ylm (θ. The shape of oscillating nuclei can be described by spherical harmonics: R = R0 1 + lm alm Ylm (θ.8263. This gives for the number of nuclei N : N (t) = N0 exp(−λt). 14. 126}. a proton in the nucleus captures an electron (usually from the K-shell). Because nucleons tend to order themselves in groups of 2p+2n this can be considered as a tunneling of a He 2+ nucleus through a potential barrier.0 = β cos γ and a2. 28. So the fraction decaying into state i is λi / λi . Electron capture: here. The half life time follows from τ 1 λ = ln(2).z = µN ml and MS. Spontaneous fission: a nucleus breaks apart. 3.z = gS µN mS . There are 5 types of natural radioactive decay: 1.A. ϕ) l = 0 gives rise to monopole vibrations. There are 2 contributions to the magnetic moment: ML = 2mp 2mp where gS is the spin-gyromagnetic ratio.±2 = 1 2β sin γ where β is the 2 deformation factor and γ the shape parameter.2 The shape of the nucleus A nucleus is to first approximation spherical with a radius of R = R 0 A1/3 . Here. Here a proton changes into a neutron or vice versa: p+ → n0 + W+ → n0 + e+ + νe . which can be applied to the theory of neutron stars. The resulting magnetic moment is related to the nuclear spin I according to M = gI (e/2mp)I. l = 2 quadrupole. This is the case if N or Z ∈ {2. This gives rise to the so called magical numbers: nuclei where each state in the outermost level are filled are particulary stable. √ l = 1 gives dipole vibrations. For protons holds g S = 5.3 Radioactive decay ˙ The number of nuclei decaying is proportional to the number of nuclei: N = −λN . 5. 50. ϕ). γ-decay: here the nucleus emits a high-energetic photon.2 · 10−15 m. The probability that N nuclei decay within a time interval is given by a Poisson distribution: λN e−λ dt P (N )dt = N0 N! If a nucleus can decay into more final states then holds: λ = λi . R0 ≈ 1. Wevers substates which exist independently for protons and neutrons. of the magnetic moment Π M = (−1)l+1 . The decay constant is given by λ= P (l) Eγ ∼ h ¯ω (¯ c)2 h Eγ R h ¯c 2l ∼ 10−4l . J. with a 2.4·10−15 m. The z-component is then Mz = µN gI mI . density vibrations. 20. 4.

2 The energy of the photon is E γ = Ei − Ef − TR . The wavefunction of the incoming particles can be expressed as a sum of angular momentum wavefunctions: ψinit = eikz = l ψl The impact parameter is related to the angular momentum with L = bp = b¯ k. From this it follows that σ(θ) = |f (θ)| 2 . so bk ≈ l. with TR = Eγ /2mc2 the recoil energy.4 Scattering and nuclear reactions 14. 14. From this follows that the intensity of the beam decreases as −dI = Inσdx. At large distances from the scattering point they have approximately a spherical wavefunction ψ scat = f (θ)eikr /r where f (θ) is the scattering amplitude. which can usually be neglected. This results in I = I0 e−nσx = I0 e−µx . With I the quantum number of angular momentum of the nucleus. ϕ)dΩ/4π = Inxdσ it follows: R(θ. Usually the decay constant of electric multipole moments is larger than the one of magnetic multipole moments.1 Kinetic model If a beam with intensity I hits a target with density n and length x (Rutherford scattering) the number of scatterings R per unit of time is equal to R = Inxσ.2 Quantum mechanical model for n-p scattering The initial state is a beam of neutrons moving along the z-axis with wavefunction ψ init = eikz and current density Jinit = v|ψinit |2 = v. ϕ) dσ = dΩ 4πnxI dσ ∆N = n ∆Ω∆x N dΩ If N particles are scattered in a material with density n then holds: For Coulomb collisions holds: dσ dΩ = C 1 Z1 Z2 e2 2 4 1 8πε0 µv0 sin ( 2 θ) 14. The total wavefunction is then given by eikr ψ = ψin + ψscat = eikz + f (θ) r The particle flux of the scattered particles is v|ψ scat |2 = v|f (θ)|2 dΩ.4. The parity of the emitted radiation is Π l = Πi · Πf . L = h I(I + 1). holds the following selection rule: ¯ |Ii − If | ≤ ∆l ≤ |Ii + If |.Chapter 14: Nuclear physics 83 where l is the quantum number for the angular momentum and P the radiated power. At higher energies holds: σ = 4π k2 sin2 (δl ) l . Because dR = R(θ. so ψ = ψ0 + l>0 ψl and ψ0 = sin(kr) kr If the potential is approximately rectangular holds: ψ 0 = C The cross section is then σ(θ) = sin2 (δ0 ) so σ = k2 h ¯ 2 k 2 /2m W0 + W sin(kr + δ0 ) kr 4π sin2 (δ0 ) k2 σ(θ)dΩ = At very low energies holds: sin 2 (δ0 ) = with W0 the depth of the potential well. At very low energy h only particles with l = 0 are scattered.4.

84 Physics Formulary by ir.C. The absorbed dose D is given by D = dE abs /dm. It can be derived that D= µE Ψ The Kerma K is the amount of kinetic energy of secundary produced particles which is produced per mass unit of the radiated object.01 Gy. gamma radiation o β. m1 + m2 + 2m2 mk 14. An old unit is the rad: 1 rad=0. so Pk P1 + P2 → k>2 the total energy Q gained or required is given by Q = (m 1 + m2 − k>2 mk )c2 . For some types of radiation holds: Radiation type R¨ ntgen. With the energy-absorption coefficient µ E follows: o X= dQ eµE = Ψ dm W where W is the energy required to disjoin an elementary charge. and the energy flux density ψ = dΨ/dt.A. Wevers 14. If the absorption is not equally distributed also weight factors w per organ need to be used: H = wk Hk . mesons Thermic neutrons Fast neutrons protons α. with unit C/kg. with unit Gy=J/kg. The equivalent dose H is a weight average of the absorbed dose per type of radiation.58 · 10 −4 C/kg. ˙ The dose tempo is defined as D. The intensity of a beam of particles in matter decreases according to I(s) = I 0 exp(−µs). The deceleration of a heavy particle is described by the Bethe-Bloch equation: dE q2 ∼ 2 ds v The fluention is given by Φ = dN/dA. Parameters describing a relation between those are called interaction parameters. H = QD. fission products Q 1 1 3 to 5 10 to 20 10 20 .3 Conservation of energy and momentum in nuclear reactions If a particle P1 collides with a particle P2 which is in rest w. The minimal required kinetic energy T of P 1 in the laboratory system to initialize the reaction is T = −Q If Q < 0 there is a threshold energy. The mass absorption coefficient is given by µ/ . electrons. The flux is given by φ = dΦ/dt.5 Radiation dosimetry Radiometric quantities determine the strength of the radiation source(s).t. These weight factors are called the quality factors.4. Dosimetric quantities are related to the energy transfer from radiation to matter. the laboratory system and other particles are created.r. where for each type radiation the effects on biological material is used for the weight factor. Their unit is Sv. The radiation dose X is the amount of charge produced by the radiation per unit of mass. An old unit is the R¨ ntgen: 1Ro= 2. The absorption coefficient is given by µ = (dN/N )/dx. J. The energy loss is defined by Ψ = dW/dA.

a(kj )] = 0 . a† (kj )] = 0 . a† (kj )] = δij Hence for free spin-0 particles holds: H 0 = i a† (ki )a(ki )¯ ωki h 15. This is a complete description because the particles are indistinguishable. Hint is the interaction Hamiltonian and can increase or decrease a c 2 at the cost of others. etc. ∂ν Φα (x)). a is the annihilation operator and a † the creation operator.1 Creation and annihilation operators A state with more particles can be described by a collection occupation numbers |n 1 n2 n3 · · · . and Ψ(t)|Ψ(t) = in time is described by the Schr¨ dinger equation o i d |Ψ(t) = H|Ψ(t) dt where H = H0 + Hint . So aa† is an occupation number operator. ∂ν Φα )d4 x the field equation can be derived: ∂ ∂L ∂L =0 − α ∂Φ ∂xν ∂(∂ν Φα ) The conjugated field is. All operators which can change occupation numbers can be expanded in the a and a † operators. The expansion of the states tum k1 .. ict) through the fields: L = L(Φ α (x). and: √ ni |n1 n2 · · · ni − 1 · · · a(ki )|n1 n2 · · · ni · · · = √ † ni + 1 |n1 n2 · · · ni + 1 · · · a (ki )|n1 n2 · · · ni · · · = Because the states are normalized holds a|0 = 0 and a( ki )a† (ki )|ni = ni |ni . The states are orthonormal: ∞ n1 n2 n3 · · · |n1 n2 n3 · · · = i=1 δni ni The time-dependent state vector is given by Ψ(t) = n1 n2 ··· cn1 n2 ··· (t)|n1 n2 · · · The coefficients c can be interpreted as follows: |c n1 n2 ··· |2 is the probability to find n 1 particles with momen|cni (t)|2 = 1. [a† (ki ). The Lagrangian is given by L = L(x)d3 x. H0 is the Hamiltonian for free particles and keeps |c ni (t)|2 constant. The following commutation rules can be derived: [a(ki ). Using the variational principle δI(Ω) = 0 and with the action-integral I(Ω) = L(Φα . Hence the vacuum state is given by |000 · · · . analogous to momentum in classical mechanics. defined as: Πα (x) = ∂L ˙ ∂ Φα . the Lagrange density L is a function of the position x = (x.2 Classical and quantum fields Starting with a real field Φ α (x) (complex fields can be split in a real and an imaginary part).Chapter 15 Quantum field theory & Particle physics 15. [a(ki ). n2 particles with momentum k2 .

the coefficients have to be each others hermitian conjugate because Φ is hermitian. and the negative frequency part is the annihilation part.3 The interaction picture Some equivalent formulations of quantum mechanics are possible: 1. Πβ (x )] = iδαβ (x − x ) 15. Πβ (x )] = 0 . holds: h 0 ∂ ∂ Φ(x) = Π(x) and Π(x) = (∇2 − M 2 )Φ(x) ∂t ∂t 2 From this follows that Φ obeys the Klein-Gordon equation (✷ − M 2 )Φ = 0. H0 ] dt dt S S S 15. [Φα (x). In general holds that ∆(y) = 0 outside the light cone. With the definition k0 = 2 2 2 k + M := ωk and the notation k · x − ik0 t := kx the general solution of this equation is: 1 Φ(x) = √ V k 1 √ a(k )eikx + a† (k )e−ikx 2ωk i . t. with M := m 2 c2 /¯ 2 . The interaction picture can be obtained from the Schr¨ dinger picture by an unitary transformation: o |Φ(t) = eiH0 |ΦS (t) and O(t) = eiH0 OS e−iH0 The index S denotes the Schr¨ dinger picture.4 Real scalar field in the interaction picture It is easy to find that. The Lagrange density is given by: L(Φ. So the equations obey the locality postulate. time-dependent operators. The energy operator is given by: 2 H= H(x)d3 x = k h ¯ ωk a† (k )a(k ) . Quantization of a classical field is analogous to quantization in point mass mechanics: the field functions are considered as operators obeying certain commutation rules: [Φα (x). [Πα (x). Usually one can take the limit V → ∞.86 Physics Formulary by ir. J. time-independent operators. Wevers ˙ With this. Schr¨ dinger picture: time-dependent states. which is used as normalization factor. ∂ ν Φ) = − 1 (∂ν Φ∂ν Φ + m2 Φ2 ). Φ(x )] = i∆(x − x ) with ∆(y) = 1 (2π)3 sin(ky) 3 d k ωk ∆(y) is an odd function which is invariant for proper Lorentz transformations (no mirroring).C. time-dependent operators. the Hamilton density becomes H(x) = Π α Φα − L(x). the positive frequency part. Because Φ has only one component this can be interpreted as a field describing a particle with spin zero. In general it holds that the term with e −ikx . From this follows: o i d d |Φ(t) = Hint (t)|Φ(t) and i O(t) = [O(t). o 2.A. Heisenberg picture: time-independent states. 3. Π(x) = √ V 1 2 ωk k −a(k )eikx + a† (k )e−ikx The field operators contain a volume V . This is consistent with the previously found result [Φ(x. Interaction picture: time-dependent states. is the creation part. Φβ (x )] = 0 . From this follows that the commutation rules are given by [Φ(x). Φ(x . t)] = 0.

Hence: h ˜ ψ(x) = e−i(S+L) ψ(x) = e−iJ ψ(x) Then the solutions of the Dirac equation are given by: ψ(x) = ur (p )e−i(p·x±Et) ± Here. When this field is quantized the field operators are given by 1 Φ(x) = √ V 1 √ a(k )eikx + b† (k )e−ikx 2ωk 1 . µ = 4 these are Lorentz transformations. Because this quantity is 0 for real fields a complex field is needed to describe charged particles.6 Field functions for spin. This 1 −1 in·S results in the condition D γλ D = Λλµ γµ . Then holds ∂L ∂ fα = 0 ∂xν ∂(∂ν Φα ) This is a continuity equation ⇒ conservation law. Suppose that L ((Φα ) . ur (p )ur (p ) = δrr .Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 87 15. The conserved quantity is the current density J µ (x) = −ie(Φ∂µ Φ∗ − Φ∗ ∂µ Φ). With the notation v r (p ) = ur (−p ) and ur (p ) = ur (p ) one can write for the dot products of these spinors: − + ur (p )ur (p ) = + + E E δrr .1 particles 2 Spin is defined by the behaviour of the solutions ψ of the Dirac equation. The above Lagrange density is invariant for a change in phase Φ → Φe iθ : a global gauge transformation. ˜ ˜ A rotated field ψ obeys the Dirac equation if the following condition holds: ψ(x) = D(Λ)ψ(Λ−1 x). One finds: D = e with Sµν = −i 2 ¯ γµ γν . Noether’s theorem connects a continuous symmetry of L and an additive conservation law. if it obeys the Klein-Gordon equation. ν ≤ 3 these are rotations. ur (p )ur (p ) = 0 − − − + M M . A scalar field Φ has the property ˜ that. for ν = 4. and ± is the sign of the energy. the rotated field Φ(x) := Φ(Λ−1 x) also obeys it. conservation of charge The Lagrange density of charged spin-0 particles is given by: L = −(∂ ν Φ∂ν Φ∗ + M 2 ΦΦ∗ ). Which quantity is conserved depends on the symmetry.5 Charged spin-0 particles. ∂ν Φα ) and there exists a continuous transformation between Φ α and Φα such as Φα = Φα + f α (Φ). These can be written as: ∂ ∂ ˜ Φ(x) = Φ(x)e−in·L with Lµν = −i¯ xµ h − xν ∂xν ∂xµ For µ ≤ 3. Φ† (x) = √ V 1 √ a† (k )eikx + b(k )e−ikx 2ωk k k Hence the energy operator is given by: H= k h ¯ ωk a† (k )a(k ) + b† (k )b(k ) and the charge operator is given by: Q(t) = −i J4 (x)d3 x ⇒ Q = k e a† (k )a(k ) − b† (k )b(k ) From this follows that a † a := N+ (k ) is an occupation number operator for particles with a positive charge and b† b := N− (k ) is an occupation number operator for particles with a negative charge. ∂ν (Φα ) ) = L (Φα . Λ denotes 4-dimensional rotations: the proper Lorentz transformations. r is an indication for the direction of the spin. 15.

∂ +M ∂xµ ψ(x) 15. ur (p )v r (p ) = 0 Combinations of the type aa give a 4 × 4 matrix: 2 u r=1 r (p )ur (p ) −iγλ pλ + M . ψβ (x )]+ = −iSαβ (x − x ) ∂ − M ∆(x) ∂xλ The anti commutation rules give besides the positive-definite energy also the Pauli exclusion principle and the Fermi-Dirac statistics: because c† (p )c† (p ) = −c† (p )c† (p ) holds: {c† (p)}2 = 0. ψβ (x )] = 0 . J. ψβ (x )] = 0 . Another way to see + + this is the fact that {Nr (p )}2 = Nr (p ): the occupation operators have only eigenvalues 0 and 1. The expression for the current density now becomes J µ = −ieN (ψγµ ψ). The energy operator is given by 2 H= p Ep r=1 c† (p )cr (p ) − dr (p )d† (p ) r r To prevent that the energy of positrons is negative the operators must obey anti commutation rules in stead of commutation rules: [cr (p ). Wevers Because of the factor E/M this is not relativistic invariant.88 Physics Formulary by ir. d† (p )]+ = δrr δpp . It appears to be impossible r r r r r to create two electrons with the same momentum and spin. . or in which they are on the right of the creation operators. Assume hereby that all commutators are zero. c and c are the creation respectively annihilation operators for an electron and d † and d the creation respectively annihilation operators for a positron. [ψα (x). A Lorentz-invariant dot product is defined by ab := a† γ4 b. [ψα (x).7 Quantization of spin. with S(x) = γλ To avoid infinite vacuum contributions to the energy and charge the normal product is introduced. c† (p )]+ = [dr (p ). From this follows: ur (p )ur (p ) = δrr . • In all other terms interchange the factors so that the annihilation operators go to the right. all other anti commutators are 0. r r The field operators obey [ψα (x). This is the exclusion principle. = 2M 2 v r (p )v r (p ) = r=1 −iγλ pλ − M 2M The Lagrange density which results in the Dirac equation and having the correct energy normalization is: L(x) = −ψ(x) γµ and the current density is J µ (x) = −ieψγµ ψ. v r (p )v r (p ) = −δrr .A. This product is obtained by: • Expand all fields into creation and annihilation operators.1 fields 2 The general solution for the fieldoperators is in this case: ψ(x) = and ψ(x) = † M V M V p 1 √ E 1 √ E cr (p )ur (p )eipx + d† (p )v r (p )e−ipx r r c† (p )ur (p )e−ipx + dr (p )v r (p )eipx r r p Here.C. • Keep all terms which have no annihilation operators. By an interchange of two fermion operators add a minus sign. where a := a† γ4 is a row spinor. by interchange of two boson operators not.

this only applies to free EM-fields: in intermediary states in interactions there can exist longitudinal and timelike photons. this gives problems with the commutation rules. 2 gives transversal polarized. With a local gauge transformation one obtains N 3 (k ) = 0 and N4 (k ) = 0. the T -operator means a time-ordered product: the terms in such a product must be ordered in increasing time order from the right to the left so that the earliest terms act first. From this follows that (a 3 (k ) − a4 (k ))|Φ = 0.8 Quantization of the electromagnetic field Starting with the Lagrange density L = − 1 2 it follows for the field operators A(x): 1 A(x) = √ V 1 √ 2ωk 4 ∂Aν ∂Aν ∂xµ ∂xµ am (k ) m=1 m (k )eikx + a† (k ) m (k )∗ e−ikx k The operators obey [a m (k ). By changing the definition of the inner product in R configuration space the expectation values for A 1. A 4 is still defined to be hermitian because otherwise the sign of the energy becomes incorrect. The interaction Hamilton density for the interaction between the electromagnetic and the electron-positron field is: Hint (x) = −Jµ (x)Aµ (x) = ieN (ψγµ ψAµ ) When this is expanded as: H int = ieN (ψ + + ψ − )γµ (ψ + + ψ − )(A+ + A− ) µ µ . Aν (x )] = iδµν D(x − x ) with D(y) = ∆(y)|m=0 In spite of the fact that A 4 = iV is imaginary in the classical case.3 (x) ∈ I and for A4 (x) become imaginary. If the potentials satisfy the Lorentz gauge condition ∂ µ Aµ = 0 the E and B operators derived from these potentials will satisfy the Maxwell equations.Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 89 15. If the Schr¨ dinger equation is integrated: o t |Φ(t) = |Φ(−∞) − i −∞ Hint (t1 )|Φ(t1 ) dt1 and perturbation theory is applied one finds that: S= (−i)n n! n=0 ∞ ∞ ··· T {Hint (x1 ) · · · Hint (xn )} d4 x1 · · · d4 xn ≡ n=0 S (n) Here. 15. The S-matrix is then given by: S ij = Φi |S|Φj = Φi |Φ(∞) . These photons are also responsible for the stationary Coulomb potential. However.9 Interacting fields and the S-matrix The S(scattering)-matrix gives a relation between the initial and final states of an interaction: |Φ(∞) = S|Φ(−∞) . a† (k )] = δmm δkk .2. Further holds: [Aµ (x). It is now demanded that only those states are permitted for which holds ∂A+ µ |Φ = 0 ∂xµ This results in: ∂Aµ ∂xµ = 0. However. All other commutators are 0. m = 3 longitudinal polarized and m = 4 timelike polarized photons. m gives the polarization m direction of the photon: m = 1.

It is assumed that an electron. The contraction functions can also be written as: ∆F (x) = lim −2i →0 (2π)4 −2i eikx d4 k and S F (x) = lim →0 (2π)4 k 2 + m2 − i eipx iγµ pµ − M 4 d p p2 + M 2 − i In the expressions for S (2) this gives rise to terms δ(p + k − p − k ).A. J. Hadrons: these exist of quarks and can be categorized in: I. The appearing operators describe the minimal changes necessary to change the initial state into the final state. Wick’s theorem gives an expression for the time-ordened product of an arbitrary number of field operators. Each term corresponds with a possible process. 15. Wevers eight terms appear. and is the expectation value of the time2 ordered product in the vacuum state. Further the factors in H int can create and thereafter annihilate particles: the virtual particles. Some time-ordened products are: T {Φ(x)Φ(y)} T ψα (x)ψβ (y) T {Aµ (x)Aν (y)} = N {Φ(x)Φ(y)} + 1 ∆F (x − y) 2 F = N ψα (x)ψβ (y) − 1 Sαβ (x − y) 2 F = N {Aµ (x)Aν (y)} + 1 δµν Dµν (x − y) 2 Here. ψ + annihilates an electron and ψ + annihilates a positron.90 Physics Formulary by ir.11 Classification of elementary particles Elementary particles can be categorized as follows: 1. The effects of the virtual particles are described by the (anti)commutator functions.C. An integration over one of them becomes ∞. if there would not be an electromagnetical field. In the Hamilton and Lagrange density of the free electron-positron field appears M 0 . would have a mass M 0 and a charge e 0 unequal to the observed mass M and charge e. D F (x) = ∆F (x)|m=0 and  1 eikx 3   d k   (2π)3 ωk  F ∆ (x) =   1 e−ikx 3    d k 3 (2π) ωk if x0 > 0 if x0 < 0 The term 1 ∆F (x − y) is called the contraction of Φ(x) and Φ(y). . However. Baryons: these exist of 3 quarks or 3 antiquarks. So this gives. 15. The expressions for S (n) contain time-ordered products of normal products. In the x-representation this can be understood because the product of two functions containing δ-like singularities is not well defined. In the x-representation each diagram describes a number of processes.10 Divergences and renormalization It turns out that higher orders contribute infinite terms because only the sum p + k of the four-momentum of the virtual particles is fixed. This means that energy and momentum is conserved. This can be written as a sum of normal products. with M = M0 + ∆M : Le−p (x) = −ψ(x)(γµ ∂µ + M0 )ψ(x) = −ψ(x)(γµ ∂µ + M )ψ(x) + ∆M ψ(x)ψ(x) and Hint = ieN (ψγµ ψAµ ) − i∆eN (ψγµ ψAµ ). This is solved by discounting all divergent diagrams in a renormalization of e and M . virtual particles do not obey the relation between energy and momentum. Only µ terms with the correct number of particles in the initial and final state contribute to a matrix element Φ i |S|Φj . S F (x) = (γµ ∂µ − M )∆F (x). The term ieψ + γµ ψ + A− acting on |Φ µ gives transitions where A − creates a photon. The graphical representation of these processes are called Feynman diagrams.

56563 1115.9 1321. T is the isospin.Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 91 II. Field quanta: γ.27231 939. W± .56995 497. An overview of particles and antiparticles is given in the following table: Particle u d s c b t e− µ− τ− νe νµ ντ γ gluon W+ Z graviton spin (¯ ) B h 1/2 1/3 1/2 1/3 1/2 1/3 1/2 1/3 1/2 1/3 1/2 1/3 1/2 0 1/2 0 1/2 0 1/2 0 1/2 0 1/2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 L 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 T 1/2 1/2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T3 1/2 −1/2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B∗ 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 charge (e) +2/3 −1/3 −1/3 +2/3 −1/3 +2/3 −1 −1 −1 0 0 0 0 0 +1 0 0 m 0 (MeV) 5 9 175 1350 4500 173000 0. 3. The anti particles have quantum numbers with the opposite sign except for the total isospin T.55 1197.658 1777.37 1192. There exist excited states with higher internal L. µ± . with T 3 the projection of the isospin on the third axis.0 1232. These are: 1.45 2285. Leptons: e± .0 Each quark can exist in two spin states. one for e.32 1672. while baryons are fermions with spin 1 or 3 . 2.56563 939.45 1672.37 938. So mesons are bosons with spin 0 or 1 in their ground state. which are separately conserved.511 105.4 1869.677 493.55 1192.684 1189.1 1232. Z0 .8 9460. ν e . The quantum numbers are subject to conservation laws. Neutrino’s have a 2 2 1 1 helicity of − 2 while antineutrino’s have only + 2 as possible value. u d s c b t e+ µ+ τ+ νe νµ ντ γ gluon W− Z graviton Here B is the baryon number and L the lepton number.0 1232.684 1115.0 J/Ψ Υ p+ p− n0 n0 Λ Λ Σ+ Σ− Σ0 Σ0 Σ− cc bb uud uud udd udd uds uds uus uus uds uds dds 3096. It is found that there are three different lepton numbers. C the charmness.0 1969. τ ± .27231 938. together with their mass in MeV in their ground state: π0 π+ π− K0 K0 K+ K− D+ D− D0 D0 F+ F− 1 2 √ 2(uu+dd) ud du sd ds us su cd dc cu uc cs sc 134. νe .672 493. .9764 139.4 1864. ν µ . Mass/energy because the laws of nature are invariant for translations in time.56995 139.6 1864.32 1321.0 1232. ν τ .436 1314. ντ . gluons.0 1232.9 1314.37 1189. discrete symmetries result in multiplicative conservation laws. S the strangeness and B ∗ the bottomness.677 1869. νµ . The composition of (anti)quarks of the hadrons is given in the following table.1 0(?) 0(?) 0(?) 0 0 80220 91187 0 antipart.436 Σ+ Ξ0 0 Ξ − Ξ Ξ+ Ω− Ω+ Λ+ c ∆ 2− ∆ 2+ ∆+ ∆0 ∆− dds uss uss dss dss sss sss udc uuu uuu uud udd ddd 1197. Mesons: these exist of one quark and one antiquark. gravitons (?). Geometrical conservation laws are invariant under Lorentz transformations and the CPT-operation. These can be derived from symmetries in the Lagrange density: continuous symmetries give rise to additive conservation laws. µ and τ .6 1969.672 497.

12 P and CP-violation It is found that the weak interaction violates P-symmetry. Further holds P|K 0 = −|K0 because K0 and K0 have an intrinsic parity of −1. 6. The potential energy will become high enough to create a quarkantiquark pair when it is tried to disjoin an (anti)quark from a hadron. Wevers 2. The following holds: C|K 0 = η|K0 where η is a phase factor. Isospin because QCD is invariant for rotations in T-space. 3. Some processes which violate P symmetry but conserve the combination CP are: 1. β-decay of spin-polarized 60 Co: 60 Co →60 Ni + e− + ν e . Baryon number and lepton number are conserved but not under a possible SU(5) symmetry of the laws of nature. This will result in two hadrons and not in free quarks. For colour interactions a base of K 0 and K0 is practical because then the number u−number u is constant. More electrons with a spin parallel to the Co than with a spin antiparallel are created: (parallel−antiparallel)/(total)=20%. Electrical charge because the Maxwell equations are invariant under gauge transformations. The linear combinations √ √ |K0 := 1 2(|K0 + |K0 ) and |K0 := 1 2(|K0 − |K0 ) 1 2 2 2 are eigenstates of CP: CP|K0 = +|K0 and CP|K0 = −|K0 . The color force does not decrease with distance.92 Physics Formulary by ir. Angular momentum because the laws of nature are invariant for rotations. Momentum because the laws of nature are invariant for translations in space. J. The CP-symmetry was found to be violated by the decay of neutral Kaons. Left-handed electrons appear more than 1000× as much as right-handed ones. A base of K0 and K0 is practical while 1 1 2 2 1 2 describing weak interactions. The expansion postulate must be used for weak decays: |K0 = 1 ( K0 |K0 + K0 |K0 ) 1 2 2 . The elementary particles can be classified into three families: leptons 1st generation 2nd generation 3rd generation e νe − quarks d u s c b t antileptons e νe + antiquarks d u s c b t µ− νµ τ− ντ µ+ νµ τ+ ντ Quarks exist in three colours but because they are confined these colours cannot be seen directly.C. From this follows that K 0 and K0 are not eigenvalues of CP: CP|K 0 = |K0 . 3. 2. These are the lowest possible states with a s-quark so they can decay only weakly. 15. µ-decay: µ− → e− + νµ + ν e . and even CP-symmetry is not conserved. Dynamical conservation laws are invariant under the CPT-operation. 2. 3. Colour charge is conserved. Quarks type is only conserved under the colour interaction. 4. There is no connection with the neutrino: the decay of the Λ particle through: Λ → p + + π − and Λ → n0 + π 0 has also these properties. Parity is conserved except for weak interactions. 5. These are: 1.A.

c. g is the µ matching coupling constant. t).13.13 The standard model When one wants to make the Lagrange density which describes a field invariant for local gauge transformations from a certain group. and:       sin θ1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 cos θ1 d  s  =  0 cos θ2 sin θ2   0 1 0   − sin θ1 cos θ1 0  b 0 − sin θ2 cos θ2 0 0 1 0 0 eiδ    d 1 0 0  0 cos θ3 sin θ3   s  0 − sin θ3 cos θ3 b θ1 ≡ θC is the Cabibbo angle: sin(θ C ) ≈ 0. 15.and right.01. The multiplets are classified as follows: e− R T T3 Y 0 0 −2 1 2 νeL e− L 1 2 uL dL 1 2 1 2 uR 0 dR 0 0 −2 3 − −1 1 2 − 1 3 1 2 0 4 3 .1 The electroweak theory The electroweak interaction arises from the necessity to keep the Lagrange density invariant for local gauge transformations of the group SU(2)⊗U(1). The Lagrange density for a scalar field becomes: a µν 1 L = − 2 (Dµ Φ∗ Dµ Φ + M 2 Φ∗ Φ) − 1 Fµν Fa 4 a and the field tensors are given by: F µν = ∂µ Aa − ∂ν Aa + gca Al Am . 2 | K1 |K 1 2| K0 |K0 |2 . t ) = (u. Right. The hypercharge Y . one has to perform the transformation ∂ D ∂ g → = − i Lk Ak µ ∂xµ Dxµ ∂xµ h ¯ Here the Lk are the generators of the gauge group (the “charges”) and the A k are the gauge fields. Tk ] = 0. is defined by: Q = 1 Y + T3 2 so [Y. The group U(1) Y ⊗SU(2)T is taken as symmetry group for the electroweak interaction because the generators of this group commute.Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics 93 The probability to find a final state with CP= −1 is 1 0 0 2 | .handed solutions of the Dirac equation for neutrino’s are given by: ψL = 1 (1 + γ5 )ψ and ψR = 1 (1 − γ5 )ψ 2 2 It appears that neutrino’s are always left-handed while antineutrino’s are always right-handed. If a fifth Dirac matrix is defined by:   0 0 1 0  0 0 0 1   γ5 := γ1 γ2 γ3 γ4 = −   1 0 0 0  0 1 0 0 the left.and left-handed spin states are treated different because the weak interaction does not conserve parity. the probability of CP=+1 decay is 2 The relation between the mass eigenvalues of the quarks (unaccented) and the fields arising in the weak currents (accented) is (u .23 ± 0. c . for quarks given by Y = B + S + C + B ∗ + T . ν µ lm µ ν 15.

8 ± 2. the generator T = 0.007 GeV/c2 . “White” particles: they have no colour charge. 1 field Bµ (x) is connected with gauge group U(1) and 3 gauge fields Aµ (x) are connected with SU(2). 2. 2 15. Wµ = 1 2(A1 − iA2 ) µ µ µ µ 2 2 Zµ Aµ = = gA3 − g Bµ µ g2 + g 2 g A3 + gBµ µ g2 + g 2 ≡ A3 cos(θW ) − Bµ sin(θW ) µ ≡ A3 sin(θW ) + Bµ cos(θW ) µ where θW is called the Weinberg angle.13.l a µν Ψk Mkl Ψl − 1 Fµν Fa 4 The gluons remain massless because this Lagrange density does not contain spinless particles. “Coloured” particles: the generators T are 8 3 × 3 matrices. The Lagrange density for coloured particles is given by LQCD = i k Ψ k γ µ Dµ Ψ k + k.3 Quantumchromodynamics Coloured particles interact because the Lagrange density is invariant for the transformations of the group SU(3) of the colour interaction. 2 2 gg and for the elementary charge holds: e = = g cos(θW ) = g sin(θW ) g2 + g 2 Experimentally it is found that M W = 80.L . Hence the state with the lowest energy corresponds with the state Φ ∗ (x)Φ(x) = v = µ2 /2λ =constant. It is assumed that there exists an isospin-doublet of scalar fields Φ with electrical charges +1 and 0 and potential V (Φ) = −µ 2 Φ∗ Φ + λ(Φ∗ Φ)2 . This means that the dynamic equations which describe the system have a symmetry which the ground state does not have.0 GeV/c2 .187 ± 0. The field can be written (were ω ± and z are Nambu-Goldstone bosons which can be transformed away.26 GeV/c2 and MZ = 91.94 Physics Formulary by ir.24 GeV/c2 and MZ = 93. ψeL )γ µ ∂µ − i Aµ · ( 1 σ) − 1 i Bµ · (−1) 2 2 ¯ h ¯ h g ψeR γ µ ∂µ − 1 i (−2)Bµ ψeR 2 ¯ h ψνe.L ψeL − Here.0 ± 0.255 ± 0. and √ mφ = µ 2) as: Φ= Φ+ Φ0 = iω + √ (v + φ − iz)/ 2 and 0|Φ|0 = 0 √ v/ 2 Because this expectation value = 0 the SU(2) symmetry is broken but the U(1) symmetry is not. are globally U(1)⊗SU(2) symmetric. The total Lagrange density (minus the fieldterms) for the electron-fermion field now becomes: L0. A distinction can be made between two types of particles: 1. J.C.010. L H = (DLµ Φ)∗ (DL Φ) − V (Φ). Their mass is probably generated by spontaneous symmetry breaking.EW = g g −(ψνe. Because leftand right.13.handed quarks now belong to the same multiplet a mass term can be introduced. When the gauge fields in the resulting Lagrange density are separated one obtains: √ √ − + Wµ = 1 2(A1 + iA2 ) . The extra µ terms in L arising from these fields. . For this angle holds: sin 2 (θW ) = 0. According to the weak theory this should be: M W = 83. Wevers Now.2 Spontaneous symmetry breaking: the Higgs mechanism All leptons are massless in the equations above.A. There exist three colours and three anticolours. Their antiparticles have charges −1 and 0. 15. 1 σ are the generators of T and −1 and −2 the generators of Y . Relations for the masses of the field quanta can be obtained from the remaining terms: M W = 1 vg and MZ = 1 v g 2 + g 2 . This term can be brought in the form M kl = mk δkl .022 ± 0.

Chapter 15: Quantum field theory & Particle physics

95

15.14 Path integrals
The development in time of a quantum mechanical system can, besides with Schr¨ dingers equation, also be o described by a path integral (Feynman): ψ(x , t ) = F (x , t , x, t)ψ(x, t)dx

in which F (x , t , x, t) is the amplitude of probability to find a system on time t in x if it was in x on time t. Then, iS[x] F (x , t , x, t) = exp d[x] h ¯ where S[x] is an action-integral: S[x] = taken over all possible paths [x]: L(x, x, t)dt. The notation d[x] means that the integral has to be ˙  
n ∞

1 d[x] := lim n→∞ N

−∞

  dx(tn ) 

in which N is a normalization constant. To each path is assigned a probability amplitude exp(iS/¯ ). The h classical limit can be found by taking δS = 0: the average of the exponent vanishes, except where it is stationary. In quantum fieldtheory, the probability of the transition of a fieldoperator Φ(x, −∞) to Φ (x, ∞) is given by iS[Φ] F (Φ (x, ∞), Φ(x, −∞)) = exp d[Φ] h ¯ with the action-integral S[Φ] =

L(Φ, ∂ν Φ)d4 x

15.15 Unification and quantum gravity
The strength of the forces varies with energy and the reciprocal coupling constants approach each other with increasing energy. The SU(5) model predicts complete unification of the electromagnetical, weak and colour forces at 1015 GeV. It also predicts 12 extra X bosons which couple leptons and quarks and are i.g. responsible for proton decay, with dominant channel p + → π 0 + e+ , with an average lifetime of the proton of 10 31 year. This model has been experimentally falsified. Supersymmetric models assume a symmetry between bosons and fermions and predict partners for the currently known particles with a spin which differs 1 . The supersymmetric SU(5) model predicts unification at 2 1016 GeV and an average lifetime of the proton of 10 33 year. The dominant decay channels in this theory are p+ → K+ + ν µ and p+ → K0 + µ+ . Quantum gravity plays only a role in particle interactions at the Planck dimensions, where λ C ≈ RS : mPl = hc/G = 3 · 1019 GeV, tPl = h/mPlc2 = hG/c5 = 10−43 sec and rPl = ctPl ≈ 10−35 m.

Chapter 16

Astrophysics
16.1 Determination of distances
The parallax is mostly used to determine distances in nearby space. The parallax is the angular difference between two measurements of the position of the object from different view-points. If the annual parallax is given by p, the distance R of the object is given by R = a/ sin(p), in which a is the radius of the Earth’s orbit. The clusterparallax is used to determine the distance of a group of stars by using their motion w.r.t. a fixed background. The tangential velocity v t and the radial velocity v r of the stars along the sky are given by vr = V cos(θ) , vt = V sin(θ) = ωR ˆ where θ is the angle between the star and the point of convergence and R the distance in pc. This results, with v t = vr tan(θ), in: R= 1 vr tan(θ) ˆ ⇒ R= ω p

-5 -4 M -3 -2 -1
0 1

Type 1

Type 2 RR-Lyrae 0,1 0,3 1

where p is the parallax in arc seconds. The parallax is then given by p= 4.74µ vr tan(θ)

P (days) →

3 10 30 100

with µ de proper motion of the star in /yr. A method to determine the distance of objects which are somewhat further away, like galaxies and star clusters, uses the period-Brightness relation for Cepheids. This relation is shown in the above figure for different types of stars.

16.2 Brightness and magnitudes
The brightness is the total radiated energy per unit of time. Earth receives s 0 = 1.374 kW/m2 from the Sun. Hence, the brightness of the Sun is given by L = 4πr2 s0 = 3.82 · 1026 W. It is also given by:

L = 4πR

2 0

πFν dν

where πFν is the monochromatic radiation flux. At the position of an observer this is πf ν , with fν = (R/r)2 Fν if absorption is ignored. If A ν is the fraction of the flux which reaches Earth’s surface, the transmission factor is given by Rν and the surface of the detector is given by πa 2 , then the apparent brightness b is given by:

b = πa

2 0

fν Aν Rν dν

The magnitude m is defined by: b1 1 = (100) 5 (m2 −m1 ) = (2.512)m2 −m1 b2

Chapter 16: Astrophysics

97

because the human eye perceives lightintensities logaritmical. From this follows that m 2 − m1 = 2.5 ·10 log(b1 /b2 ), or: m = −2.5 ·10 log(b) + C. The apparent brightness of a star if this star would be at a distance of 10 pc is called the absolute brightness B: B/b = (ˆ/10) 2 . The absolute magnitude is then given by r M = −2.5 ·10 log(B) + C, or: M = 5 + m − 5 ·10 log(ˆ). When an interstellar absorption of 10 −4 /pc is taken r into account one finds: ˆ r M = (m − 4 · 10−4 r ) + 5 − 5 ·10 log(ˆ) If a detector detects all radiation emitted by a source one would measure the absolute bolometric magnitude. If the bolometric correction BC is given by BC = 2.5 ·10 log Energy flux received Energy flux detected = 2.5 ·10 log fν dν fν Aν Rν dν

holds: Mb = MV − BC where MV is the visual magnitude. Further holds Mb = −2.5 ·10 log L L + 4.72

16.3 Radiation and stellar atmospheres
The radiation energy passing through a surface dA is dE = I ν (θ, ϕ) cos(θ)dνdΩdAdt, where Iµ is the monochromatical intensity [Wm −2 sr−1 Hz−1 ]. When there is no absorption the quantity I ν is independent of the distance to the source. Planck’s law holds for a black body: Iν (T ) ≡ Bν (T ) = 1 c 2hν 3 wν (T ) = 2 4π c exp(hν/kT ) − 1

The radiation transport through a layer can then be written as: dIν = −Iν κν + jν ds Here, jν is the coefficient of emission and κ ν the coefficient of absorption. ds is the thickness of the layer. 1, the layer The optical thickness τ ν of the layer is given by τ ν = κν ds. The layer is optically thin if τ ν is optically thick if τν 1. For a stellar atmosphere in LTE holds: j ν = κν Bν (T ). Then also holds: Iν (s) = Iν (0)e−τν + Bν (T )(1 − e−τν )

16.4 Composition and evolution of stars
The structure of a star is described by the following equations: dM (r) dr dp(r) dr L(r) dr dT (r) dr rad dT (r) dr conv = = = = = 4π (r)r2 − GM (r) (r) r2

4π (r)ε(r)r2 − 3 L(r) κ(r) , (Eddington), or 4 4πr2 4σT 3 (r) T (r) γ − 1 dp(r) , (convective energy transport) p(r) γ dr

Further, for stars of the solar type, the composing plasma can be described as an ideal gas: p(r) = (r)kT (r) µmH

The first chain releases 25. 19.2) MeV. ii.51) MeV released.21 + (0.69) MeV. 7 Be + p+ → 8 B + γ. dM/dr = M/R. composition) Convection will occur when the star meets the Schwartzschild criterium: dT dr < conv dT dr rad Otherwise the energy transfer takes place by radiation. T (r).72 MeV. The reactions are shown below. 1. I. For stars in quasi-hydrostatic equilibrium hold the approximations r = 1 R. 8 It can be derived that L ∼ M 3 : the mass-brightness relation. T (r).74 + (1. Y the mass fraction of He and Z the mass fraction of the other elements. speedlimiting reaction is shown in boldface. The proton-proton chain can be divided into two subchains: 1 H + p+ → 2 D + e+ + νe . This results in the equation for the main sequence in the Hertzsprung-Russel diagram: 10 log(L) = 8 ·10 log(Teff ) + constant 16. pp2: 3 He + α → 7 Be + γ i. κ ∼ and ε ∼ T µ (this last assumption is only 2 2 valid for stars on the main sequence). Wevers where µ is the average molecular mass.98 Physics Formulary by ir. Further holds: L ∼ R 4 ∼ Teff .98) MeV. Two reaction chains are responsible for this reaction.C.A. Further holds: κ(r) = f ( (r). and then 2 D + p → 3 He + γ. pp1: 3 He +3 He → 2p+ + 4 He.03 + (1. The CNO cycle. the second 24. composition) and ε(r) = g( (r). Both 7 Be chains become more important with raising T .5 Energy production in stars The net reaction from which most stars gain their energy is: 4 1 H → 4 He + 2e+ + 2νe + γ. J.80) MeV. II. There is 26. 7 Be + e− → 7 Li + ν. 2. → O + e+ → ↑ 14 N + p+ → 15 15 N+ν O+γ ← 15 −→ N + p+ → α +12 C ↓ 12 C + p+ → 13 N + γ ↓ 13 N → 13 C + e+ + ν ↓ 13 C + p+ → 14 N + γ ←− 15 15 N + p+ → 16 O + γ ↓ 16 O + p+ → 17 F + γ ↓ 17 F → 17 O + e+ + ν ↓ 17 O + p+ → α + 14 N .5 + (7. For pp-chains holds µ ≈ 5 and for the CNO chains holds µ = 12 tot 18.92 + (0. then 7 Li + p+ → 24 He + γ. then 8 B + e+ → 24 He + ν. This reaction produces 26. M (r) = 1 M . The slowest. 25. usually well approximated by: µ= nmH = 1 2X + 3 4Y + 1Z 2 where X is the mass fraction of H. The energy between brackets is the energy carried away by the neutrino.

The unit vectors are then given by: eu = 1 ∂x 1 ∂x 1 ∂x . gradf = ∇f = ex + ey + ez ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂ay ∂az ∂ax ∂2f ∂2f ∂2f + + . ∇2 f = + 2 + + 2 2 2 ∂r r r ∂ϕ ∂z ∂r r ∂r r ∂ϕ ∂z 1 ∂az ∂aϕ − r ∂ϕ ∂z er + ∂ar ∂az − ∂z ∂r eϕ + ∂aϕ aϕ 1 ∂ar + − ∂r r r ∂ϕ ez In spherical coordinates (r. ∇2 f = + 2 + 2 2 ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂x ∂y ∂z ex + ∂ax ∂az − ∂z ∂x ey + ∂ay ∂ax − ∂x ∂y ez div a = ∇ · a = rot a = ∇ × a = ∂az ∂ay − ∂y ∂z In cylinder coordinates (r.The ∇ operator 99 The ∇-operator In cartesian coordinates (x. ew = h1 ∂u h2 ∂v h3 ∂w where the factors h i set the norm to 1. gradf = er + eϕ + ez ∂r r ∂ϕ ∂z ∂r r ∂ϕ ∂z ar 1 ∂aϕ ∂az 1 ∂2f ∂ar ∂2f 1 ∂f ∂2f + + + . v. ev = . v. θ. ϕ. Then holds: gradf div a rot a = = = 1 ∂f 1 ∂f 1 ∂f eu + ev + ew h1 ∂u h2 ∂v h3 ∂w ∂ 1 ∂ ∂ (h2 h3 au ) + (h3 h1 av ) + (h1 h2 aw ) h1 h2 h3 ∂u ∂v ∂w 1 ∂(h3 aw ) ∂(h2 av ) ∂(h1 au ) ∂(h3 aw ) 1 − − eu + h2 h3 ∂v ∂w h3 h1 ∂w ∂u ∂(h2 av ) ∂(h1 au ) 1 − ew h1 h2 ∂u ∂v ∂ h2 h3 ∂f h1 h2 ∂f 1 ∂ h3 h1 ∂f ∂ + + h1 h2 h3 ∂u h1 ∂u ∂v h2 ∂v ∂w h3 ∂w ev + ∇2 f = . w). w) can be obtained from cartesian coordinates by the transformation x = x(u. y. z) holds: ∇= div a = rot a = ∂ 1 ∂ ∂ ∂f 1 ∂f ∂f er + eϕ + ez . z) holds: ∇= ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂f ∂f ∂f ex + ey + ez . ϕ) holds: ∇ = gradf div a rot a = = = ∂ ∂ 1 ∂ 1 er + eθ + eϕ ∂r r ∂θ r sin θ ∂ϕ ∂f 1 ∂f 1 ∂f er + eθ + eϕ ∂r r ∂θ r sin θ ∂ϕ 2ar 1 ∂aθ aθ 1 ∂aϕ ∂ar + + + + ∂r r r ∂θ r tan θ r sin θ ∂ϕ 1 ∂aϕ 1 ∂ar aθ 1 ∂aθ ∂aϕ aϕ + − − − er + r ∂θ r tan θ r sin θ ∂ϕ r sin θ ∂ϕ ∂r r ∂aθ aθ 1 ∂ar + − eϕ ∂r r r ∂θ ∂2f 1 ∂2f ∂f 1 ∂2f 2 ∂f 1 + 2 2 + 2 + 2 2 + ∂r2 r ∂r r ∂θ r tan θ ∂θ r sin θ ∂ϕ2 eθ + ∇2 f = General orthonormal curvelinear coordinates (u.

Potential El. Amount of subst. Resistance El.100 The SI units The SI units Basic units Quantity Length Mass Time Therm. temp. flux density Inductance Luminous flux Illuminance Activity Absorbed dose Dose equivalent Unit hertz newton pascal joule watt coulomb volt farad ohm siemens weber tesla henry lumen lux bequerel gray sievert Sym. m kg s K A cd mol Derived units with special names Quantity Frequency Force Pressure Energy Power Charge El. Electr. Capacitance El. Unit metre kilogram second kelvin ampere candela mol Sym. flux Mag. current Luminous intens. Hz N Pa J W C V F Ω S Wb T H lm lx Bq Gy Sv Derivation s −1 kg · m · s −2 N · m−2 N·m J · s−1 A·s W · A−1 C · V −1 V · A−1 A · V −1 V·s Wb · m −2 Wb · A −1 cd · sr lm · m −2 s −1 J · kg −1 J · kg −1 Extra units Plane angle solid angle radian sterradian rad sr Prefixes yotta zetta exa peta tera Y Z E P T 1024 1021 1018 1015 1012 giga mega kilo hecto deca G M k h da 109 106 103 102 10 deci centi milli micro nano d c m µ n 10−1 10−2 10−3 10−6 10 −9 pico femto atto zepto yocto p f a z y 10−12 10−15 10−18 10−21 10 −24 . Conductance Mag.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful

Master Your Semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer for students: Only $4.99/month.

Master Your Semester with a Special Offer from Scribd & The New York Times

Cancel anytime.